Yamaha YSP-4000 de handleiding

Merk: Yamaha

Model: YSP-4000

Categorie: Aanvullende muziekapparatuur

Type: de handleiding

YAMAHA ELECTRONICS CORPORATION, USA

6660 ORANGETHORPE AVE., BUENA PARK, CALIF. 90620, U.S.A.

YAMAHA CANADA MUSIC LTD.

135 MILNER AVE., SCARBOROUGH, ONTARIO M1S 3R1, CANADA

YAMAHA ELECTRONIK EUROPA G.m.b.H.

SIEMENSSTR. 22-34, 25462 RELLINGEN BEI HAMBURG, GERMANY

YAMAHA ELECTRONIQUE FRANCE S.A.

RUE AMBROISE CROIZAT BP70 CROISSY-BEAUBOURG 77312 MARNE-LA-VALLEE CEDEX02, FRANCE

YAMAHA ELECTRONICS (UK) LTD.

YAMAHA HOUSE, 200 RICKMANSWORTH ROAD WATFORD, HERTS WD18 7GQ, ENGLAND

YAMAHA SCANDINAVIA A.B.

J A WETTERGRENS GATA 1, BOX 30053, 400 43 VÄSTRA FRÖLUNDA, SWEDEN

YAMAHA MUSIC AUSTRALIA PTY, LTD.

17-33 MARKET ST., SOUTH MELBOURNE, 3205 VIC., AUSTRALIA

YSP-4000

Printed in Malaysia WK94290

YSP-4000

Digital Sound Projector

OWNER’S MANUAL

00cv_YSP-4000_UA.fm Page 1 Thursday, September 20, 2007 10:08 AM

IMPORTANT SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS

i En

■ Explanation of Graphical Symbols

The lightning flash with arrowhead symbol,

within an equilateral triangle, is intended to

alert you to the presence of uninsulated

“dangerous voltage” within the product’s

enclosure that may be of sufficient magnitude

to constitute a risk of electric shock to

persons.

The exclamation point within an equilateral

triangle is intended to alert you to the

presence of important operating and

maintenance (servicing) instructions in the

literature accompanying the appliance.

Read these instructions.

2 Keep these instructions.

3 Heed all warnings.

4 Follow all instructions.

5 Do not use this apparatus near water.

6 Clean only with dry cloth.

7 Do not block any ventilation openings. Install in accordance with

the manufacturer’s instructions.

8 Do not install near any heat sources such as radiators, heat

registers, stoves, or other apparatus (including amplifiers) that

produce heat.

9 Do not defeat the safety purpose of the polarized or grounding-

type plug. A polarized plug has two blades with one wider than

the other. A grounding type plug has two blades and a third

grounding prong. The wide

blade or the third prong are provided for your safety. If the

provided plug does not fit into your outlet, consult an electrician

for replacement of the obsolete outlet.

10 Protect the power cord from being walked on or pinched

particularly at plugs, convenience receptacles, and the point

where they exit from the apparatus.

11 Only use attachments/accessories specified by the manufacturer.

12 Use only with the cart, stand, tripod, bracket,

or table specified by the manufacturer, or

sold with the apparatus. When a cart is used,

use caution when moving the cart/apparatus

combination to avoid injury from tip-over.

13 Unplug this apparatus during lightning

storms or when unused for long periods of time.

14 Refer all servicing to qualified service personnel. Servicing is

required when the apparatus has been damaged in any way, such

as power supply cable or plug is damaged, liquid has been spilled

or objects have fallen into the apparatus, the apparatus has been

exposed to rain or moisture, does not operate normally, or has

been dropped.

IMPORTANT SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS

CAUTION

CAUTION: TO REDUCE THE RISK OF

ELECTRIC SHOCK, DO NOT REMOVE

COVER (OR BACK). NO USER-SERVICEABLE

PARTS INSIDE. REFER SERVICING TO

QUALIFIED SERVICE PERSONNEL.

RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK

DO NOT OPEN

01EN_YSP-4000_UA.book Page i Wednesday, December 26, 2007 3:00 PM

Black process 45.0° 240.0 LPI

IMPORTANT SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS

ii En

FCC INFORMATION (for US customers)

1. IMPORTANT NOTICE: DO NOT MODIFY THIS UNIT!

This product, when installed as indicated in the instructions

contained in this manual, meets FCC requirements.

Modifications not expressly approved by Yamaha may void

your authority, granted by the FCC, to use the product.

2. IMPORTANT:

When connecting this product to accessories and/or another

product use only high quality shielded cables. Cable/s supplied

with this product MUST be used. Follow all installation

instructions. Failure to follow instructions could void your FCC

authorization to use this product in the USA.

3. NOTE:

This product has been tested and found to comply with the

requirements listed in FCC Regulations, Part 15 for Class “B”

digital devices. Compliance with these requirements provides a

reasonable level of assurance that your use of this product in a

residential environment will not result in harmful interference

with other electronic devices.

This equipment generates/uses radio frequencies and, if not

installed and used according to the instructions found in the

users manual, may cause interference harmful to the operation

of other electronic devices.

Compliance with FCC regulations does not guarantee that

interference will not occur in all installations. If this product is

found to be the source of interference, which can be determined

by turning the unit “OFF” and “ON”, please try to eliminate the

problem by using one of the following measures:

Relocate either this product or the device that is being affected

by the interference.

Utilize power outlets that are on different branch (circuit

breaker or fuse) circuits or install AC line filter/s.

In the case of radio or TV interference, relocate/reorient the

antenna. If the antenna lead-in is 300 ohm ribbon lead, change

the lead-in to coaxial type cable.

If these corrective measures do not produce satisfactory results,

please contact the local retailer authorized to distribute this type

of product. If you can not locate the appropriate retailer, please

contact Yamaha Electronics Corp., U.S.A. 6660 Orangethorpe

Ave, Buena Park, CA 90620.

The above statements apply ONLY to those products distributed

by Yamaha Corporation of America or its subsidiaries.

We Want You Listening For A Lifetime

Yamaha and the Electronic Industries Association’s Consumer Electronics Group want you to get the most out of your

equipment by playing it at a safe level. One that lets the sound come through loud and clear without annoying

blaring or distortion – and, most importantly, without affecting your sensitive hearing.

Since hearing damage from loud sounds is often undetectable until it is too late, Yamaha and the Electronic Industries

Association’s Consumer Electronics Group recommend you to avoid prolonged exposure from excessive volume levels.

01EN_YSP-4000_UA.book Page ii Wednesday, December 26, 2007 3:00 PM

Black process 45.0° 240.0 LPI

CAUTION: READ THIS BEFORE OPERATING THIS UNIT.

iii En

To assure the finest performance, please read this manual

carefully. Keep it in a safe place for future reference.

Install this sound system in a well ventilated, cool, dry, clean place with

at least 5 cm (2 in) of space above (or below) this unit – away from

direct sunlight, heat sources, vibration, dust, moisture, and/or cold.

3 Locate this unit away from other electrical appliances, motors, or

transformers to avoid humming sounds.

4 Do not expose this unit to sudden temperature changes from cold

to hot, and do not locate this unit in an environment with high

humidity (i.e. a room with a humidifier) to prevent condensation

inside this unit, which may cause an electrical shock, fire,

damage to this unit, and/or personal injury.

5 Avoid installing this unit where foreign object may fall onto this

unit and/or this unit may be exposed to liquid dripping or

splashing. On the top of this unit, do not place:

– Other components, as they may cause damage and/or

discoloration on the surface of this unit.

– Burning objects (i.e. candles), as they may cause fire, damage

to this unit, and/or personal injury.

– Containers with liquid in them, as they may fall and liquid may

cause electrical shock to the user and/or damage to this unit.

6 Do not cover this unit with a newspaper, tablecloth, curtain, etc.

in order not to obstruct heat radiation. If the temperature inside

this unit rises, it may cause fire, damage to this unit, and/or

personal injury.

7 Do not plug in this unit to a wall outlet until all connections are

complete.

8 Do not operate this unit upside-down. It may overheat, possibly

causing damage.

9 Do not use force on switches, knobs and/or cords.

10 When disconnecting the power supply cable from the wall outlet,

grasp the plug; do not pull the cable.

11 Do not clean this unit with chemical solvents; this might damage

the finish. Use a clean, dry cloth.

12 Only voltage specified on this unit must be used. Using this unit

with a higher voltage than specified is dangerous and may cause

fire, damage to this unit, and/or personal injury. Yamaha will not

be held responsible for any damage resulting from use of this unit

with a voltage other than specified.

13 To prevent damage by lightning, keep the power supply cable

disconnected from a wall outlet or this unit during a lightning

storm.

14 Do not attempt to modify or fix this unit. Contact qualified

Yamaha service personnel when any service is needed.

The cabinet should never be opened for any reasons.

15 When not planning to use this unit for long periods of time (i.e.

vacation), disconnect the power supply cable from the wall

outlet.

16 Be sure to read the “Troubleshooting” section on common

operating errors before concluding that this unit is faulty.

17 Before moving this unit, press STANDBY/ON to set this unit in

standby mode, and disconnect the power supply cable from the

wall outlet.

18 Condensation will form when the surrounding temperature

changes suddenly. Disconnect the power supply cable from the

outlet, then leave the unit alone.

19 When using the unit for a long time, the unit may become warm.

Turn the power off, then leave the unit alone for cooling.

20 Install this unit near the AC outlet and where the AC power plug

can be reached easily.

21 The batteries shall not be exposed to excessive heat such as

sunshine, fire or the like.

Caution: Read this before operating this unit.

WARNING

TO REDUCE THE RISK OF FIRE OR ELECTRIC SHOCK, DO

NOT EXPOSE THIS UNIT TO RAIN OR MOISTURE.

WARNING

THE POWER SUPPLY CABLE OF THIS UNIT MUST BE

CONNECTED TO THE MAIN SOCKET OUTLET VIA A

PROTECTIVE EARTHING CONNECTION.

This unit is not disconnected from the AC power source as long as

it is connected to the AC wall outlet, even if this unit itself is

turned off by STANDBY/ON. This state is called the standby

mode. In this state, this unit is designed to consume a very small

quantity of power.

IMPORTANT

Please record the serial number of this unit in the space below.

MODEL:

Serial No.:

The serial number is located on the rear of the unit. Retain this

Owner’s Manual in a safe place for future reference.

FOR CANADIAN CUSTOMERS

To prevent electric shock, match wide blade of plug to wide slot

and fully insert.

This Class B digital apparatus complies with Canadian ICES-003.

FOR U.K. CUSTOMERS

If the socket outlets in the home are not suitable for the plug

supplied with this appliance, it should be cut off and an

appropriate 3-pin plug fitted. For details, refer to the instructions

described below.

Note

The plug severed from the mains lead must be destroyed, as a plug with

a bared flexible cord is hazardous if engaged in a live socket outlet.

IMPORTANT

THE WIRES IN THIS MAINS LEAD ARE COLOURED IN

ACCORDANCE WITH THE FOLLOWING CODE:

GREEN-AND-YELLOW: EARTH

BLUE: NEUTRAL

BROWN: LIVE

As the colours of the wires in the mains lead of this apparatus may

not correspond with the coloured markings identifying the

terminals in your plug, proceed as follows:

The wire which is coloured GREEN-AND-YELLOW must be

connected to the terminal in the plug which is marked by the letter

“E” or the safety earth symbol or coloured GREEN or GREEN-

AND-YELLOW.

The wire which is coloured BLUE must be connected to the

terminal marked with the letter “N” or coloured BLACK.

The wire which is coloured BROWN must be connected to the

terminal marked with the letter “L” or coloured RED.

CAUTION

Danger of explosion if battery is incorrectly replaced. Replace

only with the same or equivalent type.

CAUTION

Use of controls or adjustments or performance of procedures other

than those specified herein may result in hazardous radiation

exposure.

01EN_YSP-4000_UA.book Page iii Wednesday, December 26, 2007 3:00 PM

Black process 45.0° 240.0 LPI

PREPARATIONINTRODUCTION

BASIC

OPERATION

ADVANCED

OPERATION

ADDITIONAL

INFORMATION

SETUP

English

1 En

Overview ................................................................. 2

Features .................................................................. 3

Using this manual .................................................. 5

Supplied accessories .............................................. 6

Controls and functions .......................................... 7

Front panel ................................................................ 7

Front panel display ................................................... 8

Rear panel ................................................................. 9

Remote control (Europe, Australia, Asia,

and Korea models) .............................................. 11

Remote control (U.S.A. and Canada models) ......... 14

Installation ............................................................ 17

Before installing this unit ........................................ 17

Installing this unit ................................................... 17

Connections .......................................................... 20

Before connecting components ............................... 21

Connections using HDMI cables ............................ 22

Connecting a TV ..................................................... 23

Connecting a DVD player/recorder ........................ 24

Connecting a digital satellite tuner or a cable TV tuner

Connecting a digital airwave tuner ......................... 26

Connecting a portable audio player ........................ 27

Connecting other external components .................. 28

Connecting a subwoofer ......................................... 29

Connecting the FM antenna .................................... 30

About the RS-232C/IR-OUT/IR IN terminals ........ 30

Connecting the AC power supply cable ................. 31

Getting started ..................................................... 32

Installing batteries in the remote control ................ 32

Operation range of the remote control .................... 32

Turning on this unit or

setting it to the standby mode ............................. 33

Using SET MENU ................................................ 34

Displaying the OSD (on-screen display) ................ 34

The flow chart of SET MENU ................................ 35

Changing OSD language ..................................... 36

AUTO SETUP (IntelliBeam) .............................. 37

The flow chart of AUTO SETUP ........................... 37

Installing the IntelliBeam microphone ................... 38

Using AUTO SETUP (IntelliBeam) ....................... 39

Using the system memory ................................... 44

Convenient usage of the system memory ............... 44

Saving settings ........................................................ 44

Loading settings ...................................................... 45

Playback ............................................................... 47

Selecting the input source ....................................... 47

Playing back sources ............................................... 48

Adjusting the volume .............................................. 49

FM tuning ............................................................. 50

FM controls and functions ...................................... 50

Automatic tuning .................................................... 51

Manual tuning ......................................................... 51

Automatic preset tuning .......................................... 52

Manual preset tuning .............................................. 53

Selecting a preset station ........................................ 54

Displaying the Radio Data System information

(Europe model only) ........................................... 54

Enjoying surround sound ....................................56

5 Beam .................................................................... 56

Stereo plus 3 Beam ................................................. 57

3 Beam .................................................................... 57

My Surround ........................................................... 57

Enjoying 2-channel sources

in surround sound ............................................... 59

Enjoying TV in surround sound ............................. 60

Adjusting surround mode parameters ..................... 61

Enjoying stereo sound ..........................................62

2-channel stereo playback ....................................... 62

5-channel stereo playback ....................................... 62

Playing back sound clearly (My Beam) ..............63

Using auto-adjust function ...................................... 63

Using manual-adjust function ................................. 64

Using sound field programs .................................65

CINEMA DSP programs ........................................ 67

Using the music enhancer ....................................70

Using the volume mode

(Night listening enhancer/

TV volume equal mode) ...................................71

Using the sleep timer ............................................72

Displaying the input source information ............74

Using the HDMI control feature .........................75

MANUAL SETUP ................................................76

Using MANUAL SETUP ....................................... 77

BEAM MENU ........................................................ 78

SOUND MENU ...................................................... 82

INPUT MENU ........................................................ 84

DISPLAY MENU ................................................... 88

Adjusting the audio balance ................................90

Using the test tone .................................................. 90

Using the audio output being played back .............. 91

Selecting the input mode ......................................93

Adjusting the system parameters .......................94

Using the system parameters .................................. 94

Setting the MEMORY PROTECT ......................... 95

Setting the MAX VOLUME ................................... 96

Setting the TURN ON VOLUME .......................... 96

Setting the MONITOR CHECK ............................. 97

Setting the DEMO MODE ..................................... 98

Setting the PANEL INPUT KEY ........................... 99

Disabling the front panel keys .............................. 100

Setting the FACTORY PRESET .......................... 101

Remote control features .....................................103

Setting remote control codes ................................ 103

Controlling other components .............................. 104

Using the TV macro ............................................. 107

Troubleshooting ..................................................109

Glossary ...............................................................113

Index ....................................................................115

Specifications ......................................................116

List of remote control codes...........................................i

Contents

INTRODUCTION

PREPARATION

SETUP

BASIC OPERATION

ADVANCED OPERATION

ADDITIONAL INFORMATION

01EN_YSP-4000_UA.book Page 1 Wednesday, December 26, 2007 3:00 PM

Black process 45.0° 240.0 LPI

Overview

2 En

It is generally accepted that in order to fully enjoy the benefits of surround sound at home, you must endure the agony of

wiring and installing a great number of speakers in the hope that your listening room will give you the same kind of

surround sound experience as your local movie theater.

Yamaha YSP-4000 Digital Sound Projector challenges this preconception that complicated speaker setup and

troublesome wiring go hand-in-hand with the enjoyment of multi-channel surround sound.

This slimline unit does away with the need for complicated wiring and installation worries, leaving you with a unit that is

not only easy to set up, but is also capable of reproducing the kind of powerful surround sound you have been waiting for

from its built-in 2 woofers and 40 full-range small speakers.

You can fine-tune the parameters of this unit to adjust the delay time for separate sound beams, resulting in highly

directional sound that comes in on the listening position from all directions.

The YSP-4000 projects sound beams containing surround sound information for the front right (R), front left (L),

surround right (SR), and surround left (SL) speaker positions, which are reflected off the walls of your listening room

before reaching the actual listening position. With the addition of center (C) sound beams, this Digital Sound Projector

creates true-to-life 5.1-channel surround sound that makes you feel as if there are actual speakers around the room.

Sit back and enjoy the real sound experience of this simple, yet stylish Digital Sound Projector.

Overview

Listening position

Imaginary

surround left

speaker

Imaginary

surround right

speaker

Imaginary

front left

speaker

Imaginary

front right

speaker

Imaginary

center

speaker

01EN_YSP-4000_UA.book Page 2 Wednesday, December 26, 2007 3:00 PM

Black process 45.0° 240.0 LPI

Features

3 En

INTRODUCTION

English

Digital Sound Projector™

The Digital Sound Projector technology allows one slim

unit to control and steer multiple channels of sound to

generate multi-channel surround sound, thus eliminates

the need for satellite loudspeakers and cabling normally

associated with conventional surround sound systems.

This unit also employs the beam modes that let you enjoy

the surround sound (5 Beam, Stereo plus 3 Beam, 3 Beam,

and My Surround), 2-channel and 5-channel stereo

playback, and My Beam.

My Surround

In addition to the above mentioned beam modes, this unit

is equipped with My Surround beam mode that allows you

to enjoy surround system even in a small listening area.

My Surround is a function integrated and optimized with

DiMAGIC’s Euphony technology and Yamaha’s Beam

reproduction system.

My Beam

This unit employs My Beam that ensures a clear sound in

a noisy environment. You can adjust the beam angle

manually or automatically using the supplied remote

control to the maximum of 45°, rightward and leftward.

Cinema DSP

This unit employs the Cinema DSP technology developed

by Yamaha Electronics Corp. that lets you experience

movies at home with all the original dramatic sound

impact.

HDMI™ (High-Definition Multimedia Interface)

◆ HDMI interface for standard, enhanced, or high-definition

video (including 1080p video signal transmission) as well as

multi-channel digital audio based on HDCP

◆ Simple and easy connections with HDMI supported external

components

◆ Functional link with an HDMI control-compatible TV

◆ Analog video up-scaling from 480i (NTSC)/576i (PAL) or

480p (NTSC)/576p (PAL) to 720p or 1080i

Versatile Remote Control

The supplied remote control comes with preset remote

control codes used to control the DVD player, VCR, cable

TV tuner, and digital satellite tuner connected to this unit.

In addition, the remote control is equipped with the macro

capability that enables a series of operations with the press

of a single button.

AUTO SETUP (IntelliBeam)

This unit employs the automatic sound beam and acoustic

optimization technology with the aid of the supplied

IntelliBeam microphone. You can avoid troublesome

listening-based speaker setup and achieve highly accurate

sound beam adjustments that best match your listening

environment.

Compatibility with the Newest Technologies

This unit employs decoders compatible with Dolby

Digital, DTS, Dolby Pro Logic, Dolby Pro Logic II, DTS

Neo:6, Music Enhancer, and Neural Surround.

◆ Dolby Digital

This is the standard audio signal format used on various

digital media such as DVD, Blu-ray, and HD DVD. This

surround technology delivers high-quality digital audio for up

to 5.1 discrete channels to produce a directional and more

realistic effect.

◆ DTS

This is the standard audio signal format used on various

digital media such as DVD, Blu-ray, and HD DVD. This

surround technology delivers high-quality digital audio for up

to 5.1 discrete channels to produce a directional and more

realistic effect.

◆ Dolby Pro Logic

This sophisticated, matrix decoding technology up-converts

any 2-channel source audio to a 5.1-channel full bandwidth

playback, resulting in a surround sound experience.

◆ Dolby Pro Logic II

This is a redesigned version of Dolby Pro Logic that employs

2 stereo surround channels, a subwoofer, and a greatly

enhanced steering logic. This improved technology provides

an exceptionally stable sound field that simulates 5.1 to a

much greater degree than the original Dolby Pro Logic.

◆ DTS Neo:6

This technology decodes the conventional 2-channel sources

for 6-channel playback, enabling playback with the full-range

channels with higher separation. Music mode and Cinema

mode are available to play back music and movie sources

respectively.

◆ Music Enhancer to improve the sound quality of compression

artifacts such as the MP3 format.

◆ Neural Surround decoder (U.S.A and Canada models only)

Sophisticated FM tuner

◆ 40-station random and direct preset tuning

◆ Automatic preset tuning

◆ Radio Data System capability (Europe model only)

XM™ Satellite Radio

(U.S.A. and Canada models only)

◆ XM Satellite Radio tuning capability (using the XM Mini-

Tuner Dock, and Antenna sold separately by XM Satellite

Radio)

◆ Neural Surround decoder to play back the XM HD content of

XM Satellite Radio broadcasts in multi-channels, resulting in

a full surround sound experience

◆ XM Satellite Radio information displaying capability

iPod™ Controlling Capability

(U.S.A., Canada, and Australia models only)

◆ DOCK terminal to connect a Yamaha iPod universal dock

(such as the YDS-10, sold separately), which supports iPod

(Click and Wheel), iPod nano, and iPod mini

◆ Playback information displaying capability

◆ Battery charging capability

Features

01EN_YSP-4000_UA.book Page 3 Wednesday, December 26, 2007 3:00 PM

Black process 45.0° 240.0 LPI

Features

4 En

The “ ” logo and “IntelliBeam” are trademarks of

YAMAHA CORPORATION.

The “ ” logo and “Cinema DSP” are registered

trademarks of YAMAHA CORPORATION.

Manufactured under license from Dolby Laboratories.

“Dolby”, “Pro Logic”, and the double-D symbol are trademarks

of Dolby Laboratories.

“DTS” and “Neo:6” are registered trademarks of DTS, Inc.

“HDMI”, the “HDMI” logo and “High-Definition Multimedia

Interface” are trademarks or registered trademarks of HDMI

Licensing LLC.

Manufactured under license from 1 Ltd. Worldwide patents

applied for.

The “ ” logo and “Digital Sound Projector

™

” are trademarks

of 1 Ltd.

TruBass, SRS and the “ ” symbol are registered trademarks

of SRS Labs, Inc. TruBass technology is incorporated under

license from SRS Labs, Inc.

™

is a trademark of DiMAGIC Co., Ltd.

01EN_YSP-4000_UA.book Page 4 Wednesday, December 26, 2007 3:00 PM

Black process 45.0° 240.0 LPI

Using this manual

5 En

INTRODUCTION

English

• This manual describes how to connect and operate this unit. For details regarding the operation of external components, refer to the

supplied owner’s manual for each component.

• Operations in this manual use keys on the supplied remote control of this unit unless otherwise specified.

• y indicates a tip for your operation.

• This manual is printed prior to production. Designs and specifications are subject to change in part as a result of improvements, etc. In

case of differences between the manual and the product, the product has priority.

1 Install this unit in your listening room.

See “Installation” on page 17.

2 Connect this unit to your TV and other external components.

See “Connections” on page 20.

3 Prepare the remote control and turn on the power of this unit.

See “Getting started” on page 32.

4 Run AUTO SETUP.

See “AUTO SETUP (IntelliBeam)” on page 37.

5 Play back a source.

See “Playback” on page 47.

6 Change the beam modes and/or CINEMA DSP settings.

See “Enjoying surround sound” on page 56.

7 Run MANUAL SETUP to fine-tune settings and/or set remote control codes.

See “MANUAL SETUP” on page 76 and “Remote control features” on page 103.

Using this manual

Notes

If you want to make additional settings

and adjustments

01EN_YSP-4000_UA.book Page 5 Wednesday, December 26, 2007 3:00 PM

Black process 45.0° 240.0 LPI

Supplied accessories

6 En

Check that you have received all of the following parts.

Supplied accessories

STEREO MY SUR.

MY BEAM

PRESET/TUNE

MEMORYSEARCH

SLEEP

INPUTMODE

ENHANCER MENU

RETURNDISPLAY

TV VOL

VOLUME

MUTE

CH LEVEL TEST

TV INPUT TV MUTE

ENTER

SUR. DECODE

OFF

CODE SET

SPORTS

5BEAM ST+3BEAM 3BEAM

MUSIC MOVIE

VOL MODE

AUTO

SETUP

CATFM/XM

MACRO

INPUT1

YSP

TV/AV

ENTRY

CAT/

A-E

321

AUX1 AUX2

STB

DVD

AUX3

POWERPOWERSTANDBY/ON

DOCK

+10

Remote control (×1)

Batteries (×2)

(AA, R6, UM-3)

OSD* video pin cable (×1)

IntelliBeam microphone

(×1)

Fasteners (×4)

Audio pin cable (×1)

Digital audio pin cable (×1)

Optical cable (×1)

Cable clamp (×1)

Cardboard microphone

stand (×1)

(Orange)

(White/Red)

(Yellow)

Indoor FM antenna (×1)

(U.S.A. and Canada models)

Demonstration DVD

(×1)

REFERENCE GUIDE

(iPod/XM Radio) (×1)

QUICK REFERENCE

GUIDE

(U.S.A., Canada, and Australia

models only)

* The number of provided languages

varies depending on the model.

AC power supply cable (×1)

* OSD: On-Screen Display

01EN_YSP-4000_UA.book Page 6 Wednesday, December 26, 2007 3:00 PM

Black process 45.0° 240.0 LPI

Controls and functions

7 En

INTRODUCTION

English

1 Front panel display

Shows information about the operational status of this

unit.

2 Remote control sensor

Receives infrared signals from the remote control.

3 AUX 3 input jack

Connect your portable audio player (see page 27).

4 INTELLIBEAM MIC jack

Connect the supplied IntelliBeam microphone for AUTO

SETUP (see page 38).

5 INPUT

Press repeatedly to switch between input sources (see

page 47).

Outputs a test tone to experience the sound beam (see

page 98).

6 VOLUME +/–

Controls the volume level of all audio channels (see

page 49).

7 STANDBY/ON

Turns on the power of this unit or sets it to the standby

mode (see page 33).

• When you turn on this unit, you will hear a click sound

followed by the 4 to 5-second interval before sound

reproducing.

• In the standby mode, this unit consumes a small amount of

power in order to receive infrared signals from the remote

control or to search for HDMI signals.

Controls and functions

Front panel

INPUT VOLUME STANDBY/ON

INTELLIBEAM MIC

AUX 3

INPUT VOLUME STANDBY/ON

INTELLIBEAM MIC

AUX 3

3 5 6 7

Notes

01EN_YSP-4000_UA.book Page 7 Wednesday, December 26, 2007 3:00 PM

Black process 45.0° 240.0 LPI

Controls and functions

8 En

1 HDMI indicator

Lights up when the signal of the selected input source is

input at the HDMI IN jack(s).

2 TUNER indicators

FM: Light up when this unit is receiving an FM broadcast.

XM: MEMORY flashes during the XM preset operation

(U.S.A. and Canada models only).

3 CINEMA DSP indicator

Lights up when a sound field program is selected (see

page 67).

4 PCM indicator

Lights up when this unit is reproducing PCM (Pulse Code

Modulation) digital audio signals.

5 Decoder indicators

Light up when the corresponding decoder operates

(see page 58).

The neural decoder is available for the U.S.A. and Canada models

only.

6 ENHANCER indicator

Lights up when the Music Enhancer is selected (see

page 70).

7 Volume level indicator

Displays the current volume level.

8 DOCK indicator

(U.S.A., Canada, and Australia models only)

Lights up when your iPod (Click and Wheel), iPod nano,

or iPod mini is connected to this unit via the DOCK

terminal on this unit.

9 SRS TruBass indicator

Lights up when TruBass is turned on (see page 84).

0 EQUAL indicator

Lights up when the TV volume equal mode is selected

(see page 71).

A NIGHT indicator

Lights up when one of the night listening enhancers is

selected (see page 71).

B SLEEP indicator

Lights up when the sleep timer is set (see page 72).

C Radio Data System indicators

(Europe model only)

Show the current Radio Data System status.

D XM indicator

(U.S.A. and Canada models only)

Lights up when XM is selected as the input source.

E Multi-information display

Shows information with alphanumeric characters when

you adjust the parameters of this unit.

F Input channel indicators

Show information when you adjust the parameters of this

unit. The channel component of the current digital input

signal is displayed (see page 58).

You can adjust the brightness and display setting of the front

panel display using the F.DISPLAY SET parameter in MANUAL

SETUP (see page 88).

Front panel display

AB C D

Note

01EN_YSP-4000_UA.book Page 8 Wednesday, December 26, 2007 3:00 PM

Black process 45.0° 240.0 LPI

Controls and functions

9 En

INTRODUCTION

English

The illustration below shows the rear panel of the U.S.A. and Canada models.

1 AUX 1 HDMI IN jack

Connect your digital satellite tuner, cable TV tuner, digital

air wave tuner, or game console via an HDMI connection

(see page 22).

2 DVD HDMI IN jack

Connect your DVD player via an HDMI connection (see

page 22).

3 HDMI OUT jack

Connect to the HDMI IN jack on your HDMI component

such as a TV or a projector connected to this unit (see

page 22).

4 AC IN

Connect the supplied AC power supply cable

(see page 31).

5 IR-OUT terminal

This is a control expansion terminal for commercial use

only (see page 30).

6 ANTENNA jack

Connect the FM antenna (see page 30).

7 SUBWOOFER jack

Connect your subwoofer (see page 29).

8 TV/STB AUDIO IN jacks

Connect your TV, digital satellite tuner, or cable TV tuner

via an analog connection (see pages 23 and 25).

9 AUX 1 AUDIO IN jacks

Connect an external component via an analog connection

(see page 24).

0 DOCK terminal

(U.S.A., Canada, and Australia models only)

Connect the Yamaha iPod universal dock (such as YDS-

10, sold separately) (see page 2 in the Reference Guide).

A DVD COAXIAL DIGITAL IN jack

Connect your DVD player via a coaxial digital connection

(see page 24).

B AUX 2 COAXIAL DIGITAL IN jack

Connect an external component via a coaxial digital

connection (see page 28).

Rear panel

IR-OUT

AUX 1

DVD

OUT

HDMI

RS-232C

IR INXM

OPTICAL

COAXIAL

DVD AUX 2

AUX 1TV/STB

DIGITAL INDOCK

AUX 1STB

ANTENNA

DVD/AUX 2 AUX 1 TV/STB

AUDIO IN

VIDEO IN

SYSTEM

CONNECTOR

SUBWOOFER

COMPONENTCOMPONENTCOMPONENT

VIDEO OUT

FM75

UNBAL.

IR-OUT

I JHGFMLKON

60978 EDCBA

(U.S.A. and Canada models)

01EN_YSP-4000_UA.book Page 9 Wednesday, December 26, 2007 3:00 PM

Black process 45.0° 240.0 LPI

Controls and functions

10 En

C XM antenna jack

(U.S.A and Canada models only)

Connect your XM Mini-Tuner Dock (sold separately)

(see page 5 in the Reference Guide).

D IR IN terminal

This is a control expansion terminal for commercial use

only (see page 30).

E RS-232C terminal

This is a control expansion terminal for commercial use

only (see page 30).

F SYSTEM CONNECTOR terminal

(U.S.A. and Canada models only)

Use to connect a Yamaha subwoofer equipped with a

SYSTEM CONNECTOR terminal to this unit.

G VIDEO OUT jack

Connect to the video input jack of your TV via a

composite analog video connection to display the OSD of

this unit (see page 23).

H COMPONENT VIDEO OUT jacks

Connect to the video input jacks of your TV via a

component analog video connection to display the OSD of

this unit (see page 23).

I STB VIDEO IN jacks

Connect a digital satellite tuner or a cable TV tuner via a

composite analog video connection (see pages 25 to 26).

J STB COMPONENT VIDEO IN jacks

Connect a digital satellite tuner or a cable TV tuner via a

component analog video connection (see pages 25 to 26).

K DVD/AUX 2 VIDEO IN jacks

Connect a DVD player/recorder or an external component

via a composite analog video connection

(see pages 24 and 28).

L DVD/AUX 2 COMPONENT VIDEO IN jacks

Connect a DVD player/recorder or an external component

via a component analog video connection (see pages 24

and 28).

M AUX 1 VIDEO IN jacks

Connect an external component via a composite analog

video connection (see page 28).

N TV/STB OPTICAL DIGITAL IN jack

Connect your TV, digital satellite tuner, or cable TV tuner

via an optical digital connection (see pages 23 and 25).

O AUX 1 OPTICAL DIGITAL IN jack

Connect an external component via an optical digital

connection (see page 28).

01EN_YSP-4000_UA.book Page 10 Wednesday, December 26, 2007 3:00 PM

Black process 45.0° 240.0 LPI

Controls and functions

11 En

INTRODUCTION

English

This section describes the functions of the remote control

used to control this unit. Some buttons marked with an

asterisk (*) share the common functions between the YSP

and TV/AV operation modes (S).

You can also control other components using the remote control

once you set the appropriate remote control codes. See

“Controlling other components” on page 104 for details.

1 Infrared window

Outputs infrared control signals. Aim this window at the

component you want to operate.

2 STANDBY/ON

Sets this system to the standby mode (see page 33).

3 Transmission indicator

Lights up when infrared control signals are being output.

4 Input selector buttons

Use to select an input source (DVD, AUX1, AUX2,

AUX3, STB, TV, or FM).

5 VOL MODE

Turns on or off the volume modes (see page 71).

6 AUTO SETUP

Enters the AUTO SETUP menu (see page 37).

7 CINEMA DSP program buttons

Select the CINEMA DSP programs (see page 65).

8 ENHANCER

Turns on or off the Music Enhancer (see page 70).

9 Cursor buttons / / / , ENTER

Select and adjust SET MENU items.

0 DISPLAY

Displays information on the selected input signal.

A VOLUME +/–

Increases or decreases the volume level of this unit (see

page 49).

B MUTE

Mutes the sound. Press again to restore the audio output to

the previous volume level (see page 49).

C TV INPUT

Toggles between the input sources on the TV (see

page 104).

D CH LEVEL

Adjusts the volume level of each channel (see page 91).

E TEST

Outputs a test tone when adjusting the output level of each

channel (see page 90).

Remote control (Europe, Australia, Asia, and Korea models)

STEREO

MY BEAM

PRESET/TUNE

MEMORYSEARCH

SLEEP

INPUTMODE

ENHANCER MENU

RETURNDISPLAY

TV VOL

VOLUME

MUTE

CH LEVEL TEST

TV INPUT TV MUTE

ENTER

SUR. DECODE

OFF

CODE SET

SPORTS

5BEAM ST+3BEAM 3BEAM

MUSIC MOVIE

VOL MODE

AUTO

SETUP

A-E

MACRO

INPUT1

YSP

TV/AV

ENTRY

A-E

321

AUX1 AUX2

STB

DVD

AUX3

TVAV

POWERPOWERSTANDBY/ON

+10

MY SUR.

01EN_YSP-4000_UA.book Page 11 Wednesday, December 26, 2007 3:00 PM

Black process 45.0° 240.0 LPI

Controls and functions

12 En

F DVD player/VCR control buttons

Control your DVD player or VCR (see pages 105 and

106).

G My Beam microphone

Collects the test tones from this unit when using the My

Beam auto-adjust function (see page 63).

H TV POWER

Turns on the power of your TV or sets it to the standby

mode (see page 104).

I AV POWER

Turns on the power of the selected component or sets it to

the standby mode (see pages 105 and 106).

J INPUT1

Switches the input source on your TV (see page 104).

K MACRO

Use to set the TV macro (see page 107).

L a /5

Switches the preset station number (1 to 8) when this unit

is receiving an FM broadcast (see page 54).

M A-E

Switches the preset station group (A to E) when this unit is

receiving an FM broadcast (see page 54).

N SLEEP

Sets the sleep timer (see page 72).

O INPUTMODE

Toggles between input modes (AUTO, DTS, and

ANALOG) (see page 93).

P Beam mode buttons

Change the beam mode settings (see pages 56, 62, and

63).

Q SUR. DECODE

Selects the surround mode for playback (see page 59).

R MENU

Displays the setup menu on your TV monitor (see

pages 39 and 77).

S Operation mode selector

Selects the operation mode of this unit. Select YSP when

operating this unit and select TV/AV when operating your

TV or other AV components.

T RETURN

Selects sleep timer settings or returns to the previous SET

MENU screen.

U TV VOL +/–

Adjusts the volume level of your TV (see page 104).

V CH +/–

Changes the channels of your TV, digital satellite tuner,

cable TV tuner, or VCR (see pages 104 and 106).

W TV MUTE, CODE SET

Mutes the audio output of your TV (see page 104).

Sets up remote control codes (see page 103).

The functions L and M are available only when the FM stations

are preset.

Note

01EN_YSP-4000_UA.book Page 12 Wednesday, December 26, 2007 3:00 PM

Black process 45.0° 240.0 LPI

Controls and functions

13 En

INTRODUCTION

English

This section describes the functions of the remote control

used to control FM, Radio Data System, or iPod when the

TV/AV mode is selected with the operation mode selector

(7). Note that the Radio Data System controls are

available for Europe model only, and the iPod controls are

available for Australia model only.

1 PRESET/TUNE

FM: Switches between the preset search mode and the

frequency search mode (see pages 51 to 54).

2 Numeric buttons

FM: Enter numbers.

3 Cursor buttons / / / , ENTER

FM: Use ENTRY ( / ) to change the preset station

number (1 to 8) or frequency level (see pages 51 to 54).

Use A-E ( / ) to change the preset station group (A to

E) (see pages 53 and 54). Use ENTER to confirm the input

above.

These functions are also available when this unit is receiving the

Radio Data System (see page 54) or playing back your iPod (see

page 3 in the Reference Guide).

4 DISPLAY

Radio Data System and iPod: Displays information when

this unit is receiving the Radio Data System (see page 54)

or playing back your iPod (see page 2 in the Reference

Guide).

5 MEMORY

FM: Stores the preset stations (see pages 52 and 53).

This function is also available when this unit is receiving the

Radio Data System (see page 54).

6 SEARCH

FM: Switches between automatic and manual tuning (see

page 51).

7 Operation mode selector

Selects the operation mode of this unit. Select YSP when

operating this unit and select TV/AV when operating your

TV or other AV components.

321

+10

STEREO

MY BEAM

PRESET/TUNE

MEMORYSEARCH

SLEEP

INPUTMODE

ENHANCER MENU

RETURNDISPLAY

TV VOL

VOLUME

MUTE

CH LEVEL TEST

TV INPUT TV MUTE

OFF

CODE SET

SPORTS

5BEAM ST+3BEAM 3BEAM

MUSIC MOVIE

VOL MODE

AUTO

SETUP

A-E

MACRO

INPUT1

YSP

TV/AV

ENTRY

A-E

AUX1 AUX2

STB

DVD

AUX3

TVAV

POWERPOWERSTANDBY/ON

ENTER

SUR. DECODE

MY SUR.

01EN_YSP-4000_UA.book Page 13 Wednesday, December 26, 2007 3:00 PM

Black process 45.0° 240.0 LPI

Controls and functions

14 En

This section describes the functions of the remote control

used to control this unit. Some buttons marked with an

asterisk (*) share the common functions between the YSP

and TV/AV operation modes (S).

You can also control other components using the remote control

once you set the appropriate remote control codes. See

“Controlling other components” on page 104 for details.

1 Infrared window

Outputs infrared control signals. Aim this window at the

component you want to operate.

2 STANDBY/ON

Sets this system to the standby mode (see page 33).

3 Transmission indicator

Lights up when infrared control signals are being output.

4 Input selector buttons

Use to select an input source (DVD, AUX1, AUX2,

AUX3/DOCK, STB, TV, or FM/XM).

5 VOL MODE

Turns on or off the volume modes (see page 71).

6 AUTO SETUP

Enters the AUTO SETUP menu (see page 37).

7 Sound field program buttons

Select the sound field programs (see page 65).

8 ENHANCER

Turns on or off the Music Enhancer (see page 70).

9 Cursor buttons / / / , ENTER

Select and adjust SET MENU items.

0 DISPLAY

Displays information on the selected input signal.

A VOLUME +/–

Increases or decreases the volume level of this unit (see

page 49).

B MUTE

Mutes the sound. Press again to restore the audio output to

the previous volume level (see page 49).

C TV INPUT

Toggles between the input source on your TV (see

page 104).

D CH LEVEL

Adjusts the volume level of each channel (see page 91).

E TEST

Outputs a test tone when adjusting the output level of each

channel (see page 90).

Remote control (U.S.A. and Canada models)

STEREO

MY BEAM

PRESET/TUNE

MEMORYSEARCH

SLEEP

INPUTMODE

ENHANCER MENU

RETURNDISPLAY

TV VOL

VOLUME

MUTE

CH LEVEL TEST

TV INPUT TV MUTE

ENTER

OFF

CODE SET

SPORTS

5BEAM ST+3BEAM

MUSIC MOVIE

VOL MODE

AUTO

SETUP

CATFM/XM

MACRO

INPUT1

YSP

TV/AV

ENTRY

CAT/

A-E

321

AUX1 AUX2

STB

DVD

AUX3

POWERPOWERSTANDBY/ON

DOCK

+10

MY SUR.

3BEAM

SUR. DECODE

01EN_YSP-4000_UA.book Page 14 Wednesday, December 26, 2007 3:00 PM

Black process 45.0° 240.0 LPI

Controls and functions

15 En

INTRODUCTION

English

F DVD player/VCR control buttons

Control your DVD player or VCR (see pages 105 and

106).

G My Beam microphone

Collects the test tones from this unit when using the My

Beam auto-adjust function (see page 63).

H TV POWER

Turns on the power of your TV or sets it to the standby

mode (see page 104).

I AV POWER

Turns on the power of the selected component or sets it to

the standby mode (see pages 105 and 106).

J INPUT1

Switches the input source on your TV (see page 104).

K MACRO

Use to set the TV macro (see page 107).

L a /5

Switches the preset station number (1 to 8) when this unit

is receiving an FM broadcast or XM channel (see

page 54).

M CAT

Switches the preset station group (A to E) when this unit is

receiving an FM broadcast or XM channel (see page 54).

N SLEEP

Sets the sleep timer (see page 72).

O INPUTMODE

Toggles between input modes (AUTO, DTS, and

ANALOG) (see page 93).

P Beam mode buttons

Change the beam mode settings (see pages 56, 62, and

63).

Q SUR. DECODE

Selects the surround mode for playback (see page 59).

R MENU

Displays the setup menu on your TV monitor (see

pages 39 and 77).

S Operation mode selector

Selects the operation mode of this unit. Select YSP when

operating this unit and select TV/AV when operating your

TV or other AV components.

T RETURN

Selects sleep timer settings or returns to the previous SET

MENU screen.

U TV VOL +/–

Adjusts the volume level of your TV (see page 104).

V CH +/–

Changes the channels of your TV, digital satellite tuner,

cable TV tuner, or VCR (see pages 104 and 106).

W TV MUTE, CODE SET

Mutes the audio output of your TV (see page 104).

Sets up remote control codes (see page 103).

The functions L and M are available only when the FM/XM

stations are preset.

Note

01EN_YSP-4000_UA.book Page 15 Wednesday, December 26, 2007 3:00 PM

Black process 45.0° 240.0 LPI

Controls and functions

16 En

This section describes the functions of the remote control

used to control FM, XM Satellite Radio, or iPod when the

TV/AV mode is selected with the operation mode selector

(7).

1 PRESET/TUNE

FM: Switches between the preset search mode and the

frequency search mode (see pages 51 to 54).

2 Numeric buttons

FM, XM: Enter numbers.

3 Cursor buttons / / / , ENTER

FM: Use ENTRY ( / ) to change the preset station

number (1 to 8) or frequency level (see pages 51 to 54).

Use CAT/A-E ( / ) to change the preset station group

(A to E) (see pages 53 and 54). Use ENTER to confirm the

input above.

XM: Use ENTRY ( / ) to select XM channels in

All Channel Search mode/Category Search mode, and to

select the preset channel number (1 to 8) in Preset Search

mode. Use CAT/A-E ( / ) to select XM categories in

All Channel Search mode/Category Search mode, and to

select the preset channel group (A to E) in Preset Search

mode. Use ENTER to confirm the input above (see pages

7 and 8 in the Reference Guide).

These functions are also available when this unit is playing back

your iPod (see page 3 in the Reference Guide).

4 DISPLAY

XM and iPod: Displays information when this unit is

receiving an XM channel (see page 10 in the Reference

Guide) or playing back your iPod (see page 3 in the

Reference Guide).

5 MEMORY

FM: Stores the preset stations (see pages 52 and 53).

XM: Use to store the preset stations (see page 9 in the

Reference Guide).

6 SEARCH

FM: Switches between automatic and manual tuning (see

page 51).

XM: Switches between search modes (All Channel

Search, Category Search, and Preset Search) (see pages 7

and 8 in the Reference Guide).

7 Operation mode selector

Selects the operation mode of this unit. Select YSP when

operating this unit and select TV/AV when operating your

TV or other AV components.

321

+10

STEREO

MY BEAM

PRESET/TUNE

MEMORYSEARCH

SLEEP

INPUTMODE

ENHANCER MENU

RETURNDISPLAY

TV VOL

VOLUME

MUTE

CH LEVEL TEST

TV INPUT TV MUTE

ENTER

OFF

CODE SET

SPORTS

5BEAM ST+3BEAM 3BEAM

MUSIC MOVIE

VOL MODE

AUTO

SETUP

CATFM/XM

MACRO

INPUT1

ENTRY

CAT/

A-E

AUX1 AUX2

STB

DVD

AUX3

POWERPOWERSTANDBY/ON

DOCK

YSP

TV/AV

SUR. DECODE

MY SUR.

01EN_YSP-4000_UA.book Page 16 Wednesday, December 26, 2007 3:00 PM

Black process 45.0° 240.0 LPI

Installation

17 En

PREPARATION

English

This section describes a suitable installation location to install this unit using a metal wall bracket, a rack or a stand.

Depending on your installation environment, connections with external components can be done before installing this

unit. We recommend that you temporarily place and arrange all components, including this unit, in order to decide which

procedure should come first. Especially when you make a connection over HDMI, we recommend that you make a

connection first before installation (see page 22).

This unit creates surround sound by reflecting projected

sound beams off the walls of your listening room. The

surround sound effects produced by this unit may not be

sufficient when this unit is installed in the following

locations.

• Rooms with walls inadequate for reflecting sound

beams

• Rooms with acoustically absorbent walls

• Rooms with measurements outside the following

range: W (3 to 7 m (10 to 23 ft)) x H (2 to 3.5 m (7 to

11.5 ft)) x D (3 to 7 m (10 to 23 ft))

• Rooms with less than 1.8 m (6 ft) from the listening

position to this unit

• Rooms where objects such as furniture are likely to

obstruct the path of sound beams

• Rooms where the listening position is close to the walls

• Rooms where the listening position is not in front of

this unit

• You can enjoy surround sound by selecting My Surround (see

page 57) as the beam mode even if your listening room may not

fulfill the above conditions (except when the listening position

is not directly facing toward the front of this unit).

• You can also enjoy surround sound by selecting 2-channel or

5-channel stereo playback (see page 62) or My Beam (see

page 63) as the beam mode even if your listening room may not

fulfill the above conditions.

Make sure you leave an adequate amount of ventilation

space so that heat can escape. Make at least 5 cm (2 in) of

space above or below this unit.

• We do not recommend putting this unit directly on the floor of

your listening room. Please install this unit using a metal wall

bracket, a rack, or a stand.

• This unit weighs 15.5 kg (34 lbs 3 oz). Be sure to install this

unit where it will not fall subject to vibrations, such as from an

earthquake, and where it is out of the reach of children.

• When using a cathode-ray tube (CRT) TV, do not install this

unit directly above your TV.

• This unit is shielded against magnetic rays. However, if the

picture on your TV screen becomes blurred or distorted, we

recommend moving this unit away from your TV.

Install this unit where there are no obstacles such as

furniture obstructing the path of sound beams. Otherwise,

the desired surround sound effects may not be achieved.

You may install this unit in parallel with the wall or in the

corner.

Parallel installation

Install this unit in the exact center of the wall when it is

measured from the left and right corners.

Corner installation

Install this unit in the corner at a 40º to 50º angle from the

adjacent walls.

Installation

Before installing this unit

5 cm (2 in) or more

Rear

Front

Side view

Side

Notes

Installing this unit

An object, such as

furniture

40° to 50°

An object, such as furniture

01EN_YSP-4000_UA.book Page 17 Wednesday, December 26, 2007 3:00 PM

Black process 45.0° 240.0 LPI

18 En

Installation

■ Installation examples

Example 1

Install this unit as close to the exact center of the wall as possible.

Example 2

Install this unit so that the sound beams can be reflected off the walls.

Example 3

Install this unit as close to the exact front of your normal listening position as possible.

01EN_YSP-4000_UA.book Page 18 Wednesday, December 26, 2007 3:00 PM

Black process 45.0° 240.0 LPI

19 En

Installation

PREPARATION

English

■ Using a metal wall bracket

You can use the optional metal wall bracket (such as SPM-

K30) to mount this unit on the wall in your listening room.

Refer to the instructions supplied with the metal bracket for

details on how to attach the metal bracket to the wall or how to

attach this unit to the metal bracket.

■ Using a stand

You can mount your TV on a stand placed on a

commercially available rack and install this unit under

your TV.

Refer to the instructions supplied with the stand for details on

how to install the stand or how to mount and the TV on the stand.

■ Using a rack

You can install this unit either above or under your TV in a

commercially available rack.

Make sure that the rack is large enough to allow adequate

ventilation space around this unit (see page 17) and that it is

strong enough to support the weight of both this unit and your TV.

■ Affixing this unit

Peel off the film from each of the four supplied fasteners

and then secure them to the bottom four corners of this

unit and the top of the rack, etc.

• Do not install this unit on top of a slanted surface. This unit may

fall over and cause injury.

• Make sure you wipe the surface of the rack, etc. before securing

the fasteners. Applying the tape to a dirty or wet surface will

weaken the sticking power of the tape, and this unit may fall as

a result.

112

730

4- 7

24- 7x22

150

355 150355

This unit

Metal wall bracket

YSP-4000

SPM-K30 (Option)

(mm)

This unit

Stand

Note

Notes

When this unit is installed above your TV

When this unit is installed under your TV

This unit

Peel off

the film

Fasteners

Peel off

the pad

on the

bottom

01EN_YSP-4000_UA.book Page 19 Wednesday, December 26, 2007 3:00 PM

Black process 45.0° 240.0 LPI

Connections

20 En

This unit is equipped with the following types of audio/video input/output jacks/terminal:

For audio input

• 2 optical digital input jacks

• 2 coaxial digital input jacks

• 2 sets of analog input jacks

• 1 universal dock terminal

(U.S.A., Canada, and Australia models only)

For audio/video input

• 2 HDMI input jacks

For video input

• 3 composite video input jacks

• 2 sets of component video input jacks

For audio output

• 1 subwoofer output jack

For audio/video output

• 1 HDMI output jack

For video output

• 1 composite video output jack

• 1 set of component video output jacks

Use these jacks/terminal to connect external components such as your TV, DVD player, VCR, digital satellite tuner, cable

TV tuner, digital air wave tuner, portable audio player, game console, and iPod. Further, by connecting a subwoofer to

this unit, you can enjoy reinforced low-bass sounds. For details on how to connect various types of external components

to this unit, see pages 22 to 29.

• Do not connect this unit or other components to the mains power until all connections between components are

complete.

• Unplug the AC power supply cable before changing connections, moving or cleaning this unit.

Connections

CAUTION

INPUT VOLUME STANDBY/ON

INTELLIBEAM MIC

AUX 3

This unit

Audio connection Video connection

VCR or game consoleDVD player Subwoofer Digital satellite tuner

or cable TV tuner

portable audio

player

01EN_YSP-4000_UA.book Page 20 Wednesday, December 26, 2007 3:00 PM

Black process 45.0° 240.0 LPI

21 En

Connections

PREPARATION

English

■ Cables used for connections

HDMI cable

Audio pin cable (supplied)

Optical cable (supplied)

Digital audio pin cable (supplied)

3.5 mm stereo mini plug cable

Subwoofer pin cable

OSD video pin cable (supplied) / Video pin cable

Component video pin cable

■ Notes on connecting the optical cable

• Pull out the cap before connecting the optical cable.

When you are not using the optical cable, be sure to put the cap

back in place.

• When inserting the cable into the optical digital jack, make sure

the direction is correct.

■ Affixing cables

To prevent cables from becoming unplugged, place the supplied cable

clamp with the open side facing upward, attach it to the rear panel of

this unit in a suitable position, and then affix cables in the cable clamp.

■ Information on HDMI™

Audio signals

•

When CPPM copy-protected DVD audio is played back, video and

audio signals may not be output depending on the type of DVD player.

• This unit is not compatible with HDCP-incompatible HDMI or

DVI components.

• We recommend that you use an HDMI cable shorter than 5 m

(16 ft) with the HDMI logo printed on it.

• Use a conversion cable (HDMI jack

↔ DVI-D jack) to connect

this unit to other DVI components.

■ Priority order for audio input signals

When multiple types of audio signals are simultaneously

being input from a single source component, this unit

plays back the audio signals in the following priority

order: HDMI → Digital → Analog

As default settings, the following input jacks are assigned

to the corresponding input sources:

Before connecting components

Audio/Video

Audio

Video

(White)

(Red)

(White)

(Red)

(Orange)(Orange)

(Yellow)(Yellow)

(Green)

(Blue)

(Red)

(Blue)

(Red)

Cap

Input source Audio signal type

DVD video Dolby Digital, DTS, PCM

DVD audio

2-channel stereo

(up to 96 kHz/24 bit)

Blu-ray Disc

HD DVD

Dolby Digital, DTS, PCM

Notes

Input

jack

Input

Source

HDMI Digital Analog

TV/STB

DVD

AUX 1

AUX 2

AUX 3

Optical cable

Attach to this unit

01EN_YSP-4000_UA.book Page 21 Wednesday, December 26, 2007 3:00 PM

Black process 45.0° 240.0 LPI

22 En

Connections

This unit is equipped with 2 HDMI input jacks and 1 HDMI output jack. If your TV and other components have HDMI

jacks, use HDMI cables for simpler and easier connections, and you can skip the connection procedures from page 23 to

26. If your TV has a built-in digital satellite tuner and an optical digital output jack, connect the optical digital output jack

on your TV to the TV/STB OPTICAL DIGITAL IN jack on this unit.

• We recommend that you secure the HDMI cable(s) with adhesive tape, etc. once you have connected the HDMI cable(s) to the HDMI

jack(s) of this unit.

• This unit outputs analog video signal and analog/digital audio signals input at the video/component video jacks and analog/digital

input jacks at the HDMI OUT jack.

HDMI cable

Connections using HDMI cables

AUX 1

DVD

OUT

HDMI

AAA

Rear panel of this unit

HDMI

output

HDMI

input

HDMI

output

DVD player/recorder

Digital satellite tuner,

cable TV tuner,

digital airwave tuner,

or game console

This connection (except for a game

console) is not necessary if your

TV has a built-in digital satellite

tuner, cable TV tuner, or digital

airwave tuner.

Audio/Video

01EN_YSP-4000_UA.book Page 22 Wednesday, December 26, 2007 3:00 PM

Black process 45.0° 240.0 LPI

23 En

Connections

PREPARATION

English

For audio connection, connect the analog audio output jacks on your TV to the TV/STB AUDIO IN jacks on this unit. If

your TV has an optical digital output jack, connect the optical digital output jack on your TV to the TV/STB OPTICAL

DIGITAL IN jack on this unit.

For video connection, connect the video input jack on your TV to the VIDEO OUT jack on this unit to display the OSD

for easy viewing when you adjust the system parameters in SET MENU. If your TV has component video input jacks,

connect the component video input jacks of your TV to the COMPONENT VIDEO OUT jacks of this unit in addition to

the composite video connection. Once the component video connection is made, you can enjoy images with better

resolution.

To prevent the optical cable from being unplugged, affix the optical cable in the supplied cable clamp (see page 21).

If you make analog and optical digital audio connections at the same time as shown in the illustration below, the digital audio signals

input at the TV/STB OPTICAL DIGITAL IN jack take priority over the analog audio signals input at the TV/STB AUDIO IN jacks.

OSD video pin cable

Component video pin cable

Audio pin cable

Optical cable

Connecting a TV

Notes

AUX 1TV/STB

AUDIO IN

COMPONENT

VIDEO OUT

OPTICAL

COAXIAL

DVD AUX 2

AUX 1TV/STB

DIGITAL IN

Rear panel of this unit

Optical

digital

output

Video

input

Analog

audio

output

Component

video input

Video Audio

01EN_YSP-4000_UA.book Page 23 Wednesday, December 26, 2007 3:00 PM

Black process 45.0° 240.0 LPI

24 En

Connections

For audio connection, connect the coaxial digital output jack on your DVD player/recorder to the DVD COAXIAL

DIGITAL IN jack on this unit. When you connect this unit to your DVD/VCR combo player/recorder, connect the analog

audio output jacks on your DVD/VCR combo player/recorder to the AUX 1 AUDIO IN jacks on this unit in addition to

the coaxial digital audio connection.

For video connection, connect the video output jack of your DVD player/recorder to the DVD/AUX 2 VIDEO IN jack of

this unit. If your DVD player/recorder has component video output jacks, connect the component video output jacks of

your DVD player/recorder to the DVD/AUX 2 COMPONENT VIDEO IN jacks of this unit. Once the component video

connection is made, you can enjoy images with better resolution.

To prevent the optical cable from being unplugged, affix the optical cable in the supplied cable clamp (see page 21).

• Check that your DVD player/recorder is properly set to output Dolby Digital and DTS digital audio signals. If not, adjust the system

settings of your DVD player/recorder. For details, refer to the operation manual supplied with your DVD player/recorder.

• If your DVD player/recorder does not have a coaxial digital output jack, make an optical digital audio connection instead (see

page 28).

Video pin cable

Component video pin cable

Audio pin cable

Digital audio pin cable

Connecting a DVD player/recorder

Notes

AUX 1TV/STB

AUDIO IN

STB

ANTENNA

DVD/AUX 2 AUX 1

VIDEO IN

SUBWOOFER

COMPONENTCOMPONENT

FM75

UNBAL.

OPTICAL

COAXIAL

DVD AUX 2

AUX 1TV/STB

DIGITAL IN

Coaxial

digital

output

Analog

audio

output

DVD player/recorder

Video signal to the TV

Rear panel of this unit

You can only make

either a composite

or a component

connection.

Video

output

Component

video output

For the DVD/

VCR combo

player/recorder

connection

Video

output

*1 *2

Video Audio

01EN_YSP-4000_UA.book Page 24 Wednesday, December 26, 2007 3:00 PM

Black process 45.0° 240.0 LPI

25 En

Connections

PREPARATION

English

For audio connection, connect the optical digital output jack on your digital satellite tuner or cable TV tuner to the TV/

STB OPTICAL DIGITAL IN jack on this unit. Connect the analog audio output jacks on your digital satellite tuner or

cable TV tuner to the TV/STB AUDIO IN jacks on this unit.

For video connection, connect the video output jack of your digital satellite tuner or cable TV tuner to the STB VIDEO

IN jack of this unit. If your digital satellite tuner or cable TV tuner has component video output jacks, connect the

component video output jacks of your digital satellite tuner or cable TV tuner to the STB COMPONENT VIDEO IN

jacks of this unit. Once the component video connection is made, you can enjoy images with better resolution.

To prevent the optical cable from being unplugged, affix the optical cable in the supplied cable clamp (see page 21).

Video pin cable

Component video pin cable

Audio pin cable

Optical cable

Connecting a digital satellite tuner or a cable TV tuner

STB

ANTENNA

DVD/AUX 2 AUX 1

VIDEO IN

SUBWOOFER

COMPONENTCOMPONENT

FM75

UNBAL.

AUX 1TV/STB

AUDIO IN

OPTICAL

COAXIAL

DVD AUX 2

AUX 1TV/STB

DIGITAL IN

Rear panel of this unit

Analog

audio

output

Optical

digital

output

Digital satellite tuner

or cable TV tuner

Video signal to the TV

You can only make

either a composite

or a component

connection.

Video

output

Component

video output

This connection (except for a game console) is not

necessary if your TV has a built-in digital satellite

tuner, cable TV tuner, or digital airwave tuner.

Video Audio

01EN_YSP-4000_UA.book Page 25 Wednesday, December 26, 2007 3:00 PM

Black process 45.0° 240.0 LPI

26 En

Connections

For audio connection, connect the TV/STB AUDIO IN jacks on this unit to the analog audio output jacks on your TV.

Connect the optical digital output jack on your digital airwave tuner to the TV/STB OPTICAL DIGITAL IN jack on this

unit in addition to the analog audio connection. By doing so, you can enjoy both analog and digital broadcasts.

For video connection, connect the video output jack of your digital airwave tuner to the STB VIDEO IN jack of this unit.

If your digital airwave tuner has component video output jacks, connect the component video output jacks of your digital

airwave tuner to the STB COMPONENT VIDEO IN jacks of this unit. Once the component video connection is made,

you can enjoy images with better resolution.

To prevent the optical cable from being unplugged, affix the optical cable in the supplied cable clamp (see page 21).

Video pin cable

Component video pin cable

Audio pin cable

Optical cable

Connecting a digital airwave tuner

STB

ANTENNA

DVD/AUX 2 AUX 1

VIDEO IN

SUBWOOFER

COMPONENTCOMPONENT

FM75

UNBAL.

AUX 1TV/STB

AUDIO IN

OPTICAL

COAXIAL

DVD AUX 2

AUX 1TV/STB

DIGITAL IN

Rear panel of this unit

Connect to the analog

audio output jacks on

the TV.

Optical

digital

output

Digital airwave tunerVideo signal to the TV

You can only make

either a composite

or a component

connection.

Video

output

Component

video output

This connection (except for a game console) is not

necessary if your TV has a built-in digital satellite

tuner, cable TV tuner, or digital airwave tuner.

Video Audio

01EN_YSP-4000_UA.book Page 26 Wednesday, December 26, 2007 3:00 PM

Black process 45.0° 240.0 LPI

27 En

Connections

PREPARATION

English

Connect the analog audio output jack on your portable audio player to the AUX 3 input jack on the front panel of this

unit.

3.5 mm stereo mini plug cable

Connecting a portable audio player

INPUT VOLUME STANDBY/ON

INTELLIBEAM MIC

AUX 3

Portable audio player

Front panel of this unit

Analog

audio

output

Audio

01EN_YSP-4000_UA.book Page 27 Wednesday, December 26, 2007 3:00 PM

Black process 45.0° 240.0 LPI

28 En

Connections

If your component supports optical digital connections, connect the optical digital output jack on your component

(e.g., DVD player/recorder) to the AUX 1 OPTICAL DIGITAL IN jack on this unit. If your component does not support

optical digital connections, connect the coaxial digital output jack on your component to the AUX 2 COAXIAL

DIGITAL IN jack on this unit. If your component does not support any digital connections, connect the analog audio

output jacks on your component (e.g., VCR) to the AUX 1 AUDIO IN jacks on this unit.

For video connection, connect the video output jack of your DVD player/recorder, etc. to the DVD/AUX 2 VIDEO IN (or

AUX 1 VIDEO IN) jack of this unit. If your DVD player/recorder, etc. has component video output jacks, connect the

component video output jacks of your DVD player/recorder, etc. to the DVD/AUX 2 COMPONENT VIDEO IN jacks of

this unit. Once the component video connection is made, you can enjoy images with better resolution.

To prevent the optical cable from being unplugged, affix the optical cable in the supplied cable clamp (see page 21).

If you make analog and digital audio connections at the same time as shown in the illustration below, the digital audio signals input at

the AUX 1 OPTICAL DIGITAL IN or AUX 2 COAXIAL DIGITAL IN jack take priority over the analog audio signals input at the AUX

1 AUDIO IN jacks.

Video pin cable

Component video pin cable

Audio pin cable

Optical cable

Digital audio pin cable

Connecting other external components

Note

AUX 1TV/STB

AUDIO IN

STB

ANTENNA

DVD/AUX 2 AUX 1

VIDEO IN

SUBWOOFER

COMPONENTCOMPONENT

FM75

UNBAL.

OPTICAL

COAXIAL

DVD AUX 2

AUX 1TV/STB

DIGITAL IN

Optical

digital

output

Video signal to

the TV

DVD player/recorder, VCR,

game console, CD player, etc.

Rear panel of this unit

Analog

audio

output

Coaxial

digital

output

Video

output

Component

video output

You can only make

either a composite

or a component

connection.

Video

output

Video Audio

01EN_YSP-4000_UA.book Page 28 Wednesday, December 26, 2007 3:00 PM

Black process 45.0° 240.0 LPI

29 En

Connections

PREPARATION

English

Connect the monaural input jack on your subwoofer to the SUBWOOFER jack on this unit.

This connection alone does not output sound from the connected subwoofer. To output sound from the connected

subwoofer, turn on the power of your subwoofer and then run AUTO SETUP (see page 37) or select SWFR for BASS

OUT in SUBWOOFER SET (see page 82).

When connecting a Yamaha subwoofer equipped with a SYSTEM CONNECTOR terminal, connect it to the SYSTEM

CONNECTOR terminal on this unit (U.S.A. and Canada models). If the subwoofer is connected using a system type

connection, changing the power mode of this unit controls the power mode of the subwoofer.

Subwoofer pin cable

Connecting a subwoofer

STB

ANTENNA

DVD/AUX 2 AUX 1

VIDEO IN

SUBWOOFER

COMPONENTCOMPONENT

FM75

UNBAL.

VIDEO OUT

COMPONENT

SYSTEM

CONNECTOR

Monaural

input

Subwoofer

System

connector

System connector

cable

Rear panel of this unit

(U.S.A. and Canada models)

Audio

01EN_YSP-4000_UA.book Page 29 Wednesday, December 26, 2007 3:00 PM

Black process 45.0° 240.0 LPI

30 En

Connections

Connect the supplied FM antenna to the FM ANTENNA jack on this unit.

The RS-232C, IR-OUT, and IR IN terminals do not support normal external component connections. They are control

expansion terminals for commercial use only.

Connecting the FM antenna

About the RS-232C/IR-OUT/IR IN terminals

STB

ANTENNA

DVD/AUX 2 AUX 1

VIDEO IN

SUBWOOFER

COMPONENTCOMPONENT

FM75

UNBAL.

Rear panel of this unit

FM indoor antenna (supplied)

IR-OUT

RS-232C

IR IN

IR-OUT

IR IN terminal

Rear panel of this unit

(U.S.A. and Canada models)

RS-232C terminal IR-OUT terminal

01EN_YSP-4000_UA.book Page 30 Wednesday, December 26, 2007 3:00 PM

Black process 45.0° 240.0 LPI

31 En

Connections

PREPARATION

English

Once all other connections are complete, plug one end of the AC power supply cable into the AC IN terminal of this unit

and then plug the other end into the AC wall outlet.

Connecting the AC power supply cable

IR-OUT

To the AC

wall outlet

Rear panel of this unit

(U.S.A. and Canada models)

AC IN

01EN_YSP-4000_UA.book Page 31 Wednesday, December 26, 2007 3:00 PM

Black process 45.0° 240.0 LPI

GETTING STARTED

32 En

1 Press and hold the mark on the battery

cover and then open the cover.

2 Insert the two supplied batteries (AA, R6,

UM-3) into the battery compartment.

Make sure you insert the batteries according to the

polarity markings (+/–).

3 Close the battery cover.

• Change all of the batteries if you notice the following

conditions: the operation range of the remote control decreases

or the transmission indicator does not light up or becomes dim.

• Do not use old batteries together with new ones.

• Do not use different types of batteries (such as alkaline and

manganese batteries) together. Read the packaging carefully as

these different types of batteries may have the same shape and

color.

• Exhausted batteries may leak. If the batteries have leaked,

dispose of them immediately. Avoid touching the leaked

material or letting it come into contact with clothing, etc. Clean

the battery compartment thoroughly before installing new

batteries.

• Do not throw away batteries with general house waste. Dispose

of them correctly in accordance with your local regulations.

• The memory stored in the remote control may be erased in the

following cases:

– The remote control is left without batteries for more than two

minutes.

– Exhausted batteries remain in the remote control.

– The buttons on the remote control are accidentally pressed

when you change batteries.

• If the memory stored in the remote control is unwantedly

erased, insert new batteries and set the remote control codes

again.

Remove the transparent sheet before using the remote control.

The remote control transmits a directional infrared beam.

Use the remote control within 6 m (20 ft) of this unit and

point it toward the remote control sensor of this unit

during operation.

• Do not spill water or other liquids on the remote control.

• Do not drop the remote control.

• Do not leave or store the remote control in the following places:

– places of high humidity, such as near a bath

– places of high temperatures, such as near a heater or a stove

– places of extremely low temperatures

– dusty places

• Do not expose the remote control sensor of this unit to direct

sunlight or lighting such as inverted fluorescent lamps.

• If the batteries grow old, the effective operation range of the

remote control decreases considerably. If this happens, replace

the batteries with two new ones as soon as possible.

Getting started

Installing batteries in the remote

control

Notes

Press

Operation range of the remote

control

Notes

INPUT VOLUME STANDBY/ON

INTELLIBEAM MIC

AUX 3

45 45

Approximately

6 m (20 ft)

01EN_YSP-4000_UA.book Page 32 Wednesday, December 26, 2007 3:00 PM

Black process 45.0° 240.0 LPI

Getting started

33 En

SETUP

English

1 Press STANDBY/ON to turn on the power of

this unit.

The volume level appears in the front panel display,

and the current input source and beam mode are

displayed.

2 Press STANDBY/ON again to set this unit to

the standby mode.

When this unit is in the standby mode, only STANDBY/ON on

the front panel or on the remote control is operational, and the

other control buttons on the front panel or on the remote control

are not operational until the power of this unit is turned on.

Turning on this unit or

setting it to the standby mode

INPUT VOLUME STANDBY/ON

PRESET/TUNE

MEMORYSEARCH

CATFM/XM

MACRO

INPUT1

AUX1 AUX2

STB

DVD

AUX3

POWERPOWERSTANDBY/ON

DOCK

(U.S.A. and Canada models)

STANDBY/ON

Front panel

Remote control

VOLUME 30

Current volume level

DVD MY SUR

Current input

source

Current beam

mode

Note

01EN_YSP-4000_UA.book Page 33 Wednesday, December 26, 2007 3:00 PM

Black process 45.0° 240.0 LPI

USING SET MENU

34 En

This section describes how to display the OSD (on-screen display) of this unit on your TV screen and to set the

parameters for your listening room. Once this is complete, you can enjoy real surround sound while watching TV in the

comfort of your own home.

1 Check that the video input jack on your TV is

connected to the VIDEO OUT jack on this unit

to display the OSD of this unit.

2 Press STANDBY/ON to turn on the power of

this unit.

3 Turn on the power of your TV.

4 Set the operation mode selector to YSP.

5 Press MENU.

The SET MENU screen appears on your TV.

Using SET MENU

Displaying the OSD (on-screen display)

STANDBY/ON

Front panel

Remote control

YSP

TV/AV

;MEMORY

;AUTO SETUP

;MANUAL SETUP

;LANGUAGE SETUP

[ ]/[ ]:Up/Down

[ENTER]:Enter

SET MENU

01EN_YSP-4000_UA.book Page 34 Wednesday, December 26, 2007 3:00 PM

Black process 45.0° 240.0 LPI

Using SET MENU

35 En

SETUP

English

The following diagram illustrates the overall flow of the setup procedure.

The flow chart of SET MENU

Run AUTO SETUP (IntelliBeam).

See “AUTO SETUP (IntelliBeam)” on page 37.

Look for a remedy.

See “Error messages for AUTO SETUP” on page 43 for a complete list of error

messages and possible remedies.

Play back audio signals or adjust the settings for the beam mode and the CINEMA DSP.

See “Playback” on page 47, “Enjoying surround sound” on page 56, and “Using sound field programs” on

page 65.

Run MANUAL SETUP.

See “MANUAL SETUP” on page 76.

• If you cannot clearly hear a sound beam from a specific channel, adjust settings for

SETTING PARAMETERS (see page 78) or for BEAM ADJUSTMENT (see page 79) in

BEAM MENU.

• If there are acoustically absorbent objects such as curtains in the path of the sound beams,

adjust settings for TREBLE GAIN in BEAM MENU (see page 81).

If an error occurs

If you want to make additional settings

and adjustments

Run LANGUAGE SETUP.

See “Changing OSD language” on page 36.

01EN_YSP-4000_UA.book Page 35 Wednesday, December 26, 2007 3:00 PM

Black process 45.0° 240.0 LPI

CHANGING OSD LANGUAGE

36 En

This feature allows you to select the language of your choice that appears in SET MENU of this unit.

1 Set the operation mode selector to YSP.

2 Press MENU.

The SET MENU screen appears on your TV.

• The control buttons used for SET MENU are displayed at

the bottom of the screen.

• To return to the previous screen while using SET MENU,

press RETURN.

• To exit from SET MENU, press MENU once more.

• You can also perform the following operations while

viewing information in the front panel display.

3 Press / to select LANGUAGE SETUP,

and press ENTER.

The following screen appears on your TV.

4 Press / to select the desired language,

and press ENTER.

Choices: ENGLISH (English), DEUTSCH (German),

Français (French), ESPAÑOL (Spanish),

ITALIANO (Italian), NEDERLANDS (Dutch),

Русский (Russian)

Changing OSD language

YSP

TV/AV

;MEMORY

;AUTO SETUP

;MANUAL SETUP

;LANGUAGE SETUP

[ ]/[ ]:Up/Down

[ENTER]:Enter

SET MENU

ENTER

ENGLISH

DEUTSCH

Francais

ESPANOL

ITALIANO

NEDERLANDS

[ ]/[ ]:Select

[ENTER]:Return

;LANGUAGE SETUP

ENTER

01EN_YSP-4000_UA.book Page 36 Wednesday, December 26, 2007 3:00 PM

Black process 45.0° 240.0 LPI

AUTO SETUP (INTELLIBEAM)

37 En

SETUP

English

This unit creates a sound field by reflecting sound beams on the walls of your listening room and by broadening the

cohesion of all the channels. Just as you would arrange the speaker position of other audio systems, you need to set the

beam angle to enjoy the best possible sound from this unit.

This unit employs the beam optimization and sound optimization features with the aid of the supplied IntelliBeam

microphone, allowing you to avoid troublesome listening-based setup and achieving highly accurate sound adjustments

that best match your listening environment. We call these two features “IntelliBeam” generically.

Beam optimization:

This feature optimizes the beam angle so that the parameter best matches your listening environment.

Sound optimization:

This feature optimizes the beam delay, volume, and quality so that the parameters best match your listening environment.

This unit performs a series of checks to optimize the beam angle, delay, volume, and quality. You can choose to optimize

all or part of the parameters.

The beam angle checking procedure is skipped if SOUND

OPTIMZ only is selected.

The sound optimization procedure is skipped if BEAM

OPTIMZ only is selected.

The subwoofer checking procedure is skipped if BEAM

OPTIMZ only is selected.

AUTO SETUP (IntelliBeam)

The flow chart of AUTO SETUP

*2 *3

Checking the environment of

your listening room

Optimizing the beam angle

Checking the subwoofer and

optimizing the beam delay,

frequency, and volume

Beam

optimization

Sound

optimization

Notes

01EN_YSP-4000_UA.book Page 37 Wednesday, December 26, 2007 3:00 PM

Black process 45.0° 240.0 LPI

AUTO SETUP (IntelliBeam)

38 En

The supplied IntelliBeam microphone collects and analyzes the sound that this unit produces in your actual listening

environment. Follow the procedure below to connect the IntelliBeam microphone to this unit and make sure that the

IntelliBeam microphone is placed in a proper location and that there are no large obstacles between the IntelliBeam

microphone and the walls in your listening room.

• After you have completed the AUTO SETUP procedure, be sure to disconnect the IntelliBeam microphone.

• The IntelliBeam microphone is sensitive to heat.

– Keep it away from direct sunlight.

– Do not place it on top of this unit.

• Do not connect the IntelliBeam microphone to an extension cable as doing so may result in an inaccurate sound optimization.

• An error may occur during the AUTO SETUP procedure if the IntelliBeam microphone is not properly placed in your listening room.

To avoid the possibility of an error:

– Do not place the IntelliBeam microphone to the extreme right or left from the center of this unit.

– Do not place the IntelliBeam microphone within 1.8 m (6.0 ft) from the front of this unit.

– Do not place the IntelliBeam microphone more than 1 m (3.3 ft) upper or lower from the center height of this unit.

• Make sure that there are no obstacles between the IntelliBeam microphone and the walls in your listening room as these objects

obstruct the path of sound beams. However, any objects that are in contact with the walls will be regarded as a protruding part of the

walls.

• The best possible results are achieved if the IntelliBeam microphone is placed at the same height as your ears would be when you are

seated in your listening position. However, if this is not possible, you can manually fine-tune the sound beam angle and balance the

sound beam output levels using MANUAL SETUP (see page 76) once the AUTO SETUP procedure is completed.

• If a subwoofer with adjustable volume and crossover/high-cut frequency controls is connected to

this unit, set the volume between 11 and 1 o’clock as viewed on a conventional clockface and set

the crossover/high-cut frequency to the maximum.

1 Press STANDBY/ON to turn off the power of

this unit.

2 Connect the supplied IntelliBeam

microphone to the INTELLIBEAM MIC jack on

the front panel.

3 Place the IntelliBeam microphone on a flat

level surface more than 1.8 m (6.0 ft) from the

front of the unit and within 1 m (3.3 ft) upper

or lower from the center height of the unit

with the IntelliBeam microphone facing

upward at your normal listening position.

Be sure to place the IntelliBeam microphone on an

imaginary center line drawn from this unit.

You may want to use the supplied cardboard microphone

stand to affix the IntelliBeam microphone at the same height

as your ears would be when you are seated in your listening

position.

Installing the IntelliBeam microphone

Notes

VOLUME

MIN MAX MIN

MAX

CROSSOVER

HIGH CUT

Subwoofer

STANDBY/ON

Front panel

Remote control

INTELLIBEAM MIC

AUX 3

INTELLIBEAM MIC

Note

IntelliBeam

microphone

More than

1.8 m (6.0 ft)

Within 1 m (3.3 ft)

upper or lower from

the center height

Cardboard

microphone stand

Sofa

Upper bound

position of the

microphone

Lower bound

position of the

microphone

01EN_YSP-4000_UA.book Page 38 Wednesday, December 26, 2007 3:00 PM

Black process 45.0° 240.0 LPI

AUTO SETUP (IntelliBeam)

39 En

SETUP

English

■ Assembling the supplied cardboard

microphone stand

You will find three separate parts (one circular part and

two longitudinal parts) of the cardboard microphone stand

originally put together.

1 Disassemble the three parts of the cardboard

microphone stand originally put together.

2 Insert one of the longitudinal part into the

crevice of the other longitudinal part.

3 Place the circular part on top of the two

combined longitudinal parts.

4 Place the supplied IntelliBeam microphone

on top of the circular part.

Once the IntelliBeam microphone is firmly connected to

this unit and properly placed in your listening room,

follow the procedure below to start the AUTO SETUP

procedure.

You can also enter the AUTO SETUP procedure simply by

pressing and holding AUTO SETUP for more than two

seconds. In this case, this unit performs both of the beam

optimization and sound optimization procedures.

IntelliBeam

microphone

Center line

Using AUTO SETUP (IntelliBeam)

STEREO

MY BEAM

PRESET/TUNE

MEMORYSEARCH

SLEEP

INPUTMODE

ENHANCER MENU

RETURNDISPLAY

TV VOL

VOLUME

ENTER

OFF

SPORTS

5BEAM ST+3BEAM 3BEAM

MUSIC MOVIE

VOL MODE

AUTO

SETUP

CATFM/XM

MACRO

INPUT1

ENTRY

CAT/

A-E

321

AUX1 AUX2

STB

DVD

AUX3

POWERPOWERSTANDBY/ON

DOCK

+10

789

SUR. DECODE

MY SUR.

YSP

TV/AV

INPUT VOLUME STANDBY/ON

(U.S.A. and Canada models)

01EN_YSP-4000_UA.book Page 39 Wednesday, December 26, 2007 3:00 PM

Black process 45.0° 240.0 LPI

AUTO SETUP (IntelliBeam)

40 En

• Make sure that your listening room is as quiet as possible while

this unit is performing the AUTO SETUP procedure.

• To achieve the best results possible, evacuate yourself from

your listening room until the AUTO SETUP procedure is

completed so that you may not obstruct the path of sound

beams.

• Be advised that it is normal for loud test tones to be output

during the AUTO SETUP procedure.

• The AUTO SETUP procedure may not be run successfully if

this unit is installed in one of the rooms described in “Before

installing this unit” on page 17. In such cases, run MANUAL

SETUP (see page 76) to manually adjust the corresponding

parameters.

• If an error occurs, an error buzzer is played, the AUTO SETUP

procedure stops, and an error message appears on the screen.

See “Error messages for AUTO SETUP” on page 43 for

appropriate remedies.

• The AUTO SETUP procedure takes about three minutes

maximum. A chime is played when the AUTO SETUP

procedure is run successfully.

• If there are curtains in your listening room, we recommend

following the procedure below.

1. Open the curtains to improve sound reflection.

2. Run BEAM OPTIMZ only.

3. Close the curtains.

4. Run SOUND OPTIMZ only.

• You can save the settings optimized by the AUTO SETUP

procedure (see page 44). A set of settings optimized according

to the specific conditions of your listening environment can be

recalled later depending on the varying conditions of your

listening environment (see page 45).

1 Press STANDBY/ON to turn on the power of

this unit.

If a subwoofer is connected to this unit, turn on the

power of the subwoofer.

2 Set the operation mode selector to YSP.

3 Press MENU.

The SET MENU screen appears on your TV.

• The control buttons used for SET MENU are displayed at

the bottom of the screen.

• To return to the previous screen while using SET MENU,

press RETURN.

• To exit from the SET MENU screen, press MENU again.

• You can start the BEAM+SOUND OPTIMZ procedure

simply by pressing and holding AUTO SETUP for more

than two seconds. Steps 4 and 5 are skipped and then the

screen shown in step 5 is displayed on your TV. Start the

AUTO SETUP procedure from step 6.

• You can also perform the following operations in the front

panel display.

4 Press / to select AUTO SETUP and

press ENTER.

The following screen appears on your TV.

Notes

STANDBY/ON

Front panel

Remote control

YSP

TV/AV

;MEMORY

;AUTO SETUP

;MANUAL SETUP

;LANGUAGE SETUP

[ ]/[ ]:Up/Down

[ENTER]:Enter

SET MENU

1)BEAM+SOUND OPTIMZ

2)BEAM OPTIMZ only

3)SOUND OPTIMZ only

[ ]/[ ]:Up/Down

[ENTER]:Enter

;AUTO SETUP

ENTER

01EN_YSP-4000_UA.book Page 40 Wednesday, December 26, 2007 3:00 PM

Black process 45.0° 240.0 LPI

AUTO SETUP (IntelliBeam)

41 En

SETUP

English

5 Press / to select BEAM+SOUND

OPTIMZ, BEAM OPTIMZ only, or SOUND

OPTIMZ only and then press ENTER.

The following screen appears on your TV.

BEAM+SOUND OPTIMZ

(Beam optimization and sound optimization)

Use to optimize the beam angle, delay, volume, and

quality so that the parameters best match your listening

environment.

It is recommended that you should select this optimization

feature in the following cases:

• If you make settings for the first time.

• If the unit has been relocated.

• If your listening room has been restructured.

• If the objects in your listening room (furniture, etc.)

have been rearranged.

This menu takes about three minutes.

BEAM OPTIMZ only

(Beam optimization only)

Use to optimize the beam angle so that the parameter best

matches your listening environment.

This menu takes about one minute.

SOUND OPTIMZ only

(Sound optimization only)

Use to optimize the beam delay, volume, and quality so

that the parameters best match your listening environment.

It is recommended that you should select this optimization

feature in the following cases:

• If you have opened or closed the curtains in your

listening room before using this unit.

• If you have manually set the beam angle.

This menu takes about two minutes.

You must optimize the beam angle in the BEAM OPTIMZ only

procedure before starting the SOUND OPTIMZ only procedure.

6 Check the following points once again before

starting the AUTO SETUP procedure.

• Is the IntelliBeam microphone firmly connected to

this unit?

• Is the IntelliBeam microphone placed in a proper

location?

• Are there any large obstacles in between the

IntelliBeam microphone and the walls in your

listening room?

7 Press ENTER to start the AUTO SETUP

procedure.

The following screen appears on your TV and the

AUTO SETUP procedure starts in 10 seconds.

Leave the room quietly before starting the AUTO

SETUP procedure.

If an error occurs, an error buzzer is played and an

error message is displayed. See “Error messages for

AUTO SETUP” on page 43 for a complete list of

error messages and their proper remedies. Follow the

instructions and perform the AUTO SETUP

procedure again.

Note

ENTER

PREPARATION & CHECK

Please connect the MIC.

Please place the MIC at least

1.8m/6ft away from the YSP

unit. The MIC should be set

at ear level when seated.

Measurement takes about 3min.

After [ENTER] is pressed,

please leave the room.

[ENTER]:Start [RETURN]:Cancel

AUTO SETUP

Will begin in 10sec

Please leave the room

**--------

[RETURN]:Cancel

AUTO SETUP START

ENTER

← Flashes

01EN_YSP-4000_UA.book Page 41 Wednesday, December 26, 2007 3:00 PM

Black process 45.0° 240.0 LPI

AUTO SETUP (IntelliBeam)

42 En

8 Check that the following screen is displayed

on your TV.

The results of the AUTO SETUP procedure are

displayed on your TV.

• If “ENVIRONMENT CHECK [FAILED]” is

displayed, we recommend running the AUTO SETUP

procedure again. For details, see step 9.

• If “SUBWOOFER : NOT APPLICABLE” is displayed

even though a subwoofer is connected to this unit,

increase the volume level of the subwoofer and run the

AUTO SETUP procedure again.

• Depending on the environment of your listening room,

the beam angle of front left and right, and surround left

and right may be set to the same value even if

“5 BEAM” is displayed as a result.

9 Press ENTER to confirm the results or press

RETURN to cancel the results.

The following screen is displayed for two seconds

and then disappears from your TV.

If “ENVIRONMENT CHECK [FAILED]” is displayed in

step 8, the following screen is displayed after pressing

ENTER. In this case, see ERROR E-1 in “Error messages

for AUTO SETUP” on page 43. Press ENTER to exit

AUTO SETUP and then run the procedure again from

step 3.

10 Disconnect the IntelliBeam microphone from

the INTELLIBEAM MIC jack on the front

panel.

If you want to save and load settings, see “Using the system

memory” on page 44.

MEASUREMENT COMPLETE

BEAM MODE :5 BEAM

SUBWOOFER :NOT APPLICABLE

[ENTER]:Save set-up.

[RETURN]:Do not save set-up.

SHOW RESULT

Example 1

MEASUREMENT COMPLETE

ENVIRONMENT CHECK[FAILED]

BEAM MODE :5 BEAM

SUBWOOFER :YES

[ENTER]:Save set-up.

[RETURN]:Do not save set-up.

SHOW RESULT

Example 2

←

Flashes

ENTER

AUTO SETUP COMPLETE

Please remove the MIC from

the YSP and the listening

position.

AUTO SETUP COMPLETE

Your YSP unit may not be set

up correctly.

We recommend you try again.

Please press [ENTER] key to

exit.

INTELLIBEAM MIC

AUX 3

←

Flashes

01EN_YSP-4000_UA.book Page 42 Wednesday, December 26, 2007 3:00 PM

Black process 45.0° 240.0 LPI

AUTO SETUP (IntelliBeam)

43 En

SETUP

English

■ Error messages for AUTO SETUP

Before the AUTO SETUP procedure starts

While the AUTO SETUP procedure is in progress

If one of the errors listed below except E-1 is displayed, press RETURN. In case you have started the AUTO SETUP

procedure by pressing AUTO SETUP in step 3, run the procedure again from step 3 after the screen disappears. In case

you have started the AUTO SETUP procedure by pressing MENU in step 3, run the procedure again from step 4 after the

screen in step 3 is displayed. Run MANUAL SETUP if the problem is difficult to be saved.

Error message Cause Remedy

See

page

ERROR E-2

No MIC detected. Please check

MIC connection and re-try.

The IntelliBeam microphone is not

connected to this unit.

Connect the IntelliBeam microphone to

this unit.

Error message Cause Remedy

See

page

ERROR E-1

Please test in quieter environment.

There is too much unwanted noise in

your listening room.

Make sure that your listening room is as

quiet as possible. You may want to

choose certain hours during the day

when there is not much noise coming

from outside.

—

ERROR E-2

No MIC detected. Please check

MIC connection and re-try.

The IntelliBeam microphone was

disconnected while the AUTO SETUP

procedure was in progress.

Make sure that the IntelliBeam

microphone is firmly connected to this

unit.

ERROR E-3

Unexpected control is detected.

Please re-try.

Some other operations were performed

on this unit while the AUTO SETUP

procedure was in progress.

Do not perform any other operations

while the AUTO SETUP procedure is in

progress.

—

ERROR E-4

Please check MIC position. MIC

should be set in front of YSP.

The IntelliBeam microphone is not

placed in front of this unit.

Make sure that the IntelliBeam

microphone is installed in front of this

unit.

ERROR E-5

Please check MIC position. MIC

should be set above 1.8m/6.0ft.

The IntelliBeam microphone is not

placed in the right distance from this

unit.

Make sure that the IntelliBeam

microphone is installed more than 1.8 m

(6.0 ft) from the front of this unit and

within 1 m (3.3 ft) from the center height

of this unit.

ERROR E-6

Volume level is lower than

expected. Please check MIC

position/connection and re-try.

The IntelliBeam microphone cannot

collect the sound produced by this unit

because the sound output level is too low.

Make sure that the IntelliBeam

microphone is firmly connected to this

unit and placed in a proper location. If

the problem persists, contact the nearest

authorized Yamaha service center for

assistance.

ERROR E-7

Unexpected error happened.

Please re-try.

An internal system error occurred. Repeat the AUTO SETUP procedure.

—

01EN_YSP-4000_UA.book Page 43 Wednesday, December 26, 2007 3:00 PM

Black process 45.0° 240.0 LPI

USING THE SYSTEM MEMORY

44 En

You can save the current settings adjusted in SET MENU

in the system memory of this unit. It is handy to save

certain settings according to the varying conditions of

your listening environment. For example, if there are

curtains in the path of sound beams, the effectiveness of

the sound beams will vary depending on whether the

curtains are open or closed.

1 Set the operation mode selector to YSP.

2 Press MENU.

The SET MENU screen appears on your TV.

• The control buttons used for SET MENU are displayed at

the bottom of the screen.

• To return to the previous screen while using SET MENU,

press RETURN.

• To exit from the SET MENU screen, press MENU once

more.

• You can also perform the following operations in the front

panel display.

3 Press / to select MEMORY and press

ENTER.

The following screen appears on your TV.

4 Press / to select SAVE and press

ENTER.

The following screen appears on your TV.

Using the system memory

Convenient usage of the system

memory

Saving settings

When the curtains are

open

When the curtains are

closed

YSP

TV/AV

;MEMORY

;AUTO SETUP

;MANUAL SETUP

;LANGUAGE SETUP

[ ]/[ ]:Up/Down

[ENTER]:Enter

SET MENU

ENTER

1)LOAD

2)SAVE

[ ]/[ ]:Up/Down

[ENTER]:Enter

;MEMORY

ENTER

MEMORY1

MEMORY2

MEMORY3

[ ]/[ ]:Select

[ENTER]:Enter

2)MEMORY SAVE

ENTER

01EN_YSP-4000_UA.book Page 44 Wednesday, December 26, 2007 3:00 PM

Black process 45.0° 240.0 LPI

Using the system memory

45 En

SETUP

English

5 Press / to select MEMORY1,

MEMORY2, or MEMORY3 and press ENTER.

The following screen appears on your TV.

6 Press ENTER again.

The new parameters are saved as MEMORY1,

MEMORY2, or MEMORY3. Once the parameters

are saved, the display returns to the SET MENU

screen.

7 Press MENU to exit.

The SET MENU screen disappears from your TV.

You can recall the settings saved in “Saving settings” on

page 44 according to the varying conditions of your

listening environment.

1 Set the operation mode selector to YSP.

2 Press MENU.

The SET MENU screen appears on your TV.

• The control buttons used for SET MENU are displayed at

the bottom of the screen.

• To return to the previous screen while using SET MENU,

press RETURN.

• To exit from the SET MENU screen, press MENU once

more.

• You can also perform the following operations in the front

panel display.

3 Press / to select MEMORY and press

ENTER.

The following screen appears on your TV.

MEMORY1 Save Now ?

Push [ENTER] to Save

2)MEMORY SAVE

ENTER

MEMORY1 Saving

2)MEMORY SAVE

ENTER

;MEMORY

;AUTO SETUP

;MANUAL SETUP

;LANGUAGE SETUP

[ ]/[ ]:Up/Down

[ENTER]:Enter

SET MENU

Loading settings

YSP

TV/AV

;MEMORY

;AUTO SETUP

;MANUAL SETUP

;LANGUAGE SETUP

[ ]/[ ]:Up/Down

[ENTER]:Enter

SET MENU

ENTER

1)LOAD

2)SAVE

[ ]/[ ]:Up/Down

[ENTER]:Enter

;MEMORY

ENTER

01EN_YSP-4000_UA.book Page 45 Wednesday, December 26, 2007 3:00 PM

Black process 45.0° 240.0 LPI

Using the system memory

46 En

4 Press / to select LOAD and press

ENTER.

The following screen appears on your TV.

5 Press / to select MEMORY1,

MEMORY2, or MEMORY3 and press ENTER.

The following screen appears on your TV.

6 Press ENTER again.

The new parameters saved as MEMORY1,

MEMORY2, or MEMORY3 are loaded. Once the

parameters are loaded, the display returns to the SET

MENU screen.

7 Press MENU to exit.

The SET MENU screen disappears from your TV.

ENTER

MEMORY1

MEMORY2

MEMORY3

[ ]/[ ]:Select

[ENTER]:Enter

1)MEMORY LOAD

ENTER

MEMORY1 Load Now ?

Push [ENTER] to Load

1)MEMORY LOAD

ENTER

MEMORY1 Loading

1)MEMORY LOAD

ENTER

;MEMORY

;AUTO SETUP

;MANUAL SETUP

;LANGUAGE SETUP

[ ]/[ ]:Up/Down

[ENTER]:Enter

SET MENU

01EN_YSP-4000_UA.book Page 46 Wednesday, December 26, 2007 3:00 PM

Black process 45.0° 240.0 LPI

PLAYBACK

47 En

BASIC

OPERATION

English

You can play back sound from the components connected

to this unit simply by pressing INPUT on the front panel

repeatedly or pressing one of the input selector buttons

(TV, STB, DVD, AUX1, AUX2, or AUX3) on the remote

control. The name of the selected input source and the

type of corresponding input mode appear in the front

panel display.

■ Front panel operations

Press INPUT on the front panel repeatedly to

toggle between TV, STB, DVD, AUX1, AUX2, and

AUX3.

The name of the corresponding input source and the type

of current input mode are displayed in the front panel

display.

■ Remote control operations

In addition to controlling this unit, you can also operate other AV

components if you set up the remote control with the appropriate

remote control codes and set the operation mode selector to TV/

AV to change the control area (see page 103).

Press TV to play back a TV program.

Press STB to play back a satellite broadcast.

Press DVD to play back a DVD.

Playback

Selecting the input source

STEREO

MY BEAM

PRESET/TUNE

MEMORYSEARCH

SLEEP

INPUTMODE

ENHANCER MENU

RETURNDISPLAY

ENTER

OFF

SPORTS

5BEAM ST+3BEAM 3BEAM

MUSIC MOVIE

VOL MODE

AUTO

SETUP

CATFM/XM

MACRO

INPUT1

ENTRY

CAT/

A-E

321

AUX1 AUX2

STB

DVD

AUX3

DOCK

+10

789

YSP

TV/AV

SUR. DECODE

MY SUR.

INPUT VOLUME STANDBY/ON

(U.S.A. and Canada models)

TV/STB AUTO

Name of the selected

input source

Type of the selected

input mode

STB

TV/STB AUTO

DVD

DVD AUTO

01EN_YSP-4000_UA.book Page 47 Wednesday, December 26, 2007 3:00 PM

Black process 45.0° 240.0 LPI

48 En

Playback

Press AUX1 (or AUX2) to play back a component

connected to the AUX 1 (or AUX 2) jack on the

rear panel of this unit.

Press AUX3 to play back a component connected

to the AUX 3 input jack on the front panel.

Once an input source is selected (see page 47), you can

play back the selected input source.

This section uses a DVD player as an example of the playback

source.

For details on your TV and DVD player, refer to the respective

owner’s manual.

1 Turn on the power of your DVD player.

2 Switch to the video input on your TV using

the remote control supplied with the TV and

display the DVD menu screen.

If necessary, turn down the volume of your TV until no

sound is heard.

3 Press DVD to select DVD as the input source.

4 Play back DVD on your DVD player using the

supplied remote control.

Audio signals from your DVD player are output from

this unit.

• You can use the supplied demonstration DVD to check the

digital signals being input at the DVD player with the digital

connection (optical/coaxial/HDMI). The input channel and LFE

indicators light up when this unit detects the 5.1-channel signal

input at the optical/coaxial/HDMI jack. If the indicator

lights up, confirm the settings of the digital output, bitstream

output, DTS output, and/or HDMI output of the DVD player.

• If the output volume is too low, increase the volume of this unit

to around 45.

• If you have set the appropriate remote control codes for your

TV and DVD player, you can use the remote control supplied

with this unit to operate these components. For details on how

to set remote control codes, see page 103.

Playing back sources

Note

AUX1

AUX1 AUTO

AUX3

Note

DVD

PCM

01EN_YSP-4000_UA.book Page 48 Wednesday, December 26, 2007 3:00 PM

Black process 45.0° 240.0 LPI

49 En

Playback

BASIC

OPERATION

English

Press VOLUME +/– to increase or decrease the

volume level.

The numeric value of the volume level appears in the front

panel display.

Control range: MIN (minimum), 01 to 99,

MAX (maximum)

• The volume level of all input sources (including multi-channel

as well as stereo sources) changes at the same time.

• One volume level increases or decreases each time you press

VOLUME +/–.

• You can continuously increase or decrease the volume level if

you press and hold VOLUME +/–.

■ Muting the sound

1 Press MUTE to mute the sound.

“AUDIO MUTE ON” appears in the front panel

display, and the volume level indicator flashes.

2 Press MUTE again (or press VOLUME +/–) to

resume the sound output.

“AUDIO MUTE OFF” appears temporarily in the

front panel display (or the numeric value of the

current volume level appears if you press VOLUME

+/–), and the volume level indicator lights up.

The sound output of all input sources (including multi-channel as

well as stereo sources) is muted at the same time.

You can select whether the sound output is to be muted

completely or by 20 dB when you press MUTE (see page 83).

Adjusting the volume

Notes

INPUT VOLUME STANDBY/ON

TV VOL

VOLUME

MUTE

TV INPUT TV MUTE

VOLUME

VOLUME 30

Front panel

Remote control

Note

TV VOL

VOLUME

MUTE

TV INPUT TV MUTE

CODE SET

DVD 5BEAM

MUTE

AUDIO MUTE ON

Flashes

AUDIO MUTE OFF

VOLUME

Lights up

MUTE

01EN_YSP-4000_UA.book Page 49 Wednesday, December 26, 2007 3:00 PM

Black process 45.0° 240.0 LPI

FM TUNING

50 En

There are two tuning methods: automatic and manual. Automatic tuning is effective when the radio signal is strong and

there is no interference. If the radio signal is weak, tune into the FM station manually. You can also use the automatic and

manual preset tuning features to store up to 40 stations in total (A1 to E8: 5 preset station groups with 8 preset station

numbers each).

• This section exceptionally uses the remote control for Europe, Australia, Asia, and Korea models.

• When the operation mode selector is set to TV/AV, you can operate all FM functions. When the operation mode selector is set to YSP,

you can only operate the functions described in “Selecting a preset station” (see page 54).

Orient the connected FM antenna for the best reception.

■ Remote control functions

Set the operation mode selector (8) to TV/AV before

tuning or preset tuning.

1 FM

Selects FM as the input source. This unit is tuned into the

last selected FM station.

U.S.A. and Canada models use FM/XM.

2 PRESET/TUNE

Switches between the preset search mode and the

frequency search mode (see page 53).

3 Numeric buttons

Use numbers 1 through 8 to select the preset station

numbers (see page 54).

4 ENTRY ( / )

• Selects the preset station numbers (1 to 8) when the

colon (:) is displayed in the front panel display

(see page 54).

• Selects the tuning frequency when the colon (:) is not

displayed in the front panel display (see page 51).

5 A-E ( / )

Selects the preset station groups (A to E) (see page 53).

U.S.A. and Canada models use CAT/A-E .

6 MEMORY

• Stores a preset station in the memory (see page 53).

• Hold down this button for more than three seconds to

start automatic preset tuning (see page 52).

7 SEARCH

Switches between automatic tuning (the AUTO indicator

is turned on) and manual tuning (the AUTO indicator is

turned off) (see page 51).

8 Operation mode selector

Selects the operation mode of this unit.

FM tuning

Note

FM controls and functions

STEREO MY SUR.

MY BEAM

PRESET/TUNE

MEMORYSEARCH

SLEEP

INPUTMODE

ENHANCER

RETURNDISPLAY

TV VOL

VOLUME

MUTE

TV INPUT TV MUTE

ENTER

SUR. DECODE

OFF

CODE SET

SPORTS

5BEAM ST+3BEAM 3BEAM

MUSIC MOVIE

VOL MODE

AUTO

SETUP

MACRO

INPUT1

321

AUX1 AUX2

STB

DVD

AUX3

POWERPOWERSTANDBY/ON

+10

789

YSP

TV/AV

ENTRY

A-E

(Europe, Australia, Asia, and

Korea models)

01EN_YSP-4000_UA.book Page 50 Wednesday, December 26, 2007 3:00 PM

Black process 45.0° 240.0 LPI

51 En

FM tuning

BASIC

OPERATION

English

Automatic tuning is effective when the radio station

signals are strong and there is no interference.

1 Set the operation mode selector to TV/AV.

2 Press FM to select FM as the input source.

“FM” appears in the front panel display.

• You can also press INPUT on the front panel repeatedly to

select FM as the input source.

• If “XM” appears in the front panel display, press FM/XM

again to display “FM” (U.S.A. and Canada models only).

3 Press SEARCH repeatedly until the AUTO

indicator lights up in the front panel display.

If a colon (:) appears in the front panel display, tuning

is not available. Press PRESET/TUNE to turn the

colon (:) off.

4 Press ENTRY ( / ) once to begin

automatic tuning.

When this unit is tuned into an FM station, the

TUNED indicator lights up and the frequency of the

station appears in the front panel display.

• Press to tune into a higher frequency.

• Press to tune into a lower frequency.

If the desired FM station signal is weak, tune into it

manually.

Manual tuning automatically switches the tuner to the monaural

reception mode to increase the signal quality.

1 Set the operation mode selector to TV/AV.

2 Press FM to select FM as the input source.

“FM” appears in the front panel display.

• You can also press INPUT on the front panel repeatedly to

select FM as the input source.

• If “XM” appears in the front panel display, press FM/XM

again to display “FM” (U.S.A. and Canada models only).

Automatic tuning

YSP

TV/AV

A FM 88.9 MHz

Lights up

No colon (:)

Manual tuning

Note

ENTER

ENTRY

YSP

TV/AV

01EN_YSP-4000_UA.book Page 51 Wednesday, December 26, 2007 3:00 PM

Black process 45.0° 240.0 LPI

52 En

FM tuning

3 Press SEARCH repeatedly until the AUTO

indicator disappears from the front panel

display.

If a colon (:) appears in the front panel display, tuning

is not available. Press PRESET/TUNE to turn the

colon (:) off.

4 Press ENTRY ( / ) to tune into the

desired station manually.

Hold down the button for quick search.

You can use the automatic preset tuning feature to store up

to 40 FM stations with strong signals (A1 to E8: 5 preset

station groups with 8 preset station numbers each). You

can recall the preset stations easily by selecting the preset

station groups and numbers.

1 Set the operation mode selector to TV/AV.

2 Press FM to select FM as the input source.

“FM” appears in the front panel display.

• You can also press INPUT on the front panel repeatedly to

select FM as the input source.

• If “XM” appears in the front panel display, press FM/XM

again to display “FM” (U.S.A. and Canada models only).

3 Press and hold MEMORY for more than three

seconds.

The preset station group and number, the MEMORY

indicator, and the AUTO indicator flash. Automatic

preset tuning starts from the current frequency and

proceeds toward higher frequencies.

When automatic preset tuning is completed, the front

panel display shows the frequency of the last preset

station.

• When you overwrite an existing preset station, the

previously stored FM station is cleared.

• If the number of automatically preset stations does not

reach 40 (E8), this unit automatically stops searching.

• Only FM stations with sufficient signal strength are preset

automatically. If the desired station is weak in signal

strength, tune into it manually and store it as described in

“Manual preset tuning” on page 53.

Automatic preset tuning

A FM 88.9 MHz

No colon (:)

ENTER

ENTRY

YSP

TV/AV

Notes

A1:FM 88.9 MHz

Flashes

MEMORY

01EN_YSP-4000_UA.book Page 52 Wednesday, December 26, 2007 3:00 PM

Black process 45.0° 240.0 LPI

53 En

FM tuning

BASIC

OPERATION

English

You can also store up to 40 stations (A1 to E8: 5 preset

station groups with 8 preset station numbers each)

manually.

1 Set the operation mode selector to TV/AV.

2 Tune into the desired FM station.

See page 51 for tuning instructions.

3 Press MEMORY.

The MEMORY indicator flashes in the front panel

display for approximately 10 seconds.

4 Press A-E ( / ) repeatedly to select a

preset station group (A to E) while the

MEMORY indicator is flashing.

The selected preset station group letter appears.

Check that the colon (:) appears in the front panel

display.

• If the colon (:) does not appear, press PRESET/TUNE to

display the colon.

• U.S.A. and Canada models use CAT/A-E .

• Even when the operation mode selector is set to YSP, you

can select the desired preset group by pressing A-E (CAT

for U.S.A. and Canada models).

5 Press ENTRY ( / ) to select a preset

station number (1 to 8) while the MEMORY

indicator is flashing.

• You can also use the numeric buttons to select the desired

preset station number.

• Even when the operation mode selector is set to YSP, you

can select the desired preset number by pressing / .

6 Press MEMORY while the MEMORY indicator

is flashing.

The preset station group and number appear in the

front panel display together with the station band and

frequency. The MEMORY indicator disappears from

the front panel display.

• When you overwrite an existing preset station, the

previously stored FM station is cleared.

• The reception mode (stereo or monaural) is stored along

with the station frequency.

Manual preset tuning

YSP

TV/AV

Flashes

MEMORY

A :FM 88.9 MHz

ENTER

A-E

Preset

station

group

Colon (:)

Flashes

Notes

A1:FM 88.9 MHz

Preset station number

ENTER

ENTRY

Flashes

A1:FM 88.9 MHz

The displayed station has been stored as A1.

MEMORY

01EN_YSP-4000_UA.book Page 53 Wednesday, December 26, 2007 3:00 PM

Black process 45.0° 240.0 LPI

54 En

FM tuning

You can tune into the preset stations simply by selecting

the preset station groups and numbers.

1 Set the operation mode selector to TV/AV.

2 Press FM to select FM as the input source.

“FM” appears in the front panel display.

• You can also press INPUT on the front panel repeatedly to

select FM as the input source.

• If “XM” appears in the front panel display, press FM/XM

again to display “FM” (U.S.A. and Canada models only).

3 Press A-E ( / ) to select the desired

preset station group (A to E).

The preset station group letter appears in the front

panel display and changes each time you press the

button.

• If the colon (:) does not appear, press PRESET/TUNE to

display the colon.

• U.S.A. and Canada models use CAT/A-E .

• Even when the operation mode selector is set to YSP, you

can select the desired preset group by pressing A-E (CAT

for U.S.A. and Canada models).

4 Press ENTRY ( / ) to select the desired

preset station number (1 to 8).

The preset station group and number appear in the

front panel display together with the station band and

frequency.

• You can also use the numeric buttons to select the desired

preset station number.

• Even when the operation mode selector is set to YSP, you

can select the desired preset number by pressing / .

Radio Data System is a data transmission system used by

FM stations. You can display the four types of the Radio

Data System information: PS (program service), PTY

(program type), RT (radio text), and CT (clock time). The

corresponding indicators light up in the front panel

display.

• You can select the Radio Data System display modes only when

the corresponding Radio Data System indicators are lit in the

front panel display. It may take a while for this unit to receive

all of the Radio Data System data from the station.

• If the signals being received are not strong enough, this unit

may not be able to utilize the Radio Data System data. In

particular, the “RT” mode requires a large amount of data and

may not be available even when the other Radio Data System

display modes are available.

• In case of poor reception conditions, tune into the desired

station manually (see page 51).

• In case the signal strength is weakened by external interference

while this unit is receiving the Radio Data System data, the

reception may be cut off unexpectedly and “...WAIT” appears in

the front panel display.

• If the reception is cut off when the “CT” mode is selected, “CT

WAIT” appears in the front panel display.

Selecting a preset station

YSP

TV/AV

ENTER

A-E

Displaying the Radio Data System

information (Europe model only)

Notes

ENTER

ENTRY

A1:FM 88.9 MHz

01EN_YSP-4000_UA.book Page 54 Wednesday, December 26, 2007 3:00 PM

Black process 45.0° 240.0 LPI

55 En

FM tuning

BASIC

OPERATION

English

1 Tune into the desired Radio Data System

broadcasting station.

We recommend automatic preset tuning to tune into

the Radio Data System broadcasting stations (see

page 52).

The AUTO PS feature of this unit changes the frequency

display to the “PS” mode if the Radio Data System station

broadcasts the PS data.

2 Press DISPLAY repeatedly to select the

desired Radio Data System display mode.

• Select “PS” to display the name of the Radio Data

System program.

• Select “PTY” to display the type of Radio Data

System program.

• Select “RT” to display the information on the

Radio Data System program.

• Select “CT” to display the current time.

In the “RT” mode, this unit can scroll the display with a

maximum of 64 alphanumeric characters, including the

umlaut symbol. Unavailable characters are displayed with

the “_” (underscore).

Note

CTRTPTYPS

Frequency display

DISPLAY

Program type Descriptions

NEWS

News

AFFAIRS

Current affairs

INFO

General information

SPORT

Sport

EDUCATE

Education

DRAMA

Drama

CULTURE

Culture

SCIENCE

Science

VARIED

Light entertainment

POP M

Pop music

ROCK M

Rock music

M.O.R.M

Middle-of-the-road music

LIGHT M

Light classical

CLASSICS

Serious classical

OTHER M

Other music

01EN_YSP-4000_UA.book Page 55 Wednesday, December 26, 2007 3:00 PM

Black process 45.0° 240.0 LPI

ENJOYING SURROUND SOUND

56 En

You can enjoy multi-channel surround sound by changing the beam mode using the beam mode buttons on the remote

control. Select 5 Beam, Stereo plus 3 Beam, 3 Beam, or My Surround for multi-channel playback.

• When ANGLE TO WALL OR CORNER is set in MANUAL SETUP (see page 78), 5 Beam and 3 Beam cannot be selected.

• To enjoy 5 Beam, Stereo plus 3 Beam, or 3 Beam as the beam mode, you must perform AUTO SETUP or MANUAL SETUP so that

the parameters best match your listening environment.

1 Set the operation mode selector to YSP.

2 Press one of the beam mode buttons

(5BEAM, ST+3BEAM, 3BEAM, or MY SUR.) to

select the desired beam mode for 5.1-

channel play back.

Outputs sound beams from the front left, front right,

center, surround left, and surround right channels. This

mode is ideal for enjoying surround sound effects to the

fullest when you watch DVDs recorded in a multi-channel

format or play back 2-channel sources in a multi-channel

format.

Press 5BEAM to select 5 Beam.

• To achieve the best surround sound effect, make sure that there

are no obstacles placed in the path of sound beams in that the

objects may prevent the sound beams from rebounding directly

off the walls in your listening room.

• The front left and right sound beams are output toward the walls

in your listening room.

• “SP Pos. Corner!” appears in the front panel display if

INSTALLED POSITION is set to ANGLE TO WALL OR

CORNER (see page 78).

Enjoying surround sound

Notes

STEREO MY SUR.

MY BEAM

SLEEP

INPUTMODE

ENHANCER MENU

RETURNDISPLAY

ENTER

SUR. DECODE

OFF

SPORTS

5BEAM ST+3BEAM 3BEAM

MUSIC MOVIE

VOL MODE

AUTO

SETUP

ENTRY

CAT/

A-E

321

+10

789

YSP

TV/AV

(U.S.A. and Canada models)

YSP

TV/AV

5BEAM

ST+3BEAM

3BEAM

MY SUR.

5 Beam

Notes

5BEAM

01EN_YSP-4000_UA.book Page 56 Wednesday, December 26, 2007 3:00 PM

Black process 45.0° 240.0 LPI

57 En

Enjoying surround sound

BASIC

OPERATION

English

Outputs normal sound from the front left and right

channels and sound beams from the center and surround

left and right channels. This mode is ideal for watching

live recordings on a DVD. Vocals and instrumental sounds

can be heard close to the center of the listening position

while sound reflections from the venue itself can be heard

on your right and left, giving you the feeling that you are

sitting right in front of the stage.

Press ST+3BEAM to select Stereo plus 3 Beam.

The front left and right sound beams are output directly toward

the listening position.

Outputs sound beams from the front left and right and

center channels. This mode is ideal for enjoying movies

with the whole family. Because the listening position area

is widened, you can enjoy excellent quality surround

sound over a wider area. In addition, you can use this

mode when the listening position is close to the backside

of the wall, and the surround left and right sound beams

cannot be reflected off the wall.

Press 3BEAM to select 3 Beam.

You can achieve a more realistic surround effect if you adjust

settings for IMAGE LOCATION in BEAM MENU (see page 82).

• When you play back multi-channel sources, surround left and

right signals are mixed down and output from the front left and

right channels.

• The front left and right sound beams are output toward the walls

in your listening room.

• “SP Pos. Corner!” appears in the front panel display if

INSTALLED POSITION is set to ANGLE TO WALL OR

CORNER (see page 78).

This mode enables surround system in a small listening

area which may not fulfill the listening room conditions

for other beam modes (see “Before installing this unit” on

page 17). Use this beam mode when you want to enjoy

surround sound near this unit, or when the other beam

modes are unavailable.

Press MY SUR. to select My Surround.

• Beam mode settings such as beam angles and distances are

ineffective in this mode.

• For the full effect of My Surround, your listening position must

face toward the front of this unit.

Stereo plus 3 Beam

Note

3 Beam

ST+3BEAM

3BEAM

Notes

My Surround

Notes

MY SUR.

01EN_YSP-4000_UA.book Page 57 Wednesday, December 26, 2007 3:00 PM

Black process 45.0° 240.0 LPI

58 En

Enjoying surround sound

■ Decoder indicators

Depending on the input source and the selected surround

mode, the indicators in the front panel display light up as

follows:

• You can select an input mode (AUTO, DTS, or ANALOG) by

pressing INPUTMODE repeatedly (see page 93).

• Discs encoded in DTS-ES, Dolby Digital 5.1 EX, Dolby Digital

EX, or Dolby Digital Surround EX will be played back in DTS

or Dolby Digital.

■ Input channel indicators

Depending on the channel component of the current

digital input signal, the input channel indicators in the

front panel display light up as follows:

■ Surround modes and recommended

sources

• When you select an input source (see page 47), the surround

mode used for the previously selected input source is

automatically selected.

• If the power of this unit is turned off and on again, the surround

mode used for the previously selected input source before the

power was turned off is automatically selected.

• If the surround modes are not available, “Prohibit” appears in

the front panel display when you press SUR. DECODE.

• The surround modes are available:

– when the beam mode is set to a setting other than the 2-

channel or 5-channel stereo playback (see page 62) and My

Surround (see page 57).

– when the CINEMA DSP programs are turned off

(see page 69).

– when the movie program is selected as the CINEMA DSP

program (see page 68). In this case, only Dolby Pro Logic,

Dolby Pro Logic II Movie, and DTS Neo:6 Cinema are

available.

– when 2-channel signals are being input.

– when the Music Enhancer is turned off (see page 70).

Status Indicator

When PCM signals are being input

When DTS digital signals are being

input

When DTS Neo:6 is selected as the

surround mode

When Dolby Digital signals are

being input

When Dolby Pro Logic is selected

as the surround mode

When Dolby Pro Logic II is selected

as the surround mode

Status Indicator

When 2-channel stereo signals are

being input

When 5.1-channel signals are being

input

PCM

DIGITAL

Surround mode

Recommended

source

Dolby Pro Logic – All sources

Dolby Pro Logic II

Movie

Music

Game

Movies

Music

Games

DTS Neo:6

Cinema

Music

Movies

Music

Neural Surround

(U.S.A. and

Canada models

only)

–

XM Satellite Radio

(U.S.A. and Canada

models only)

Notes

01EN_YSP-4000_UA.book Page 58 Wednesday, December 26, 2007 3:00 PM

Black process 45.0° 240.0 LPI

59 En

Enjoying surround sound

BASIC

OPERATION

English

This unit can decode 2-channel sources for 5.1-channel

playback so that you can enjoy a variety of surround sound

effects by switching the surround mode.

The surround modes are available only when the CINEMA DSP

programs are turned off (see page 69) or when the movie program

is selected as the CINEMA DSP program (see page 68). In

addition, the beam mode must be set to 5 Beam, Stereo plus 3

Beam, or 3 Beam (see page 56), while the Music Enhancer must

be also turned off (see page 70).

1 Set the operation mode selector to YSP.

2 Press SUR. DECODE repeatedly (or press

SUR. DECODE and then press / ) to

switch between surround modes.

Choices: Neo:6 Cinema, Neo:6 Music, PRO LOGIC,

PLII Movie, PLII Music, PLII Game, neural surround

Default setting: Neo:6 Cinema

Enjoying 2-channel sources

in surround sound

STEREO MY SUR.

MY BEAM

ENHANCER MENU

RETURNDISPLAY

ENTER

SUR. DECODE

OFF

SPORTS

5BEAM ST+3BEAM 3BEAM

MUSIC MOVIE

ENTRY

CAT/

A-E

321

+10

789

YSP

TV/AV

(U.S.A. and Canada models)

YSP

TV/AV

SUR. DECODE

ENTER

Neo:6 Cinema

Neo:6 Music

PRO LOGIC

PLII Movie

PLII

Music

PLII

Game

neural surround

Example of the surround

mode display in the front

panel display when the

CINEMA DSP program

and the Music Enhancer

are turned off

(U.S.A. and Canada models only)

01EN_YSP-4000_UA.book Page 59 Wednesday, December 26, 2007 3:00 PM

Black process 45.0° 240.0 LPI

60 En

Enjoying surround sound

You can enjoy analog audio signals output from your TV

in real surround sound.

Before performing the steps below, set the volume of this unit to

30. If necessary, adjust the volume level in step 4 below.

1 Select the TV channel you want to watch.

To select a TV channel, use the remote control

supplied with your TV.

2 Set the operation mode selector to YSP.

3 Press TV.

This unit outputs audio signals from your TV.

4 If you hear sound from your TV speakers,

reduce the volume level of your TV until you

can no longer hear any audio being output.

To reduce the TV volume level, use the remote

control supplied with your TV.

5 Press VOLUME +/– to adjust the volume

level.

6 Press SUR. DECODE repeatedly (or press

SUR. DECODE and then press / ) to

switch between surround modes.

Signals input from 2-channel sources are played back

in multi-channels.

For more information on surround modes, see

page 58.

Enjoying TV in surround sound

STEREO

MY BEAM

PRESET/TUNE

MEMORYSEARCH

SLEEP

INPUTMODE

ENHANCER MENU

RETURNDISPLAY

TV VOL

VOLUME

ENTER

SUR. DECODE

OFF

SPORTS

5BEAM ST+3BEAM 3BEAM

MY SUR.

MUSIC MOVIE

VOL MODE

AUTO

SETUP

CATFM/XM

MACRO

INPUT1

ENTRY

CAT/

A-E

321

STB

+10

789

YSP

TV/AV

(U.S.A. and Canada models)

YSP

TV/AV

VOLUME

SUR. DECODE

ENTER

01EN_YSP-4000_UA.book Page 60 Wednesday, December 26, 2007 3:00 PM

Black process 45.0° 240.0 LPI

61 En

Enjoying surround sound

BASIC

OPERATION

English

You can configure the parameters for Dolby Pro Logic II

Music and DTS Neo:6 Music to fine-tune the surround

sound effect.

1 Repeat steps 1 and 2 in “Enjoying 2-channel

sources in surround sound” on page 59 and

select PL II Music or Neo:6 Music.

2 Press / to select the parameter.

3 Press / to configure the selected

parameter.

■ When Dolby Pro Logic II Music is

selected

PANORAMA

Gives the front left and right channel sound a

wraparound effect, distributed throughout the entire

surround sound field to give you an expansive feeling.

Choices: ON/OFF

Default setting: OFF

DIMENSION

Adjusts the difference in volume between the front

and surround channels to the desired volume balance.

Control range: –3 (toward the surround direction) to

+3 (toward the front direction)

Default setting: STD (standard)

C. WIDTH

Distributes the center channel sound to the left and

right. If 0 is selected, the center channel sound is

output only from the center channel.

Control range: 0 to 7

Default setting: 3

■ When DTS Neo:6 Music is selected

C. IMAGE

Adjusts the center image from three channels (front

left and right and center) to varying degrees.

Control range: 0.0 (wider) to 1.0 (toward the center)

Default setting: 0.3

Adjusting surround mode

parameters

ENHANCER MENU

RETURNDISPLAY

ENTER

SUR. DECODE

OFF

SPORTSMUSIC MOVIE

ENTRY

CAT/

A-E

+10

789

YSP

TV/AV

(U.S.A. and Canada models)

ENTER

01EN_YSP-4000_UA.book Page 61 Wednesday, December 26, 2007 3:00 PM

Black process 45.0° 240.0 LPI

ENJOYING STEREO SOUND

62 En

You can enjoy 2-channel and 5-channel stereo playback as the beam modes by pressing STEREO on the remote control.

• When you play back Dolby Digital audio signals in the 2-channel or 5-channel stereo playback, the dynamic range becomes

compressed. If the volume level decreases to the extreme, use other beam modes except My Beam.

• When the 2-channel or 5-channel stereo playback is selected as the beam mode, the surround modes (see page 58) and the CINEMA

DSP programs (see page 65) become ineffective.

Sounds are output from the front right and left channels.

This is ideal for playing back hi-fi sources, such as CDs,

and can be used to replace your TV speakers.

1 Set the operation mode selector to YSP.

2 Press STEREO to select the 2-channel stereo

playback as the beam mode.

“STEREO” appears in the front panel display.

When you play back multi-channel sources, all signals except

those from the front left and right channels are mixed down and

output from the front left and right channels. No audio is output

from the center and surround channels.

Sounds are output from front left and right, center, and

surround left and right. This is ideal for playback in a large

listening area or at a party.

1 Set the operation mode selector to YSP.

2 Press STEREO twice to select the 5-channel

stereo playback as the beam mode.

“5CH STEREO” appears in the front panel display.

Enjoying stereo sound

Notes

2-channel stereo playback

STEREO

MY BEAM MY SUR.

ENHANCER MENU

RETURNDISPLAY

ENTER

SUR. DECODEOFF

SPORTS

MUSIC MOVIE

ENTRY

CAT/

A-E

321

+10

789

YSP

TV/AV

(U.S.A. and Canada models)

YSP

TV/AV

STEREO

Note

5-channel stereo playback

YSP

TV/AV

STEREO

5CH STEREO

01EN_YSP-4000_UA.book Page 62 Wednesday, December 26, 2007 3:00 PM

Black process 45.0° 240.0 LPI

PLAYING BACK SOUND CLEARLY (MY BEAM)

63 En

BASIC

OPERATION

English

You can improve listenability in a noisy environment by changing the beam mode to My Beam, which outputs sound

beams directly toward the listening position in a single channel. In addition, My Beam is also ideal when you do not want

the sound beams to be reflected on the walls in your listening room or when you do not want to disturb other people

while enjoying music or movies at night.

If My Beam is selected as the beam mode, the surround modes (see page 58), the CINEMA DSP programs (see page 65), and TruBass

(see page 84) become ineffective. In addition, no audio is output from the subwoofer connected to this unit.

The My Beam microphone on the remote control collects

the test tones from this unit so that the beam angle can be

automatically adjusted.

1 Set the operation mode selector to YSP.

2 Press and hold MY BEAM for more than two

seconds.

A test tone is output twice from this unit. Keep

pointing the remote control toward this unit while the

test tones are being output so that the My Beam

microphone can collect the test tones.

Control range: L60° to R60°

Operation guarantee range: 6 m (20 ft), L45° to R45°

• If an error occurs, an error buzzer is played and “MY BEAM

ERROR” is displayed in the front panel display.

• An error may occur if the listening room is noisy. Make sure

that the listening room is as quiet as possible while the test

tones are being output.

• Do not shake or move the remote control while the test tones are

being output.

• Do not cover the My Beam microphone on the remote control

while the test tones are being output.

• The batteries in the remote control may be weak if the remote

control does not function properly. In this case, replace all the

batteries and then try the procedure again.

• When the input signal with 64 kHz or 96 kHz of sampling

frequency is being played back, the beam angle cannot be

automatically adjusted.

Playing back sound clearly (My Beam)

Note

STEREO

MY BEAM MY SUR.

SLEEP

INPUTMODE

ENHANCER MENU

RETURNDISPLAY

ENTER

SUR. DECODEOFF

SPORTS

5BEAM ST+3BEAM 3BEAM

MUSIC MOVIE

VOL MODE

ENTRY

CAT/

A-E

321

+10

789

YSP

TV/AV

POWERPOWERSTANDBY/ON

My Beam

microphone

(U.S.A. and Canada models)

Using auto-adjust function

YSP

TV/AV

MY BEAM

Notes

01EN_YSP-4000_UA.book Page 63 Wednesday, December 26, 2007 3:00 PM

Black process 45.0° 240.0 LPI

64 En

Playing back sound clearly (My Beam)

You can adjust the beam angle manually while playing

back an input source. This function is also ideal if the

listening position is out of the operation guarantee range

of the auto-adjust function.

1 Set the operation mode selector to YSP.

2 Press MY BEAM.

“MY BEAM” is displayed in the front panel display.

3 Press / while “MY BEAM” is displayed to

adjust the beam angle.

Control range: L90° to R90°

• Press repeatedly to increase the horizontal angle

on the left side.

• Press repeatedly to increase the horizontal angle

on the right side.

Using manual-adjust function

YSP

TV/AV

MY BEAM

ENTER

ANGLE 0

01EN_YSP-4000_UA.book Page 64 Wednesday, December 26, 2007 3:00 PM

Black process 45.0° 240.0 LPI

USING SOUND FIELD PROGRAMS

65 En

BASIC

OPERATION

English

This unit is equipped with a variety of precise digital decoders that allow you to enjoy multi-channel playback from

stereo or multi-channel sources. This unit is also equipped with a Yamaha CINEMA DSP (digital sound field processing)

chip containing several sound field programs used to enhance your playback experience. Most of the CINEMA DSP

programs are precise digital recreations of actual acoustic environments found in famous concert halls, music venues, and

movie theaters.

The Yamaha CINEMA DSP programs are compatible with all Dolby Digital, DTS, and Dolby Surround sources.

Choose a CINEMA DSP program based on your listening preference and do not purely rely on the name of the CINEMA DSP program

itself.

■ What is a sound field?

A significant factor that creates the rich, full tones of a live instrument is the multiple reflections from the walls of the

room. In addition to making the sound live, these reflections enable the listener to tell where the player is situated as well

as the size and shape of the room in which the listener is sitting.

■ Elements of a sound field

In any environment, there are two distinct types of sound reflections combined with the direct sound coming straight to

our ears from the player’s instrument to make up the sound field.

Early reflections

Reflected sounds reach our ears extremely rapidly (50 ms to 80 ms after the direct sound) after reflecting from one

surface only (from the ceiling or the wall, for example). Early reflections help add clarity to the direct sound.

Reverberations

These are caused by reflections from more than one surface (i.e., wall, ceiling, the back of the room, etc.) so numerous

that they merge together to form a continuous sonic afterglow. They are non-directional and lessen the clarity of the direct

sound.

Direct sound, early reflections, and subsequent reverberations all together help us determine the subjective size and shape

of the room, and it is this information that the digital sound field processor reproduces in order to create the sound fields.

With the appropriate early reflections and subsequent reverberations in your listening room, you can create your own

listening environment. The acoustics in your room could be changed to those of a concert hall, a dance floor, or a

listening room of virtually any size at all. This ability to create sound fields at will is exactly what Yamaha has done with

the CINEMA DSP technology.

Using sound field programs

Note

01EN_YSP-4000_UA.book Page 65 Wednesday, December 26, 2007 3:00 PM

Black process 45.0° 240.0 LPI

66 En

Using sound field programs

■ Sound field program descriptions

You can select from the following sound field programs based on your listening preference when you play music, movie

or sports sources. For details on how to switch between the available sound field programs, see page 67.

There is only one sports sound field program available.

Note

Sound field program Source Feature

Music Video

Music

This program produces a vibrant environment and lets you feel as if

you are at an actual jazz or rock concert.

Concert Hall

This program creates a rich surround effect of a large round concert

hall with a great deal of presence, emphasizing the extension of

sounds, and lets you feel as if you are seated close to the center of the

stage.

Jazz Club

This program recreates the acoustic environment of “The Bottom

Line”, a famous jazz club in New York and lets you feel as if you are

seated right in front of the stage.

Sci-Fi

Movie

This program clearly reproduces dialogs and special sound effects of

the latest science fiction films and lets you feel a broad and expansive

cinematic space amid silence.

Spectacle

This program reproduces the wide and grand environment and lets you

have added impressions on spectacular scenes with strong visual

impacts.

Adventure

This program reproduces the thrilling environment of the latest action

films and lets you feel the dynamic and excitement of fast-moving

scenes.

SPORTS Sports

This program reproduces the energetic environment of live sports

broadcasting, converging a commentator’s voice on the center and

broadening the overall atmosphere of the stadium, and lets you feel as

if you are seated at an actual stadium or a ball park.

01EN_YSP-4000_UA.book Page 66 Wednesday, December 26, 2007 3:00 PM

Black process 45.0° 240.0 LPI

67 En

Using sound field programs

BASIC

OPERATION

English

You can select from three different CINEMA DSP

programs (MUSIC, MOVIE, and SPORTS) depending on

the type of source you want to enjoy. The CINEMA DSP

indicator lights up in the front panel display when one of

the CINEMA DSP programs is selected.

• The CINEMA DSP programs are ineffective when My

Surround (see page 57) is selected as the beam mode.

• If the CINEMA DSP programs are not available, “Prohibit”

appears in the front panel display when you press one of the

CINEMA DSP program buttons on the remote control.

■ Music programs

Select this CINEMA DSP program when you play back

music sources. This program produces a vibrant

atmosphere and lets you feel as if you are seated in an

actual rock or jazz concert hall.

1 Set the operation mode selector to YSP.

2 Press MUSIC to select the music CINEMA

DSP program.

3 Check that MUSIC is displayed in the front

panel display and then press MUSIC on the

remote control repeatedly (or press / on

the remote control) to switch between the

music sound field programs.

For detailed descriptions of each sound field program, see “Sound

field program descriptions” on page 66.

CINEMA DSP programs

Notes

STEREO

MY BEAM MY SUR.

ENHANCER MENU

RETURNDISPLAY

ENTER

SUR. DECODEOFF

SPORTS

5BEAM ST+3BEAM 3BEAM

MUSIC MOVIE

ENTRY

CAT/

A-E

321

+10

789

YSP

TV/AV

(U.S.A. and Canada models)

YSP

TV/AV

MUSIC

ENTER

MUSIC

Music Video

Concert Hall

Jazz Club

01EN_YSP-4000_UA.book Page 67 Wednesday, December 26, 2007 3:00 PM

Black process 45.0° 240.0 LPI

68 En

Using sound field programs

■ Movie programs

Select this CINEMA DSP program when you play back

movie sources, especially the ones encoded in Dolby

Digital, DTS, or Dolby Surround. This program clearly

reproduces dialog and sound effects, thus creating a broad

and expansive cinematic space amid silence.

1 Set the operation mode selector to YSP.

2 Press MOVIE to select the movie CINEMA

DSP program.

3 Check that MOVIE is displayed in the front

panel display and then press MOVIE on the

remote control repeatedly (or press / on

the remote control) to switch between the

music sound field programs.

For detailed descriptions of each sound field program, see “Sound

field program descriptions” on page 66.

■ Sports program

Select this CINEMA DSP program when you play back

sports sources. This program densely concentrates the

vocal sound of the commentator in the center while

broadening the sound from the audience or the

environment all around your listening room.

1 Set the operation mode selector to YSP.

2 Press SPORTS to select the sports CINEMA

DSP program.

• There is only one sports sound field program available.

• For detailed descriptions of each sound field program, see

“Sound field program descriptions” on page 66.

YSP

TV/AV

MOVIE

ENTER

MOVIE

Sci-Fi

Spectacle

Adventure

YSP

TV/AV

SPORTS

01EN_YSP-4000_UA.book Page 68 Wednesday, December 26, 2007 3:00 PM

Black process 45.0° 240.0 LPI

69 En

Using sound field programs

BASIC

OPERATION

English

■ Turning off CINEMA DSP programs

Turn off the CINEMA DSP programs if you want to enjoy

the original sound without the CINEMA DSP program

effect.

1 Set the operation mode selector to YSP.

2 Press OFF to turn off the CINEMA DSP

programs.

“CINEMA DSP OFF” is displayed in the front panel

display and the CINEMA DSP indicator disappears.

■ Adjusting CINEMA DSP effect levels

You can enjoy good quality sound with the factory preset

parameters. However, you can also adjust the effect level

of the CINEMA DSP programs relative to the level of the

direct sound so that each CINEMA DSP program can

reflect your listening environment and your preference

even more accurately.

1 Set the operation mode selector to YSP.

2 Press MUSIC, MOVIE, or SPORTS to select

the desired CINEMA DSP program.

3 Press / .

“DSP LEVEL” is displayed in the front panel display.

4 Press / to adjust the effect level of the

selected CINEMA DSP program.

Control range: –6 dB to +3 dB

• A larger value increases the effect level.

• A smaller value decreases the effect level.

YSP

TV/AV

OFF

CINEMA DSP OFF

YSP

TV/AV

SPORTS

MOVIE

MUSIC

or or

DSP LEVEL 0dB

ENTER

ENTRY

ENTER

01EN_YSP-4000_UA.book Page 69 Wednesday, December 26, 2007 3:00 PM

Black process 45.0° 240.0 LPI

USING THE MUSIC ENHANCER

70 En

You can use the Music Enhancer of this unit to improve the sound nearest to the original depth and width of compression

artifacts such as the MP3 format.

1 Set the operation mode selector to YSP.

2 Press ENHANCER to select the Music

Enhancer.

The currently selected mode appears in the front

panel display.

3 Press ENHANCER repeatedly to switch

between the Music Enhancer levels (OFF,

MIN, and MAX).

The ENHANCER indicator lights up when

“ENHANCER:HIGH” or “ENHANCER:LOW” is

selected.

• The Music Enhancer is not compatible with the CINEMA DSP

programs. If a CINEMA DSP program is selected while the

Music Enhancer is on, the Music Enhancer is turned off

automatically. In this case, the Music Enhancer remains off

even after the CINEMA DSP program is canceled. Likewise, if

the Music Enhancer is turned on while a CINEMA DSP

program is selected, the CINEMA DSP program is canceled

automatically. In this case, the CINEMA DSP program remains

off even after the Music Enhancer is turned off.

• The Music Enhancer is available only when a setting other than

My Surround (see page 57) is selected as the beam mode.

Using the music enhancer

ENHANCER MENU

RETURNDISPLAY

TV VOL

VOLUME

ENTER

SUR. DECODEOFF

SPORTSMUSIC MOVIE

ENTRY

CAT/

A-E

+10

789

YSP

TV/AV

(U.S.A. and Canada models)

YSP

TV/AV

ENHANCER

Notes

ENHANCER:HIGH

ENHANCER:LOW

ENHANCER OFF

ENHANCER

Lights up

01EN_YSP-4000_UA.book Page 70 Wednesday, December 26, 2007 3:00 PM

Black process 45.0° 240.0 LPI

USING THE VOLUME MODE (NIGHT LISTENING ENHANCER/TV VOLUME EQUAL MODE)

71 En

BASIC

OPERATION

English

The night listening enhancers are designed to improve listenability at lower volumes or at night. In addition, you can limit

the volume level of the TV so that it will not vary suddenly to a great extent whenever the contents being broadcast

change (i.e. due to commercials, etc.).

1 Set the operation mode selector to YSP.

2 Press VOL MODE repeatedly to select

NIGHT:CINEMA, NIGHT:MUSIC, TV EQUAL

VOLUME, or OFF.

The NIGHT indicator lights up in the front panel

display when “NIGHT:CINEMA” or

“NIGHT:MUSIC” is selected.

The EQUAL indicator lights up in the front panel

display when “TV EQUAL VOLUME” is selected.

• Select NIGHT:CINEMA when watching films to

reduce the dynamic range of film soundtracks and

to make dialog easier to hear at lower volumes.

• Select NIGHT:MUSIC when listening to music

sources to preserve ease-of-listening for all sounds.

• Select TV EQUAL VOLUME when watching TV

programs.

• Select OFF to turn off the volume mode.

3 Press / to adjust the effect level of

compression while NIGHT:CINEMA,

NIGHT:MUSIC, or TV EQUAL VOLUME is

displayed.

• Select Effect.Lvl:MIN for minimum compression.

• Select Effect.Lvl:MID for standard compression.

• Select Effect.Lvl:MAX for maximum

compression.

• The volume mode settings are canceled if you press

STANDBY/ON or disconnect the AC power supply cable from

the AC wall outlet.

• The volume mode settings become ineffective when My

Surround is selected as the beam mode (see page 57).

Using the volume mode

(Night listening enhancer/TV volume equal mode)

STEREO

MY BEAM MY SUR.

SLEEP

INPUTMODE

ENHANCER MENU

RETURNDISPLAY

ENTER

SUR. DECODEOFF

SPORTS

5BEAM ST+3BEAM 3BEAM

MUSIC MOVIE

VOL MODE

AUTO

SETUP

ENTRY

CAT/

A-E

321

+10

789

YSP

TV/AV

(U.S.A. and Canada models)

YSP

TV/AV

NIGHT:CINEMA

NIGHT:MUSIC

TV EQUAL VOLUME

OFF

VOL MODE

Lights up

Notes

Lights up

Effect.Lvl:MIN

Effect.Lvl:MID

Effect.Lvl:MAX

ENTER

01EN_YSP-4000_UA.book Page 71 Wednesday, December 26, 2007 3:00 PM

Black process 45.0° 240.0 LPI

USING THE SLEEP TIMER

72 En

Use this feature to automatically set this unit to the standby mode after a specified period of time. The sleep timer is

useful if you are going to sleep after a certain amount of time while this unit is still playing back a source.

1 Set the operation mode selector to YSP.

2 Press SLEEP repeatedly to set the interval

for the sleep timer.

Choices: 120min, 90min, 60min, 30min, OFF

The SLEEP indicator flashes in the front panel

display while switching the interval for the sleep

timer.

Each time you press SLEEP, the front panel display

changes as shown below.

3 Wait for a few seconds without operating this

unit to confirm the setting for the sleep timer.

The SLEEP indicator lights up in the front panel

display, indicating that the sleep timer is activated.

Using the sleep timer

STEREO

MY BEAM

PRESET/TUNE

MEMORYSEARCH

SLEEP

INPUTMODE

ENHANCER MENU

RETURNDISPLAY

ENTER

SUR. DECODEOFF

SPORTS

MY SUR.

5BEAM ST+3BEAM 3BEAM

MUSIC MOVIE

VOL MODE

AUTO

SETUP

CATFM/XM

ENTRY

CAT/

A-E

321

+10

789

YSP

TV/AV

(U.S.A. and Canada models)

YSP

TV/AV

SLEEP

Flashes

SLEEP

SLEEP 120min

SLEEP 90min

SLEEP 60min

SLEEP 30min

SLEEP OFF

Lights up

01EN_YSP-4000_UA.book Page 72 Wednesday, December 26, 2007 3:00 PM

Black process 45.0° 240.0 LPI

73 En

Using the sleep timer

BASIC

OPERATION

English

■ Canceling the sleep timer

1 Set the operation mode selector to YSP.

2 Press SLEEP repeatedly until “SLEEP OFF”

appears in the front panel display.

3 Wait for a few seconds without operating this

unit to confirm the setting for the sleep timer.

The SLEEP indicator disappears from the front panel

display, indicating that the sleep timer is deactivated.

The previous setting for the sleep timer before you deactivate it is

stored in the system memory.

The sleep timer setting can also be deactivated if you press

STANDBY/ON to set this unit to the standby mode or unplug the

AC power supply cable from the AC outlet.

Note

YSP

TV/AV

SLEEP

SLEEP OFF

Disappears

01EN_YSP-4000_UA.book Page 73 Wednesday, December 26, 2007 3:00 PM

Black process 45.0° 240.0 LPI

DISPLAYING THE INPUT SOURCE INFORMATION

74 En

You can display the format and sampling frequency of the current input signal in the front panel display.

1 Set the operation mode selector to YSP.

2 Press DISPLAY.

The information on the current input signal is

displayed as follows:

When the input signal is unclear, “___” is displayed for the

sampling frequency.

Displaying the input source information

ENHANCER MENU

RETURNDISPLAY

TV VOL

VOLUME

MUTE

TV INPUT TV MUTE

ENTER

SUR. DECODEOFF

ENTRY

CAT/

A-E

+10

YSP

TV/AV

(U.S.A. and Canada models)

YSP

TV/AV

Input signal Indicator

Sampling

frequency

Dolby digital DOLBY DGTL

32/44.1/48/64/

88.2/96 kHz

DTS DTS

PCM PCM

Analog ANALOG –

DISPLAY

D.DGTL:48kHz

INPUT SIGNAL

DOLBY DGTL:48kHz

01EN_YSP-4000_UA.book Page 74 Wednesday, December 26, 2007 3:00 PM

Black process 45.0° 240.0 LPI

USING THE HDMI CONTROL FEATURE

75 En

BASIC

OPERATION

English

You can operate the following functions using the remote control supplied with your TV if this unit and an HDMI

control-compatible TV (except some models) are connected via HDMI.

• Turning on or off the power (synchronized operation with the TV)

• Selecting the audio output component (TV or this unit)

• Adjusting the volume level (up/down and mute)

An example of the HDMI control-compatible component is a Panasonic EZ Sync (for U.S.A. and Canada) or Viera Link

(for other countries)-compatible component (TV, DVD recorder, Blu-ray recorder, etc.).

If you connect this unit to an HDMI control-compatible DVD player or Blu-ray Disc player via HDMI, you can also control the

connected component in synchronization with this unit (except some models).

1 Connect this unit to your HDMI control-compatible TV via HDMI.

For details about HDMI and HDMI components, see “Information on HDMI™” on page 21 and “Connections using

HDMI cables” on page 22. Also in the owner’s manual supplied with your TV, refer to the information on

connecting an AV amplifier.

2 Turn on the power of all components connected via HDMI.

For details about controlling external components, see the owner’s manuals supplied with your components.

3 Check the system settings for all components connected via HDMI and activate the HDMI control

feature.

For details about setting external components, see the owner’s manuals supplied with your components. Once you

have followed steps 1 to 3, you do not need to carry out the same procedure again next time.

4 Turn off the power of your TV and then turn on the power again.

5 Set the input source selector of your TV to this unit (HDMI, etc.).

6 Select the connected component as the input source by pressing INPUT on the front panel of this

unit (or press one of the input selector buttons on the remote control). Confirm that the video

image played back on the DVD recorder (etc.) appears in your TV correctly.

7 Use the remote control supplied with your TV to turn on or off the power, select the audio output

component, and adjust the volume level of this unit.

• Check the following if you cannot operate this unit in synchronization with your TV.

– Whether HDMI CONTROL is set to ON (see page 87).

– Whether the HDMI control feature is activated for your TV (see the owner’s manual supplied with your TV).

• While you are playing back audio from a non-HDMI component, turning off the power of your TV with the remote control

supplied with your TV does not turn off the power of this unit. Playback continues without being affected.

Using the HDMI control feature

Notes

01EN_YSP-4000_UA.book Page 75 Wednesday, December 26, 2007 3:00 PM

Black process 45.0° 240.0 LPI

MANUAL SETUP

76 En

To achieve the best quality surround sound, you can use MANUAL SETUP to fine-tune the listening environment

parameters, as well as to make advanced settings for sound signals, sound beams, digital input, and the OSD. Change the

initial settings (indicated in bold under each parameter) to reflect the needs of your own listening environment.

• You can save the settings optimized by the AUTO SETUP procedure (see page 44). A set of settings optimized according to the

specific conditions of your listening environment can be recalled later depending on the varying conditions of your listening

environment (see page 45).

• Most of the parameters in SOUND MENU and BEAM MENU are automatically set when you run AUTO SETUP (see page 37). Use

SOUND MENU and BEAM MENU to make additional adjustments.

• BEAM MENU allows you to make settings for the surround sound effects normally available in the speaker settings menu.

• Make settings for the parameters in BEAM MENU first before making settings for the parameters in SOUND MENU, INPUT MENU,

and DISPLAY MENU.

SOUND MENU

Use to manually adjust the various parameters related to the sound output.

BEAM MENU

Use to manually adjust the various parameters related to the sound beam output.

INPUT MENU

Use to manually adjust the various parameters related to the audio and video input.

DISPLAY MENU

Use to manually adjust the various parameters related to the display.

MANUAL SETUP

Item Features Page

TONE CONTROL Adjusts the output level of high-frequency or low-frequency sound.

SUBWOOFER SET Adjusts the various subwoofer settings.

MUTE LEVEL Adjusts the muting level.

AUDIO DELAY Adjusts the audio delay.

ROOM EQ Adjusts the tonal quality of the listening room.

DD/DTS Dynamic Range Adjusts the dynamic range of Dolby Digital or DTS signals.

TruBass Selects the bass sound enhancer.

Item Features Page

SETTING PARAMETERS Adjusts the listening room and listening position settings.

BEAM ADJUSTMENT Adjusts the various sound beam settings.

IMAGE LOCATION Adjusts the sound position of the front left and right channels.

Item Features Page

INPUT ASSIGNMENT Assigns jacks according to the component to be used.

INPUT MODE Selects the initial input of the source.

INPUT TRIM Adjusts the input level of the source.

INPUT RENAME Renames the displayed input source.

HDMI SET Adjusts the various HDMI settings.

XM ANTENNA LEVEL

(U.S.A. and Canada

models only)

Displays the current reception level of the XM Satellite Radio signal.

Item Features Page

F.DISPLAY SET Adjusts the front panel display settings.

OSD SET Adjusts the OSD settings.

UNIT SET Changes the display unit of measurement.

01EN_YSP-4000_UA.book Page 76 Wednesday, December 26, 2007 3:00 PM

Black process 45.0° 240.0 LPI

77 En

MANUAL SETUP

ADVANCED

OPERATION

English

Use the remote control to access and adjust each

parameter.

You can adjust the SET MENU parameters while the unit is

reproducing sound.

1 Set the operation mode selector to YSP.

2 Press MENU.

The SET MENU screen appears on your TV.

• The control buttons used for SET MENU are displayed at

the bottom of the screen.

• To return to the previous screen while using SET MENU,

press RETURN.

• To exit from the SET MENU screen, press MENU once

more.

• You can also perform the following operations in the front

panel display.

3 Press / to select MANUAL SETUP and

press ENTER.

The following screen appears on your TV.

4 Press / to select a sub menu and press

ENTER.

5 Press / / / and ENTER to configure

each parameter.

6 Press MENU to exit.

The OSD disappears from your TV screen.

Using MANUAL SETUP

ENHANCER MENU

RETURNDISPLAY

TV VOL

VOLUME

ENTER

SUR. DECODEOFF

SPORTSMUSIC MOVIE

ENTRY

CAT/

A-E

+10

789

YSP

TV/AV

(U.S.A. and Canada models)

YSP

TV/AV

;MEMORY

;AUTO SETUP

;MANUAL SETUP

;LANGUAGE SETUP

[ ]/[ ]:Up/Down

[ENTER]:Enter

SET MENU

ENTER

1)SOUND MENU

2)BEAM MENU

3)INPUT MENU

4)DISPLAY MENU

[ ]/[ ]:Up/Down

[ENTER]:Enter

;MANUAL SETUP

ENTER

01EN_YSP-4000_UA.book Page 77 Wednesday, December 26, 2007 3:00 PM

Black process 45.0° 240.0 LPI

78 En

MANUAL SETUP

Use to manually adjust the various parameters related to

the sound beam output.

SET MENU → MANUAL SETUP → BEAM MENU

You can adjust the sound beam output level of each channel in

“Adjusting the audio balance” (see page 90).

■ SETTING PARAMETERS

(Setting parameters)

Use to set the position of this unit in your listening room

and the distance of this unit from the listening position.

When you make settings for each parameter, other related

parameters are automatically adjusted to best match your

listening environment.

If you make adjustments in SETTING PARAMETERS, the beam

optimization settings made in the AUTO SETUP procedure will

be lost. If you want to keep the beam optimization settings made

in the AUTO SETUP and make further adjustments, adjust

settings in BEAM ADJUSTMENT first (see page 79).

INSTALLED POSITION

(Installed position of this unit)

Use to adjust the installed position of this unit.

Choices: FLAT TO WALL (Parallel to wall installation),

ANGLE TO WALL OR CORNER

(Corner installation)

• Select FLAT TO WALL if this unit is installed in

parallel with the wall in your listening room. Adjust the

width and length of your listening room as well as the

distance of the listening position from this unit and the

distance of the center of this unit from the left wall.

Choices for the room width and length:

2.0 m to 12.0 m (6.5 ft to 40.0 ft)

Choices for the listening position from this unit:

1.8 m to 9.0 m (6.0 ft to 30.0 ft)

Choices for the listening position from the left wall:

0.6 m to 11.4 m (2.0 ft to 38.0 ft)

BEAM MENU

Note

A)SETTING PARAMETERS

B)BEAM ADJUSTMENT

C)IMAGE LOCATION

[ ]/[ ]:Up/Down

[ENTER]:Enter

2)BEAM MENU

INSTALLED POSITION

;;;;;;;FLAT TO WALL

INSTALLED HEIGHT

;;;;;;;1.0m

[ ]/[ ]:Up/Down [ ]/[ ]:Sel

[ENTER]:Return

A)SETTING PARAMETERS 1/3

FLAT TO WALL

ANGLE TO WALL

OR CORNER

Listening position

from the left wall

Listening position

from the unit

Room width

Room length

A)SETTING PARAMETERS 2/3

-------[ 5.4m ]-

4.9m

[ ]/[ ]:Up/Down [ ]/[ ]:Sel

[ENTER]:Return

--------|

2.7m [ 2.5m ]

[ ]/[ ]:Up/Down [ ]/[ ]:Sel

[ENTER]:Return

A)SETTING PARAMETERS 3/3

Room width and

length

Listening position

from the unit and

the left wall

01EN_YSP-4000_UA.book Page 78 Wednesday, December 26, 2007 3:00 PM

Black process 45.0° 240.0 LPI

79 En

MANUAL SETUP

ADVANCED

OPERATION

English

• Select ANGLE TO WALL OR CORNER if this unit is

installed in the corner of your listening room. Adjust

the width and length of your listening room as well as

the distance of the listening position from this unit.

Choices for the room width and length:

2.0 m to 12.0 m (6.5 ft to 40.0 ft)

Choices for the listening position from this unit:

1.8 m to 9.0 m (6.0 ft to 30.0 ft)

When you set the INSTALLED POSITION parameter in

MANUAL SETUP (see page 78), the parameters newly set for

the width and length of your listening room are automatically set

as the factory default value.

INSTALLED HEIGHT

(Installed height of this unit)

Use to adjust the installed height of this unit.

Choices: 0.0 m to 3.0 m

Initial setting: 1.0 m

■ BEAM ADJUSTMENT (Beam adjustment)

Use to manually adjust the various sound beam settings.

We recommend that you select 5 Beam as the beam mode

before adjusting these parameters (see page 56).

• When INSTALLED POSITION is adjusted in MANUAL

SETUP (see page 78), the factory default value is automatically

set for this parameter except Center in FOCAL LENGTH (see

page 81).

• Depending on the beam mode settings (see pages 56 and 62),

some channel positions may not be available for selection. In

this case, “– –” is displayed. When using Stereo plus 3 Beam as

the beam mode, set the surround left and right signals to be

output from the front left and right channels.

Note

Listening position

from the unit

Room length

Room width

----- 5.4m ---

[ 5.4m ]

[ ]/[ ]:Up/Down [ ]/[ ]:Sel

[ENTER]:Return

A)SETTING PARAMETERS 2/3

[ 2.5m ]

[ ]/[ ]:Up/Down [ ]/[ ]:Sel

[ENTER]:Return

A)SETTING PARAMETERS 3/3

Room width and

length

Listening

position from the

unit

Notes

0.0 m to 3.0 mFloor

a)HORIZONTAL ANGLE

b)VERTICAL ANGLE

c)BEAM TRAVEL LENGTH

d)FOCAL LENGTH

e)TREBLE GAIN

[ ]/[ ]:Up/Down

[ENTER]:Enter

B)BEAM ADJUSTMENT

01EN_YSP-4000_UA.book Page 79 Wednesday, December 26, 2007 3:00 PM

Black process 45.0° 240.0 LPI

80 En

MANUAL SETUP

HORIZONTAL ANGLE (Horizontal angle)

Use to adjust the horizontal angle of sound beams for each

channel. By adjusting the horizontal angle of the sound

beams, you can optimize the sound beam paths. A test

tone is automatically output.

Choices: L90° to R90°

Adjust toward L (left) to move the direction of the output

to the left and adjust toward R (right) to move it to the

right.

VERTICAL ANGLE (Vertical angle)

Use to adjust the vertical angle of sound beams for each

speaker. By altering the beam path, you can optimize

sound beam angles.

Choices: –45° to +45°

Initial setting: 0°

• Adjust toward – (minus) to move the angle downward.

• Adjust toward + (plus) to move the angle upward.

BEAM TRAVEL LENGTH (Beam travel length)

A certain amount of delay must be applied to the sound

from each channel so that all sounds can arrive at the

listening position at the same time. This menu sets the

distance that sound beams travel after being output and

reflected off the wall until they arrive at the listening

position and adjusts the delay applied to the respective

channel.

The lines in the illustration below indicate the distance.

Choices: 0.3 m to 24.0 m (1.0 ft to 80.0 ft)

• Front L adjusts the distance the front left channel

sound beams travel.

• Front R adjusts the distance the front right channel

sound beams travel.

• Center adjusts the distance the center channel sound

beams travel.

• Surround L adjusts the distance the surround left

channel sound beams travel.

• Surround R adjusts the distance the surround right

channel sound beams travel.

We recommend that you use the setting optimized by AUTO

SETUP (see page 37). Adjust this parameter only when you

changed HORIZONTAL ANGLE (see page 80).

()

(+)

()

5 beam

Front L L90 R90

L65deg

0(deg)

[ ]/[ ]:Up/Down [ ]/[ ]:Sel

[ENTER]:Return

a)HORIZONTAL ANGLE 1/5

5 beam

Front L (+)

0deg. ------0deg.

(-)

[ ]/[ ]:Up/Down [ ]/[ ]:Sel

[ENTER]:Return

b)VERTICAL ANGLE 1/5

5 beam

Front L;;;;;;;6.0m

Front R;;;;;;;6.0m

Center;;;;;;;;2.5m

Surround L;;;;9.1m

Surround R;;;;9.1m

[ ]/[ ]:Up/Down [ ]/[ ]:Sel

[ENTER]:Return

c)BEAM TRAVEL LENGTH

01EN_YSP-4000_UA.book Page 80 Wednesday, December 26, 2007 3:00 PM

Black process 45.0° 240.0 LPI

81 En

MANUAL SETUP

ADVANCED

OPERATION

English

FOCAL LENGTH (Focal length)

Use to set the distance from the front of this unit to the

focal point of output for each channel to achieve an

expansive feeling for each channel.

The focal points except for the center channel should be

set near the reflection points on the walls. The shorter the

distance, the larger the expansion.

Choices: –1.0 m to +13.0 m (–3.5 ft to +43.5 ft)

Adjust toward – (minus) to move the focus outward and

adjust toward + (plus) to move the focus toward the

normal position.

• Front L adjusts the focal length for the front left sound

beams.

• Front R adjusts the focal length for the front right

sound beams.

• Center adjusts the focal length for the center sound

beams. Initial setting: –0.5 m (–1.5 ft)

• Surround L adjusts the focal length for the surround

left sound beams.

• Surround R adjusts the focal length for the surround

right sound beams.

We recommend that you use the initial setting (–0.5 m (or 1.5 ft))

for the center channel.

TREBLE GAIN (Treble gain)

Use to adjust the high-frequency output level of each

channel.

If the reflection points of the front left and right or surround left

and right sound beams are on curtain or other acoustically

absorbent surfaces, you can achieve more effective surround

sound by increasing the treble level for those sound beams.

Choices: –12.0 dB to +12.0 dB

Initial setting: 0 dB

• Front L adjusts the high-frequency output level of the

front left channel.

• Front R adjusts the high-frequency output level of the

front right channel.

• Center adjusts the high-frequency output level of the

center channel.

• Surround L adjusts the high-frequency output level

of the surround left channel.

• Surround R adjusts the high-frequency output level

of the surround right channel.

focal length

focal point

sweet spot

(+)

()

Front left channel Center channel

5 beam

Front L;;;;;;+1.5m

Front R;;;;;;+1.5m

Center;;;;;;;-0.5m

Surround L;;;+2.3m

Surround R;;;+2.3m

[ ]/[ ]:Up/Down [ ]/[ ]:Sel

[ENTER]:Return

d)FOCAL LENGTH

- +

Front L;;;;;;;;0dB

Front R;;;;;;;;0dB

Center;;;;;;;;;0dB

Surround L;;;;;0dB

Surround R;;;;;0dB

[ ]/[ ]:Up/Down [ ]/[ ]:Sel

[ENTER]:Return

e)TREBLE GAIN

------

01EN_YSP-4000_UA.book Page 81 Wednesday, December 26, 2007 3:00 PM

Black process 45.0° 240.0 LPI

82 En

MANUAL SETUP

■ IMAGE LOCATION (Image location)

Use to adjust the direction from which the front left and

right channel sound is heard so that each sound can be

heard closer to the center channel.

Use this feature to redirect audio signals if the sound

coming from the front left and right channels seems

unnatural, such as when your listening position is not the

center of your listening room.

You can only adjust this parameter when 3 Beam or 5

Beam is selected as the beam mode (see page 56).

Choices: ON, OFF

Setting range: 0% to 95%

Initial setting: 0%

LEFT (Left)

Adjusts audio signals toward the left.

The higher the percentage, the louder the output from the

center.

RIGHT (Right)

Adjusts audio signals toward the right.

The higher the percentage, the louder the output from the

center.

Use to manually adjust the various parameters related to

the sound output.

SET MENU → MANUAL SETUP → SOUND MENU

■ TONE CONTROL (Tone control)

You can adjust the tonal quality of sound beams.

TREBLE (Treble)

Use to adjust the high-frequency response.

Choices: –12 dB to +12 dB

Initial setting: 0 dB

BASS (Bass)

Use to adjust the low-frequency response.

Choices: –12 dB to +12 dB

Initial setting: 0 dB

■ SUBWOOFER SET (Subwoofer settings)

Use to manually adjust the various subwoofer

settings.

OFF )ON

LCR

LEFT;;;;;;;;;;;0%

RIGHT;;;;;;;;;;0%

[ ]/[ ]:Up/Down [ ]/[ ]:Sel

[ENTER]:Return

C)IMAGE LOCATION

Without adjustment

With the front left

channel adjusted

Without adjustment

With the front right

channel adjusted

SOUND MENU

A)TONE CONTROL

B)SUBWOOFER SET

C)MUTE LEVEL

D)AUDIO DELAY

E)ROOM EQ

F)DD/DTS Dynamic Range

G)TruBass

[ ]/[ ]:Up/Down

[ENTER]:Enter

1)SOUND MENU

TREBLE;;;;;0dB

BASS;;;;;;;0dB

[ ]/[ ]:Up/Down [ ]/[ ]:Sel

[ENTER]:Return

A)TONE CONTROL

------

BASS OUT;;;;;FRONT

CROSS OVER;;;100Hz

LFE LEVEL;;;;;;0dB

DISTANCE;;;;;;3.0m

[ ]/[ ]:Up/Down [ ]/[ ]:Sel

[ENTER]:Return

B)SUBWOOFER SET

01EN_YSP-4000_UA.book Page 82 Wednesday, December 26, 2007 3:00 PM

Black process 45.0° 240.0 LPI

83 En

MANUAL SETUP

ADVANCED

OPERATION

English

BASS OUT (Bass out)

Low-frequency (bass) signals can be directed to the

subwoofer or the front left and right channels. This setting

also determines the routing of LFE (low-frequency effect)

signals found in Dolby Digital or DTS sources.

Choices: SWFR (Subwoofer), FRONT

• Select SWFR if you connect a subwoofer. LFE and

low-frequency signals from other channels are directed

to the subwoofer.

• Select FRONT if you do not use a subwoofer. LFE and

low-frequency signals from other channels are directed

to the front left and right channels.

CROSS OVER (Crossover)

When BASS OUT is set to SWFR, you can use this

feature to select a crossover (cutoff) frequency for all low-

frequency signals. All frequencies below the selected

frequency will be sent to the subwoofer position.

Choices: 80Hz, 100Hz, 120Hz

LFE LEVEL (Low-frequency effect level)

Select to adjust the output level of the LFE (low-frequency

effect) channel according to the capacity of your

subwoofer. The LFE channel carries low-frequency

special effects which are only added to certain scenes.

This setting is effective only when this unit decodes Dolby

Digital or DTS signals.

Choices: –20 to 0 dB

DISTANCE (Distance)

Select to adjust the distance of the subwoofer from the

listening position.

Choices: 0.3 to 15.0 m (1.0 ft to 50.0 ft)

Initial setting: 3.0 m (10.0 ft)

■ MUTE LEVEL (Muting level)

Use to adjust how much the mute function reduces the

volume level.

Choices: MUTE, –20 dB

• Select MUTE to completely halt all sound output.

• Select –20 dB to reduce the current volume level by

20 dB.

■ AUDIO DELAY (Audio delay)

Use to delay the sound output and synchronize it with the

video image. This may be necessary when using certain

LCD monitors or projectors.

Choices: 0 to 160 msec

■ ROOM EQ (Room equalizer)

Use to change the tonal qualities of your listening room

when the unit is mounted on the wall.

Choices: MOUNTING (Mount type),

REFLECTING (Reflectivity type)

MOUNTING (Mounting type)

Use to enhance medium to low range sounds.

Choices: WALL (Wall mount), SHELF (Shelf mount)

• Select WALL if this unit is mounted on the wall in your

listening room.

• Select SHELF if this unit is mounted on the shelf in

your listening room.

REFLECTING (Reflectivity type)

Use to select the reflectivity of your listening room.

Choices: NORMAL (Normal), HI ECHO (High echo)

• Select NORMAL if your listening room has a normal

reflectivity.

• Select HI ECHO if your listening room has highly

reflective surfaces such as concrete walls.

MUTE -20dB

[ ]/[ ]:Select

[ENTER]:Return

C)MUTE LEVEL

AUDIO DELAY;;;;;0msec

[ ]/[ ]:Select

[ENTER]:Return

D)AUDIO DELAY

MOUNTING;;;;;SHELF

REFLECTING;;;NORMAL

[ ]/[ ]:Up/Down [ ]/[ ]:Sel

[ENTER]:Return

)ROOM EQ

01EN_YSP-4000_UA.book Page 83 Friday, March 7, 2008 10:03 AM

Black process 45.0° 240.0 LPI

84 En

MANUAL SETUP

■ DD/DTS Dynamic Range

(Dynamic range of Dolby Digital and

DTS signals)

Use to select the amount of dynamic range compression.

This setting is effective only when the unit is decoding

Dolby Digital and DTS signals. Dynamic range is the

difference between the smallest sound that can be heard

above the noise of the equipment and the biggest sound

that can be heard without distortion.

Choices: MIN (minimum), STD (standard),

MAX (maximum)

Select to adjust the dynamic range compression.

• Select MIN for listening to sources at low volume

levels.

• Select STD for general use.

• Select MAX for feature films.

■ TruBass

Use to turn on or off the bass sound enhancer. The SRS

TruBass technology improves bass even without a

subwoofer and provides deeper, richer bass in the presence

of a subwoofer.

Choices: OFF, MID, DEEP

TruBass is not available when My Beam (see page 63) or My

Surround (see page 57) is selected as the beam mode.

Use to manually adjust the various parameters related to

the audio and video input.

SET MENU → MANUAL SETUP → INPUT MENU

“F) XM ANTENNA LEVEL” is for U.S.A. and Canada models

only.

■ INPUT ASSIGNMENT (Input assignment)

Use to assign the HDMI IN jacks of this unit to other

components if the initial settings of this unit do not

correspond to your needs. By assigning other components

to the HDMI IN jacks of this unit, you can display the

names of the connected components in the front panel

display and OSD and operate the components with the

input selector buttons of the same name. If you connect a

component to one of the HDMI IN jacks of this unit and

do not assign a name to it, the default component name for

HDMI IN jack is displayed in the front panel and OSD

when selected.

• Select HDMI1 to assign a component to the HDMI

AUX 1 IN jack of this unit.

Choices: TV/STB, AUX1

• Select HDMI2 to assign a component to the HDMI

DVD IN jack of this unit.

Choices: DVD, AUX2

• Select Line1 to assign a component to the STB

COMPONENT VIDEO IN jacks of this unit.

Choices: TV/STB, AUX1

• Select Line2 to assign a component to the DVD/AUX 2

COMPONENT VIDEO IN jacks of this unit.

Choices: DVD, AUX2

• Select Line3 to assign a component to the AUX 1

VIDEO IN jack of this unit.

Choices: DVD, AUX2

Note

MIN STD MAX

[ ]/[ ]:Select

[ENTER]:Return

F)DD/DTS Dynamic Range

OFF MID DEEP

[ ]/[ ]:Select

[ENTER]:Return

G)TruBass

INPUT MENU

Note

A)INPUT ASSIGNMENT

B)INPUT MODE

C)INPUT TRIM

D)INPUT RENAME

E)HDMI SET

F)XM ANTENNA LEVEL

[ ]/[ ]:Up/Down

[ENTER]:Enter

3)INPUT MENU

01EN_YSP-4000_UA.book Page 84 Wednesday, December 26, 2007 3:00 PM

Black process 45.0° 240.0 LPI

85 En

MANUAL SETUP

ADVANCED

OPERATION

English

■ INPUT MODE (Input mode)

Use to designate the input mode for the input sources

connected to the DIGITAL IN jacks when you turn on the

power of this unit. For information on the types of audio

signals that can be output by this unit, see “Selecting the

input mode” on page 93.

Choices: AUTO, LAST

• Select AUTO to set this unit to automatically detect the

type of input signals and select the appropriate input

mode.

• Select LAST to set this unit to automatically select the

last input mode used for that input source. If the type of

input signals is different from the setting, no sounds

will be produced.

■ INPUT TRIM (Input trim)

Use to adjust the input level of the input source.

• Select TV/STB ANALOG to adjust the level of audio

and video signals input at the TV/STB AUDIO IN

jacks of this unit.

Control range: –6.0 dB to 0.0 dB

Initial setting: –3.0 dB

• Select TV/STB DIGITAL to adjust the level of audio

and video signals input at the TV/STB OPTICAL

DIGITAL IN jack of this unit.

Control range: –6.0 dB to 0.0 dB

Initial setting: –3.0 dB

• Select DVD DIGITAL to adjust the level of audio and

video signals input at the DVD COAXIAL DIGITAL

IN jack of this unit.

Control range: –6.0 dB to 0.0 dB

Initial setting: –3.0 dB

• Select AUX1 ANALOG to adjust the level of audio and

video signals input at the AUX 1 AUDIO IN jacks of

this unit.

Control range: –6.0 dB to 0.0 dB

Initial setting: –3.0 dB

• Select AUX1 DIGITAL to adjust the level of audio and

video signals input at the AUX 1 OPTICAL DIGITAL

IN jack of this unit.

Control range: –6.0 dB to 0.0 dB

Initial setting: –3.0 dB

• Select AUX2 DIGITAL to adjust the level of audio and

video signals input at the AUX 2 COAXIAL DIGITAL

IN jack of this unit.

Control range: –6.0 dB to 0.0 dB

Initial setting: –3.0 dB

• Select AUX3 ANALOG to adjust the level of audio

signals input at the AUX 3 input jack on the front

panel.

Control range: –6.0 dB to 0.0 dB

Initial setting: –3.0 dB

• Select DOCK ANALOG to adjust the level of audio

signals input at the DOCK terminal of this unit

(U.S.A., Canada, and Australia models only).

Control range: –6.0 dB to 0.0 dB

Initial setting: –3.0 dB

HDMI

HDMI1;;;; AUX1

( AUX1 )

HDMI2;;;; DVD

( DVD )

[ ]/[ ]:Up/Down [ ]/[ ]:Sel

[ENTER]:Return

A)INPUT ASSIGNMENT 1/3

COMPONENT

Line1;;;;TV/STB

( TV/STB )

Line2;;;; DVD

( DVD )

[ ]/[ ]:Up/Down [ ]/[ ]:Sel

[ENTER]:Return

A)INPUT ASSIGNMENT 2/3

COMPOSITE

Line3;;;; AUX2

( AUX2 )

[ ]/[ ]:Up/Down [ ]/[ ]:Sel

[ENTER]:Return

A)INPUT ASSIGNMENT 3/3

AUTO LAST

[ ]/[ ]:Select

[ENTER]:Return

B)INPUT MODE

TV/STB ANALOG;;;-3.0dB

DIGITAL;;-3.0dB

DVD DIGITAL;;-3.0dB

[ ]/[ ]:Up/Down [ ]/[ ]:Sel

[ENTER]:Return

C)INPUT TRIM 1/2

01EN_YSP-4000_UA.book Page 85 Wednesday, December 26, 2007 3:00 PM

Black process 45.0° 240.0 LPI

86 En

MANUAL SETUP

■ INPUT RENAME (Input rename)

Use to change the name of the input source in the OSD

and the front panel display. Press an input selector button

(e.g., DVD) to select the component you want to change

the name for and perform the following procedure.

1 Press / to place the _ (underscore) under

the space or the character you want to edit.

The _ (underscore) flashes.

2 Press / to select the desired character.

• You can use up to 8 characters for each input.

• Press to change the character in the following

order or press to go in the reverse order:

A to Z, a space, 0 to 9, a space, a to z, a space, #, *,

+, etc.

3 Repeat steps 1 to 2 to rename each input.

4 Press ENTER to exit.

The new names are registered, and the display returns

to the previous screen.

■ HDMI SET (HDMI settings)

Use to change the HDMI audio/video output/input to

match the connected component.

Choices: SUPPORT AUDIO (Support audio),

VIDEO INFO (Video information),

UP-SCALING (HDMI up-scaling),

ASPECT RATIO (HDMI aspect ratio),

HDMI CONTROL (HDMI control)

SUPPORT AUDIO (Support audio)

Use to select whether to play back HDMI audio signals on

this unit or on another HDMI component connected to the

HDMI OUT jack of this unit.

Choices: YSP-4000, OTHER

• This setting is effective when HDMI CONTROL is set to OFF

(see page 87).

• The HDMI video signals input at one of the HDMI IN jacks of

this unit are always output at the HDMI OUT jack of this unit.

• When HDMI CONTROL is set to ON, this setting is ineffective.

This unit follows the setting of the HDMI control-compatible

TV.

DVD -> DVD

[ ]/[ ]:Position

[ ]/[ ]:Character

[ENTER]:Return

D)INPUT RENAME

ENTER

Notes

E)HDMI SET

a)SUPPORT AUDIO

b)VIDEO INFO

c)UP-SCALING

d)ASPECT RATIO

e)HDMI CONTROL

[ ]/[ ]:Up/Down

[ENTER]:Enter

YSP-4000 OTHER

[ ]/[ ]:Select

[ENTER]:Return

a)SUPPORT AUDIO

01EN_YSP-4000_UA.book Page 86 Wednesday, December 26, 2007 3:00 PM

Black process 45.0° 240.0 LPI

87 En

MANUAL SETUP

ADVANCED

OPERATION

English

VIDEO INFO (Video information)

Use to display the video information of the current input

signal.

Choices: HDMI SIGNAL, HDMI RES., HDMI ERROR

• Select HDMI SIGNAL to display the type of the

HDMI input/output signals.

• Select HDMI RES. to display the resolution of the

HDMI input/output signals.

• Select HDMI ERROR to display the error message for

HDMI sources or devices connected

(see page 111 for details).

UP-SCALING (HDMI up-scaling)

Use this feature to activate or deactivate the HDMI up-

conversion of the analog video signals input at the

composite video and component video jacks so that the

up-scaled analog video signals are output at the HDMI

OUT jack. This unit up-scales the analog video signals as

follows:

• 480i (NTSC)/576i (PAL) → 480p (NTSC)/576p (PAL),

1080i or 720p

• 480p (NTSC)/576p (PAL) → 1080i or 720p

Choices: OFF, THROUGH, 480p (or 576p), 1080i, 720p

• Select OFF to deactivate the HDMI up-conversion

feature

• Select THROUGH not to up-scale any analog video

signals.

• Select 480p (or 576p), 1080i, or 720p to up-scale

analog video signals to 480p (or 576p), 1080i, or 720p

of resolution.

• When “MONITOR CHECK” is set to “YES”, this unit receives

the information of the available video signal resolutions from

the video monitor connected via HDMI and you can only select

the resolutions supported by the video monitor in “UP-

SCALING” (see page 97).

• When “MONITOR CHECK” is set to “SKIP”, an asterisk (*)

appears on the left of the unavailable video signal resolution(s)

(see page 97).

ASPECT RATIO (HDMI aspect ratio)

Use this feature to select the adjustment of aspect ratio for

analog video signals output at the HDMI OUT jack.

Choices: THROUGH, 16:9 Normal, Smart Zoom

• Select THROUGH if you do not make any adjustments

to the aspect ratio for HDMI video signal sources.

• Select 16:9 Normal to display video images with 4:3 of

aspect ratio on your video monitor with 16:9 of aspect

ratio. Black stripes appear on the right and left sides as

a result.

• Select Smart Zoom to fit video images with 4:3 of

aspect ratio to your video monitor with 16:9 of aspect

ratio.

• When “UP-SCALING” is set to “THROUGH”, you cannot

make any adjustments to “ASPECT RATIO”.

• When “ASPECT RATIO” is set to “Smart Zoom”, the video

images of the edge of the video monitor are rather stretched.

• When the video signals are input at the HDMI IN jacks or the

signals are input with 720p or 1080i of resolution, the

“ASPECT RATIO” setting does not affect the video signals

output at the HDMI OUT jack.

HDMI CONTROL (HDMI control)

Use this function to link this unit and an HDMI control-

compatible TV via HDMI. You can turn on or off the

power, select the input mode, and adjust the volume level

of this unit using the remote control supplied with your

HDMI control-compatible TV. For details, see “Using the

HDMI control feature” on page 75.

Choices: OFF, ON

HDMI SIGNAL;;;HDMI -> HDMI

HDMI RES.;;;;1080P -> 1080P

HDMI ERROR;;;----

[ ]/[ ]:Up/Down

[ENTER]:Return

b)VIDEO INFO

HDMI UP-SCALING;;;*720p

XXX(480pXX1080iXXX*720p)XX

XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX

[ ]/[ ]:Select

[ENTER]:Return

c)UP-SCALING

Notes

HDMI ASPECT RATIO;;;THROUGH

XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX

[ ]/[ ]:Select

[ENTER]:Return

d)ASPECT RATIO

01EN_YSP-4000_UA.book Page 87 Wednesday, December 26, 2007 3:00 PM

Black process 45.0° 240.0 LPI

88 En

MANUAL SETUP

• Select ON to enable the HDMI control. The signals

input at the HDMI IN jacks are output at the HDMI

OUT jack when this unit is in the standby mode.

• Select OFF to disable the HDMI control. The signals

input at the HDMI IN jacks are not output at the HDMI

OUT jack when this unit is in the standby mode.

■ XM ANTENNA LEVEL (XM antenna level)

(U.S.A. and Canada models only)

Use to display the current reception level of the XM

Satellite Radio signals. For the best reception, orient the

connected XM Mini-Tuner Dock to obtain a value of 60%

or more.

Display status: NONE, 0 to 100%

“NONE” is displayed if the XM Mini-Tuner Dock is not

connected to this unit. In this case, check the antenna connections

(see page 5 in the Reference Guide).

Use to manually adjust the various parameters related to

the display.

SET MENU → MANUAL SETUP → DISPLAY MENU

■ F.DISPLAY SET

(Front panel display settings)

Use to adjust the brightness and display settings of the

front panel display.

STANDARD DIMMER (Standard dimmer)

Use to adjust the brightness of the front panel display

when you operate this unit by using the control buttons on

the front panel or on the remote control.

Choices: –2, –1, OFF

AUTO DIMMER (Auto dimmer)

If no operation is performed for a specified period of time,

the front panel display dims. Use to adjust the brightness

of the front panel display in this case.

Choices: OFF (the same brightness as the STANDARD

DIMMER setting), –1 to –3 (based on the

STANDARD DIMMER setting), DISPLAY OFF

SCROLL (Front panel display scroll)

(U.S.A., Canada, and Australia models only)

Use to select the mode to display information in the front

panel display when operating your iPod or XM Satellite

Radio.

Choices: CONT., ONCE

• Select CONT. to continue to scroll the display.

• Select ONCE to scroll the display to the end once, after

which the first 15 characters appear and stay.

Note

OFF ON XXXXXXX

XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX

[ ]/[ ]:Select

[ENTER]:Return

e)HDMI CONTROL

XM ANTENNA LEVEL;;;;97%

[ENTER]:Return

F)XM ANTENNA LEVEL

DISPLAY MENU

A)F.DISPLAY SET

B)OSD SET

C)UNIT SET

[ ]/[ ]:Up/Down

[ENTER]:Enter

4)DISPLAY MENU

STANDARD DIMMER;;;;;OFF

AUTO DIMMER

;;;;;;;;;;;;;OFF

SCROLL;;;;;;;;;;;;CONT.

[ ]/[ ]:Up/Down [ ]/[ ]:Sel

[ENTER]:Return

A)F.DISPLAY SET

01EN_YSP-4000_UA.book Page 88 Wednesday, December 26, 2007 3:00 PM

Black process 45.0° 240.0 LPI

89 En

MANUAL SETUP

ADVANCED

OPERATION

English

■ OSD SET (OSD settings)

Use to adjust the display position and to set the display

time of the OSD.

OSD SHIFT (OSD shift)

Use to adjust the vertical position of the OSD. Adjust

toward the – (minus) direction to raise the position of the

OSD, and adjust toward the + (plus) direction to lower it.

Choices: –5 to +5

Initial setting: 0

OSD DISPLAY TIME (OSD display time)

(U.S.A., Canada, and Australia models only)

Use to set the interval for which the OSD screen is

displayed after an operation.

Choices: ON, 10s, 30s

• Select ON to show the OSD screen constantly.

• Select 10s to turn off the OSD screen 10 seconds after

an operation.

• Select 30s to turn off the OSD screen 30 seconds after

an operation.

The OSD display time setting is available for your iPod and XM

Satellite Radio (U.S.A. and Canada models only). For details, see

pages 4 and 10 in the Reference Guide.

■ UNIT SET (Unit settings)

Use this to change the display unit of measurement.

Choices: METERS (Australia, Europe, Asia, and Korea

models), FEET (U.S.A. and Canada models)

• Select METERS to enter distances in meters.

• Select FEET to enter distances in feet.

If you change this setting, the adjusted sound beam settings may

change.

Note

OSD SHIFT;;;;;;;;;;0

OSD DISPLAY TIME;;;ON

[ ]/[ ]:Up/Down [ ]/[ ]:Sel

[ENTER]:Return

B)OSD SET

METERS FEET

[ ]/[ ]:Select

[ENTER]:Return

C)UNIT SET

01EN_YSP-4000_UA.book Page 89 Wednesday, December 26, 2007 3:00 PM

Black process 45.0° 240.0 LPI

Adjusting the audio balance

90 En

You can adjust the sound beam output level of each channel by using the test tone or the audio output being played back

in each beam mode to achieve a more true-to-life surround sound experience.

You can use the test tone feature to output a test tone from

each channel to manually balance the channel levels.

Use this to set the channel levels so that the volume level

of each channel is identical when heard from your

listening position.

1 Set the operation mode selector to YSP.

2 Press TEST.

“TEST FRONT L” appears in the front panel display

and a test tone is output from the front left channel.

3 Press / to select the channel you want

to adjust.

The front panel display changes as follows:

“TEST SUBWOOFER” is only available when a subwoofer

is connected to this unit and SWFR is selected for BASS

OUT in SOUND MENU (see page 83).

4 Press / to adjust the channel volume.

Control range: –10.0 dB to +10.0 dB

Adjusting the audio balance

Using the test tone

ENHANCER MENU

RETURNDISPLAY

TV VOL

VOLUME

MUTE

CH LEVEL TEST

TV INPUT TV MUTE

ENTER

CODE SET

ENTRY

CAT/

A-E

YSP

TV/AV

(U.S.A. and Canada models)

YSP

TV/AV

TEST

TEST FRONT L

Note

ENTER

TEST FRONT L

TEST CENTER

TEST FRONT R

TEST SUR.R

TEST SUR.L

TEST SUBWOOFER

ENTER

01EN_YSP-4000_UA.book Page 90 Wednesday, December 26, 2007 3:00 PM

Black process 45.0° 240.0 LPI

91 En

Adjusting the audio balance

ADVANCED

OPERATION

English

5 Press TEST when you have completed all

your adjustments.

• All channel levels cannot be adjusted when the 2-channel or

5-channel stereo playback (see page 62), My Beam

(see page 63), or My Surround (see page 57) is selected as the

beam mode.

• “FRONT L/R” cannot be adjusted when Stereo plus 3 Beam is

selected as the beam mode (see page 57).

• “FRONT L/R” are automatically adjusted depending on the

settings of the other channels when Stereo plus 3 Beam or

stereo playback is selected as the beam mode (see pages 57 and

62).

If the level of a particular channel cannot be adjusted, “– –dB”

appears in the front panel display.

You can also manually adjust the channel levels while

playing back an input source such as a DVD.

1 Set the operation mode selector to YSP.

2 Press CH LEVEL repeatedly (or press

CH LEVEL and / ) to select the channel

you want to adjust.

The front panel display changes as follows.

“SWFR” is available only when a subwoofer is connected to

this unit and SWFR is selected for BASS OUT in SOUND

MENU (see page 82).

Notes

Using the audio output being

played back

TEST

ENHANCER MENU

RETURNDISPLAY

TV VOL

VOLUME

MUTE

CH LEVEL TEST

TV INPUT TV MUTE

ENTER

CODE SET

ENTRY

CAT/

A-E

YSP

TV/AV

(U.S.A. and Canada models)

Note

YSP

TV/AV

CH LEVEL

ENTER

CH LEVEL

FRONT L +1.0dB

CENTER -2.5dB

FRONT R +1.0dB

SUR.R +2.0dB

SUR.L +2.0dB

SWFR --dB

01EN_YSP-4000_UA.book Page 91 Wednesday, December 26, 2007 3:00 PM

Black process 45.0° 240.0 LPI

92 En

Adjusting the audio balance

3 Press / to adjust the channel volume.

Control range: –10.0 dB to +10.0 dB

4 Wait for a few seconds without operating this

unit when you have completed your

adjustment.

• All channel levels cannot be adjusted when the 2-channel or

5-channel stereo playback (see page 62), or My Surround (see

page 57) is selected as the beam mode.

• “FRONT L/R” cannot be adjusted when Stereo plus 3 Beam is

selected as the beam mode (see page 57).

• Only CENTER can be adjusted when My Beam is selected as

the beam mode (see page 63).

• “FRONT L/R” are automatically adjusted depending on the

settings of the other channels when Stereo plus 3 Beam or

stereo playback is selected as the beam mode (see pages 57 and

62).

If the level of a particular channel cannot be adjusted, “– –dB”

appears in the front panel display.

Notes

ENTER

01EN_YSP-4000_UA.book Page 92 Wednesday, December 26, 2007 3:00 PM

Black process 45.0° 240.0 LPI

Selecting the input mode

93 En

ADVANCED

OPERATION

English

You can select the type of audio input signals of the selected input source according to your preference or the conditions

of the input source. This function is available for TV/STB, DVD, AUX1, and AUX2.

We recommend setting the input mode to AUTO in most cases.

1 Set the operation mode selector to YSP.

2 Press one of the input selector buttons to

select the desired input source.

3 Press INPUTMODE repeatedly to toggle

between input modes.

ANALOG is not available as the input mode of DVD and

AUX2.

•AUTO

Automatically selects audio input signals in the following

priority order:

1) HDMI

2) Digital

3) Analog

Use this input mode in most cases.

•DTS

Selects only digital signals encoded in DTS.

Compared to AUTO, this input mode provides greater

stability while playing back CDs or LDs encoded in DTS.

• ANALOG

Selects only analog signals.

Even when both digital and analog signals are input

simultaneously, only analog signals are selected.

You can adjust the default input mode to be selected when the

power of this unit is turned on by adjusting INPUT MODE in

INPUT MENU (see page 85).

Selecting the input mode

STEREO

MY BEAM MY SUR.

PRESET/TUNE

MEMORYSEARCH

SLEEP

INPUTMODE

ENHANCER MENU

RETURNDISPLAY

ENTER

SUR. DECODEOFF

SPORTS

5BEAM ST+3BEAM 3BEAM

MUSIC MOVIE

VOL MODE

AUTO

SETUP

CATFM/XM

MACRO

INPUT1

ENTRY

CAT/

A-E

321

AUX1 AUX2

STB

DVD

AUX3

DOCK

+10

789

YSP

TV/AV

(U.S.A. and Canada models)

YSP

TV/AV

AUX2AUX1DVD

STB

Note

TV/STB AUTO

TV/STB DTS

TV/STB ANALOG

DVD AUTO

DVD DTS

AUX1 AUTO

AUX1 DTS

AUX1 ANALOG

INPUTMODE

When TV or STB is selected

as the input source

When DVD is selected

as the input source

When AUX1 is selected

as the input source

AUX2 AUTO

AUX2 DTS

When AUX2 is selected

as the input source

01EN_YSP-4000_UA.book Page 93 Wednesday, December 26, 2007 3:00 PM

Black process 45.0° 240.0 LPI

Adjusting the system parameters

94 En

This unit has additional menus that are displayed in the front panel display. These menus offer additional operations to

adjust and customize the way this unit operates.

When “F.PANEL KEY” is set to “F.PANEL: OFF” (see page 100), STANDBY/ON on the front panel is ineffective. Use STANDBY/ON

on the remote control instead to adjust the system parameters.

Follow the procedure below to enter the system

parameters.

1 Press STANDBY/ON on the remote control to

turn off the power of this unit.

2 Press and hold INPUT on the front panel and

press STANDBY/ON on the remote control to

turn on the power of this unit.

“MEMORY PROTECT” is displayed in the front

panel display.

3 Release INPUT on the front panel.

Adjusting the system parameters

Note

Using the system parameters

INPUT VOLUME STANDBY/ON

ENHANCER MENU

RETURNDISPLAY

ENTER

ENTRY

CAT/

A-E

YSP

TV/AV

(U.S.A. and Canada models)

PRESET/TUNE

MEMORYSEARCH

CATFM/XM

MACRO

INPUT1

AUX1 AUX2

STB

DVD

AUX3

POWERPOWERSTANDBY/ON

DOCK

STANDBY/ON

INPUT

STANDBY/ON

MEMORY PROTECT

INPUT

01EN_YSP-4000_UA.book Page 94 Wednesday, December 26, 2007 3:00 PM

Black process 45.0° 240.0 LPI

95 En

Adjusting the system parameters

ADVANCED

OPERATION

English

You can protect the settings you saved in the system

memory of this unit from being accidentally erased or

unwantedly changed.

1 Repeat steps 1 to 3 in “Using the system

parameters” on page 94.

2 Set the operation mode selector to YSP.

3 Confirm that “MEMORY PROTECT” is

displayed in the front panel display and

press ENTER.

4 Press / to switch between “PROTECT:

ON” and “PROTECT: OFF”.

• Select PROTECT: ON to activate the protection

feature.

• Select PROTECT: OFF to deactivate the protection

feature.

5 Press STANDBY/ON on the remote control to

set this unit to the standby mode.

The new setting will be activated when you turn on

the power of this unit next time.

Setting the MEMORY PROTECT

YSP

TV/AV

ENTER

MEMORY PROTECT

ENTER

PROTECT: ON

PROTECT: OFF

STANDBY/ON

01EN_YSP-4000_UA.book Page 95 Wednesday, December 26, 2007 3:00 PM

Black process 45.0° 240.0 LPI

96 En

Adjusting the system parameters

You can set the maximum volume level so that this unit

will not output sound beyond the limited volume level.

1 Repeat steps 1 to 3 in “Using the system

parameters” on page 94.

2 Set the operation mode selector to YSP.

“

3 Press / so that “MAX VOLUME SET” is

displayed in the front panel display.

4 Press ENTER.

5 Press / to adjust the maximum volume

level.

Control range: MAX, 99 to 01, MIN

Control step: 1

6 Press STANDBY/ON on the remote control to

set this unit to the standby mode.

The new setting for the maximum volume level will

be activated when you turn on the power of this unit

next time.

You can set the initial volume level when the power of this

unit is turned on.

1 Repeat steps 1 to 3 in “Using the system

parameters” on page 94.

2 Set the operation mode selector to YSP.

Setting the MAX VOLUME

YSP

TV/AV

ENTER

MAX VOLUME SET

ENTER

Setting the TURN ON VOLUME

ENTER

STANDBY/ON

YSP

TV/AV

01EN_YSP-4000_UA.book Page 96 Wednesday, December 26, 2007 3:00 PM

Black process 45.0° 240.0 LPI

97 En

Adjusting the system parameters

ADVANCED

OPERATION

English

3 Press / so that “TURN ON VOLUME” is

displayed in the front panel display.

4 Press ENTER.

5 Press / to adjust the initial volume level.

Control range: MAX, 99 to 01, OFF

Control step: 1

6 Press STANDBY/ON on the remote control to

set this unit to the standby mode.

The new setting for the maximum volume level will

be activated when you turn on the power of this unit

next time.

Use this feature to activate or deactivate the monitor check

function of this unit. When this parameter is set to “YES”,

this unit receives the information on the available video

signal resolutions from the video monitor connected via

HDMI (see page 22). If your TV monitor is not

compatible with 1080i and/or 720p of resolutions, you

cannot select “1080i” and/or “720p” in “UP-SCALING”

(see page 87).

1 Repeat steps 1 to 3 in “Using the system

parameters” on page 94.

2 Set the operation mode selector to YSP.

3 Press / so that “MONITOR CHECK” is

displayed in the front panel display.

ENTER

TURN ON VOLUME

ENTER

STANDBY/ON

Setting the MONITOR CHECK

YSP

TV/AV

ENTER

MONITOR CHECK

01EN_YSP-4000_UA.book Page 97 Wednesday, December 26, 2007 3:00 PM

Black process 45.0° 240.0 LPI

98 En

Adjusting the system parameters

4 Press / to switch between “MON CHK:

YES” and “MON CHK: SKIP”.

• Select MON CHK: YES to activate the monitor

check function.

• Select MON CHK: SKIP to deactivate the monitor

check function.

5 Press STANDBY/ON on the remote control to

set this unit to the standby mode.

The new setting will be activated when you turn on

the power of this unit next time.

If you change the setting of “MONITOR CHECK”, “UP-

SCALING” is automatically set to “OFF” (see page 87).

You can test the sound beam output from this unit to

experience the sound beam.

1 Repeat steps 1 to 3 in “Using the system

parameters” on page 94.

2 Set the operation mode selector to YSP.

3 Press / so that “DEMO MODE” is

displayed in the front panel display.

4 Press ENTER.

Note

ENTER

MON CHK: YES

MON CHK: SKIP

STANDBY/ON

Setting the DEMO MODE

YSP

TV/AV

ENTER

DEMO MODE

ENTER

01EN_YSP-4000_UA.book Page 98 Wednesday, December 26, 2007 3:00 PM

Black process 45.0° 240.0 LPI

99 En

Adjusting the system parameters

ADVANCED

OPERATION

English

5 Press / to switch between “DEMO: ON”

and “DEMO: OFF”.

• Select DEMO: ON to activate the demo mode.

• Select DEMO: OFF to deactivate the demo mode.

6 Press STANDBY/ON on the remote control to

set this unit to the standby mode.

The new setting will be activated when you turn on

the power of this unit next time.

Press ENTER while playing back sources to test the

sound beam.

The sound beam being output shuttles between left

and right. Press ENTER again to stop shuttling.

You can disable the INPUT on the front panel when you

adjust the system parameters.

1 Repeat steps 1 to 3 in “Using the system

parameters” on page 94.

2 Set the operation mode selector to YSP.

3 Press / so that “PANEL INPUT KEY” is

displayed in the front panel display.

4 Press ENTER.

ENTER

DEMO: ON

DEMO: OFF

STANDBY/ON

Setting the PANEL INPUT KEY

YSP

TV/AV

ENTER

PANEL INPUT KEY

ENTER

01EN_YSP-4000_UA.book Page 99 Wednesday, December 26, 2007 3:00 PM

Black process 45.0° 240.0 LPI

100 En

Adjusting the system parameters

5 Press / to switch between “P.INPUT: ON”

and “P.INPUT: OFF”.

• Select P.INPUT: ON to enable the INPUT key on

the front panel.

• Select P.INPUT: OFF to disable the INPUT key on

the front panel. “F.PANEL KEY” is automatically

set to “ON”.

6 Press STANDBY/ON on the remote control to

set this unit to the standby mode.

The new setting will be activated when you turn on

the power of this unit next time.

You can disable the front panel keys except when you

adjust the system parameters.

1 Repeat steps 1 to 3 in “Using the system

parameters” on page 94.

2 Set the operation mode selector to YSP.

3 Press / so that “F.PANEL KEY” is

displayed in the front panel display.

4 Press ENTER.

ENTER

P.INPUT: ON

P.INPUT: OFF

STANDBY/ON

Disabling the front panel keys

YSP

TV/AV

ENTER

F.PANEL KEY

ENTER

01EN_YSP-4000_UA.book Page 100 Wednesday, December 26, 2007 3:00 PM

Black process 45.0° 240.0 LPI

101 En

Adjusting the system parameters

ADVANCED

OPERATION

English

5 Press / to switch between “F.PANEL:

ON” and “F.PANEL: OFF”.

• Select F.PANEL: ON to enable the front panel

keys.

• Select F.PANEL: OFF to disable the front panel

keys. “P.INPUT” is automatically set to “ON”.

6 Press STANDBY/ON on the remote control to

set this unit to the standby mode.

The new setting will be activated when you turn on

the power of this unit next time.

You can reset all of the parameters of this unit to the

factory presets. This procedure completely resets ALL the

parameters in SET MENU.

After performing the following procedure you must run AUTO

SETUP again to match your surround sound environment.

1 Repeat steps 1 to 3 in “Using the system

parameters” on page 94.

2 Set the operation mode selector to YSP.

3 Press / so that “FACTORY PRESET” is

displayed in the front panel display.

4 Press ENTER.

ENTER

F.PANEL: ON

F.PANEL: OFF

STANDBY/ON

Setting the FACTORY PRESET

Note

YSP

TV/AV

ENTER

FACTORY PRESET

ENTER

01EN_YSP-4000_UA.book Page 101 Wednesday, December 26, 2007 3:00 PM

Black process 45.0° 240.0 LPI

102 En

Adjusting the system parameters

5 Press / to switch between “PRESET:

RESET” and “PRESET: CANCEL”.

• Select PRESET: RESET to reset all of the current

settings.

• Select PRESET: CANCEL to cancel the resetting

procedure.

6 Press STANDBY/ON on the remote control to

set this unit to the standby mode.

The new setting will be activated when you turn on

the power of this unit next time.

ENTER

PRESET: RESET

PRESET:CANCEL

STANDBY/ON

01EN_YSP-4000_UA.book Page 102 Wednesday, December 26, 2007 3:00 PM

Black process 45.0° 240.0 LPI

Remote control features

103 En

ADVANCED

OPERATION

English

In addition to controlling this unit, the remote control can also operate other AV components made by Yamaha and other

manufacturers. To control other components, you must set up the remote control with the appropriate remote control

codes and set the operation mode selector to TV/AV to change the control area.

Depending on the external AV component you are using, you may not be able to operate the component with the remote control, even if

a remote control code is set. In this case, operate the component using the supplied remote control.

You can control other components by setting the

appropriate remote control codes. Codes can be set up for

each input area (DVD, AUX1, AUX2, STB, and TV).

For a complete list of available remote control codes, refer

to “List of remote control codes” at the end of this manual.

1 Press and hold CODE SET and press one of

the input selector buttons to select the input

source you want to set a remote control code

for.

The transmission indicator flashes twice and remains

lit.

Proceed to step 2 while holding down CODE SET.

2 Press the numeric buttons to enter the

remote control code while holding down

CODE SET.

3 Refer to “Controlling other components” on

page 104 to operate the external component

using the remote control.

If the external component functions correctly the

remote control code setup is successful.

If the external component does not function correctly,

the remote control code may be incorrect. Confirm

that the remote control code is correct. See “List of

remote control codes” at the end of this manual and

start over from step 1.

If the manufacturer of your component has more than one code,

try each of them until you find the correct one.

Remote control features

Note

Setting remote control codes

MUTE

CH LEVEL TEST

TV INPUT TV MUTE

CODE SET

STEREO

MY BEAM MY SUR.

PRESET/TUNE

MEMORYSEARCH

SLEEP

INPUTMODE

ENHANCER

SUR. DECODEOFF

SPORTS

5BEAM ST+3BEAM 3BEAM

MUSIC MOVIE

VOL MODE

AUTO

SETUP

CATFM/XM

MACRO

INPUT1

321

AUX1 AUX2

STB

DVD

AUX3

DOCK

+10

789

(U.S.A. and Canada models)

Transmission indicator

TV MUTE

CODE SET

While holding

down, press

AUX2AUX1DVD

STB

Note

If the remote control is without batteries for more than

two minutes, or if exhausted batteries remain in the

remote control, the contents of the memory may be

cleared. When the memory is cleared, insert new

batteries and reset the remote control codes.

When changing the batteries, be careful not to press

any of the buttons on the remote control. Doing so will

clear the contents of the memory.

SPORTS

MY SUR.

SPORTS

Setting example: Yamaha DVD input area

TV MUTE

CODE SET

While holding

down, press

01EN_YSP-4000_UA.book Page 103 Wednesday, December 26, 2007 3:00 PM

Black process 45.0° 240.0 LPI

104 En

Remote control features

■ Operating your TV

Set the operation mode selector to TV/AV, and

press TV to select TV as the input source.

The control area of the remote control changes to the TV

operation mode.

1 Numeric buttons

Selects a TV channel for playback.

2 CH +/–

Switches between the available TV channels.

3 TV INPUT

Switches the input source for your TV.

4 TV POWER

Turns on or off the power of your TV.

5 TV INPUT1

Selects the input source of your TV.

6 TV VOL +/–

Adjusts the audio output level of your TV.

7 TV MUTE

Temporarily mutes audio output from your TV.

Controlling other components

YSP

TV/AV

STEREO

MY BEAM MY SUR.

PRESET/TUNE

MEMORYSEARCH

SLEEP

INPUTMODE

ENHANCER

RETURNDISPLAY

TV VOL

VOLUME

MUTE

CH LEVEL TEST

TV INPUT TV MUTE

ENTER

SUR. DECODEOFF

CODE SET

SPORTS

5BEAM ST+3BEAM 3BEAM

MUSIC MOVIE

VOL MODE

AUTO

SETUP

CATFM/XM

MACRO

INPUT1

321

AUX1 AUX2

STB

DVD

AUX3

POWERPOWERSTANDBY/ON

DOCK

+10

YSP

TV/AV

CAT/

A-E

ENTRY

(U.S.A. and Canada models)

01EN_YSP-4000_UA.book Page 104 Wednesday, December 26, 2007 3:00 PM

Black process 45.0° 240.0 LPI

105 En

Remote control features

ADVANCED

OPERATION

English

■ Operating your DVD player/recorder

Set the operation mode selector to TV/AV and

press DVD to select DVD as the input source.

The control area of the remote control changes to the DVD

operation mode.

1 Numeric buttons

Enter numeric digits.

2 Cursor buttons / / / , ENTER

Use to select DVD menu items.

3 Operation buttons for DVD players

Operate your DVD player/recorder, such as play and stop.

4 AV POWER

Turns on or off the power of your DVD player/recorder.

5 MENU

Displays the DVD menu.

6 RETURN

Use to return to the previous DVD menu screen or exit

from the DVD menu.

■ Operating your STB

(CATV/Satellite tuner)

Set the operation mode selector to TV/AV and

press STB to select STB as the input source.

The control area of the remote control changes to the STB

operation mode.

1 Numeric buttons

Enter numeric digits.

2 CH +/–

Switches between the available STB channels.

3 AV POWER

Turns on or off the power of your STB.

DVD

YSP

TV/AV

STEREO

MY BEAM MY SUR.

PRESET/TUNE

MEMORYSEARCH

SLEEP

INPUTMODE

ENHANCER

RETURNDISPLAY

TV VOL

VOLUME

MUTE

CH LEVEL TEST

TV INPUT TV MUTE

ENTER

SUR. DECODEOFF

CODE SET

SPORTS

5BEAM ST+3BEAM 3BEAM

MUSIC MOVIE

VOL MODE

AUTO

SETUP

CATFM/XM

MACRO

INPUT1

321

AUX1 AUX2

STB

DVD

AUX3

POWERPOWERSTANDBY/ON

DOCK

+10

YSP

TV/AV

CAT/

A-E

ENTRY

(U.S.A. and Canada models)

STB

YSP

TV/AV

STEREO

MY BEAM MY SUR.

PRESET/TUNE

MEMORYSEARCH

SLEEP

INPUTMODE

ENHANCER

RETURNDISPLAY

TV VOL

VOLUME

MUTE

TV INPUT TV MUTE

ENTER

SUR. DECODEOFF

CODE SET

SPORTS

5BEAM ST+3BEAM 3BEAM

MUSIC MOVIE

VOL MODE

AUTO

SETUP

CATFM/XM

MACRO

INPUT1

321

AUX1 AUX2

STB

DVD

AUX3

POWERPOWERSTANDBY/ON

DOCK

+10

789

YSP

TV/AV

CAT/

A-E

ENTRY

(U.S.A. and Canada models)

01EN_YSP-4000_UA.book Page 105 Wednesday, December 26, 2007 3:00 PM

Black process 45.0° 240.0 LPI

106 En

Remote control features

■ Operating your VCR

Set the operation mode selector to TV/AV and

press AUX1 to select VCR as the input source.

The control area of the remote control changes to the

AUX1 operation mode.

This operation is available when your VCR is connected to the

AUX 1 AUDIO IN jacks on this unit.

1 Numeric buttons

Enter numeric digits.

2 CH +/–

Switches between the available VCR channels.

3 Operation buttons for VCR

Operate your VCR, such as play and stop.

4 AV POWER

Turns on or off the power of your VCR.

AUX1

YSP

TV/AV

STEREO

MY BEAM MY SUR.

PRESET/TUNE

MEMORYSEARCH

SLEEP

INPUTMODE

ENHANCER

RETURNDISPLAY

TV VOL

VOLUME

MUTE

CH LEVEL TEST

TV INPUT TV MUTE

ENTER

SUR. DECODEOFF

CODE SET

SPORTS

5BEAM ST+3BEAM 3BEAM

MUSIC MOVIE

VOL MODE

AUTO

SETUP

CATFM/XM

MACRO

INPUT1

321

AUX1 AUX2

STB

DVD

AUX3

POWERPOWERSTANDBY/ON

DOCK

+10

YSP

TV/AV

CAT/

A-E

ENTRY

(U.S.A. and Canada models)

01EN_YSP-4000_UA.book Page 106 Wednesday, December 26, 2007 3:00 PM

Black process 45.0° 240.0 LPI

107 En

Remote control features

ADVANCED

OPERATION

English

The TV macro feature makes it possible to perform a

series of operations with the press of a single button. For

example, when you want to play a DVD, you would

normally turn on the component, select DVD as the input

source, and press the play button to start playback. The TV

macro feature lets you perform all of these operations

simply by pressing the DVD macro button.

• Be sure to set up a remote control code for your TV before

setting macros.

• The ways to set macros differ if your TV does not have the

tuning capability.

• If you press any control buttons on the remote control other than

the ones used to set macros while setting macros, the setting

procedure is automatically canceled.

• If it takes more than 10 seconds in steps 2 and 3, the setting

procedure is automatically canceled. In this case, repeat from

step 1.

■ Setting macros for the TV with the

tuning capability

1 Press and hold CODE SET and press one of

the input selector buttons to select the input

source you want to set macros for.

Proceed to step 2 while holding down CODE SET.

2 Press MACRO while holding down CODE

SET.

3 Press CH +/– or the numeric buttons to select

the TV channel.

Check that the TV screen changes to the tuner screen.

4 Press TV INPUT repeatedly until the screen

changes to the display of the input source

selected in step 1.

5 Press ENTER to confirm the macro setting.

Using the TV macro

Notes

STEREO MY SUR.

MY BEAM

PRESET/TUNE

MEMORYSEARCH

SLEEP

INPUTMODE

ENHANCER MENU

RETURNDISPLAY

TV VOL

VOLUME

MUTE

CH LEVEL TEST

TV INPUT TV MUTE

ENTER

SUR. DECODE

OFF

CODE SET

SPORTS

5BEAM ST+3BEAM 3BEAM

MUSIC MOVIE

VOL MODE

AUTO

SETUP

CATFM/XM

MACRO

INPUT1

ENTRY

CAT/

A-E

321

AUX1 AUX2

STB

DVD

AUX3

POWERPOWERSTANDBY/ON

DOCK

+10

YSP

TV/AV

(U.S.A. and Canada models)

TV MUTE

CODE SET

AUX2AUX1DVD

STB

While holding

down, press

TV MUTE

CODE SET

MACRO

While holding

down, press

STEREO

OFF

789

+10

5BEAM

ST+3BEAM

3BEAM

MY SUR.

MY BEAM

MUSIC MOVIE SPORTS

TV INPUT

ENTER

01EN_YSP-4000_UA.book Page 107 Wednesday, December 26, 2007 3:00 PM

Black process 45.0° 240.0 LPI

108 En

Remote control features

■ Setting macros for the TV without the

tuning capability

1 Press and hold CODE SET and press one of

the input selector buttons to select the input

source you want to set macros for.

Proceed to step 2 while holding down CODE SET.

2 Press MACRO while holding down CODE

SET.

3 Press INPUT1.

Check that the TV screen changes to the input 1

screen.

4 Press TV INPUT repeatedly until the screen

changes to the display of the input source

selected in step 1.

5 Press ENTER to confirm the setting.

■ Operating macros

Press and hold one of the input selector buttons

for approximately two seconds to select the input

source you want to operate macros for.

The TV input changes at the same time the input mode

changes.

■ Canceling the macros

1 Press and hold CODE SET and press one of

the input selector buttons to select the input

source you want to cancel the macros for.

Proceed to step 2 while holding down CODE SET.

2 Press MACRO while holding down CODE

SET.

3 Press ENTER to cancel the macros.

TV MUTE

CODE SET

While holding

down, press

AUX2AUX1DVD

STB

TV MUTE

CODE SET

MACRO

While holding

down, press

INPUT1

TV INPUT

ENTER

AUX2AUX1DVD

STB

TV MUTE

CODE SET

While holding

down, press

AUX2AUX1DVD

STB

TV MUTE

CODE SET

MACRO

While holding

down, press

ENTER

01EN_YSP-4000_UA.book Page 108 Wednesday, December 26, 2007 3:00 PM

Black process 45.0° 240.0 LPI

Troubleshooting

109 En

ADDITIONAL

INFORMATION

English

Refer to the chart below when this unit does not function properly. If the problem you are experiencing is not listed below

or if the instruction below does not help, set this unit to the standby mode, disconnect the AC power supply cable, and

contact the nearest authorized Yamaha dealer or service center.

■ General

Troubleshooting

Problem Cause Remedy

See

page

This unit fails to turn on

when STANDBY/ON is

pressed, or enters the

standby mode soon after the

power has been turned on.

The AC power supply cable is not firmly

connected to the AC wall outlet.

Connect the AC power supply cable firmly

to the AC wall outlet.

This unit has been exposed to a strong

external electric shock (such as lightning

and strong static electricity).

Set this unit to the standby mode, disconnect

the AC power supply cable, plug it back in

after 30 seconds, and use it normally.

—

This unit suddenly enters the

standby mode.

The internal temperature becomes too high

and the overheat protection circuitry has

been activated.

Wait for about one hour for this unit to cool

down and turn it back on.

—

The sleep timer has turned the unit off. Turn on the power and play back the source

again.

—

No sound. Incorrect input or output cable connections. Connect the cables properly. If the problem

persists, the cables may be defective.

No appropriate input source has been

selected.

Select an appropriate input source with

INPUT or the input selector buttons.

The volume is turned down. Turn up the volume.

The sound is muted. Press MUTE or VOLUME +/– to resume

audio output and adjust the volume level.

The signals this unit cannot reproduce (such

as PCM signals with more than 96 kHz of

sampling frequency) are being received

from the source component.

Play a source whose signals can be

reproduced by this unit.

—

Change the system settings of the source

component.

—

The HDMI components connected to this

unit do not support the HDCP copy

protection standards.

Connect the HDMI components that support

the HDCP copy protection standards.

SUPPORT AUDIO is set to OTHER and

HDMI audio signals are not being played

back on this unit.

Set SUPPORT AUDIO to YSP-4000 in

MANUAL SETUP

The sound suddenly goes

off.

The sleep timer has turned this unit off. Turn on the power and play back the source

again.

—

The sound is muted. Press MUTE or VOLUME +/– to resume

audio output and adjust the volume level.

No sound from the effect

channels.

You are playing back the source or program

in the 2-channel stereo playback or My

Beam mode.

Press one of the beam mode buttons on the

remote control to select a multi-channel

playback mode and play back the source or

program once more.

No sound from the center

channel.

The output level of the center channel is set

to minimum.

Raise the level of the center channel.

No sound from the surround

channels.

The output level of the surround channels is

set to minimum.

Raise the output level of the surround

channels.

01EN_YSP-4000_UA.book Page 109 Wednesday, December 26, 2007 3:00 PM

Black process 45.0° 240.0 LPI

110 En

Troubleshooting

Problem Cause Remedy

See

page

No sound from the

subwoofer.

BASS OUT in SUBWOOFER SET is set to

FRONT.

Select SWFR.

The source does not contain low bass signals.

Distorted or too little bass

sound.

CROSS OVER in SUBWOOFER SET is set

incorrectly.

Set CROSS OVER correctly.

One of the night listening enhancers is

currently selected.

Turn off the night listening enhancers.

Too much bass sound. TruBass is currently turned on. Turn off TruBass.

The volume level of the subwoofer is too high.

Turn down the volume level of the subwoofer.

—

Surround sound effects are

insubstantial.

The listening room is not a regular shape. Install this unit in a square or rectangular

shaped room.

—

There is no wall in the path of the sound

beam.

Try placing a flat object, such as a board, in

the path of the sound beam.

—

Dolby Digital or DTS sources

cannot be played back.

(Dolby Digital or DTS

indicator does not light up in

the front panel display.)

The connected component is not set to

output Dolby Digital or DTS digital signals.

Make an appropriate setting following the

operating instructions for your component.

—

The input mode is set to ANALOG. Set the input mode to AUTO.

There is noise interference

when a subwoofer is not

connected to this unit.

The protection circuitry was in operation

because a source with strong bass elements

was played back.

Turn down the volume level.

Select SWFR for BASS OUT.

Connect a subwoofer and adjust settings for

SUBWOOFER SET.

Low-frequency sounds are

distorted.

CROSS OVER in SUBWOOFER SET is set

incorrectly.

Set CROSS OVER correctly.

On-screen display does not

appear.

The OSD video pin cable is not connected

properly.

Connect the cable properly.

This unit does not operate

properly.

The internal microcomputer has been frozen

by an external electric shock (such as

lightning or excessive static electricity) or

by a power supply with low voltage.

Disconnect the AC power supply cable from

the outlet and plug it in again after about 30

seconds.

—

No sound is heard from the

TV connected via HDMI.

The TV does not accept the multi-channel

audio signals.

Convert the multi-channel audio signals to

the 2-channel audio signals at the source

component such as a DVD player.

—

“SUPPORT AUDIO” is set to “YSP-4000”. Set “SUPPORT AUDIO” to “OTHER”.

There is noise interference

from digital or high-

frequency equipment.

This unit is too close to the digital or high-

frequency equipment.

Move this unit farther away from such

equipment.

—

This unit does not output

effect sounds properly.

The original source includes surround effects.

Disable the surround effect settings of this unit.

—

My Beam auto-adjust

function does not work.

The listening room is too noisy. Keep the listening room as quiet as possible.

—

Try manual-adjust function.

The sound reflectivity of the listening room

is too much.

Set REFLECTING to HI ECHO.

The remote control may be operated outside

of the remote control operation range.

The remote control functions within a

maximum range of 6 m (20 ft) and no more

than 45 degrees off-axis from the front

panel.

The function does not work properly

because of the condition of the connected

components.

Select My Beam and then try again.

01EN_YSP-4000_UA.book Page 110 Wednesday, December 26, 2007 3:00 PM

Black process 45.0° 240.0 LPI

111 En

Troubleshooting

ADDITIONAL

INFORMATION

English

■ Remote control

■ HDMI

Problem Cause Remedy

See

page

The remote control does not

work and/or function

properly.

Wrong distance or angle. The remote control functions within a

maximum range of 6 m (20 ft) and no more

than 45 degrees off-axis from the front

panel.

Direct sunlight or lighting (from an inverter

type of fluorescent lamp, etc.) is striking the

remote control sensor of this unit.

Reposition this unit.

—

The batteries are weak. Replace all batteries.

Cannot operate external

components with the remote

control of this unit.

The external component you want to operate

is not selected as the input source.

Press INPUT on the front panel or the input

selector buttons on the remote control to

select the external component you want to

operate.

The remote control code was not correctly

set.

Set the remote control code correctly or try

another code for the same manufacturer

using the “List of remote control codes” at

the end of this manual.

103

Even if the remote control code is correctly

set, there are some models that do not

respond to the remote control.

Use the remote control supplied with the

external component.

—

The cursor buttons do not

work during SET MENU

operation.

The operation mode selector was

unwantedly set to TV/AV.

Set the operation mode selector to YSP.

—

Cannot use the My Beam

auto-adjust function.

Wrong distance or angle. The remote control functions within a

maximum range of 6 m (20 ft) and no more

than 45 degrees off-axis from the front

panel.

Error message Cause Remedy

See

page

Device Error The number of the connected HDMI

components exceeds the limit.

Reduce the number of the connected HDMI

components.

—

HDCP Error HDCP authentication failed. Check that the connected HDMI

components support the HDCP copy

protection standards.

—

Out of Resolution The resolution of the HDMI output signals

exceeds the limit allowed by your TV.

Adjust UP-SCALING.

01EN_YSP-4000_UA.book Page 111 Wednesday, December 26, 2007 3:00 PM

Black process 45.0° 240.0 LPI

112 En

Troubleshooting

■ FM tuner

Problem Cause Remedy

See

page

FM stereo reception is noisy. The characteristics of FM stereo broadcasts

may cause this problem when the

transmitter is too far away or the antenna

input is poor.

Check the antenna connections.

Try using a high-quality directional FM

antenna.

—

Use the manual tuning method.

There is distortion, and clear

reception cannot be obtained

even with a good FM

antenna.

There is multi-path interference. Adjust the antenna position to eliminate

multi-path interference.

—

The desired station cannot

be tuned into with the

automatic tuning method.

The signal is too weak. Use a high-quality directional FM antenna.

—

Use the manual tuning method.

Previously preset stations

can no longer be tuned into.

This unit has been disconnected for a long

period.

Preset the stations again.

01EN_YSP-4000_UA.book Page 112 Wednesday, December 26, 2007 3:00 PM

Black process 45.0° 240.0 LPI

Glossary

113 En

ADDITIONAL

INFORMATION

English

■ Dolby Digital

Dolby Digital is a digital surround sound system that gives

you completely independent multi-channel audio. With 3

front channels (left, center, and right) and 2 surround

stereo channels, Dolby Digital provides 5 full-range audio

channels. With an additional channel especially for bass

effects, called LFE (low-frequency effect), the system has

a total of 5.1-channels (LFE is counted as 0.1-channel).

By using 2-channel stereo for the surround channels, more

accurate moving sound effects and surround sound

environment are possible than with Dolby Surround. The

wide dynamic range (from maximum to minimum

volume) reproduced by the 5 full-range channels and the

precise sound orientation generated using digital sound

processing provide listeners with excitement and realism

previously unheard of.

With this unit, any sound environment from monaural up

to a 5.1-channel configuration can be freely selected for

your enjoyment.

■ Dolby Pro Logic II

Dolby Pro Logic II is an improved technique used to

decode vast numbers of existing Dolby Surround software.

This new technology enables a discrete 5-channel

playback with 2 front left and right channels, 1 center

channel, and 2 surround left and right channels (instead of

only 1 surround channel for conventional Pro Logic

technology). Music and Game modes are also available for

2-channel sources in addition to the Movie mode.

■ Dolby Surround

Dolby Surround uses a 4-channel analog recording system

to reproduce realistic and dynamic sound effects: 2 front

left and right channels (stereo), a center channel for dialog

(monaural), and a surround channel for special sound

effects (monaural). The surround channel reproduces

sound within a narrow frequency range.

Dolby Surround is widely used with nearly all video tapes

and laser discs, and in many TV and cable broadcasts as

well. The Dolby Pro Logic decoder built into this unit

employs a digital signal processing system that

automatically stabilizes the volume on each channel to

enhance moving sound effects and directionality.

■ DTS Digital Surround

DTS digital surround was developed to replace the analog

soundtracks of movies with a 6-channel digital sound

track, and is now rapidly gaining popularity in movie

theaters around the world. DTS, Inc. has developed a

home theater system so that you can enjoy the depth of

sound and natural spatial representation of DTS digital

surround in your home. This system produces practically

distortion-free 6-channel sound (technically, left, right,

and center channels, 2 surround channels, plus an LFE

0.1-channel as a subwoofer, for a total of 5.1 channels).

The unit incorporates a DTS-ES decoder that enables 6.1-

channel reproduction by adding the surround back channel

to existing 5.1-channel format.

■ DTS Neo:6

Neo:6 decodes the conventional 2-channel sources for 6-

channel playback by the specific decoder. It enables

playback with the full-range channels with higher

separation just like digital discrete signal playback. Two

modes are available: Music mode for playing music

sources and Cinema mode for movies.

■ EUPHONY

Euphony is a revolutionary sound field reproduction

system implemented with state-of-the-art sound

technologies developed under the basic concept of

enjoying beautiful sound. It can reproduce surround sound

optimized without depending on the number of input

channels, the number of speakers (two or more speakers)

or the speaker’s dimensions. In addition, it features steady

center localization. It also can reproduce the surround

sound for the headphones with natural sound and “out-of-

head” localization so that the listener feels an expanded

sound and will not tire, even when listening to music or a

movie for long time.

■ HDMI

HDMI (High-Definition Multimedia Interface) is the first

industry-supported, uncompressed, all-digital audio/video

interface. Providing an interface between any source (such

as a set-top box or AV receiver) and an audio/video

monitor (such as a digital television), HDMI supports

standard, enhanced, or high-definition video as well as

multi-channel digital audio using a single cable. HDMI

transmits all ATSC HDTV standards and supports 8-

channel digital audio, with bandwidth to spare to

accommodate future enhancements and requirements.

When used in combination with HDCP (High-bandwidth

Digital Content Protection), HDMI provides a secure

audio/video interface that meets the security requirements

of content providers and system operators. For further

information on HDMI, visit the HDMI website at

“http://www.hdmi.org/”.

Glossary

01EN_YSP-4000_UA.book Page 113 Wednesday, December 26, 2007 3:00 PM

Black process 45.0° 240.0 LPI

114 En

Glossary

■ LFE 0.1-channel

This channel is for the reproduction of low bass signals.

The frequency range for this channel is 20 Hz to 120 Hz.

This channel is counted as 0.1 because it only enforces a

low-frequency range compared to the full-range

reproduction by the other 5/6 channels in Dolby Digital or

DTS 5.1/6.1-channel systems.

■ Neural Surround

Neural Surround

™

represents the latest advancement in

surround technology and has been adopted by XM

Satellite Radio for digital radio broadcast of surround

recordings and live events in surround sound. Neural

Surround

™

employs psychoacoustic frequency domain

processing which allows delivery of a more detailed sound

stage with superior channel separation and localization of

audio elements.

■ PCM (Linear PCM)

Linear PCM is a signal format under which an analog

audio signal is digitized, recorded, and transmitted

without using any compression. This is used as a method

of recording CDs and DVD audio. The PCM system uses

a technique for sampling the size of the analog signal per

very small unit of time. Standing for pulse code

modulation, the analog signal is encoded as pulses and

then modulated for recording.

■ SRS TruBass

SRS TruBass is a psychoacoustic bass enhancement

technology developed by SRS Labs, Inc. for speakers and

headphone systems that delivers bass up to an octave

below the physical capabilities of the speaker’s driver.

SRS TruBass technology takes advantage of a

spontaneous tendency of the human ears to infer low-

range audio data when presented with higher-frequency

harmonic signals. As a result, our ears can hear the

original low-range sound that the speaker system is

incapable of producing.

01EN_YSP-4000_UA.book Page 114 Wednesday, December 26, 2007 3:00 PM

Black process 45.0° 240.0 LPI

Index

115 En

ADDITIONAL

INFORMATION

English

■ Numerics

3 Beam ............................................................................ 57

5 Beam ............................................................................ 56

■ A

AC power supply cable...................................................31

Audio pin cable...............................................................21

AUTO SETUP (IntelliBeam).......................................... 37

■ B

Battery.............................................................................32

BEAM MENU................................................................ 78

Beam mode .........................................................56, 62, 63

■ C

Cable clamp ....................................................................21

Cardboard microphone stand..........................................39

CINEMA DSP ................................................................ 67

■ D

DEMO MODE................................................................98

Demonstration DVD......................................................... 6

Digital audio pin cable....................................................21

DISPLAY MENU ........................................................... 88

Dolby Digital ..................................................................58

Dolby Pro Logic..............................................................58

Dolby Pro Logic II.......................................................... 58

DTS.................................................................................58

DTS Neo: 6 ..................................................................... 58

Dynamic range................................................................84

■ E

EUPHONY ...................................................................113

■ F

FACTORY PRESET ..................................................... 101

Fastener...........................................................................19

Front panel........................................................................7

Front panel display ...........................................................8

■ H

HDMI.............................................................................. 21

HDMI cable ....................................................................21

■ I

IntelliBeam .....................................................................37

IntelliBeam microphone ................................................. 38

■ L

LFE 0.1-channel ........................................................... 114

■ M

MANUAL SETUP ..........................................................76

MEMORY .......................................................................44

Movie program................................................................68

Music program ................................................................67

My Beam.........................................................................63

■ N

Night listening enhancer .................................................71

■ O

On-screen display (OSD)................................................34

Optical cable ...................................................................21

OSD video pin cable .......................................................21

■ P

PCM ..............................................................................114

Power...............................................................................33

■ R

Rear panel .........................................................................9

Remote control................................................................11

Remote control code .....................................................103

Remote control sensor.....................................................32

■ S

SET MENU.....................................................................34

Sleep timer ......................................................................72

Sound field program........................................................65

Stereo plus 3 Beam .........................................................57

Surround mode................................................................58

Surround sound ...............................................................56

SOUND MENU ..............................................................82

Sports program................................................................68

Stereo sound....................................................................62

System parameter............................................................94

■ T

Test tone ..........................................................................90

TruBass............................................................................84

TV macro ......................................................................107

TV volume equal mode...................................................71

■ V

Volume ............................................................................49

Volume mode ..................................................................71

Index

01EN_YSP-4000_UA.book Page 115 Wednesday, December 26, 2007 3:00 PM

Black process 45.0° 240.0 LPI

Specifications

116 En

AMP SECTION

• Maximum Output Power (JEITA)

................................................. 2 W (1 kHz, 10% THD, 4 Ω) × 40

20 W (100 Hz, 10% THD, 4 Ω) × 2

SPEAKER SECTION

•Driver

Small dia. speakers

...................... 4 cm (1-9/16 in) cone magnetic shielding type × 40

Woofers

...................... 11 cm (4-5/16 in) cone magnetic shielding type × 2

• Frequency response..................................................55 Hz to 20 kHz

(-10 dB, stereo mode)

CONNECTIONS

• Input Jacks

TV/STB, AUX 1 AUDIO IN (1 V, 32 kΩ) ........... 2 pairs (Analog)

TV/STB, AUX 1 OPTICAL DIGITAL IN ........ 2 (Optical digital)

DVD, AUX 2 COAXIAL DIGITAL IN ............2 (Coaxial digital)

STB, DVD/AUX 2, AUX 1 VIDEO IN .................. 3 (Composite)

STB, DVD/AUX 2 COMPONENT VIDEO IN .....2 (Component)

AUX 1, DVD HDMI IN ............................................................... 2

AUX 3 .......................................................................................... 1

• Output Jacks

SUBWOOFER (1.5 V, less than 120 Hz) ................ 1 (Subwoofer)

VIDEO OUT (1 Vp-p, 75 Ω) .................................. 1 (Composite)

COMPONENT VIDEO OUT

(Y: 1 Vp-p, 75 Ω PB/PR: 0.5 Vp-p, 75 Ω) ...........1 (Component)

HDMI OUT .................................................................................. 1

• System Connector Jack

INTELLIBEAM MIC ..................................1 (Microphone input)

RS-232C ........................................................... 1 (System control)

SYSTEM CONNECTOR (U.S.A. and Canada models)

........................................................................ 1 (System control)

IR IN ................................................................ 1 (System control)

IR-OUT ............................................................ 1 (System control)

FM SECTION

• Tuning Range

[U.S.A., Canada, and Asia models] ................ 87.5 to 107.9 MHz

[Other models] ............................................ 87.50 to 108.00 MHz

GENERAL

• Power Supply

[U.S.A. and Canada models] ............................. AC 120 V, 60 Hz

[Australia model] .................................. AC 220

–240 V, 50/60 Hz

[U.K. and Europe models] .................... AC 220

–240 V, 50/60 Hz

[Korea model] ....................................... AC 220

–240 V, 50/60 Hz

[General model] .................................... AC 110

–120 V, 50/60 Hz

[Asia model] ..........................................AC 220

–240 V, 50/60 Hz

• Power Consumption ..................................................................55 W

• Standby Power Consumption ...................................... 0.5 W or less

• Dimensions (W x H x D) ............................... 1030 x 198 x 144 mm

(40-17/32 x 7-21/32 x 5-22/32 in)

• Weight ............................................................ 15.5 kg (34 lbs 10 oz)

Specifications are subject to change without notice.

Specifications

HDMI interface of this unit is based on the following standard:

• HDCP (High-bandwidth Digital Content Protection System)

licensed by Digital Content Protection, LLC.

01EN_YSP-4000_UA.book Page 116 Wednesday, December 26, 2007 3:00 PM

Black process 45.0° 240.0 LPI

List of remote control codes

ADMIRAL 292, 293, 216

AIWA 294, 276, 283, 284

AKAI 295, 296

ALBA

296

AOC 297

BELL &

HOWELL 292

BESTAR 298

BLAUPUNKT 229, 222

BLUE SKY 298

BRANDT 223

BROC SONIC 297

BUSH 296

BYD:SIGN 201, 202

CLATRONIC 298

CRAIG 224

CROSLEX 225, 298

CURTIS MATHIS

297, 226

DAEWOO 297, 298, 224,

227, 228

DAYTRON 239

DUAL 298

DWIN 293, 281

EMERSON 297, 224, 239, 232

FURGUSON 223, 265, 266

FIRST LINE 298

FISHER 295, 233

FRABA 298

FUJITSU 289

FUNAI 277, 278

GE 293, 297, 234,

235, 236

GOODMANS 296, 298, 223

GRUNDIG 229, 238, 249

HITACHI 297, 239, 242,

243, 285, 206

ICE 296

IRRADIO 296

ITT/NOKIA 244, 245

JC PENNY 293, 297, 234, 237

JVC 296, 246, 247, 286

KENDO 298

KTV 297, 239

LG/GOLDSTAR

297, 298, 239, 237

LOEWE 298, 248, 207

LXI 293, 297, 225,

226, 233, 298

MAGNAVOX 297, 225, 239, 298

MARANTZ 298, 210

MATSUI 295

MEDION 203, 204, 298

MEMOREX 297, 216

MITSUBISHI 299, 297, 259, 287

NAD 226, 255

NEC 297, 252, 282

NOKIA 244, 245

NOKIA OCEANIC

245

NORDMENDE 265, 266

ONWA 296

PANASONIC 234, 235, 236,

253, 288, 211

PHILCO 297, 225, 239, 298

PHILIPS 298, 225, 205

PIONEER 226, 235, 254,

255, 268

PORTLAND 297, 256

PROSCAN 293, 221

PROSCAN 231, 241, 251

PROTON 297, 250, 260, 270

QUASAR 234, 235

RADIO SHACK299, 293, 297

RCA 293, 297, 234,

256, 257, 258, 221

RUNCO 220, 230, 271

SABA 223, 269, 265, 266

SAMPO 281, 297, 280

SAMSUNG 297, 239, 248,

262, 275

SANYO 295, 233, 279,

272, 273, 274, 212

SCHNEIDER 296

SCOTT 297

SHARP 292, 239, 232,

213, 208

SIEMENS 229

SIGNATURE 216

SIGNATURE 292

SONY 263, 214

SYLVANIA 297, 225, 298

SYNPHONIC 217, 218, 219

TELEFUNKUN 269, 264, 265, 266

THOMSON 223, 266

TOSHIBA 292, 226, 267, 215

VIDECH 297, 242

WARDS 297, 239, 232, 216

YAMAHA 299, 292, 242,

285, 287, 253, 206

YAMAJI 298

ZENITH 216, 261, 271

DVD PLAYER

AIWA 648, 649

APEX DIGITAL

652, 653, 654

BYD:SIGN 678, 679

DAEWOO 655

DENON 623, 624, 682

FUNAI 625

HARMAN/KARDON

656, 657

HITACHI 626, 688, 689

JVC 627, 643, 692

KENWOOD 628

KLH 658

LG/GOLDSTAR

645, 663, 664

MARANTZ 699, 659

MITSUBISHI 629

ONKYO 632, 633, 634

PANASONIC 623, 635, 668,

672, 682, 683, 684

PHILIPS 699, 647, 659

PIONEER 636, 637, 638,

673, 674, 675, 685

686, 687

RCA 639

SAMSUNG 642

SHARP 643, 692

SONY 644, 676, 677

SYLVANIA 662

SYMPHONIC 662

THOMSON 646

TOSHIBA 634, 665, 666, 667

YAMAHA 699, 622, 623,

647, 682

ZERITH 663, 664

VCR

ADMIRAL 395

AIWA 396, 397, 398, 329

AKAI 322, 323, 324

AUDIO DYNAMIC

392, 394

BELL & HOWELL

393

BLAUPUNKT 325, 326

BROC SONIC 327

BUSH 322

CANON 325, 328

CGM 396, 332

CITIZEN 396

CRAIG 396, 363

CURTHIS MATHIS

397, 328, 333

DAEWOO 328, 334, 335

DBX 392, 394

DIMENSIA 333

DYNATECH 397

EMERSON 327, 334, 396, 397

FISHER 393, 336

FUNAI 397

GE 328, 333, 387

GO VIDEO 321, 331, 341,

351, 363

GOODMANS 334, 337

GRUNDIG 332, 338

HITACHI 325, 333, 349,

342, 343

INSTANT REPLAY

325, 328

ITT/NOKIA 393

JC PENNY 392, 393, 394,

328, 333, 349,

396, 363

JVC 392, 394, 344,

345, 346, 347

KENDO 396

KENWOOD 392, 394, 396

LG/GOLDSTAR

396, 388

LOEWE 396, 337

LUXOR 395

LXI 393, 396, 397,

336, 349

MAGNAVOX 325, 326, 328

MARANTZ 392, 394

MARTA 396

MATSUI 396

MEMOREX 328, 336, 396, 397

MINOLTA 333, 349

MITSUBISHI 399, 344, 348,

359, 353, 352

MTC 363, 397

MULTITECH 397, 348, 354

NEC 392, 394, 344, 383

NOKIA 393, 395

NOKIA OCEANIC

395

OKANO 323

OLYMPIC 325, 328

ORION 327

PANASONIC 325, 328, 339,

355, 378, 384,

385, 386

PENTAX 333, 349

PHILCO 325, 328, 397

PHILLIPS 325, 326, 328,

337, 356, 357

PHONOLA 337

PILOT 396

PIONEER 325

QUASAR 325, 328

RCA/PROSCAN

325, 326, 328,

333, 335, 349,

358, 363, 397

REALISTIC 393, 397, 328,

336, 359, 362,

396, 363

SAMSUNG 354, 358, 363,

364, 365, 366

SANSUI 394

SANYO 393, 336, 367

SCHNEIDER 337

SCOTT 399, 335, 336,

348, 359, 354,

358, 352

SELECO 322

SHARP 395, 362, 382

SIEMENS 393

SIGNATURE 2000

395, 397

SONY 368, 379, 372,

373, 374, 375

SYLVANIA 397, 325, 326, 328

SYMPHONIC 397

TANDBERG 334

TANDY 397

TASHIRO 396

TATUNG 392, 394

TEAC 392, 394, 397

TECHNICS 325, 328

TEKNIKA 396

TELEFUNKUN

376, 377

THOMAS 397

THORN 393, 396

TOSHIBA 335, 389

TOTEVISION 363, 396

UNITECH 363

UNIVERSUM 396, 327, 376

VIDEOSONIC 363

W.WHOUSE 396

WARDS 395, 396, 336,

362, 397, 363

YAMAHA 399, 392, 393, 394

ZERITH 344, 361, 368,

371, 379, 396, 397

CABLE TV TUNER

ABC 739, 752, 753,

755, 758, 759, 762

GENERAL INSTRUMENT

722, 786, 787, 788

HAMIN 723, 724, 725,

726, 727

HITACHI 722

JEROLD 722, 728, 729,

732, 733, 734,

735, 736, 737

MAGNAVOX 738

MOTOROLA 748, 728

OAK 739, 742, 743

PANASONIC 744, 745, 746,

747, 783, 784

PHILLIPS 763, 764, 765,

766, 767, 768

PIONEER 748, 785, 747

RADIO SHACK749

01EN_YSP-4000_UA.book Page i Wednesday, December 26, 2007 3:00 PM

Black process 45.0° 240.0 LPI

RCA 744, 792, 793

SCIENTIFIC ATLANTA

752, 753, 754, 789

SONY 756, 757

TOCOM 755

UNIVERSAL 769, 772, 773,

774, 775

VIEWSTAR 764, 766, 776,

777, 778, 779, 782

SATELLITE TUNER

ECHOSTAR 822

GE 837, 838, 839

GENERAL INSTRUMENT

823

HITACHI 824

HUGHES 843, 844, 845, 846

JVC 822

MAGNAVOX 825

PANASONIC 826, 829

PHILLIPS 825, 843, 844,

845, 846, 847,

848, 849

PRIMESTAR 827

PROSCAN 837, 838, 839, 842

RADIO SHACK

828

RCA 837, 838, 839, 842

SAMSUNG 852

SKY+ 853

SKY HD 853

SONY 832, 835

TOSHIBA 833, 836

UNIDEN 825

ZENITH 834

01EN_YSP-4000_UA.book Page ii Wednesday, December 26, 2007 3:00 PM

Black process 45.0° 240.0 LPI

YAMAHA ELECTRONICS CORPORATION, USA

6660 ORANGETHORPE AVE., BUENA PARK, CALIF. 90620, U.S.A.

YAMAHA CANADA MUSIC LTD.

135 MILNER AVE., SCARBOROUGH, ONTARIO M1S 3R1, CANADA

YAMAHA ELECTRONIK EUROPA G.m.b.H.

SIEMENSSTR. 22-34, 25462 RELLINGEN BEI HAMBURG, GERMANY

YAMAHA ELECTRONIQUE FRANCE S.A.

RUE AMBROISE CROIZAT BP70 CROISSY-BEAUBOURG 77312 MARNE-LA-VALLEE CEDEX02, FRANCE

YAMAHA ELECTRONICS (UK) LTD.

YAMAHA HOUSE, 200 RICKMANSWORTH ROAD WATFORD, HERTS WD18 7GQ, ENGLAND

YAMAHA SCANDINAVIA A.B.

J A WETTERGRENS GATA 1, BOX 30053, 400 43 VÄSTRA FRÖLUNDA, SWEDEN

YAMAHA MUSIC AUSTRALIA PTY. LTD.

LEVEL 1, 99 QUEENSBRIDGE STREET, SOUTHBANK, VIC 3006, AUSTRALIA

YSP-4000

Printed in Malaysia WK94290-2

YSP-4000

Digital Sound Projector

OWNER’S MANUAL

00cv_YSP-4000_UA.fm Page 1 Friday, March 7, 2008 10:23 AM

Black process 45.0° 240.0 LPI

YSP-4000

Digital Sound Projector

Reference Guide for iPod

/XM

Radio

This is the Reference Guide for Yamaha YSP-4000 Digital Sound Projector. This guide explains the connections and

operations of iPod and XM Satellite Radio (U.S.A. and Canada models only). Operations in this guide use keys on the

supplied remote control unless otherwise specified. For general information including the controls and functions of this

unit, refer to the owner’s manual.

The illustrations used in this Reference Guide are for U.S.A. and Canada models only.

“iPod” is a trademark of Apple Inc., registered in the U.S. and other countries.

The XM name and related logos are registered trademarks of XM Satellite Radio Inc.

Neural Surround

™

name and related logos are trademarks owned by Neural Audio Corporation.

Using iPod™........................................................................................................................................ 2

Connection................................................................................................................................................. 2

Controlling iPod™ ....................................................................................................................................2

XM™ Satellite Radio tuning (U.S.A. and Canada models only).................................................... 5

Connecting XM™ Mini-Tuner Home Dock............................................................................................. 5

Activating XM™ Satellite Radio.............................................................................................................. 6

Basic XM™ Satellite Radio operations .................................................................................................... 6

Presetting the XM™ Satellite Radio channels.......................................................................................... 9

Displaying the XM™ Satellite Radio information.................................................................................. 10

Troubleshooting................................................................................................................................ 11

Overview

Contents

iPod

USING IPOD™

2 En

This unit has the DOCK terminal on the rear panel that allows you to connect the Yamaha iPod universal dock (such as

YDS-10, sold separately). Station your iPod in the Yamaha iPod universal dock, and use the supplied remote control to

operate your iPod.

• Only iPod (Click and Wheel), iPod nano, and iPod mini are supported.

• Some features may not be compatible depending on the model or the software version of your iPod.

Connect the Yamaha iPod universal dock to the DOCK

terminal of this unit using a dedicated cable.

Do not connect this unit or other components to the main power

until all connections between components are complete.

When your iPod and external component using the AUX 3 input

jack are connected to this unit at the same time, and when the

DOCK indicator is lit in the front panel display, iPod output takes

priority.

1 Navigate through the iPod menu ( / / / ) and

starts playback (ENTER).

2 Displays the OSD (on-screen menu) menu.

3 Selects AUX3/DOCK (U.S.A. and Canada models) or

AUX3 (Australia model) as the input source.

4 Use to return to the previous iPod menu.

5 Sets the operation mode of this unit.

6 Use to return to the previous iPod menu.

7 Stops playback.

8 Pauses playback.

9 Searches forward/backward.

0 Starts playback.

A Skips to the beginning of the current/previous/next

track.

8 and 9 toggle between play and pause operations in the Simple

Remote mode.

Using iPod™

Notes

Connection

CAUTION

OPTICAL

COAXIAL

DVD AUX 2

AUX 1TV/STB

DIGITAL INDOCK

AUX 1AUX 1 TV/STB

AUDIO IN

SUBWOOFER

Yamaha iPod universal dock

(such as YDS-10, sold separately)

Rear panel of this unit

Controlling iPod™

ENHANCER

TV VOL

VOLUME

MUTE

CH LEVEL TEST

TV INPUT TV MUTE

ENTER

SUR. DECODE

OFF

CODE SET

+10

YSP

TV/AV

ENTRY

CAT/

A-E

RETURNDISPLAY

MACRO

INPUT1

AUX1 AUX2

STB

DVD

AUX3

POWERPOWERSTANDBY/ON

DOCK

(U.S.A. and Canada models)

Using iPod™

3 En

English

• For a complete list of status messages that appear in the front panel display and in the OSD, see the “iPod” section in

“Troubleshooting” on page 11.

• While your iPod is stationed in the Yamaha iPod universal dock connected to the DOCK terminal of this unit, your iPod battery is

automatically charged as long as this unit is turned on.

■ Controlling iPod in the Simple Remote

mode

You can perform some basic operations such as play,

pause, stop, backward/forward search, and track skip

using the remote control without the aid of the OSD. Such

basic operations can be performed also on your iPod.

1 Set the operation mode selector to TV/AV.

2 Press AUX3/DOCK (U.S.A. and Canada

models) or AUX3 (Australia model), and set

your iPod in the Yamaha iPod universal dock.

In the front panel display, “iPod connected” appears

and the DOCK indicator lights up.

• You can view the photos or video clips stored on your iPod in

the iPod screen (some models only).

•Use

# and * on the remote control interchangeably to toggle

between play and pause operations.

Information on the current song appears only in the iPod screen

but not in the front panel display of this unit.

■ Controlling iPod in the Menu Browse

mode

You can perform the advanced operations using the remote

control with the aid of the OSD (see the owner’s manual

for information on the OSD). In the OSD, you can browse

the song list stored on your iPod. Further, you can change

or adjust the settings on your iPod as desired. Such

advanced operations cannot be performed on your iPod.

1 Set the operation mode selector to TV/AV.

2 Press AUX3/DOCK (U.S.A. and Canada

models) or AUX3 (Australia model), and set

your iPod in the Yamaha iPod universal dock.

In the front panel display, “iPod connected” appears

and the DOCK indicator lights up.

3 Press DISPLAY, and display the menu

browse mode.

The OSD appears on your TV.

Note

YSP

TV/AV

iPod connected

Lights up

YSP

TV/AV

iPod connected

Lights up

DISPLAY

Playlists

Artists

Albums

Songs

Genres

Composers

Settings

iPod Top

01EN_YSP-4000_UA-RG.book Page 3 Friday, March 7, 2008 11:25 AM

Black process 45.0° 240.0 LPI

Using iPod™

4 En

4 Press / and / to navigate through

the iPod menu, and press ENTER to start

playback of the selected song.

Choices: Playlists (playlists), Artists (artists), Albums

(albums), Songs (songs), Genres (genres),

Composers (composers), Settings (settings)

• Playlists > Songs

• Artists > Albums > Songs

• Albums > Songs

• Songs

• Genres > Artists > Albums > Songs

• Composers > Albums > Songs

• Settings > Shuffle, Repeat

Settings parameters:

Shuffle Shuffle

Use this function for random playback of songs or albums.

When “Songs” or “Albums” is chosen, “S” appears in the

top right corner while the songs or albums are being

shuffled. Press ENTER repeatedly to toggle between the

choices.

Choices: Off, Songs, Albums

• Select “Off” to deactivate this function.

• Select “Songs” for random playback of songs.

• Select “Albums” for random playback of albums.

Repeat Repeat

Use this function for repeated playback of a song or a

sequence of songs. When “One” or “All” is chosen, “R”

appears in the top right corner while a song or a sequence

of songs are being repeated. Press ENTER repeatedly to

toggle between the choices.

Choices: Off, One, All

• Select “Off” to deactivate this function.

• Select “One” for repeated playback of a song.

• Select “All” for repeated playback of a sequence of

songs.

• Press RETURN or MENU to go back to the previous menu.

• The information on the current song also appears in the front

panel display. You can set the front panel display mode: CONT.

or ONCE. For details, see “SCROLL” (Front panel display

scroll) in “F.DISPLAY SET” (Front panel display settings) in

the owner’s manual (see page 88).

• You can set the interval for which the OSD screen is displayed

after an operation. See “OSD DISPLAY TIME” (OSD display

time) in “OSD SET” (OSD settings) in the owner’s manual (see

page 89).

• You can view the photos or video clips stored on your iPod in

the OSD (some models only).

• The YAMAHA logo appears in the iPod screen in this mode.

• Undisplayable characters are shown as underscores “_” in the

front panel display and OSD.

• You can change or adjust the “Settings” parameters only in the

OSD.

■ An example of the information display

during playback

1 Track number/total tracks

2 Name of the artist

3 Name of the album

4 Name of the song

5 Progress bar

6 Elapsed time

7 Shuffle and repeat icons

8 (playback), (pausing),

(search forward),

and (search backward)

9 Remaining time

ENTER

and

Notes

iPod[Play] S R

1/9



||||||||;;;;;;;;;;;;

0:51-7:44

FrankieZipper

Made-to-order

RoadtoIndia

01EN_YSP-4000_UA-RG.book Page 4 Wednesday, December 26, 2007 10:39 AM

Black process 45.0° 240.0 LPI

XM™ SATELLITE RADIO TUNING (U.S.A. AND CANADA MODELS ONLY)

5 En

English

■ About XM Satellite Radio

XM Satellite Radio offers an extraordinary variety of commercial-free music, plus the best in sports, news, talk, and

entertainment. XM is broadcast in superior digital audio from coast to coast. From rock to reggae, from classical to hip

hop, XM has something for every music fan. XM’s dedication to playing the richest selection of music is matched by its

passion for live sporting events, talk radio, up-to-the-minute news, stand-up comedy, children’s programming, and much

more.

This unit is equipped with the Neural Surround decoder that plays back the XM HD surround sound content of the XM Satellite Radio

broadcasts in multi-channels, resulting in a full surround sound experience. See “Surround modes and recommended sources” in the

owner’s manual (see page 58).

The XM Satellite Radio service is unavailable in Alaska and Hawaii.

Connect XM Mini-Tuner and Home Dock (each sold

separately by XM Satellite Radio) to the XM jack on the

rear panel of this unit. For information on your XM Mini-

Tuner and Home Dock, see the operating instructions

provided with XM Mini-Tuner Home Dock.

• To ensure optimal reception of the XM Satellite Radio signals,

the antenna of Home Dock must be placed at or near a south-

facing window with no obstacles in the path to the sky. You can

mount it indoors or outdoors.

• Use the “XM ANTENNA LEVEL” parameter in “MANUAL

SETUP” (see page 88 in the owner’s manual) to display the XM

Satellite Radio reception level (%) in the OSD. For the best

reception, adjust the orientation of the connected indoor

antenna of the Home Dock to obtain a value of 60% or more.

If “CHECK ANTENNA” appears in the front panel display,

Home Dock may not be connected properly to the XM jack on the

rear panel of this unit.

XM™ Satellite Radio tuning

(U.S.A. and Canada models only)

XM READY

Legal Disclaimer

Hardware and required monthly subscription sold separately. Other fees and taxes, including a one-time activation fee may apply.

Subscription fee is consumer only. All fees and programming subject to change. Channels with frequent explicit language are indicated with

an XL. Channel blocking is available for XM radio receivers by calling 1-800-XMRADIO (US residents) and 1-877-GET-XMSR (Canadian

residents). For a full listing of the XM commercial-free channels and advertising-supported channels, visit lineup.xmradio.com (US

residents) or www.xmradio.ca (Canadian residents). Subscriptions subject to Customer Agreement available at xmradio.com (US residents)

Note

Connecting XM™ Mini-Tuner Home Dock

RS-232C

IR INXM

OPTICAL

COAXIAL

DVD AUX 2

AUX 1TV/STB

DIGITAL IN

XM Mini-Tuner and Home Dock

(each sold separately)

Rear panel of this unit

Note

XM™ Satellite Radio tuning (U.S.A. and Canada models only)

6 En

Once you have installed XM Mini-Tuner Home Dock,

inserted XM Mini-Tuner, connected Home Dock to your

XM READY home audio system, and installed the

antenna, you are ready to subscribe and begin receiving

XM programming. There are three places to find your

eight-character XM Radio ID: on XM Mini-Tuner, on XM

Mini-Tuner package, and on XM Channel 0 (see “All

Channel Search mode” on page 7). Record the XM Radio

ID in the following eight squares for reference.

The XM Radio ID does not use the letters “I”, “O”, “S”, or “F”.

Activate your XM Satellite Radio service in the U.S. online at

http://www.xmradio.com/ or call 1-800-XM-RADIO (1-800-967-

2346). You will need a major credit card. XM will send a signal

from the satellites to activate the full channel lineup. Activation

normally takes 10 to 15 minutes, but during peak busy periods

you may need to keep your XM READY home audio system on

for up to an hour. When you can access the full channel lineup on

your XM READY home audio system, you are done. For more

information or to subscribe in Canada, visit XM on the Web at

http://www.xmradio.ca/ or call XM’s Listener Care at 1-877-

GET-XMSR (1-877-438-9677).

1 Set the operation mode selector to

TV/AV.

2 Press FM/XM repeatedly to select XM as the

input source.

In the front panel display, the XM indicator lights up

and the XM Satellite Radio information (channel

number/channel name, channel category, and artist

name/song or program title) for the currently selected

channel appears.

• You can also press INPUT on the front panel repeatedly to

select XM as the input source.

• When XM is selected as the input source, this unit

automatically recalls the previously chosen channel.

Activating XM™ Satellite Radio

Note

Basic XM™ Satellite Radio

operations

STEREO

MY BEAM

PRESET/TUNE

MEMORYSEARCH

SLEEP

INPUTMODE

ENHANCER MENU

RETURNDISPLAY

TV VOL

VOLUME

ENTER

SUR. DECODEOFF

SPORTS

5BEAM ST+3BEAM 3BEAM

MY SUR.

MUSIC MOVIE

VOL MODE

AUTO

SETUP

CATFM/XM

MACRO

INPUT1

ENTRY

CAT/

A-E

321

AUX1 AUX2

STB

DVD

AUX3

POWERPOWERSTANDBY/ON

DOCK

+10

789

TV/AV

YSP

TV/AV

[001] Preview

Lights up

FM/XM

XM™ Satellite Radio tuning (U.S.A. and Canada models only)

7 En

English

3 Search for a desired channel by using one of

the four XM Satellite Radio search modes:

• To select a channel from all channels, see “All

Channel Search mode” on this page.

• To select a channel by channel category, see

“Category Search mode” on this page.

• To select a channel from the preset channels, see

“Preset Search mode” on page 8.

• To select a channel by directly entering the channel

number, see “Direct Number Access mode” on

page 8.

• You can preset the XM Satellite Radio channels (see page 9).

• You can display the XM Satellite Radio information in the front

panel display and/or in the OSD (see page 10).

■ All Channel Search mode

1 Press SEARCH repeatedly to select “ALL CH

SEARCH”.

2 Press ENTRY ( / ) repeatedly to search

for an XM channel within all channels.

• Hold down ENTRY ( / ) for quick search.

• To change the channel category, press CAT/A-E ( / ).

• Select channel “0” to display your XM Radio ID number.

■ Category Search mode

1 Press SEARCH repeatedly to select “CAT

SEARCH”.

2 Press CAT/A-E ( / ) repeatedly to change

the XM channel category.

3 Press ENTRY ( / ) repeatedly to search

for an XM channel within the selected

channel category.

Hold down ENTRY ( / ) for quick search.

ALL CH SEARCH

ENTER

ENTRY

CAT SEARCH

ENTER

CAT/

A-E

ENTER

ENTRY

XM™ Satellite Radio tuning (U.S.A. and Canada models only)

8 En

■ Preset Search mode

Prior to selecting a preset channel in the Preset Search

mode, you must preset the XM channels. For details, see

“Presetting the XM™ Satellite Radio channels” on page 9.

1 Press SEARCH repeatedly to select

“PRESET SEARCH”.

2 Press CAT/A-E ( / ) repeatedly to change

the preset channel group (A to E).

3 Press ENTRY ( / ) repeatedly to

change the preset channel number (1 to 8).

You can also use the numeric buttons to directly input the preset

channel number.

■ Direct Number Access mode

1 Press SEARCH repeatedly to select either

“ALL CH SEARCH” or “CAT SEARCH”.

2 Press the numeric buttons (0 to 9) to enter

the desired three-digit XM channel number.

For example, to enter the number 123, press the

numeric buttons 1, 2, and 3.

The front panel display changes as follows:

• To enter a one- or two-digit number, press the corresponding

number button(s), and press ENTER to confirm the number. If

you do not press ENTER, this unit automatically confirms the

entered number after a few seconds.

• If you press a button other than the numeric buttons and

ENTER during this operation, the Direct Number Access mode

is canceled.

PRESET SEARCH

ENTER

CAT/

A-E

ENTER

ENTRY

Notes

ALL CH SEARCH

CAT SEARCH

5BEAM

ST+3BEAM

3BEAM

<XM> --1

<XM> -12

<XM> 123

XM™ Satellite Radio tuning (U.S.A. and Canada models only)

9 En

English

You can use this feature to store up to 40 XM Satellite

Radio channels (A1 to E8: 5 preset channel groups with 8

preset channel numbers each). You can then recall the

preset channels easily by selecting the preset group and

number as described in “Preset Search mode” on page 8.

1 Search for an XM channel that you want to

preset.

See “Basic XM™ Satellite Radio operations” on

page 6 for details.

The initial factory setting for all preset channels is “[001]

Preview”.

2 Press MEMORY.

The MEMORY indicator flashes in the front panel

display for about 10 seconds.

Operate steps 3 to 5 while the MEMORY indicator is flashing.

3 Press CAT/A-E ( / ) repeatedly to select a

preset group while the MEMORY indicator is

flashing.

The selected preset group appears in the front panel

display.

4 Press ENTRY ( / ) repeatedly to select

a preset number while the MEMORY indicator

is flashing.

The selected preset number appears in the front panel

display.

5 Press MEMORY or ENTER to assign the

preset group and number to the selected XM

channel while the MEMORY indicator is

flashing.

A colon (:) appears, and the MEMORY indicator

turns off in the front panel display.

When you overwrite an existing preset channel, the previously

stored XM channel information is cleared and updated.

Presetting the XM™ Satellite

Radio channels

Note

[043] XMU

Currently selected channel number

Flashes

MEMORY

Currently selected preset group

Flashing

ENTER

CAT/

A-E

C [043] XMU

Note

C8 [043] XMU

Currently selected preset number

Flashing

ENTER

ENTRY

Colon (:)

MEMORY

ENTER

C8: [043] XMU

Colon (:)

XM™ Satellite Radio tuning (U.S.A. and Canada models only)

10 En

You can display the XM Satellite Radio information

(channel number/channel name, channel category, and

artist name/song or program title) for the currently

selected channel in the front panel display or in the OSD.

If a status or error message appears in the front panel display or in

the OSD, see the “XM Satellite Radio (U.S.A. and Canada

models only)” in “Troubleshooting” on page 11.

■ Displaying the XM channel information

in the front panel display

Press DISPLAY repeatedly to toggle between the

following information displays.

When the channel number / channel name is

displayed:

When the channel category is displayed:

When the artist name / song title is displayed:

• You can set the front panel display mode: CONT. or ONCE.

When ONCE is selected, the front panel display scrolls

characters to the end once, after which the first 15 characters

appear and stay. See “SCROLL” (Front panel display scroll) in

“F.DISPLAY SET” (Front panel display settings) in the owner’s

manual (page 88).

• Undisplayable characters are displayed as spaces.

■ Displaying the XM channel information

in the OSD

Press DISPLAY.

The following screen is displayed in the OSD.

• To turn off the OSD, press DISPLAY again.

• You can set the interval for which the OSD screen is displayed

after an operation. See “OSD DISPLAY TIME” (OSD display

time) in “OSD SET” (OSD settings) in the owner’s manual

(page 89).

• To hold the XM Satellite Radio OSD information, press

ENTER. To unhold, press ENTER again.

• This unit can save up to two XM Satellite Radio OSD

information screens for future reference. To view the previous

OSD screens, press RETURN repeatedly while the current XM

Satellite Radio OSD information screen is on hold.

Displaying the XM™ Satellite

Radio information

Note

Channel number / Channel name

Artist name / Song or program title

DISPLAY

Channel category

[043] XMU

<CAT>ROCK

Coldplay / Spee

XM INFORMATION

ALL CH SEARCH

XM :043

CHAN :XMU

CAT :Rock

NAME :Coldplay

TITLE:Speed of sound

.(Coldplay/Spe)

[ ]/[ ]:CHANNEL

[ ]/[ ]:CATEGORY

DISPLAY

TROUBLESHOOTING

11 En

English

Refer to the following charts when the status messages appear during your iPod or XM Satellite Radio operations on this

unit. If you experience a problem that is not listed below, or if the instruction below does not help, set this unit to the

standby mode, disconnect the power supply cable, and contact the nearest authorized Yamaha dealer or service center.

■ iPod

In case of a transmission error with no status message appearing in the front panel display and in the OSD, check the connection

between your iPod and this unit.

■ XM Satellite Radio (U.S.A. and Canada models only)

Troubleshooting

Note

Status message Cause Remedy

See

page

This unit is in the middle of recognizing

the connection with your iPod.

This unit is in the middle of acquiring the

song lists from your iPod.

Connect error

There is a problem with the signal path

from your iPod to this unit.

Turn off this unit and reconnect the Yamaha iPod

universal dock to the DOCK terminal of this unit.

Try resetting your iPod. —

Unknown iPod

Your iPod is not supported by this unit. Only iPod (Click and Wheel), iPod nano, and iPod

mini are supported.

—

iPod connected

The connection between your iPod and

this unit is completed.

Disconnected

Your iPod is removed from the Yamaha

iPod universal dock.

Set your iPod back in the Yamaha iPod universal

dock.

Unable to play

This unit cannot play back the files stored

on your iPod.

Check the playability of the files stored on your iPod. —

Store other playable music files on your iPod. —

Status message Cause Remedy

See

page

CHECK ANTENNA

XM Mini-Tuner and Home Dock are not

connected to the XM jack of this unit or

not working properly.

Check XM Mini-Tuner and Home Dock connections

and adjust the orientation for the best reception level.

UPDATING

The XM user encryption code is being

updated.

Wait until the encryption code is updated. —

NO SIGNAL

The signal is too weak. Adjust the orientation of the indoor antenna of Home

Dock for the best reception level.

It takes longer than four seconds to decode

audio or text data.

Wait until the decoding process is finished. —

OFF AIR

The currently selected XM channel is not

broadcasting signals.

Check the channel number again or select another

XM channel.

—

<XM> - - -

The Channel Station ID (SID) is no longer

available.

- - - / - - -

No artist name or song title is available.

<CAT> - - -

No channel is available for the selected

category.

Select another channel category by pressing

CAT/A-E repeatedly.

YAMAHA ELECTRONICS CORPORATION, USA

6660 ORANGETHORPE AVE., BUENA PARK, CALIF. 90620, U.S.A.

YAMAHA CANADA MUSIC LTD.

135 MILNER AVE., SCARBOROUGH, ONTARIO M1S 3R1, CANADA

YAMAHA ELECTRONIK EUROPA G.m.b.H.

SIEMENSSTR. 22-34, 25462 RELLINGEN BEI HAMBURG, GERMANY

YAMAHA ELECTRONIQUE FRANCE S.A.

RUE AMBROISE CROIZAT BP70 CROISSY-BEAUBOURG 77312 MARNE-LA-VALLEE CEDEX02, FRANCE

YAMAHA ELECTRONICS (UK) LTD.

YAMAHA HOUSE, 200 RICKMANSWORTH ROAD WATFORD, HERTS WD18 7GQ, ENGLAND

YAMAHA SCANDINAVIA A.B.

J A WETTERGRENS GATA 1, BOX 30053, 400 43 VÄSTRA FRÖLUNDA, SWEDEN

YAMAHA MUSIC AUSTRALIA PTY. LTD.

LEVEL 1, 99 QUEENSBRIDGE STREET, SOUTHBANK, VIC 3006, AUSTRALIA

Printed in Malaysia

WK94360-2

01EN_YSP-4000_UA-RG.book Page 12 Friday, March 7, 2008 11:25 AM

Black process 45.0° 240.0 LPI

Connecting external components such as a TV or DVD player to this unit.

Connect your TV or DVD player to this unit using appropriate cables as shown below. After all connections are complete, plug the power supply cable into the AC

wall outlet. For further information on connecting other components, see pages 20 to 31 in the Owner’s Manual.

YSP-4000

QUICK REFERENCE GUIDE

Printed in Malaysia WK94420 [En]

Decide where to install this unit.

Install this unit where there are no objects such as furniture obstructing the path of sound beams. Otherwise, the desired

surround sound effects may not be achieved. You may install this unit in parallel with the wall or in the corner.

Connecting external components to this unit

Installing this unit

This quick reference guide explains steps to connect a TV and a DVD player to this unit and achieve the

surround sound effects in a quick, easy manner. For detailed operation, refer to the Owner’s Manual.

Install this unit using a rack, etc.

Depending on your installation environment, connections with external components (see “2 Connecting external components to this unit”) can be done before

installing this unit. We recommend that you temporarily place and arrange all components in order to decide which procedure must come first. In case you

install this unit on top of a rack, etc., use the supplied fasteners to prevent an accidental fall of this unit.

For further information on installation, see page 17 in the Owner’s Manual.

Install this unit in the exact center of the wall when it is

measured from the left and right corners.

Install this unit in the corner at a 40˚ to 50˚ angle from the

adjacent walls.

40˚ to 50˚

An object, such as furniture An object, such as furniture

Items used for connections and operations

in this guide

Audio pin cable (x1)

OSD* video pin cable (x1)

Optical cable (x1)

Coaxial cable (x1)

AC power supply cable (x1)

IntelliBeam microphone (x1)

Cardboard microphone stand (x1)

Demonstration DVD (x1)

*OSD: On-Screen Display

Connection

example 1

If you have connected external components,

follow the steps on the backside to start the

AUTO SETUP procedure.

Continued

on the back

Front left channel

Center channel

Front right channel

Surround left channel

Surround right channel

Front left channel

Center channel

Front right channel

Surround left channel

Surround right channel

This connection example shows a way to connect external components such as a TV or DVD player to

this unit by using the supplied cable. You can enjoy the multi-channel audio from the DVD player and the

analog/digital audio from the TV. Use the video pin cable supplied with your DVD player to make a video

connection between your DVD player and this unit.

Connect cables in the following order.

This connection example shows a way to make the most of the capability of this unit. You can

enjoy DVD audio and video with higher quality via the HDMI cable. In case your TV does not have

a built-in digital satellite tuner, cable TV tuner, or digital airwave tuner, connect a digital satellite

tuner, cable TV tuner, or digital airwave tuner via the HDMI cable. For details, see “Connections

using HDMI cables” on page 22 in the Owner’s Manual.

Connection

example 2

If you have connected external components,

follow the steps on the backside to start the

AUTO SETUP procedure.

Continued

on the back

Supplied

The following is an example of installing this unit in a rack. To prevent this unit or the floor from being scratched, we recommend putting a piece of

cloth on the floor in step 2.

y Hint

Check whether the digital audio output of your TV and DVD

player is turned on.

Audio connection

Subwoofer

OPTICAL

COAXIAL

DVD AUX 2

AUX 1TV/STB

DIGITAL INDOCK

AUX 1STB

ANTENNA

DVD/AUX 2 AUX 1 TV/STB

AUDIO IN

VIDEO IN

SUBWOOFER

COMPONENTCOMPONENTCOMPONENT

VIDEO OUT

FM75

UNBAL.

Video

output

Coaxial

digital

output

Optical

digital

output

Analog

audio

output

Video

input

DVD player

YSP-4000

To the AC wall outlet

132

Pull out the cap

before

connecting the

optical cable,

and then check

the direction to

insert the

cable.

Do not plug the power supply

cable into an AC wall outlet

until all connections are

complete.

1. Pull out the cap

2. Check the direction

Video connection

* The rear panel illustration

shows jacks and their names to

help you find them easily.

They are not exactly the same

as the ones on the actual rear

panel of this unit.

1 Audio pin cable

(Outputs TV analog audio sounds from this unit)

2 OSD video pin cable

(Displays the DVD analog video and the YSP-4000 menu

screen on the TV)

3 Optical cable

(Outputs TV digital audio sounds from this unit)

4 Digital audio pin cable

(Outputs DVD digital audio sounds from this unit)

5 AC power supply cable

(Connects this unit to the AC wall outlet)

HDMI

INPUT

HDMI

OUTPUT

HDMI

OUT

DVD

AUX1

AUX 1

ANTENNA

DVD/AUX 2 AUX 1 TV/STB

AUDIO IN

VIDEO IN

SUBWOOFER

COMPONENT

To the AC wall outlet

DVD player

YSP-4000

Do not plug

the power

supply cable

into an AC wall

outlet until all

connections

are complete.

Sold separately

Connect cables in the following order.

1 (Sold separately) 2 (Sold separately)

* The rear panel illustration

shows jacks and their names to

help you find them easily.

They are not exactly the same

as the ones on the actual rear

panel of this unit.

Audio connection

Subwoofer

Digital satellite tuner/Cable TV tuner/

Digital airwave tuner

This connection is not

necessary if your TV has a

built-in digital satellite tuner,

cable TV tuner, or digital

airwave tuner. Use the optical

cable supplied with this unit to

make an audio connection

between your TV and this unit.

For details, see “Connection

example 1”.

3 Install this unit in the

rack.

1 Place this unit in front of

the rack.

2 Place this unit upside

down and connect this unit

to your TV and DVD player.

4 Installation is completed.

Supplied

3 AC power supply cable

(Connects this unit to the AC wall outlet)

1 HDMI cable

(Displays the DVD digital video and the YSP-4000 menu

screen on the TV)

2 HDMI cable

(Inputs DVD digital audio/video signals to this unit)

y Hint

•To enjoy better surround effects, place this unit on the upper shelf to keep it away from the floor.

•You can also use the optional metal wall bracket (sold separately) to mount this unit on the wall. For details, refer to the instructions

supplied with the metal wall bracket.

Note

Be careful not to leave scratches on this unit or the rack.

y Hint

If you connect this unit to an HDMI control-compatible TV (except

some models) via HDMI, you can use the remote control supplied

with your TV to turn on or off the power, select the audio output

component, and adjust the volume level of this unit.

Note

Check whether the digital audio output of your TV and DVD player is

turned on.

HDMI connection

0810_YSP-4000_En_guide.p65 8/10/07, 10:52 PM1

Press ENTER to start the AUTO

SETUP procedure, and then

leave the room within 10 seconds.

The following screen appears on the TV. Leave the room

within 10 seconds before the AUTO SETUP procedure

starts.

The setup screen automatically changes during the AUTO

SETUP procedure.

When the AUTO SETUP procedure is completed, the

following screen appears on the TV.

If “ENVIRONMENT CHECK (FAILED) is displayed, see page

42 in the Owner’s Manual and then run the procedure again.

y Hint

• The result may differ depending on the environment.

• If any error occurs, the corresponding error message appears

on the screen. In this case, see “Error messages for AUTO

SETUP” on page 43 in the Owner’s Manual and then follow

the instructions. To start the AUTO SETUP procedure once

again, press RETURN.

Press ENTER.

The following screen appears on the TV for 2 seconds and

then the menu screen disappears from the TV.

Disconnect the IntelliBeam

microphone.

The AUTO SETUP has completed. Keep the IntelliBeam

microphone in a safe place.

The settings are automatically saved in the system memory.

Enjoy TV or DVD digital audio in surround sound.

For instructions on how to operate or set your TV or DVD player, refer to the owner’s manual supplied with each component.

Enjoying surround sound

Carry out the AUTO SETUP to adjust the settings that best match your

listening environment

The IntelliBeam technology allows you to achieve sound adjustments that best match your listening environment. It is normal for loud test tones to be output

during the AUTO SETUP procedure. Make sure that there are no children around in the listening room while the AUTO SETUP procedure is in progress.

Press STANDBY/ON on the

remote control.

The power of this unit turns on.

Before operations, insert batteries into the remote control

(see page 32 in the Owner’s Manual).

If necessary, adjust the volume level of this unit.

If you have connected the subwoofer, set the volume and

crossover/high cut frequency. Refer to the note on page

38 in the Owner’s Manual.

Check the digital signal being output at this unit.

The input channel indicators (see page 8 in the Owner’s Manual) are lit in the front panel display, and they switch

according to the channel composition of the corresponding input source. If the sound is output from your TV

speakers, mute the volume on your TV. For details about digital audio input signals, see page 58 in the Owner’s

Manual.

Press VOLUME +/

on the remote control to adjust the volume

level of this unit.

Press one of the beam mode buttons on the remote control

to select the desired beam mode.

Select one of the six beam modes that best matches the current input source of this unit.

For further information on the beam modes, see page 56 in the Owner’s Manual.

To fine-tune the listening environment parameters manually or make advanced settings for speaker positions,

sound beams, etc., see “MANUAL SETUP” on page 76 in the Owner’s Manual.

AUTO SETUP START

Will begin in 10sec

Please leave the room

**--------

[RETURN]:Cancel

Enjoying TV in surround sound

SHOW RESULT

MEASUREMENT COMPLETE

BEAM MODE :5 BEAM

SUBWOOFER :NOT APPLICABLE

[ENTER]:Save set-up

[RETURN]:Do not save set-up

AUTO SETUP COMPLETE

Please remove the MIC from

the YSP and the listening

position.

TV/AV

YSP

ENTER

ENTRY

A-E

ENHANCER

DISPLAY RETURN

TV/AV

YSP

ENTER

ENTRY

A-E

ENHANCER

DISPLAY RETURN

Select the TV channel using the

remote control supplied with

your TV.

Set the operation mode selector

to YSP.

This unit switches to the YSP operation mode.

Press TV on the remote control

of this unit.

This unit switches to the TV playback mode.

More than 1.8 m (6.0 ft)

Within 1 m

(3.3 ft)

IntelliBeam

microphone

Cardboard

microphone

stand

Listening

position

Place the IntelliBeam microphone on

the extended center line of this unit

and 1.8 m (6.0 ft) or more away from

it. Also, make sure place the

IntelliBeam microphone within 1 m

(3.3 ft) upper or lower from the center

height of this unit.

IntelliBeam

microphone

Center line

Carry out the AUTO SETUP (IntelliBeam)

INTELLIBEAM MIC

1234

Set the IntelliBeam microphone at your normal listening position.

Use the supplied cardboard microphone stand or a tripod to place the IntelliBeam microphone at the same height as your ears would

be when you are seated.

IntelliBeam microphone (supplied)

Connect the supplied IntelliBeam microphone to the INTELLIBEAM MIC

jack on the front panel.

You may want to use the supplied cardboard microphone stand for the AUTO SETUP. Assemble the stand and place the IntelliBeam

microphone on top of it as shown below.

MUTE TV INPUT TV MUTE

VOLUME CH TV VOL

Enjoying DVDs in surround sound

Select the DVD video input on

your TV.

Set the operation mode selector

to YSP.

This unit switches to the YSP operation mode.

1) Press DVD on the remote

control of this unit.

This unit switches to the DVD playback mode.

Play back the supplied demonstration

DVD on the DVD player.

Set the operation mode selector

to YSP.

This unit switches to the YSP operation mode.

Press and hold AUTO SETUP for

more than 2 seconds.

The menu screen appears on the TV.

If the menu screen does not appear, check the OSD video

pin cable (see the connection example on the front page).

Check the following points.

About the IntelliBeam microphone

• Is the microphone placed on an imaginary center line drawn

from this unit?

• Is the microphone placed within 1 m (3.3 ft) upper or lower

from the center height of this unit?

• Is the microphone placed more than 1.8 m (6.0 ft) from the

front of this unit?

About the room environment

• Is your listening room kept as quiet as possible?

Prepare to leave the room.

The best setting may not be done if you are in the room.

Prepare to leave the room in 10 seconds after pressing

ENTER in step 10.

y Hint

• When leaving the room, bring this guide with you.

• Wait outside the room during the AUTO SETUP procedure.

• The AUTO SETUP procedure takes about 3 minutes.

• To cancel the AUTO SETUP procedure after it is started,

press RETURN.

Turn on the power of your TV.

Select the appropriate video

input on your TV.

If the OSD video pin cable is connected to the video input 1

on the TV as shown in the connection example, switch the

video input to “1”.

Within 1 m

(3.3 ft)

TV/AV

YSP

ENTER

ENTRY

A-E

ENHANCER

DISPLAY RETURN

AUTO SETUP

PREPARATION & CHECK

Please connect the MIC.

Please place the MIC at least

1.8m/6ft away from the YSP

unit. The MIC should be set

at ear level when seated.

After [ENTER] is pressed,

please leave the room.

[ENTER]:Start [RETURN]:Cancel

Measurement takes about 3min.

231

VOL MODE

AUTO

SETUP

INPUTMODE

SLEEP

5BEAM 3BEAMST+3BEAM

A-E

PRESET/TUNE

SEARCH MEMORY

INTELLIBEAM MIC

TV/AV

YSP

ENTER

A-E

DISPLAY RETURN

TV/AV

YSP

ENTER

A-E

DISPLAY RETURN

AUX1 AUX2 AUX3

DVD

STB

INPUT1

PRESET/TUNE

SEARCH MEMORY

MACRO

AUX1 AUX2 AUX3

DVD

VOL MODE

AUTO

SETUP

INPUTMODE

SLEEP

STB

INPUT1

A-E

PRESET/TUNE

SEARCH MEMORY

MACRO

231

5BEAM

STEREO MY BEAM MY SUR.

3BEAMST+3BEAM

Cardboard

microphone stand

Upper bound

position of the

microphone

Lower bound position

of the microphone

AUX1 AUX2 AUX3

DVD

POWER POWERSTANDBY/ON

INPUT1 MACRO

VOLUME

MIN MAX

CROSSOVER/

HIGH CUT

MIN MAX

Subwoofer

Center height of

this unit

Continued from the front

Cardboard microphone stand (supplied)

Input channel indicators

3 4

0810_YSP-4000_En_guide.p65 8/10/07, 10:52 PM2

Documenttranscriptie

00cv_YSP-4000_UA.fm Page 1 Thursday, September 20, 2007 10:08 AM UA YSP-4000 YSP-4000 Digital Sound ProjectorTM © 2007 YAMAHA ELECTRONICS CORPORATION, USA 6660 ORANGETHORPE AVE., BUENA PARK, CALIF. 90620, U.S.A. YAMAHA CANADA MUSIC LTD. 135 MILNER AVE., SCARBOROUGH, ONTARIO M1S 3R1, CANADA YAMAHA ELECTRONIK EUROPA G.m.b.H. SIEMENSSTR. 22-34, 25462 RELLINGEN BEI HAMBURG, GERMANY YAMAHA ELECTRONIQUE FRANCE S.A. RUE AMBROISE CROIZAT BP70 CROISSY-BEAUBOURG 77312 MARNE-LA-VALLEE CEDEX02, FRANCE YAMAHA ELECTRONICS (UK) LTD. YAMAHA HOUSE, 200 RICKMANSWORTH ROAD WATFORD, HERTS WD18 7GQ, ENGLAND YAMAHA SCANDINAVIA A.B. J A WETTERGRENS GATA 1, BOX 30053, 400 43 VÄSTRA FRÖLUNDA, SWEDEN YAMAHA MUSIC AUSTRALIA PTY, LTD. 17-33 MARKET ST., SOUTH MELBOURNE, 3205 VIC., AUSTRALIA All rights reserved. OWNER’S MANUAL Printed in Malaysia WK94290 01EN_YSP-4000_UA.book Page i Wednesday, December 26, 2007 3:00 PM IMPORTANT SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS IMPORTANT SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS CAUTION RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK DO NOT OPEN CAUTION: TO REDUCE THE RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK, DO NOT REMOVE COVER (OR BACK). NO USER-SERVICEABLE PARTS INSIDE. REFER SERVICING TO QUALIFIED SERVICE PERSONNEL. ■ Explanation of Graphical Symbols The lightning flash with arrowhead symbol, within an equilateral triangle, is intended to alert you to the presence of uninsulated “dangerous voltage” within the product’s enclosure that may be of sufficient magnitude to constitute a risk of electric shock to persons. The exclamation point within an equilateral triangle is intended to alert you to the presence of important operating and maintenance (servicing) instructions in the literature accompanying the appliance. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 Read these instructions. 8 Do not install near any heat sources such as radiators, heat registers, stoves, or other apparatus (including amplifiers) that produce heat. 9 Do not defeat the safety purpose of the polarized or groundingtype plug. A polarized plug has two blades with one wider than the other. A grounding type plug has two blades and a third grounding prong. The wide blade or the third prong are provided for your safety. If the provided plug does not fit into your outlet, consult an electrician for replacement of the obsolete outlet. Keep these instructions. Heed all warnings. Follow all instructions. Do not use this apparatus near water. Clean only with dry cloth. Do not block any ventilation openings. Install in accordance with the manufacturer’s instructions. 10 Protect the power cord from being walked on or pinched particularly at plugs, convenience receptacles, and the point where they exit from the apparatus. 11 Only use attachments/accessories specified by the manufacturer. 12 Use only with the cart, stand, tripod, bracket, or table specified by the manufacturer, or sold with the apparatus. When a cart is used, use caution when moving the cart/apparatus combination to avoid injury from tip-over. 13 Unplug this apparatus during lightning storms or when unused for long periods of time. 14 Refer all servicing to qualified service personnel. Servicing is required when the apparatus has been damaged in any way, such as power supply cable or plug is damaged, liquid has been spilled or objects have fallen into the apparatus, the apparatus has been exposed to rain or moisture, does not operate normally, or has been dropped. i En Black process 45.0° 240.0 LPI 01EN_YSP-4000_UA.book Page ii Wednesday, December 26, 2007 3:00 PM IMPORTANT SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS FCC INFORMATION (for US customers) 1. IMPORTANT NOTICE: DO NOT MODIFY THIS UNIT! This product, when installed as indicated in the instructions contained in this manual, meets FCC requirements. Modifications not expressly approved by Yamaha may void your authority, granted by the FCC, to use the product. Compliance with FCC regulations does not guarantee that interference will not occur in all installations. If this product is found to be the source of interference, which can be determined by turning the unit “OFF” and “ON”, please try to eliminate the problem by using one of the following measures: 2. IMPORTANT: Relocate either this product or the device that is being affected by the interference. When connecting this product to accessories and/or another product use only high quality shielded cables. Cable/s supplied with this product MUST be used. Follow all installation instructions. Failure to follow instructions could void your FCC authorization to use this product in the USA. 3. NOTE: This product has been tested and found to comply with the requirements listed in FCC Regulations, Part 15 for Class “B” digital devices. Compliance with these requirements provides a reasonable level of assurance that your use of this product in a residential environment will not result in harmful interference with other electronic devices. This equipment generates/uses radio frequencies and, if not installed and used according to the instructions found in the users manual, may cause interference harmful to the operation of other electronic devices. Utilize power outlets that are on different branch (circuit breaker or fuse) circuits or install AC line filter/s. In the case of radio or TV interference, relocate/reorient the antenna. If the antenna lead-in is 300 ohm ribbon lead, change the lead-in to coaxial type cable. If these corrective measures do not produce satisfactory results, please contact the local retailer authorized to distribute this type of product. If you can not locate the appropriate retailer, please contact Yamaha Electronics Corp., U.S.A. 6660 Orangethorpe Ave, Buena Park, CA 90620. The above statements apply ONLY to those products distributed by Yamaha Corporation of America or its subsidiaries. We Want You Listening For A Lifetime Yamaha and the Electronic Industries Association’s Consumer Electronics Group want you to get the most out of your equipment by playing it at a safe level. One that lets the sound come through loud and clear without annoying blaring or distortion – and, most importantly, without affecting your sensitive hearing. Since hearing damage from loud sounds is often undetectable until it is too late, Yamaha and the Electronic Industries Association’s Consumer Electronics Group recommend you to avoid prolonged exposure from excessive volume levels. ii En Black process 45.0° 240.0 LPI 01EN_YSP-4000_UA.book Page iii Wednesday, December 26, 2007 3:00 PM CAUTION: READ THIS BEFORE OPERATING THIS UNIT. Caution: Read this before operating this unit. 1 To assure the finest performance, please read this manual carefully. Keep it in a safe place for future reference. 2 Install this sound system in a well ventilated, cool, dry, clean place with at least 5 cm (2 in) of space above (or below) this unit – away from direct sunlight, heat sources, vibration, dust, moisture, and/or cold. 3 Locate this unit away from other electrical appliances, motors, or transformers to avoid humming sounds. 4 Do not expose this unit to sudden temperature changes from cold to hot, and do not locate this unit in an environment with high humidity (i.e. a room with a humidifier) to prevent condensation inside this unit, which may cause an electrical shock, fire, damage to this unit, and/or personal injury. 5 Avoid installing this unit where foreign object may fall onto this unit and/or this unit may be exposed to liquid dripping or splashing. On the top of this unit, do not place: – Other components, as they may cause damage and/or discoloration on the surface of this unit. – Burning objects (i.e. candles), as they may cause fire, damage to this unit, and/or personal injury. – Containers with liquid in them, as they may fall and liquid may cause electrical shock to the user and/or damage to this unit. 6 Do not cover this unit with a newspaper, tablecloth, curtain, etc. in order not to obstruct heat radiation. If the temperature inside this unit rises, it may cause fire, damage to this unit, and/or personal injury. 7 Do not plug in this unit to a wall outlet until all connections are complete. 8 Do not operate this unit upside-down. It may overheat, possibly causing damage. 9 Do not use force on switches, knobs and/or cords. 10 When disconnecting the power supply cable from the wall outlet, grasp the plug; do not pull the cable. 11 Do not clean this unit with chemical solvents; this might damage the finish. Use a clean, dry cloth. 12 Only voltage specified on this unit must be used. Using this unit with a higher voltage than specified is dangerous and may cause fire, damage to this unit, and/or personal injury. Yamaha will not be held responsible for any damage resulting from use of this unit with a voltage other than specified. 13 To prevent damage by lightning, keep the power supply cable disconnected from a wall outlet or this unit during a lightning storm. 14 Do not attempt to modify or fix this unit. Contact qualified Yamaha service personnel when any service is needed. The cabinet should never be opened for any reasons. 15 When not planning to use this unit for long periods of time (i.e. vacation), disconnect the power supply cable from the wall outlet. 16 Be sure to read the “Troubleshooting” section on common operating errors before concluding that this unit is faulty. 17 Before moving this unit, press STANDBY/ON to set this unit in standby mode, and disconnect the power supply cable from the wall outlet. WARNING TO REDUCE THE RISK OF FIRE OR ELECTRIC SHOCK, DO NOT EXPOSE THIS UNIT TO RAIN OR MOISTURE. WARNING THE POWER SUPPLY CABLE OF THIS UNIT MUST BE CONNECTED TO THE MAIN SOCKET OUTLET VIA A PROTECTIVE EARTHING CONNECTION. This unit is not disconnected from the AC power source as long as it is connected to the AC wall outlet, even if this unit itself is turned off by STANDBY/ON. This state is called the standby mode. In this state, this unit is designed to consume a very small quantity of power. IMPORTANT Please record the serial number of this unit in the space below. MODEL: Serial No.: The serial number is located on the rear of the unit. Retain this Owner’s Manual in a safe place for future reference. FOR CANADIAN CUSTOMERS To prevent electric shock, match wide blade of plug to wide slot and fully insert. This Class B digital apparatus complies with Canadian ICES-003. FOR U.K. CUSTOMERS If the socket outlets in the home are not suitable for the plug supplied with this appliance, it should be cut off and an appropriate 3-pin plug fitted. For details, refer to the instructions described below. Note The plug severed from the mains lead must be destroyed, as a plug with a bared flexible cord is hazardous if engaged in a live socket outlet. IMPORTANT THE WIRES IN THIS MAINS LEAD ARE COLOURED IN ACCORDANCE WITH THE FOLLOWING CODE: GREEN-AND-YELLOW: EARTH BLUE: NEUTRAL BROWN: LIVE As the colours of the wires in the mains lead of this apparatus may not correspond with the coloured markings identifying the terminals in your plug, proceed as follows: The wire which is coloured GREEN-AND-YELLOW must be connected to the terminal in the plug which is marked by the letter “E” or the safety earth symbol or coloured GREEN or GREENAND-YELLOW. The wire which is coloured BLUE must be connected to the terminal marked with the letter “N” or coloured BLACK. The wire which is coloured BROWN must be connected to the terminal marked with the letter “L” or coloured RED. 18 Condensation will form when the surrounding temperature changes suddenly. Disconnect the power supply cable from the outlet, then leave the unit alone. 19 When using the unit for a long time, the unit may become warm. CAUTION Danger of explosion if battery is incorrectly replaced. Replace only with the same or equivalent type. Turn the power off, then leave the unit alone for cooling. 20 Install this unit near the AC outlet and where the AC power plug can be reached easily. 21 The batteries shall not be exposed to excessive heat such as sunshine, fire or the like. iii En Black process 45.0° 240.0 LPI CAUTION Use of controls or adjustments or performance of procedures other than those specified herein may result in hazardous radiation exposure. 01EN_YSP-4000_UA.book Page 1 Wednesday, December 26, 2007 3:00 PM Contents Overview ................................................................. 2 Features .................................................................. 3 Using this manual .................................................. 5 Supplied accessories .............................................. 6 Controls and functions .......................................... 7 PREPARATION Installation ............................................................ 17 Before installing this unit ........................................ 17 Installing this unit ................................................... 17 Connections .......................................................... 20 Getting started ..................................................... 32 Using SET MENU ................................................ 34 Displaying the OSD (on-screen display) ................ 34 The flow chart of SET MENU ................................ 35 Changing OSD language ..................................... 36 AUTO SETUP (IntelliBeam) .............................. 37 The flow chart of AUTO SETUP ........................... 37 Installing the IntelliBeam microphone ................... 38 Using AUTO SETUP (IntelliBeam) ....................... 39 Convenient usage of the system memory ............... 44 Saving settings ........................................................ 44 Loading settings ...................................................... 45 BASIC OPERATION Playing back sound clearly (My Beam) ..............63 Using auto-adjust function ...................................... 63 Using manual-adjust function ................................. 64 Using sound field programs .................................65 CINEMA DSP programs ........................................ 67 Using the music enhancer ....................................70 Using the volume mode (Night listening enhancer/ TV volume equal mode) ...................................71 Using the sleep timer ............................................72 Displaying the input source information ............74 Using the HDMI control feature .........................75 ADVANCED OPERATION MANUAL SETUP ................................................76 Using MANUAL SETUP ....................................... 77 BEAM MENU ........................................................ 78 SOUND MENU ...................................................... 82 INPUT MENU ........................................................ 84 DISPLAY MENU ................................................... 88 Adjusting the audio balance ................................90 Using the test tone .................................................. 90 Using the audio output being played back .............. 91 Selecting the input mode ......................................93 Adjusting the system parameters .......................94 Using the system parameters .................................. 94 Setting the MEMORY PROTECT ......................... 95 Setting the MAX VOLUME ................................... 96 Setting the TURN ON VOLUME .......................... 96 Setting the MONITOR CHECK ............................. 97 Setting the DEMO MODE ..................................... 98 Setting the PANEL INPUT KEY ........................... 99 Disabling the front panel keys .............................. 100 Setting the FACTORY PRESET .......................... 101 Remote control features .....................................103 Setting remote control codes ................................ 103 Controlling other components .............................. 104 Using the TV macro ............................................. 107 ADDITIONAL INFORMATION Using the system memory ................................... 44 2-channel stereo playback ....................................... 62 5-channel stereo playback ....................................... 62 ADVANCED OPERATION Installing batteries in the remote control ................ 32 Operation range of the remote control .................... 32 Turning on this unit or setting it to the standby mode ............................. 33 Enjoying stereo sound ..........................................62 BASIC OPERATION SETUP 5 Beam .................................................................... 56 Stereo plus 3 Beam ................................................. 57 3 Beam .................................................................... 57 My Surround ........................................................... 57 Enjoying 2-channel sources in surround sound ............................................... 59 Enjoying TV in surround sound ............................. 60 Adjusting surround mode parameters ..................... 61 SETUP Before connecting components ............................... 21 Connections using HDMI cables ............................ 22 Connecting a TV ..................................................... 23 Connecting a DVD player/recorder ........................ 24 Connecting a digital satellite tuner or a cable TV tuner 25 Connecting a digital airwave tuner ......................... 26 Connecting a portable audio player ........................ 27 Connecting other external components .................. 28 Connecting a subwoofer ......................................... 29 Connecting the FM antenna .................................... 30 About the RS-232C/IR-OUT/IR IN terminals ........ 30 Connecting the AC power supply cable ................. 31 Enjoying surround sound ....................................56 PREPARATION Front panel ................................................................ 7 Front panel display ................................................... 8 Rear panel ................................................................. 9 Remote control (Europe, Australia, Asia, and Korea models) .............................................. 11 Remote control (U.S.A. and Canada models) ......... 14 Manual preset tuning .............................................. 53 Selecting a preset station ........................................ 54 Displaying the Radio Data System information (Europe model only) ........................................... 54 INTRODUCTION INTRODUCTION Playback ............................................................... 47 FM tuning ............................................................. 50 FM controls and functions ...................................... 50 Automatic tuning .................................................... 51 Manual tuning ......................................................... 51 Automatic preset tuning .......................................... 52 ADDITIONAL INFORMATION Troubleshooting ..................................................109 Glossary ...............................................................113 Index ....................................................................115 Specifications ......................................................116 List of remote control codes...........................................i 1 En Black process 45.0° 240.0 LPI English Selecting the input source ....................................... 47 Playing back sources ............................................... 48 Adjusting the volume .............................................. 49 01EN_YSP-4000_UA.book Page 2 Wednesday, December 26, 2007 3:00 PM Overview Overview It is generally accepted that in order to fully enjoy the benefits of surround sound at home, you must endure the agony of wiring and installing a great number of speakers in the hope that your listening room will give you the same kind of surround sound experience as your local movie theater. Yamaha YSP-4000 Digital Sound Projector challenges this preconception that complicated speaker setup and troublesome wiring go hand-in-hand with the enjoyment of multi-channel surround sound. This slimline unit does away with the need for complicated wiring and installation worries, leaving you with a unit that is not only easy to set up, but is also capable of reproducing the kind of powerful surround sound you have been waiting for from its built-in 2 woofers and 40 full-range small speakers. You can fine-tune the parameters of this unit to adjust the delay time for separate sound beams, resulting in highly directional sound that comes in on the listening position from all directions. The YSP-4000 projects sound beams containing surround sound information for the front right (R), front left (L), surround right (SR), and surround left (SL) speaker positions, which are reflected off the walls of your listening room before reaching the actual listening position. With the addition of center (C) sound beams, this Digital Sound Projector creates true-to-life 5.1-channel surround sound that makes you feel as if there are actual speakers around the room. Sit back and enjoy the real sound experience of this simple, yet stylish Digital Sound Projector. Imaginary front right speaker R C SR L SL Imaginary surround right speaker Imaginary front left speaker Imaginary center speaker Listening position Imaginary surround left speaker 2 En Black process 45.0° 240.0 LPI 01EN_YSP-4000_UA.book Page 3 Wednesday, December 26, 2007 3:00 PM Features Features My Surround In addition to the above mentioned beam modes, this unit is equipped with My Surround beam mode that allows you to enjoy surround system even in a small listening area. My Surround is a function integrated and optimized with DiMAGIC’s Euphony technology and Yamaha’s Beam reproduction system. My Beam This unit employs My Beam that ensures a clear sound in a noisy environment. You can adjust the beam angle manually or automatically using the supplied remote control to the maximum of 45°, rightward and leftward. Cinema DSP This unit employs the Cinema DSP technology developed by Yamaha Electronics Corp. that lets you experience movies at home with all the original dramatic sound impact. HDMI™ (High-Definition Multimedia Interface) ◆ HDMI interface for standard, enhanced, or high-definition video (including 1080p video signal transmission) as well as multi-channel digital audio based on HDCP ◆ Simple and easy connections with HDMI supported external components ◆ Functional link with an HDMI control-compatible TV ◆ Analog video up-scaling from 480i (NTSC)/576i (PAL) or 480p (NTSC)/576p (PAL) to 720p or 1080i Versatile Remote Control The supplied remote control comes with preset remote control codes used to control the DVD player, VCR, cable TV tuner, and digital satellite tuner connected to this unit. In addition, the remote control is equipped with the macro capability that enables a series of operations with the press of a single button. ◆ Dolby Digital This is the standard audio signal format used on various digital media such as DVD, Blu-ray, and HD DVD. This surround technology delivers high-quality digital audio for up to 5.1 discrete channels to produce a directional and more realistic effect. ◆ DTS This is the standard audio signal format used on various digital media such as DVD, Blu-ray, and HD DVD. This surround technology delivers high-quality digital audio for up to 5.1 discrete channels to produce a directional and more realistic effect. ◆ Dolby Pro Logic This sophisticated, matrix decoding technology up-converts any 2-channel source audio to a 5.1-channel full bandwidth playback, resulting in a surround sound experience. ◆ Dolby Pro Logic II This is a redesigned version of Dolby Pro Logic that employs 2 stereo surround channels, a subwoofer, and a greatly enhanced steering logic. This improved technology provides an exceptionally stable sound field that simulates 5.1 to a much greater degree than the original Dolby Pro Logic. ◆ DTS Neo:6 This technology decodes the conventional 2-channel sources for 6-channel playback, enabling playback with the full-range channels with higher separation. Music mode and Cinema mode are available to play back music and movie sources respectively. ◆ Music Enhancer to improve the sound quality of compression artifacts such as the MP3 format. ◆ Neural Surround decoder (U.S.A and Canada models only) Sophisticated FM tuner ◆ 40-station random and direct preset tuning ◆ Automatic preset tuning ◆ Radio Data System capability (Europe model only) XM™ Satellite Radio (U.S.A. and Canada models only) ◆ XM Satellite Radio tuning capability (using the XM MiniTuner Dock, and Antenna sold separately by XM Satellite Radio) ◆ Neural Surround decoder to play back the XM HD content of XM Satellite Radio broadcasts in multi-channels, resulting in a full surround sound experience ◆ XM Satellite Radio information displaying capability iPod™ Controlling Capability (U.S.A., Canada, and Australia models only) ◆ DOCK terminal to connect a Yamaha iPod universal dock (such as the YDS-10, sold separately), which supports iPod (Click and Wheel), iPod nano, and iPod mini ◆ Playback information displaying capability ◆ Battery charging capability 3 En Black process 45.0° 240.0 LPI English AUTO SETUP (IntelliBeam) This unit employs the automatic sound beam and acoustic optimization technology with the aid of the supplied IntelliBeam microphone. You can avoid troublesome listening-based speaker setup and achieve highly accurate sound beam adjustments that best match your listening environment. Compatibility with the Newest Technologies This unit employs decoders compatible with Dolby Digital, DTS, Dolby Pro Logic, Dolby Pro Logic II, DTS Neo:6, Music Enhancer, and Neural Surround. INTRODUCTION Digital Sound Projector™ The Digital Sound Projector technology allows one slim unit to control and steer multiple channels of sound to generate multi-channel surround sound, thus eliminates the need for satellite loudspeakers and cabling normally associated with conventional surround sound systems. This unit also employs the beam modes that let you enjoy the surround sound (5 Beam, Stereo plus 3 Beam, 3 Beam, and My Surround), 2-channel and 5-channel stereo playback, and My Beam. 01EN_YSP-4000_UA.book Page 4 Wednesday, December 26, 2007 3:00 PM Features The “ ” logo and “IntelliBeam” are trademarks of YAMAHA CORPORATION. Manufactured under license from 1 Ltd. Worldwide patents applied for. The “ The “ ” logo and “Cinema DSP” are registered trademarks of YAMAHA CORPORATION. Manufactured under license from Dolby Laboratories. “Dolby”, “Pro Logic”, and the double-D symbol are trademarks of Dolby Laboratories. ” logo and “Digital Sound Projector™” are trademarks of 1 Ltd. TruBass, SRS and the “ ” symbol are registered trademarks of SRS Labs, Inc. TruBass technology is incorporated under license from SRS Labs, Inc. ™ “DTS” and “Neo:6” are registered trademarks of DTS, Inc. “HDMI”, the “HDMI” logo and “High-Definition Multimedia Interface” are trademarks or registered trademarks of HDMI Licensing LLC. 4 En Black process 45.0° 240.0 LPI is a trademark of DiMAGIC Co., Ltd. 01EN_YSP-4000_UA.book Page 5 Wednesday, December 26, 2007 3:00 PM Using this manual Using this manual 1 Install this unit in your listening room. See “Installation” on page 17. 2 Connect this unit to your TV and other external components. See “Connections” on page 20. 3 Prepare the remote control and turn on the power of this unit. See “Getting started” on page 32. 4 Run AUTO SETUP. See “AUTO SETUP (IntelliBeam)” on page 37. 5 Play back a source. See “Playback” on page 47. 6 Change the beam modes and/or CINEMA DSP settings. See “Enjoying surround sound” on page 56. INTRODUCTION Notes • This manual describes how to connect and operate this unit. For details regarding the operation of external components, refer to the supplied owner’s manual for each component. • Operations in this manual use keys on the supplied remote control of this unit unless otherwise specified. • y indicates a tip for your operation. • This manual is printed prior to production. Designs and specifications are subject to change in part as a result of improvements, etc. In case of differences between the manual and the product, the product has priority. If you want to make additional settings and adjustments English 7 Run MANUAL SETUP to fine-tune settings and/or set remote control codes. See “MANUAL SETUP” on page 76 and “Remote control features” on page 103. 5 En Black process 45.0° 240.0 LPI 01EN_YSP-4000_UA.book Page 6 Wednesday, December 26, 2007 3:00 PM Supplied accessories Supplied accessories Check that you have received all of the following parts. Remote control (×1) STANDBY/ON Fasteners (×4) Optical cable (×1) POWER POWER AV TV DOCK DVD AUX1 STB TV AUX2 AUX3 TV INPUT1 MACRO FM/XM PRESET/TUNE SEARCH CAT MEMORY AUTO VOL MODE SETUP INPUTMODE SLEEP 5BEAM ST+3BEAM 1 2 3 STEREO MY BEAM MY SUR. 4 5 6 MUSIC MOVIE SPORTS 7 8 OFF 0 ENHANCER Digital audio pin cable (×1) 9 SUR. DECODE +10 ENTRY ENTER YSP DISPLAY (Orange) MENU TV/AV CAT/ A-E Cable clamp (×1) 3BEAM IntelliBeam microphone (×1) RETURN VOLUME CH MUTE TV INPUT CH LEVEL TEST Audio pin cable (×1) TV VOL TV MUTE CODE SET Cardboard microphone stand (×1) (White/Red) REFERENCE GUIDE (iPod/XM Radio) (×1) (U.S.A. and Canada models) Batteries (×2) (AA, R6, UM-3) Indoor FM antenna (×1) (U.S.A., Canada, and Australia models only) Demonstration DVD (×1) OSD* video pin cable (×1) QUICK REFERENCE GUIDE (Yellow) * OSD: On-Screen Display AC power supply cable (×1) 6 En Black process 45.0° 240.0 LPI * The number of provided languages varies depending on the model. 01EN_YSP-4000_UA.book Page 7 Wednesday, December 26, 2007 3:00 PM Controls and functions Controls and functions INTRODUCTION Front panel AUX 3 INTELLIBEAM MIC INPUT 1 3 4 AUX 3 INTELLIBEAM MIC VOLUME + STANDBY/ON 2 5 6 INPUT VOLUME 7 + STANDBY/ON 1 Front panel display Shows information about the operational status of this unit. 6 VOLUME +/– Controls the volume level of all audio channels (see page 49). 2 Remote control sensor Receives infrared signals from the remote control. 7 STANDBY/ON Turns on the power of this unit or sets it to the standby mode (see page 33). 3 AUX 3 input jack Connect your portable audio player (see page 27). 4 INTELLIBEAM MIC jack Connect the supplied IntelliBeam microphone for AUTO SETUP (see page 38). 5 INPUT Press repeatedly to switch between input sources (see page 47). Outputs a test tone to experience the sound beam (see page 98). Notes • When you turn on this unit, you will hear a click sound followed by the 4 to 5-second interval before sound reproducing. • In the standby mode, this unit consumes a small amount of power in order to receive infrared signals from the remote control or to search for HDMI signals. English 7 En Black process 45.0° 240.0 LPI 01EN_YSP-4000_UA.book Page 8 Wednesday, December 26, 2007 3:00 PM Controls and functions Front panel display 2 1 890A B C 3 D 4 E 5 6 7 F 1 HDMI indicator Lights up when the signal of the selected input source is input at the HDMI IN jack(s). A NIGHT indicator Lights up when one of the night listening enhancers is selected (see page 71). 2 TUNER indicators FM: Light up when this unit is receiving an FM broadcast. XM: MEMORY flashes during the XM preset operation (U.S.A. and Canada models only). B SLEEP indicator Lights up when the sleep timer is set (see page 72). 3 CINEMA DSP indicator Lights up when a sound field program is selected (see page 67). 4 PCM indicator Lights up when this unit is reproducing PCM (Pulse Code Modulation) digital audio signals. 5 Decoder indicators Light up when the corresponding decoder operates (see page 58). Note The neural decoder is available for the U.S.A. and Canada models only. C Radio Data System indicators (Europe model only) Show the current Radio Data System status. D XM indicator (U.S.A. and Canada models only) Lights up when XM is selected as the input source. E Multi-information display Shows information with alphanumeric characters when you adjust the parameters of this unit. F Input channel indicators Show information when you adjust the parameters of this unit. The channel component of the current digital input signal is displayed (see page 58). 6 ENHANCER indicator Lights up when the Music Enhancer is selected (see page 70). 7 Volume level indicator Displays the current volume level. 8 DOCK indicator (U.S.A., Canada, and Australia models only) Lights up when your iPod (Click and Wheel), iPod nano, or iPod mini is connected to this unit via the DOCK terminal on this unit. 9 SRS TruBass indicator Lights up when TruBass is turned on (see page 84). 0 EQUAL indicator Lights up when the TV volume equal mode is selected (see page 71). 8 En Black process 45.0° 240.0 LPI y You can adjust the brightness and display setting of the front panel display using the F.DISPLAY SET parameter in MANUAL SETUP (see page 88). 01EN_YSP-4000_UA.book Page 9 Wednesday, December 26, 2007 3:00 PM Controls and functions Rear panel The illustration below shows the rear panel of the U.S.A. and Canada models. DVD INTRODUCTION AUX 1 1 2 4 IN 5 3 (U.S.A. and Canada models) OUT HDMI IR-OUT IR-OUT 6 7 8 FM75 UNBAL. COMPONENT COMPONENT 9 0 A BC D E IR IN RS-232C ANTENNA SUBWOOFER COMPONENT DVD AUX 2 COAXIAL OPTICAL SYSTEM CONNECTOR F STB VIDEO OUT G H I DVD/AUX 2 VIDEO IN J K AUX 1 L TV/STB AUX 1 AUDIO IN M 1 AUX 1 HDMI IN jack Connect your digital satellite tuner, cable TV tuner, digital air wave tuner, or game console via an HDMI connection (see page 22). 2 DVD HDMI IN jack Connect your DVD player via an HDMI connection (see page 22). 3 HDMI OUT jack Connect to the HDMI IN jack on your HDMI component such as a TV or a projector connected to this unit (see page 22). 4 AC IN Connect the supplied AC power supply cable (see page 31). 5 IR-OUT terminal This is a control expansion terminal for commercial use only (see page 30). 6 ANTENNA jack Connect the FM antenna (see page 30). DOCK TV/STB AUX 1 DIGITAL IN N XM O 7 SUBWOOFER jack Connect your subwoofer (see page 29). 8 TV/STB AUDIO IN jacks Connect your TV, digital satellite tuner, or cable TV tuner via an analog connection (see pages 23 and 25). 9 AUX 1 AUDIO IN jacks Connect an external component via an analog connection (see page 24). 0 DOCK terminal (U.S.A., Canada, and Australia models only) Connect the Yamaha iPod universal dock (such as YDS10, sold separately) (see page 2 in the Reference Guide). A DVD COAXIAL DIGITAL IN jack Connect your DVD player via a coaxial digital connection (see page 24). B AUX 2 COAXIAL DIGITAL IN jack Connect an external component via a coaxial digital connection (see page 28). English 9 En Black process 45.0° 240.0 LPI 01EN_YSP-4000_UA.book Page 10 Wednesday, December 26, 2007 3:00 PM Controls and functions C XM antenna jack (U.S.A and Canada models only) Connect your XM Mini-Tuner Dock (sold separately) (see page 5 in the Reference Guide). D IR IN terminal This is a control expansion terminal for commercial use only (see page 30). E RS-232C terminal This is a control expansion terminal for commercial use only (see page 30). F SYSTEM CONNECTOR terminal (U.S.A. and Canada models only) Use to connect a Yamaha subwoofer equipped with a SYSTEM CONNECTOR terminal to this unit. G VIDEO OUT jack Connect to the video input jack of your TV via a composite analog video connection to display the OSD of this unit (see page 23). H COMPONENT VIDEO OUT jacks Connect to the video input jacks of your TV via a component analog video connection to display the OSD of this unit (see page 23). I STB VIDEO IN jacks Connect a digital satellite tuner or a cable TV tuner via a composite analog video connection (see pages 25 to 26). J STB COMPONENT VIDEO IN jacks Connect a digital satellite tuner or a cable TV tuner via a component analog video connection (see pages 25 to 26). K DVD/AUX 2 VIDEO IN jacks Connect a DVD player/recorder or an external component via a composite analog video connection (see pages 24 and 28). L DVD/AUX 2 COMPONENT VIDEO IN jacks Connect a DVD player/recorder or an external component via a component analog video connection (see pages 24 and 28). M AUX 1 VIDEO IN jacks Connect an external component via a composite analog video connection (see page 28). N TV/STB OPTICAL DIGITAL IN jack Connect your TV, digital satellite tuner, or cable TV tuner via an optical digital connection (see pages 23 and 25). O AUX 1 OPTICAL DIGITAL IN jack Connect an external component via an optical digital connection (see page 28). 10 En Black process 45.0° 240.0 LPI 01EN_YSP-4000_UA.book Page 11 Wednesday, December 26, 2007 3:00 PM Controls and functions Remote control (Europe, Australia, Asia, and Korea models) y You can also control other components using the remote control once you set the appropriate remote control codes. See “Controlling other components” on page 104 for details. 1 G STANDBY/ON POWER POWER *2 3 DVD AUX1 AV TV AUX2 AUX3 TV INPUT1 MACRO *4 TV STB PRESET/TUNE SEARCH A-E MEMORY FM 5 6 AUTO VOL MODE SETUP INPUTMODE SLEEP 5BEAM ST+3BEAM 1 2 3 STEREO MY BEAM MY SUR. 7 4 5 6 MUSIC MOVIE SPORTS 7 8 OFF 0 8 9 3BEAM 9 SUR. DECODE +10 ENHANCER ENTRY A-E ENTER MENU TV/AV YSP 0 DISPLAY VOLUME RETURN CH D E F Q R S t TV VOL U* *A *B *C H* I* J* K L M N O P MUTE TV INPUT CH LEVEL TEST TV MUTE CODE SET V* W* 1 Infrared window Outputs infrared control signals. Aim this window at the component you want to operate. 2 STANDBY/ON Sets this system to the standby mode (see page 33). 3 Transmission indicator Lights up when infrared control signals are being output. INTRODUCTION This section describes the functions of the remote control used to control this unit. Some buttons marked with an asterisk (*) share the common functions between the YSP and TV/AV operation modes (S). 4 Input selector buttons Use to select an input source (DVD, AUX1, AUX2, AUX3, STB, TV, or FM). 5 VOL MODE Turns on or off the volume modes (see page 71). 6 AUTO SETUP Enters the AUTO SETUP menu (see page 37). 7 CINEMA DSP program buttons Select the CINEMA DSP programs (see page 65). 8 ENHANCER Turns on or off the Music Enhancer (see page 70). 9 Cursor buttons / / / Select and adjust SET MENU items. , ENTER 0 DISPLAY Displays information on the selected input signal. A VOLUME +/– Increases or decreases the volume level of this unit (see page 49). B MUTE Mutes the sound. Press again to restore the audio output to the previous volume level (see page 49). C TV INPUT Toggles between the input sources on the TV (see page 104). D CH LEVEL Adjusts the volume level of each channel (see page 91). E TEST Outputs a test tone when adjusting the output level of each channel (see page 90). English 11 En Black process 45.0° 240.0 LPI 01EN_YSP-4000_UA.book Page 12 Wednesday, December 26, 2007 3:00 PM Controls and functions F DVD player/VCR control buttons Control your DVD player or VCR (see pages 105 and 106). T RETURN Selects sleep timer settings or returns to the previous SET MENU screen. G My Beam microphone Collects the test tones from this unit when using the My Beam auto-adjust function (see page 63). U TV VOL +/– Adjusts the volume level of your TV (see page 104). H TV POWER Turns on the power of your TV or sets it to the standby mode (see page 104). I AV POWER Turns on the power of the selected component or sets it to the standby mode (see pages 105 and 106). J INPUT1 Switches the input source on your TV (see page 104). K MACRO Use to set the TV macro (see page 107). L a /5 Switches the preset station number (1 to 8) when this unit is receiving an FM broadcast (see page 54). M A-E Switches the preset station group (A to E) when this unit is receiving an FM broadcast (see page 54). N SLEEP Sets the sleep timer (see page 72). O INPUTMODE Toggles between input modes (AUTO, DTS, and ANALOG) (see page 93). P Beam mode buttons Change the beam mode settings (see pages 56, 62, and 63). Q SUR. DECODE Selects the surround mode for playback (see page 59). R MENU Displays the setup menu on your TV monitor (see pages 39 and 77). S Operation mode selector Selects the operation mode of this unit. Select YSP when operating this unit and select TV/AV when operating your TV or other AV components. 12 En Black process 45.0° 240.0 LPI V CH +/– Changes the channels of your TV, digital satellite tuner, cable TV tuner, or VCR (see pages 104 and 106). W TV MUTE, CODE SET Mutes the audio output of your TV (see page 104). Sets up remote control codes (see page 103). Note The functions L and M are available only when the FM stations are preset. 01EN_YSP-4000_UA.book Page 13 Wednesday, December 26, 2007 3:00 PM Controls and functions STANDBY/ON DVD AUX1 STB TV TV AUX2 AUX3 TV INPUT1 MACRO PRESET/TUNE SEARCH A-E 1 MEMORY FM AUTO VOL MODE SETUP INPUTMODE SLEEP 2 5BEAM ST+3BEAM 1 2 3 STEREO MY BEAM MY SUR. 4 5 6 MUSIC MOVIE SPORTS 7 8 0 ENTRY A-E ENTER 6 These functions are also available when this unit is receiving the Radio Data System (see page 54) or playing back your iPod (see page 3 in the Reference Guide). 3BEAM 4 DISPLAY Radio Data System and iPod: Displays information when this unit is receiving the Radio Data System (see page 54) or playing back your iPod (see page 2 in the Reference Guide). 9 MENU TV/AV YSP DISPLAY RETURN 4 VOLUME y +10 ENHANCER 3 5 SUR. DECODE OFF CH 2 Numeric buttons FM: Enter numbers. 3 Cursor buttons / / / , ENTER FM: Use ENTRY ( / ) to change the preset station number (1 to 8) or frequency level (see pages 51 to 54). Use A-E ( / ) to change the preset station group (A to E) (see pages 53 and 54). Use ENTER to confirm the input above. POWER POWER AV 1 PRESET/TUNE FM: Switches between the preset search mode and the frequency search mode (see pages 51 to 54). INTRODUCTION This section describes the functions of the remote control used to control FM, Radio Data System, or iPod when the TV/AV mode is selected with the operation mode selector (7). Note that the Radio Data System controls are available for Europe model only, and the iPod controls are available for Australia model only. 7 5 MEMORY FM: Stores the preset stations (see pages 52 and 53). y This function is also available when this unit is receiving the Radio Data System (see page 54). TV VOL 6 SEARCH FM: Switches between automatic and manual tuning (see page 51). MUTE TV INPUT CH LEVEL TEST TV MUTE CODE SET 7 Operation mode selector Selects the operation mode of this unit. Select YSP when operating this unit and select TV/AV when operating your TV or other AV components. English 13 En Black process 45.0° 240.0 LPI 01EN_YSP-4000_UA.book Page 14 Wednesday, December 26, 2007 3:00 PM Controls and functions Remote control (U.S.A. and Canada models) This section describes the functions of the remote control used to control this unit. Some buttons marked with an asterisk (*) share the common functions between the YSP and TV/AV operation modes (S). y You can also control other components using the remote control once you set the appropriate remote control codes. See “Controlling other components” on page 104 for details. 1 G STANDBY/ON POWER POWER *2 3 AV DOCK AUX1 DVD *4 PRESET/TUNE SEARCH CAT 0 MEMORY AUTO VOL MODE SETUP INPUTMODE SLEEP 5BEAM ST+3BEAM 1 2 3 STEREO MY BEAM MY SUR. 3BEAM 4 5 6 MUSIC MOVIE SPORTS 7 8 9 OFF 0 9 AUX3 TV STB 7 8 AUX2 TV INPUT1 MACRO FM/XM 5 6 TV SUR. DECODE +10 ENHANCER ENTRY CAT/ A-E ENTER MENU TV/AV YSP DISPLAY VOLUME RETURN CH E F Q R S t TV VOL U* *A *B *C D H* I* J* K L M N O P MUTE TV INPUT CH LEVEL TEST TV MUTE CODE SET V* W* 1 Infrared window Outputs infrared control signals. Aim this window at the component you want to operate. 2 STANDBY/ON Sets this system to the standby mode (see page 33). 3 Transmission indicator Lights up when infrared control signals are being output. 4 Input selector buttons Use to select an input source (DVD, AUX1, AUX2, AUX3/DOCK, STB, TV, or FM/XM). 5 VOL MODE Turns on or off the volume modes (see page 71). 6 AUTO SETUP Enters the AUTO SETUP menu (see page 37). 7 Sound field program buttons Select the sound field programs (see page 65). 8 ENHANCER Turns on or off the Music Enhancer (see page 70). 9 Cursor buttons / / / Select and adjust SET MENU items. , ENTER 0 DISPLAY Displays information on the selected input signal. A VOLUME +/– Increases or decreases the volume level of this unit (see page 49). B MUTE Mutes the sound. Press again to restore the audio output to the previous volume level (see page 49). C TV INPUT Toggles between the input source on your TV (see page 104). D CH LEVEL Adjusts the volume level of each channel (see page 91). E TEST Outputs a test tone when adjusting the output level of each channel (see page 90). 14 En Black process 45.0° 240.0 LPI 01EN_YSP-4000_UA.book Page 15 Wednesday, December 26, 2007 3:00 PM Controls and functions T RETURN Selects sleep timer settings or returns to the previous SET MENU screen. G My Beam microphone Collects the test tones from this unit when using the My Beam auto-adjust function (see page 63). U TV VOL +/– Adjusts the volume level of your TV (see page 104). H TV POWER Turns on the power of your TV or sets it to the standby mode (see page 104). I AV POWER Turns on the power of the selected component or sets it to the standby mode (see pages 105 and 106). J INPUT1 Switches the input source on your TV (see page 104). V CH +/– Changes the channels of your TV, digital satellite tuner, cable TV tuner, or VCR (see pages 104 and 106). W TV MUTE, CODE SET Mutes the audio output of your TV (see page 104). Sets up remote control codes (see page 103). INTRODUCTION F DVD player/VCR control buttons Control your DVD player or VCR (see pages 105 and 106). Note The functions L and M are available only when the FM/XM stations are preset. K MACRO Use to set the TV macro (see page 107). L a /5 Switches the preset station number (1 to 8) when this unit is receiving an FM broadcast or XM channel (see page 54). M CAT Switches the preset station group (A to E) when this unit is receiving an FM broadcast or XM channel (see page 54). N SLEEP Sets the sleep timer (see page 72). O INPUTMODE Toggles between input modes (AUTO, DTS, and ANALOG) (see page 93). P Beam mode buttons Change the beam mode settings (see pages 56, 62, and 63). Q SUR. DECODE Selects the surround mode for playback (see page 59). R MENU Displays the setup menu on your TV monitor (see pages 39 and 77). S Operation mode selector Selects the operation mode of this unit. Select YSP when operating this unit and select TV/AV when operating your TV or other AV components. English 15 En Black process 45.0° 240.0 LPI 01EN_YSP-4000_UA.book Page 16 Wednesday, December 26, 2007 3:00 PM Controls and functions This section describes the functions of the remote control used to control FM, XM Satellite Radio, or iPod when the TV/AV mode is selected with the operation mode selector (7). STANDBY/ON POWER POWER AV TV DOCK AUX1 DVD AUX2 AUX3 TV INPUT1 MACRO TV STB FM/XM 1 PRESET/TUNE SEARCH CAT 5BEAM ST+3BEAM 1 2 3 STEREO MY BEAM MY SUR. 2 4 5 6 MOVIE SPORTS 7 8 OFF 0 CAT/ A-E 6 9 SUR. DECODE +10 ENTRY ENTER TV/AV RETURN 4 VOLUME CH MUTE TV INPUT TEST TV VOL TV MUTE CODE SET 2 Numeric buttons FM, XM: Enter numbers. 3 Cursor buttons / / / , ENTER FM: Use ENTRY ( / ) to change the preset station number (1 to 8) or frequency level (see pages 51 to 54). Use CAT/A-E ( / ) to change the preset station group (A to E) (see pages 53 and 54). Use ENTER to confirm the input above. XM: Use ENTRY ( / ) to select XM channels in All Channel Search mode/Category Search mode, and to select the preset channel number (1 to 8) in Preset Search mode. Use CAT/A-E ( / ) to select XM categories in All Channel Search mode/Category Search mode, and to select the preset channel group (A to E) in Preset Search mode. Use ENTER to confirm the input above (see pages 7 and 8 in the Reference Guide). y MENU YSP DISPLAY CH LEVEL 5 3BEAM MUSIC ENHANCER 3 MEMORY AUTO VOL MODE SETUP INPUTMODE SLEEP 1 PRESET/TUNE FM: Switches between the preset search mode and the frequency search mode (see pages 51 to 54). 7 These functions are also available when this unit is playing back your iPod (see page 3 in the Reference Guide). 4 DISPLAY XM and iPod: Displays information when this unit is receiving an XM channel (see page 10 in the Reference Guide) or playing back your iPod (see page 3 in the Reference Guide). 5 MEMORY FM: Stores the preset stations (see pages 52 and 53). XM: Use to store the preset stations (see page 9 in the Reference Guide). 6 SEARCH FM: Switches between automatic and manual tuning (see page 51). XM: Switches between search modes (All Channel Search, Category Search, and Preset Search) (see pages 7 and 8 in the Reference Guide). 7 Operation mode selector Selects the operation mode of this unit. Select YSP when operating this unit and select TV/AV when operating your TV or other AV components. 16 En Black process 45.0° 240.0 LPI 01EN_YSP-4000_UA.book Page 17 Wednesday, December 26, 2007 3:00 PM Installation Installation This section describes a suitable installation location to install this unit using a metal wall bracket, a rack or a stand. Depending on your installation environment, connections with external components can be done before installing this unit. We recommend that you temporarily place and arrange all components, including this unit, in order to decide which procedure should come first. Especially when you make a connection over HDMI, we recommend that you make a connection first before installation (see page 22). Before installing this unit Notes y • You can enjoy surround sound by selecting My Surround (see page 57) as the beam mode even if your listening room may not fulfill the above conditions (except when the listening position is not directly facing toward the front of this unit). • You can also enjoy surround sound by selecting 2-channel or 5-channel stereo playback (see page 62) or My Beam (see page 63) as the beam mode even if your listening room may not fulfill the above conditions. • We do not recommend putting this unit directly on the floor of your listening room. Please install this unit using a metal wall bracket, a rack, or a stand. • This unit weighs 15.5 kg (34 lbs 3 oz). Be sure to install this unit where it will not fall subject to vibrations, such as from an earthquake, and where it is out of the reach of children. • When using a cathode-ray tube (CRT) TV, do not install this unit directly above your TV. • This unit is shielded against magnetic rays. However, if the picture on your TV screen becomes blurred or distorted, we recommend moving this unit away from your TV. PREPARATION This unit creates surround sound by reflecting projected sound beams off the walls of your listening room. The surround sound effects produced by this unit may not be sufficient when this unit is installed in the following locations. • Rooms with walls inadequate for reflecting sound beams • Rooms with acoustically absorbent walls • Rooms with measurements outside the following range: W (3 to 7 m (10 to 23 ft)) x H (2 to 3.5 m (7 to 11.5 ft)) x D (3 to 7 m (10 to 23 ft)) • Rooms with less than 1.8 m (6 ft) from the listening position to this unit • Rooms where objects such as furniture are likely to obstruct the path of sound beams • Rooms where the listening position is close to the walls • Rooms where the listening position is not in front of this unit Installing this unit Install this unit where there are no obstacles such as furniture obstructing the path of sound beams. Otherwise, the desired surround sound effects may not be achieved. You may install this unit in parallel with the wall or in the corner. Parallel installation Install this unit in the exact center of the wall when it is measured from the left and right corners. An object, such as furniture Make sure you leave an adequate amount of ventilation space so that heat can escape. Make at least 5 cm (2 in) of space above or below this unit. Side view Corner installation Install this unit in the corner at a 40º to 50º angle from the adjacent walls. 5 cm (2 in) or more Front 40° to 50° Rear Side 17 En Black process 45.0° 240.0 LPI English An object, such as furniture 01EN_YSP-4000_UA.book Page 18 Wednesday, December 26, 2007 3:00 PM Installation ■ Installation examples Example 1 Install this unit as close to the exact center of the wall as possible. Example 2 Install this unit so that the sound beams can be reflected off the walls. Example 3 Install this unit as close to the exact front of your normal listening position as possible. 18 En Black process 45.0° 240.0 LPI 01EN_YSP-4000_UA.book Page 19 Wednesday, December 26, 2007 3:00 PM Installation ■ Using a metal wall bracket ■ Using a rack You can use the optional metal wall bracket (such as SPMK30) to mount this unit on the wall in your listening room. You can install this unit either above or under your TV in a commercially available rack. Metal wall bracket When this unit is installed above your TV This unit PREPARATION TV YSP-4000 355 150 355 92 112 24- 7x22 150 4- 7 When this unit is installed under your TV (mm) 730 SPM-K30 (Option) Note y Refer to the instructions supplied with the metal bracket for details on how to attach the metal bracket to the wall or how to attach this unit to the metal bracket. Make sure that the rack is large enough to allow adequate ventilation space around this unit (see page 17) and that it is strong enough to support the weight of both this unit and your TV. ■ Affixing this unit ■ Using a stand You can mount your TV on a stand placed on a commercially available rack and install this unit under your TV. Peel off the film from each of the four supplied fasteners and then secure them to the bottom four corners of this unit and the top of the rack, etc. This unit Stand Peel off the pad on the bottom TV Peel off 2 the film 1 Fasteners Notes This unit y Refer to the instructions supplied with the stand for details on how to install the stand or how to mount and the TV on the stand. • Do not install this unit on top of a slanted surface. This unit may fall over and cause injury. • Make sure you wipe the surface of the rack, etc. before securing the fasteners. Applying the tape to a dirty or wet surface will weaken the sticking power of the tape, and this unit may fall as a result. English 19 En Black process 45.0° 240.0 LPI 01EN_YSP-4000_UA.book Page 20 Wednesday, December 26, 2007 3:00 PM Connections Connections This unit is equipped with the following types of audio/video input/output jacks/terminal: For audio input • 2 optical digital input jacks • 2 coaxial digital input jacks • 2 sets of analog input jacks • 1 universal dock terminal (U.S.A., Canada, and Australia models only) For audio/video input • 2 HDMI input jacks For audio output • 1 subwoofer output jack For audio/video output • 1 HDMI output jack For video output • 1 composite video output jack • 1 set of component video output jacks For video input • 3 composite video input jacks • 2 sets of component video input jacks Use these jacks/terminal to connect external components such as your TV, DVD player, VCR, digital satellite tuner, cable TV tuner, digital air wave tuner, portable audio player, game console, and iPod. Further, by connecting a subwoofer to this unit, you can enjoy reinforced low-bass sounds. For details on how to connect various types of external components to this unit, see pages 22 to 29. CAUTION • Do not connect this unit or other components to the mains power until all connections between components are complete. • Unplug the AC power supply cable before changing connections, moving or cleaning this unit. Audio connection Video connection TV This unit AUX 3 DVD player 20 En Black process 45.0° 240.0 LPI INTELLIBEAM MIC Subwoofer INPUT portable audio player VOLUME + STANDBY/ON Digital satellite tuner or cable TV tuner VCR or game console 01EN_YSP-4000_UA.book Page 21 Wednesday, December 26, 2007 3:00 PM Connections Before connecting components ■ Cables used for connections ■ Affixing cables To prevent cables from becoming unplugged, place the supplied cable clamp with the open side facing upward, attach it to the rear panel of this unit in a suitable position, and then affix cables in the cable clamp. Audio/Video A HDMI cable Optical cable Attach to this unit Audio (White) ■ Information on HDMI™ (White) Audio signals (Red) (Red) Input source Audio signal type DVD video Dolby Digital, DTS, PCM DVD audio 2-channel stereo (up to 96 kHz/24 bit) Blu-ray Disc HD DVD Dolby Digital, DTS, PCM Optical cable (supplied) Digital audio pin cable (supplied) (Orange) (Orange) PREPARATION Audio pin cable (supplied) Notes • When CPPM copy-protected DVD audio is played back, video and audio signals may not be output depending on the type of DVD player. • This unit is not compatible with HDCP-incompatible HDMI or DVI components. 3.5 mm stereo mini plug cable y 5 • We recommend that you use an HDMI cable shorter than 5 m (16 ft) with the HDMI logo printed on it. • Use a conversion cable (HDMI jack ↔ DVI-D jack) to connect this unit to other DVI components. Subwoofer pin cable ■ Priority order for audio input signals Video OSD video pin cable (supplied) / Video pin cable (Yellow) (Yellow) Component video pin cable (Green) When multiple types of audio signals are simultaneously being input from a single source component, this unit plays back the audio signals in the following priority order: HDMI → Digital → Analog As default settings, the following input jacks are assigned to the corresponding input sources: (Green) (Blue) (Blue) (Red) (Red) ■ Notes on connecting the optical cable Input jack HDMI Digital Analog TV/STB DVD AUX 1 AUX 2 AUX 3 English • Pull out the cap before connecting the optical cable. When you are not using the optical cable, be sure to put the cap back in place. • When inserting the cable into the optical digital jack, make sure the direction is correct. Input Source Cap 21 En Black process 45.0° 240.0 LPI 01EN_YSP-4000_UA.book Page 22 Wednesday, December 26, 2007 3:00 PM Connections Connections using HDMI cables This unit is equipped with 2 HDMI input jacks and 1 HDMI output jack. If your TV and other components have HDMI jacks, use HDMI cables for simpler and easier connections, and you can skip the connection procedures from page 23 to 26. If your TV has a built-in digital satellite tuner and an optical digital output jack, connect the optical digital output jack on your TV to the TV/STB OPTICAL DIGITAL IN jack on this unit. y • We recommend that you secure the HDMI cable(s) with adhesive tape, etc. once you have connected the HDMI cable(s) to the HDMI jack(s) of this unit. • This unit outputs analog video signal and analog/digital audio signals input at the video/component video jacks and analog/digital input jacks at the HDMI OUT jack. Rear panel of this unit AUX 1 DVD IN * OUT HDMI This connection (except for a game console) is not necessary if your TV has a built-in digital satellite tuner, cable TV tuner, or digital airwave tuner. * A A HDMI input A HDMI output DVD player/recorder TV Audio/Video A HDMI cable 22 En Black process 45.0° 240.0 LPI HDMI output Digital satellite tuner, cable TV tuner, digital airwave tuner, or game console 01EN_YSP-4000_UA.book Page 23 Wednesday, December 26, 2007 3:00 PM Connections Connecting a TV For audio connection, connect the analog audio output jacks on your TV to the TV/STB AUDIO IN jacks on this unit. If your TV has an optical digital output jack, connect the optical digital output jack on your TV to the TV/STB OPTICAL DIGITAL IN jack on this unit. For video connection, connect the video input jack on your TV to the VIDEO OUT jack on this unit to display the OSD for easy viewing when you adjust the system parameters in SET MENU. If your TV has component video input jacks, connect the component video input jacks of your TV to the COMPONENT VIDEO OUT jacks of this unit in addition to the composite video connection. Once the component video connection is made, you can enjoy images with better resolution. To prevent the optical cable from being unplugged, affix the optical cable in the supplied cable clamp (see page 21). Notes If you make analog and optical digital audio connections at the same time as shown in the illustration below, the digital audio signals input at the TV/STB OPTICAL DIGITAL IN jack take priority over the analog audio signals input at the TV/STB AUDIO IN jacks. PREPARATION y Rear panel of this unit COMPONENT DVD AUX 2 COAXIAL OPTICAL TV/STB AUX 1 AUDIO IN VIDEO OUT R Video input Component video input TV/STB AUX 1 DIGITAL IN L Analog audio output Optical digital output TV Video Audio Audio pin cable Component video pin cable Optical cable English OSD video pin cable 23 En Black process 45.0° 240.0 LPI 01EN_YSP-4000_UA.book Page 24 Wednesday, December 26, 2007 3:00 PM Connections Connecting a DVD player/recorder For audio connection, connect the coaxial digital output jack on your DVD player/recorder to the DVD COAXIAL DIGITAL IN jack on this unit. When you connect this unit to your DVD/VCR combo player/recorder, connect the analog audio output jacks on your DVD/VCR combo player/recorder to the AUX 1 AUDIO IN jacks on this unit in addition to the coaxial digital audio connection. For video connection, connect the video output jack of your DVD player/recorder to the DVD/AUX 2 VIDEO IN jack of this unit. If your DVD player/recorder has component video output jacks, connect the component video output jacks of your DVD player/recorder to the DVD/AUX 2 COMPONENT VIDEO IN jacks of this unit. Once the component video connection is made, you can enjoy images with better resolution. y To prevent the optical cable from being unplugged, affix the optical cable in the supplied cable clamp (see page 21). Notes • Check that your DVD player/recorder is properly set to output Dolby Digital and DTS digital audio signals. If not, adjust the system settings of your DVD player/recorder. For details, refer to the operation manual supplied with your DVD player/recorder. • If your DVD player/recorder does not have a coaxial digital output jack, make an optical digital audio connection instead (see page 28). Rear panel of this unit FM75 UNBAL. COMPONENT ANTENNA COMPONENT SUBWOOFER DVD AUX 2 COAXIAL OPTICAL STB DVD/AUX 2 VIDEO IN *1You can only make *1 either a composite or a component connection. *1 AUX 1 *2 TV/STB AUX 1 AUDIO IN *2For the DVD/ VCR combo player/recorder connection R Video output Component video output Video signal to the TV Video output TV/STB AUX 1 DIGITAL IN *2 L Coaxial digital output Analog audio output DVD player/recorder Video Audio Video pin cable Audio pin cable Component video pin cable Digital audio pin cable 24 En Black process 45.0° 240.0 LPI 01EN_YSP-4000_UA.book Page 25 Wednesday, December 26, 2007 3:00 PM Connections Connecting a digital satellite tuner or a cable TV tuner For audio connection, connect the optical digital output jack on your digital satellite tuner or cable TV tuner to the TV/ STB OPTICAL DIGITAL IN jack on this unit. Connect the analog audio output jacks on your digital satellite tuner or cable TV tuner to the TV/STB AUDIO IN jacks on this unit. For video connection, connect the video output jack of your digital satellite tuner or cable TV tuner to the STB VIDEO IN jack of this unit. If your digital satellite tuner or cable TV tuner has component video output jacks, connect the component video output jacks of your digital satellite tuner or cable TV tuner to the STB COMPONENT VIDEO IN jacks of this unit. Once the component video connection is made, you can enjoy images with better resolution. y To prevent the optical cable from being unplugged, affix the optical cable in the supplied cable clamp (see page 21). COMPONENT ANTENNA COMPONENT SUBWOOFER DVD AUX 2 COAXIAL PREPARATION Rear panel of this unit FM75 UNBAL. OPTICAL STB * DVD/AUX 2 VIDEO IN * * AUX 1 You can only make either a composite or a component connection. R Video output Component video output Video signal to the TV * TV/STB AUX 1 DIGITAL IN TV/STB AUX 1 AUDIO IN This connection (except for a game console) is not necessary if your TV has a built-in digital satellite tuner, cable TV tuner, or digital airwave tuner. L Analog audio output Optical digital output Digital satellite tuner or cable TV tuner Video Audio Video pin cable Audio pin cable Component video pin cable Optical cable English 25 En Black process 45.0° 240.0 LPI 01EN_YSP-4000_UA.book Page 26 Wednesday, December 26, 2007 3:00 PM Connections Connecting a digital airwave tuner For audio connection, connect the TV/STB AUDIO IN jacks on this unit to the analog audio output jacks on your TV. Connect the optical digital output jack on your digital airwave tuner to the TV/STB OPTICAL DIGITAL IN jack on this unit in addition to the analog audio connection. By doing so, you can enjoy both analog and digital broadcasts. For video connection, connect the video output jack of your digital airwave tuner to the STB VIDEO IN jack of this unit. If your digital airwave tuner has component video output jacks, connect the component video output jacks of your digital airwave tuner to the STB COMPONENT VIDEO IN jacks of this unit. Once the component video connection is made, you can enjoy images with better resolution. y To prevent the optical cable from being unplugged, affix the optical cable in the supplied cable clamp (see page 21). Rear panel of this unit FM75 UNBAL. COMPONENT ANTENNA COMPONENT SUBWOOFER DVD AUX 2 COAXIAL OPTICAL STB * Video output DVD/AUX 2 VIDEO IN * * TV/STB AUX 1 DIGITAL IN TV/STB AUX 1 AUDIO IN You can only make either a composite or a component connection. Component video output Video signal to the TV * AUX 1 Connect to the analog audio output jacks on the TV. Optical digital output Digital airwave tuner This connection (except for a game console) is not necessary if your TV has a built-in digital satellite tuner, cable TV tuner, or digital airwave tuner. Video Audio Video pin cable Audio pin cable Component video pin cable Optical cable 26 En Black process 45.0° 240.0 LPI 01EN_YSP-4000_UA.book Page 27 Wednesday, December 26, 2007 3:00 PM Connections Connecting a portable audio player Connect the analog audio output jack on your portable audio player to the AUX 3 input jack on the front panel of this unit. Front panel of this unit AUX 3 INTELLIBEAM MIC INPUT VOLUME + STANDBY/ON PREPARATION AUX 3 Analog audio output Portable audio player Audio 3.5 mm stereo mini plug cable English 27 En Black process 45.0° 240.0 LPI 01EN_YSP-4000_UA.book Page 28 Wednesday, December 26, 2007 3:00 PM Connections Connecting other external components If your component supports optical digital connections, connect the optical digital output jack on your component (e.g., DVD player/recorder) to the AUX 1 OPTICAL DIGITAL IN jack on this unit. If your component does not support optical digital connections, connect the coaxial digital output jack on your component to the AUX 2 COAXIAL DIGITAL IN jack on this unit. If your component does not support any digital connections, connect the analog audio output jacks on your component (e.g., VCR) to the AUX 1 AUDIO IN jacks on this unit. For video connection, connect the video output jack of your DVD player/recorder, etc. to the DVD/AUX 2 VIDEO IN (or AUX 1 VIDEO IN) jack of this unit. If your DVD player/recorder, etc. has component video output jacks, connect the component video output jacks of your DVD player/recorder, etc. to the DVD/AUX 2 COMPONENT VIDEO IN jacks of this unit. Once the component video connection is made, you can enjoy images with better resolution. y To prevent the optical cable from being unplugged, affix the optical cable in the supplied cable clamp (see page 21). Note If you make analog and digital audio connections at the same time as shown in the illustration below, the digital audio signals input at the AUX 1 OPTICAL DIGITAL IN or AUX 2 COAXIAL DIGITAL IN jack take priority over the analog audio signals input at the AUX 1 AUDIO IN jacks. Rear panel of this unit FM75 UNBAL. ANTENNA COMPONENT COMPONENT SUBWOOFER DVD AUX 2 COAXIAL OPTICAL STB * You can only make either a composite or a component connection. DVD/AUX 2 VIDEO IN * AUX 1 TV/STB AUX 1 AUDIO IN TV/STB AUX 1 DIGITAL IN * R Video output Component video output Video signal to the TV Video output L Analog audio output Optical digital output DVD player/recorder, VCR, game console, CD player, etc. Video Audio Video pin cable Audio pin cable Component video pin cable Optical cable Digital audio pin cable 28 En Black process 45.0° 240.0 LPI Coaxial digital output 01EN_YSP-4000_UA.book Page 29 Wednesday, December 26, 2007 3:00 PM Connections Connecting a subwoofer Connect the monaural input jack on your subwoofer to the SUBWOOFER jack on this unit. This connection alone does not output sound from the connected subwoofer. To output sound from the connected subwoofer, turn on the power of your subwoofer and then run AUTO SETUP (see page 37) or select SWFR for BASS OUT in SUBWOOFER SET (see page 82). When connecting a Yamaha subwoofer equipped with a SYSTEM CONNECTOR terminal, connect it to the SYSTEM CONNECTOR terminal on this unit (U.S.A. and Canada models). If the subwoofer is connected using a system type connection, changing the power mode of this unit controls the power mode of the subwoofer. FM75 UNBAL. COMPONENT SYSTEM CONNECTOR VIDEO OUT COMPONENT STB PREPARATION Rear panel of this unit (U.S.A. and Canada models) ANTENNA COMPONENT DVD/AUX 2 VIDEO IN SUBWOOFER AUX 1 5 System connector cable System Monaural connector input Subwoofer Audio 5 Subwoofer pin cable English 29 En Black process 45.0° 240.0 LPI 01EN_YSP-4000_UA.book Page 30 Wednesday, December 26, 2007 3:00 PM Connections Connecting the FM antenna Connect the supplied FM antenna to the FM ANTENNA jack on this unit. FM indoor antenna (supplied) FM75 UNBAL. COMPONENT ANTENNA SUBWOOFER COMPONENT Rear panel of this unit STB DVD/AUX 2 VIDEO IN AUX 1 About the RS-232C/IR-OUT/IR IN terminals The RS-232C, IR-OUT, and IR IN terminals do not support normal external component connections. They are control expansion terminals for commercial use only. Rear panel of this unit (U.S.A. and Canada models) IR-OUT IR-OUT IR IN IR IN terminal 30 En Black process 45.0° 240.0 LPI RS-232C RS-232C terminal IR-OUT terminal 01EN_YSP-4000_UA.book Page 31 Wednesday, December 26, 2007 3:00 PM Connections Connecting the AC power supply cable Once all other connections are complete, plug one end of the AC power supply cable into the AC IN terminal of this unit and then plug the other end into the AC wall outlet. Rear panel of this unit (U.S.A. and Canada models) PREPARATION IR-OUT AC IN To the AC wall outlet English 31 En Black process 45.0° 240.0 LPI 01EN_YSP-4000_UA.book Page 32 Wednesday, December 26, 2007 3:00 PM GETTING STARTED Getting started Installing batteries in the remote control y Remove the transparent sheet before using the remote control. Press Operation range of the remote control 1 Press and hold the mark on the battery cover and then open the cover. 2 Insert the two supplied batteries (AA, R6, UM-3) into the battery compartment. Make sure you insert the batteries according to the polarity markings (+/–). 3 The remote control transmits a directional infrared beam. Use the remote control within 6 m (20 ft) of this unit and point it toward the remote control sensor of this unit during operation. AUX 3 INTELLIBEAM MIC INPUT VOLUME + STANDBY/ON Approximately 6 m (20 ft) 45 Close the battery cover. 45 Notes • Change all of the batteries if you notice the following conditions: the operation range of the remote control decreases or the transmission indicator does not light up or becomes dim. • Do not use old batteries together with new ones. • Do not use different types of batteries (such as alkaline and manganese batteries) together. Read the packaging carefully as these different types of batteries may have the same shape and color. • Exhausted batteries may leak. If the batteries have leaked, dispose of them immediately. Avoid touching the leaked material or letting it come into contact with clothing, etc. Clean the battery compartment thoroughly before installing new batteries. • Do not throw away batteries with general house waste. Dispose of them correctly in accordance with your local regulations. • The memory stored in the remote control may be erased in the following cases: – The remote control is left without batteries for more than two minutes. – Exhausted batteries remain in the remote control. – The buttons on the remote control are accidentally pressed when you change batteries. • If the memory stored in the remote control is unwantedly erased, insert new batteries and set the remote control codes again. 32 En Black process 45.0° 240.0 LPI Notes • Do not spill water or other liquids on the remote control. • Do not drop the remote control. • Do not leave or store the remote control in the following places: – places of high humidity, such as near a bath – places of high temperatures, such as near a heater or a stove – places of extremely low temperatures – dusty places • Do not expose the remote control sensor of this unit to direct sunlight or lighting such as inverted fluorescent lamps. • If the batteries grow old, the effective operation range of the remote control decreases considerably. If this happens, replace the batteries with two new ones as soon as possible. 01EN_YSP-4000_UA.book Page 33 Wednesday, December 26, 2007 3:00 PM Getting started Turning on this unit or setting it to the standby mode 2 Press STANDBY/ON again to set this unit to the standby mode. Note When this unit is in the standby mode, only STANDBY/ON on the front panel or on the remote control is operational, and the other control buttons on the front panel or on the remote control are not operational until the power of this unit is turned on. INPUT VOLUME + STANDBY/ON STANDBY/ON POWER POWER AV TV DOCK AUX1 AUX2 AUX3 SETUP DVD TV INPUT1 MACRO TV STB PRESET/TUNE SEARCH CAT FM/XM MEMORY (U.S.A. and Canada models) 1 Press STANDBY/ON to turn on the power of this unit. The volume level appears in the front panel display, and the current input source and beam mode are displayed. STANDBY/ON or STANDBY/ON Front panel Remote control VOLUME 30 Current volume level DVD MY SUR Current beam mode English Current input source 33 En Black process 45.0° 240.0 LPI 01EN_YSP-4000_UA.book Page 34 Wednesday, December 26, 2007 3:00 PM USING SET MENU Using SET MENU Displaying the OSD (on-screen display) This section describes how to display the OSD (on-screen display) of this unit on your TV screen and to set the parameters for your listening room. Once this is complete, you can enjoy real surround sound while watching TV in the comfort of your own home. 1 Check that the video input jack on your TV is connected to the VIDEO OUT jack on this unit to display the OSD of this unit. 4 Set the operation mode selector to YSP. TV/AV YSP 2 Press STANDBY/ON to turn on the power of this unit. STANDBY/ON 5 Press MENU. The SET MENU screen appears on your TV. or SET MENU STANDBY/ON Front panel 34 En Black process 45.0° 240.0 LPI [ ]/[ ]:Up/Down [ENTER]:Enter p Turn on the power of your TV. MENU . ;MEMORY ;AUTO SETUP ;MANUAL SETUP ;LANGUAGE SETUP p 3 Remote control 01EN_YSP-4000_UA.book Page 35 Wednesday, December 26, 2007 3:00 PM Using SET MENU The flow chart of SET MENU The following diagram illustrates the overall flow of the setup procedure. Run LANGUAGE SETUP. See “Changing OSD language” on page 36. Run AUTO SETUP (IntelliBeam). See “AUTO SETUP (IntelliBeam)” on page 37. If an error occurs SETUP Look for a remedy. See “Error messages for AUTO SETUP” on page 43 for a complete list of error messages and possible remedies. Play back audio signals or adjust the settings for the beam mode and the CINEMA DSP. See “Playback” on page 47, “Enjoying surround sound” on page 56, and “Using sound field programs” on page 65. If you want to make additional settings and adjustments Run MANUAL SETUP. See “MANUAL SETUP” on page 76. y • If you cannot clearly hear a sound beam from a specific channel, adjust settings for SETTING PARAMETERS (see page 78) or for BEAM ADJUSTMENT (see page 79) in BEAM MENU. • If there are acoustically absorbent objects such as curtains in the path of the sound beams, adjust settings for TREBLE GAIN in BEAM MENU (see page 81). English 35 En Black process 45.0° 240.0 LPI 01EN_YSP-4000_UA.book Page 36 Wednesday, December 26, 2007 3:00 PM CHANGING OSD LANGUAGE Changing OSD language This feature allows you to select the language of your choice that appears in SET MENU of this unit. 1 Set the operation mode selector to YSP. 4 Press / to select the desired language, and press ENTER. TV/AV YSP ENTER ENTER 2 Press MENU. The SET MENU screen appears on your TV. SET MENU . ;MEMORY ;AUTO SETUP ;MANUAL SETUP ;LANGUAGE SETUP MENU p p [ ]/[ ]:Up/Down [ENTER]:Enter y • The control buttons used for SET MENU are displayed at the bottom of the screen. • To return to the previous screen while using SET MENU, press RETURN. • To exit from SET MENU, press MENU once more. • You can also perform the following operations while viewing information in the front panel display. 3 Press / to select LANGUAGE SETUP, and press ENTER. The following screen appears on your TV. ENTER ENTER ;LANGUAGE SETUP . ENGLISH DEUTSCH Francais ESPANOL ITALIANO NEDERLANDS 36 En Black process 45.0° 240.0 LPI p p [ ]/[ ]:Select [ENTER]:Return Choices: ENGLISH (English), DEUTSCH (German), Français (French), ESPAÑOL (Spanish), ITALIANO (Italian), NEDERLANDS (Dutch), Русский (Russian) 01EN_YSP-4000_UA.book Page 37 Wednesday, December 26, 2007 3:00 PM AUTO SETUP (INTELLIBEAM) AUTO SETUP (IntelliBeam) This unit creates a sound field by reflecting sound beams on the walls of your listening room and by broadening the cohesion of all the channels. Just as you would arrange the speaker position of other audio systems, you need to set the beam angle to enjoy the best possible sound from this unit. This unit employs the beam optimization and sound optimization features with the aid of the supplied IntelliBeam microphone, allowing you to avoid troublesome listening-based setup and achieving highly accurate sound adjustments that best match your listening environment. We call these two features “IntelliBeam” generically. Beam optimization: This feature optimizes the beam angle so that the parameter best matches your listening environment. Sound optimization: This feature optimizes the beam delay, volume, and quality so that the parameters best match your listening environment. The flow chart of AUTO SETUP This unit performs a series of checks to optimize the beam angle, delay, volume, and quality. You can choose to optimize all or part of the parameters. Notes *1 Optimizing the beam angle Beam optimization *1 The beam angle checking procedure is skipped if SOUND OPTIMZ only is selected. *2 The sound optimization procedure is skipped if BEAM OPTIMZ only is selected. *3 The subwoofer checking procedure is skipped if BEAM OPTIMZ only is selected. SETUP Checking the environment of your listening room *2 *3 Checking the subwoofer and optimizing the beam delay, frequency, and volume Sound optimization English 37 En Black process 45.0° 240.0 LPI 01EN_YSP-4000_UA.book Page 38 Wednesday, December 26, 2007 3:00 PM AUTO SETUP (IntelliBeam) Installing the IntelliBeam microphone The supplied IntelliBeam microphone collects and analyzes the sound that this unit produces in your actual listening environment. Follow the procedure below to connect the IntelliBeam microphone to this unit and make sure that the IntelliBeam microphone is placed in a proper location and that there are no large obstacles between the IntelliBeam microphone and the walls in your listening room. Notes • After you have completed the AUTO SETUP procedure, be sure to disconnect the IntelliBeam microphone. • The IntelliBeam microphone is sensitive to heat. – Keep it away from direct sunlight. – Do not place it on top of this unit. • Do not connect the IntelliBeam microphone to an extension cable as doing so may result in an inaccurate sound optimization. • An error may occur during the AUTO SETUP procedure if the IntelliBeam microphone is not properly placed in your listening room. To avoid the possibility of an error: – Do not place the IntelliBeam microphone to the extreme right or left from the center of this unit. – Do not place the IntelliBeam microphone within 1.8 m (6.0 ft) from the front of this unit. – Do not place the IntelliBeam microphone more than 1 m (3.3 ft) upper or lower from the center height of this unit. • Make sure that there are no obstacles between the IntelliBeam microphone and the walls in your listening room as these objects obstruct the path of sound beams. However, any objects that are in contact with the walls will be regarded as a protruding part of the walls. • The best possible results are achieved if the IntelliBeam microphone is placed at the same height as your ears would be when you are seated in your listening position. However, if this is not possible, you can manually fine-tune the sound beam angle and balance the sound beam output levels using MANUAL SETUP (see page 76) once the AUTO SETUP procedure is completed. • If a subwoofer with adjustable volume and crossover/high-cut frequency controls is connected to CROSSOVER VOLUME HIGH CUT this unit, set the volume between 11 and 1 o’clock as viewed on a conventional clockface and set the crossover/high-cut frequency to the maximum. MIN MAX MIN MAX Subwoofer 1 Press STANDBY/ON to turn off the power of this unit. STANDBY/ON or STANDBY/ON Front panel 2 Remote control Connect the supplied IntelliBeam microphone to the INTELLIBEAM MIC jack on the front panel. AUX 3 3 Place the IntelliBeam microphone on a flat level surface more than 1.8 m (6.0 ft) from the front of the unit and within 1 m (3.3 ft) upper or lower from the center height of the unit with the IntelliBeam microphone facing upward at your normal listening position. Note Be sure to place the IntelliBeam microphone on an imaginary center line drawn from this unit. y You may want to use the supplied cardboard microphone stand to affix the IntelliBeam microphone at the same height as your ears would be when you are seated in your listening position. INTELLIBEAM MIC IntelliBeam microphone INTELLIBEAM MIC More than 1.8 m (6.0 ft) Cardboard microphone stand 38 En Black process 45.0° 240.0 LPI Upper bound position of the microphone Within 1 m (3.3 ft) upper or lower from the center height Sofa Lower bound position of the microphone 01EN_YSP-4000_UA.book Page 39 Wednesday, December 26, 2007 3:00 PM AUTO SETUP (IntelliBeam) Using AUTO SETUP (IntelliBeam) Once the IntelliBeam microphone is firmly connected to this unit and properly placed in your listening room, follow the procedure below to start the AUTO SETUP procedure. You can also enter the AUTO SETUP procedure simply by pressing and holding AUTO SETUP for more than two seconds. In this case, this unit performs both of the beam optimization and sound optimization procedures. Center line IntelliBeam microphone ■ Assembling the supplied cardboard microphone stand You will find three separate parts (one circular part and two longitudinal parts) of the cardboard microphone stand originally put together. 1 VOLUME + SETUP INPUT STANDBY/ON 2 STANDBY/ON POWER POWER AV TV DOCK AUX1 DVD AUX2 AUX3 TV INPUT1 MACRO TV STB FM/XM PRESET/TUNE SEARCH CAT MEMORY AUTO VOL MODE SETUP INPUTMODE SLEEP 3 5BEAM ST+3BEAM 1 2 3 STEREO MY BEAM MY SUR. 4 4 5 6 MUSIC MOVIE SPORTS 7 8 0 Disassemble the three parts of the cardboard microphone stand originally put together. +10 ENHANCER ENTRY CAT/ A-E ENTER MENU TV/AV YSP DISPLAY VOLUME 9 SUR. DECODE OFF 1 3BEAM RETURN CH TV VOL (U.S.A. and Canada models) Insert one of the longitudinal part into the crevice of the other longitudinal part. 3 Place the circular part on top of the two combined longitudinal parts. 4 Place the supplied IntelliBeam microphone on top of the circular part. English 2 39 En Black process 45.0° 240.0 LPI 01EN_YSP-4000_UA.book Page 40 Wednesday, December 26, 2007 3:00 PM AUTO SETUP (IntelliBeam) 3 Notes • Make sure that your listening room is as quiet as possible while this unit is performing the AUTO SETUP procedure. • To achieve the best results possible, evacuate yourself from your listening room until the AUTO SETUP procedure is completed so that you may not obstruct the path of sound beams. • Be advised that it is normal for loud test tones to be output during the AUTO SETUP procedure. • The AUTO SETUP procedure may not be run successfully if this unit is installed in one of the rooms described in “Before installing this unit” on page 17. In such cases, run MANUAL SETUP (see page 76) to manually adjust the corresponding parameters. • If an error occurs, an error buzzer is played, the AUTO SETUP procedure stops, and an error message appears on the screen. See “Error messages for AUTO SETUP” on page 43 for appropriate remedies. SET MENU p [ ]/[ ]:Up/Down [ENTER]:Enter p 1 . ;MEMORY ;AUTO SETUP ;MANUAL SETUP ;LANGUAGE SETUP MENU y • The control buttons used for SET MENU are displayed at the bottom of the screen. • To return to the previous screen while using SET MENU, press RETURN. • To exit from the SET MENU screen, press MENU again. • You can start the BEAM+SOUND OPTIMZ procedure simply by pressing and holding AUTO SETUP for more than two seconds. Steps 4 and 5 are skipped and then the screen shown in step 5 is displayed on your TV. Start the AUTO SETUP procedure from step 6. • You can also perform the following operations in the front panel display. y • The AUTO SETUP procedure takes about three minutes maximum. A chime is played when the AUTO SETUP procedure is run successfully. • If there are curtains in your listening room, we recommend following the procedure below. 1. Open the curtains to improve sound reflection. 2. Run BEAM OPTIMZ only. 3. Close the curtains. 4. Run SOUND OPTIMZ only. • You can save the settings optimized by the AUTO SETUP procedure (see page 44). A set of settings optimized according to the specific conditions of your listening environment can be recalled later depending on the varying conditions of your listening environment (see page 45). Press MENU. The SET MENU screen appears on your TV. 4 Press / to select AUTO SETUP and press ENTER. The following screen appears on your TV. ENTER ENTER Press STANDBY/ON to turn on the power of this unit. If a subwoofer is connected to this unit, turn on the power of the subwoofer. STANDBY/ON ;AUTO SETUP or STANDBY/ON Front panel Remote control . 1)BEAM+SOUND OPTIMZ 2)BEAM OPTIMZ only 3)SOUND OPTIMZ only 2 Set the operation mode selector to YSP. TV/AV YSP 40 En Black process 45.0° 240.0 LPI p p [ ]/[ ]:Up/Down [ENTER]:Enter 01EN_YSP-4000_UA.book Page 41 Wednesday, December 26, 2007 3:00 PM AUTO SETUP (IntelliBeam) 5 Press / to select BEAM+SOUND OPTIMZ, BEAM OPTIMZ only, or SOUND OPTIMZ only and then press ENTER. The following screen appears on your TV. 6 Check the following points once again before starting the AUTO SETUP procedure. • Is the IntelliBeam microphone firmly connected to this unit? • Is the IntelliBeam microphone placed in a proper location? • Are there any large obstacles in between the IntelliBeam microphone and the walls in your listening room? 7 Press ENTER to start the AUTO SETUP procedure. The following screen appears on your TV and the AUTO SETUP procedure starts in 10 seconds. Leave the room quietly before starting the AUTO SETUP procedure. ENTER ENTER AUTO SETUP PREPARATION & CHECK Please connect the MIC. Please place the MIC at least 1.8m/6ft away from the YSP unit. The MIC should be set at ear level when seated. Measurement takes about 3min. After [ENTER] is pressed, please leave the room. [ENTER]:Start [RETURN]:Cancel ENTER BEAM OPTIMZ only (Beam optimization only) Use to optimize the beam angle so that the parameter best matches your listening environment. This menu takes about one minute. SETUP BEAM+SOUND OPTIMZ (Beam optimization and sound optimization) Use to optimize the beam angle, delay, volume, and quality so that the parameters best match your listening environment. It is recommended that you should select this optimization feature in the following cases: • If you make settings for the first time. • If the unit has been relocated. • If your listening room has been restructured. • If the objects in your listening room (furniture, etc.) have been rearranged. This menu takes about three minutes. AUTO SETUP START Will begin in 10sec Please leave the room ← Flashes **-------[RETURN]:Cancel If an error occurs, an error buzzer is played and an error message is displayed. See “Error messages for AUTO SETUP” on page 43 for a complete list of error messages and their proper remedies. Follow the instructions and perform the AUTO SETUP procedure again. SOUND OPTIMZ only (Sound optimization only) Use to optimize the beam delay, volume, and quality so that the parameters best match your listening environment. It is recommended that you should select this optimization feature in the following cases: • If you have opened or closed the curtains in your listening room before using this unit. • If you have manually set the beam angle. This menu takes about two minutes. Note English You must optimize the beam angle in the BEAM OPTIMZ only procedure before starting the SOUND OPTIMZ only procedure. 41 En Black process 45.0° 240.0 LPI 01EN_YSP-4000_UA.book Page 42 Wednesday, December 26, 2007 3:00 PM AUTO SETUP (IntelliBeam) 8 Check that the following screen is displayed on your TV. The results of the AUTO SETUP procedure are displayed on your TV. 9 Press ENTER to confirm the results or press RETURN to cancel the results. The following screen is displayed for two seconds and then disappears from your TV. Example 1 SHOW RESULT MEASUREMENT COMPLETE AUTO SETUP COMPLETE ← Flashes Please remove the MIC from the YSP and the listening position. ENTER BEAM MODE :5 BEAM SUBWOOFER :NOT APPLICABLE [ENTER]:Save set-up. [RETURN]:Do not save set-up. Example 2 SHOW RESULT MEASUREMENT COMPLETE ← Flashes If “ENVIRONMENT CHECK [FAILED]” is displayed in step 8, the following screen is displayed after pressing ENTER. In this case, see ERROR E-1 in “Error messages for AUTO SETUP” on page 43. Press ENTER to exit AUTO SETUP and then run the procedure again from step 3. ENVIRONMENT CHECK[FAILED] BEAM MODE :5 BEAM SUBWOOFER :YES AUTO SETUP COMPLETE [ENTER]:Save set-up. [RETURN]:Do not save set-up. Your YSP unit may not be set up correctly. We recommend you try again. Please press [ENTER] key to exit. y • If “ENVIRONMENT CHECK [FAILED]” is displayed, we recommend running the AUTO SETUP procedure again. For details, see step 9. • If “SUBWOOFER : NOT APPLICABLE” is displayed even though a subwoofer is connected to this unit, increase the volume level of the subwoofer and run the AUTO SETUP procedure again. • Depending on the environment of your listening room, the beam angle of front left and right, and surround left and right may be set to the same value even if “5 BEAM” is displayed as a result. 10 Disconnect the IntelliBeam microphone from the INTELLIBEAM MIC jack on the front panel. AUX 3 INTELLIBEAM MIC y If you want to save and load settings, see “Using the system memory” on page 44. 42 En Black process 45.0° 240.0 LPI 01EN_YSP-4000_UA.book Page 43 Wednesday, December 26, 2007 3:00 PM AUTO SETUP (IntelliBeam) ■ Error messages for AUTO SETUP Before the AUTO SETUP procedure starts Error message ERROR E-2 No MIC detected. Please check MIC connection and re-try. Cause The IntelliBeam microphone is not connected to this unit. Remedy Connect the IntelliBeam microphone to this unit. See page 38 While the AUTO SETUP procedure is in progress If one of the errors listed below except E-1 is displayed, press RETURN. In case you have started the AUTO SETUP procedure by pressing AUTO SETUP in step 3, run the procedure again from step 3 after the screen disappears. In case you have started the AUTO SETUP procedure by pressing MENU in step 3, run the procedure again from step 4 after the screen in step 3 is displayed. Run MANUAL SETUP if the problem is difficult to be saved. Error message Cause Remedy See page There is too much unwanted noise in your listening room. Make sure that your listening room is as quiet as possible. You may want to choose certain hours during the day when there is not much noise coming from outside. — ERROR E-2 No MIC detected. Please check MIC connection and re-try. The IntelliBeam microphone was disconnected while the AUTO SETUP procedure was in progress. Make sure that the IntelliBeam microphone is firmly connected to this unit. 38 ERROR E-3 Unexpected control is detected. Please re-try. Some other operations were performed on this unit while the AUTO SETUP procedure was in progress. Do not perform any other operations while the AUTO SETUP procedure is in progress. — ERROR E-4 Please check MIC position. MIC should be set in front of YSP. The IntelliBeam microphone is not placed in front of this unit. Make sure that the IntelliBeam microphone is installed in front of this unit. 38 ERROR E-5 Please check MIC position. MIC should be set above 1.8m/6.0ft. The IntelliBeam microphone is not placed in the right distance from this unit. Make sure that the IntelliBeam microphone is installed more than 1.8 m (6.0 ft) from the front of this unit and within 1 m (3.3 ft) from the center height of this unit. 38 ERROR E-6 Volume level is lower than expected. Please check MIC position/connection and re-try. The IntelliBeam microphone cannot collect the sound produced by this unit because the sound output level is too low. Make sure that the IntelliBeam microphone is firmly connected to this unit and placed in a proper location. If the problem persists, contact the nearest authorized Yamaha service center for assistance. 38 ERROR E-7 Unexpected error happened. Please re-try. An internal system error occurred. Repeat the AUTO SETUP procedure. — SETUP ERROR E-1 Please test in quieter environment. English 43 En Black process 45.0° 240.0 LPI 01EN_YSP-4000_UA.book Page 44 Wednesday, December 26, 2007 3:00 PM USING THE SYSTEM MEMORY Using the system memory Convenient usage of the system memory 3 You can save the current settings adjusted in SET MENU in the system memory of this unit. It is handy to save certain settings according to the varying conditions of your listening environment. For example, if there are curtains in the path of sound beams, the effectiveness of the sound beams will vary depending on whether the curtains are open or closed. Press / to select MEMORY and press ENTER. The following screen appears on your TV. ENTER ENTER When the curtains are closed When the curtains are open ;MEMORY . 1)LOAD 2)SAVE p 4 Saving settings 1 p [ ]/[ ]:Up/Down [ENTER]:Enter Press / to select SAVE and press ENTER. The following screen appears on your TV. Set the operation mode selector to YSP. TV/AV ENTER ENTER YSP 2 Press MENU. The SET MENU screen appears on your TV. SET MENU MENU . ;MEMORY ;AUTO SETUP ;MANUAL SETUP ;LANGUAGE SETUP • The control buttons used for SET MENU are displayed at the bottom of the screen. • To return to the previous screen while using SET MENU, press RETURN. • To exit from the SET MENU screen, press MENU once more. • You can also perform the following operations in the front panel display. 44 En Black process 45.0° 240.0 LPI [ ]/[ ]:Select [ENTER]:Enter p y . MEMORY1 MEMORY2 MEMORY3 p p p [ ]/[ ]:Up/Down [ENTER]:Enter 2)MEMORY SAVE 01EN_YSP-4000_UA.book Page 45 Wednesday, December 26, 2007 3:00 PM Using the system memory 5 Press / to select MEMORY1, MEMORY2, or MEMORY3 and press ENTER. The following screen appears on your TV. ENTER ENTER Loading settings You can recall the settings saved in “Saving settings” on page 44 according to the varying conditions of your listening environment. 1 Set the operation mode selector to YSP. TV/AV YSP 2)MEMORY SAVE 2 Press MENU. The SET MENU screen appears on your TV. MEMORY1 Save Now ? SET MENU Push [ENTER] to Save . ;MEMORY ;AUTO SETUP ;MANUAL SETUP ;LANGUAGE SETUP MENU Press ENTER again. The new parameters are saved as MEMORY1, MEMORY2, or MEMORY3. Once the parameters are saved, the display returns to the SET MENU screen. SETUP 6 p p [ ]/[ ]:Up/Down [ENTER]:Enter y • The control buttons used for SET MENU are displayed at the bottom of the screen. • To return to the previous screen while using SET MENU, press RETURN. • To exit from the SET MENU screen, press MENU once more. • You can also perform the following operations in the front panel display. 2)MEMORY SAVE MEMORY1 Saving ENTER 3 Press / to select MEMORY and press ENTER. The following screen appears on your TV. SET MENU . ;MEMORY ;AUTO SETUP ;MANUAL SETUP ;LANGUAGE SETUP ENTER ENTER 7 p p [ ]/[ ]:Up/Down [ENTER]:Enter ;MEMORY Press MENU to exit. The SET MENU screen disappears from your TV. p [ ]/[ ]:Up/Down [ENTER]:Enter p MENU . 1)LOAD 2)SAVE English 45 En Black process 45.0° 240.0 LPI 01EN_YSP-4000_UA.book Page 46 Wednesday, December 26, 2007 3:00 PM Using the system memory 4 Press / to select LOAD and press ENTER. The following screen appears on your TV. 6 Press ENTER again. The new parameters saved as MEMORY1, MEMORY2, or MEMORY3 are loaded. Once the parameters are loaded, the display returns to the SET MENU screen. 1)MEMORY LOAD ENTER ENTER MEMORY1 Loading ENTER 1)MEMORY LOAD . MEMORY1 MEMORY2 MEMORY3 SET MENU p p [ ]/[ ]:Select [ENTER]:Enter . ;MEMORY ;AUTO SETUP ;MANUAL SETUP ;LANGUAGE SETUP Press / to select MEMORY1, MEMORY2, or MEMORY3 and press ENTER. The following screen appears on your TV. 7 ENTER ENTER 1)MEMORY LOAD MEMORY1 Load Now ? Push [ENTER] to Load 46 En Black process 45.0° 240.0 LPI p [ ]/[ ]:Up/Down [ENTER]:Enter p 5 Press MENU to exit. The SET MENU screen disappears from your TV. MENU 01EN_YSP-4000_UA.book Page 47 Wednesday, December 26, 2007 3:00 PM PLAYBACK Playback Selecting the input source You can play back sound from the components connected to this unit simply by pressing INPUT on the front panel repeatedly or pressing one of the input selector buttons (TV, STB, DVD, AUX1, AUX2, or AUX3) on the remote control. The name of the selected input source and the type of corresponding input mode appear in the front panel display. ■ Front panel operations Press INPUT on the front panel repeatedly to toggle between TV, STB, DVD, AUX1, AUX2, and AUX3. The name of the corresponding input source and the type of current input mode are displayed in the front panel display. ■ Remote control operations y In addition to controlling this unit, you can also operate other AV components if you set up the remote control with the appropriate remote control codes and set the operation mode selector to TV/ AV to change the control area (see page 103). Press TV to play back a TV program. TV INPUT VOLUME + STANDBY/ON DOCK AUX1 DVD AUX2 AUX3 AUTO TV/STB TV INPUT1 MACRO TV STB PRESET/TUNE SEARCH CAT MEMORY Name of the selected input source Type of the selected input mode AUTO VOL MODE SETUP INPUTMODE SLEEP 5BEAM ST+3BEAM 3BEAM 1 2 3 STEREO MY BEAM MY SUR. 4 5 6 MUSIC MOVIE SPORTS 7 8 9 +10 ENHANCER ENTRY CAT/ A-E ENTER DISPLAY STB SUR. DECODE OFF 0 Press STB to play back a satellite broadcast. BASIC OPERATION FM/XM MENU TV/AV YSP AUTO TV/STB RETURN (U.S.A. and Canada models) Press DVD to play back a DVD. DVD DVD AUTO English 47 En Black process 45.0° 240.0 LPI 01EN_YSP-4000_UA.book Page 48 Wednesday, December 26, 2007 3:00 PM Playback Press AUX1 (or AUX2) to play back a component connected to the AUX 1 (or AUX 2) jack on the rear panel of this unit. 2 Switch to the video input on your TV using the remote control supplied with the TV and display the DVD menu screen. AUX1 Note If necessary, turn down the volume of your TV until no sound is heard. AUX1 AUTO 3 DVD Press AUX3 to play back a component connected to the AUX 3 input jack on the front panel. AUX3 Press DVD to select DVD as the input source. 4 Play back DVD on your DVD player using the supplied remote control. Audio signals from your DVD player are output from this unit. y AUX3 Playing back sources Once an input source is selected (see page 47), you can play back the selected input source. Note This section uses a DVD player as an example of the playback source. y For details on your TV and DVD player, refer to the respective owner’s manual. 1 Turn on the power of your DVD player. 48 En Black process 45.0° 240.0 LPI • You can use the supplied demonstration DVD to check the digital signals being input at the DVD player with the digital connection (optical/coaxial/HDMI). The input channel and LFE indicators light up when this unit detects the 5.1-channel signal input at the optical/coaxial/HDMI jack. If the PCM indicator lights up, confirm the settings of the digital output, bitstream output, DTS output, and/or HDMI output of the DVD player. • If the output volume is too low, increase the volume of this unit to around 45. • If you have set the appropriate remote control codes for your TV and DVD player, you can use the remote control supplied with this unit to operate these components. For details on how to set remote control codes, see page 103. 01EN_YSP-4000_UA.book Page 49 Wednesday, December 26, 2007 3:00 PM Playback ■ Muting the sound Adjusting the volume TV VOL VOLUME CH MUTE TV INPUT TV MUTE CODE SET 1 Press MUTE to mute the sound. “AUDIO MUTE ON” appears in the front panel display, and the volume level indicator flashes. MUTE INPUT VOLUME + STANDBY/ON VOLUME CH TV VOL MUTE TV INPUT TV MUTE AUDIO MUTE ON Flashes Press VOLUME +/– to increase or decrease the volume level. The numeric value of the volume level appears in the front panel display. Control range: MIN (minimum), 01 to 99, MAX (maximum) DVD 2 or VOLUME Press MUTE again (or press VOLUME +/–) to resume the sound output. “AUDIO MUTE OFF” appears temporarily in the front panel display (or the numeric value of the current volume level appears if you press VOLUME +/–), and the volume level indicator lights up. VOLUME + BASIC OPERATION VOLUME 5BEAM MUTE or Front panel Remote control Lights up VOLUME 30 AUDIO MUTE OFF Notes • The volume level of all input sources (including multi-channel as well as stereo sources) changes at the same time. • One volume level increases or decreases each time you press VOLUME +/–. • You can continuously increase or decrease the volume level if you press and hold VOLUME +/–. Note The sound output of all input sources (including multi-channel as well as stereo sources) is muted at the same time. y You can select whether the sound output is to be muted completely or by 20 dB when you press MUTE (see page 83). English 49 En Black process 45.0° 240.0 LPI 01EN_YSP-4000_UA.book Page 50 Wednesday, December 26, 2007 3:00 PM FM TUNING FM tuning There are two tuning methods: automatic and manual. Automatic tuning is effective when the radio signal is strong and there is no interference. If the radio signal is weak, tune into the FM station manually. You can also use the automatic and manual preset tuning features to store up to 40 stations in total (A1 to E8: 5 preset station groups with 8 preset station numbers each). y • This section exceptionally uses the remote control for Europe, Australia, Asia, and Korea models. • When the operation mode selector is set to TV/AV, you can operate all FM functions. When the operation mode selector is set to YSP, you can only operate the functions described in “Selecting a preset station” (see page 54). Note Orient the connected FM antenna for the best reception. FM controls and functions ■ Remote control functions Set the operation mode selector (8) to TV/AV before tuning or preset tuning. 1 FM Selects FM as the input source. This unit is tuned into the last selected FM station. y U.S.A. and Canada models use FM/XM. STANDBY/ON POWER POWER AUX1 DVD AV TV AUX2 AUX3 2 PRESET/TUNE Switches between the preset search mode and the frequency search mode (see page 53). TV INPUT1 MACRO TV STB PRESET/TUNE SEARCH A-E 1 2 MEMORY FM AUTO VOL MODE SETUP INPUTMODE SLEEP 3 5BEAM ST+3BEAM 1 2 3 STEREO MY BEAM MY SUR. 3BEAM 4 5 6 MUSIC MOVIE SPORTS 7 8 OFF 0 ENHANCER 6 7 4 ENTRY ( / ) • Selects the preset station numbers (1 to 8) when the colon (:) is displayed in the front panel display (see page 54). • Selects the tuning frequency when the colon (:) is not displayed in the front panel display (see page 51). 9 SUR. DECODE +10 ENTRY MENU 4 TV/AV ENTER A-E YSP 5 DISPLAY 3 Numeric buttons Use numbers 1 through 8 to select the preset station numbers (see page 54). RETURN 8 5 A-E ( / ) Selects the preset station groups (A to E) (see page 53). y U.S.A. and Canada models use CAT/A-E VOLUME MUTE CH TV INPUT . TV VOL TV MUTE 6 MEMORY • Stores a preset station in the memory (see page 53). • Hold down this button for more than three seconds to start automatic preset tuning (see page 52). CODE SET (Europe, Australia, Asia, and Korea models) 7 SEARCH Switches between automatic tuning (the AUTO indicator is turned on) and manual tuning (the AUTO indicator is turned off) (see page 51). 8 Operation mode selector Selects the operation mode of this unit. 50 En Black process 45.0° 240.0 LPI 01EN_YSP-4000_UA.book Page 51 Wednesday, December 26, 2007 3:00 PM FM tuning Automatic tuning 4 Automatic tuning is effective when the radio station signals are strong and there is no interference. 1 Set the operation mode selector to TV/AV. Press ENTRY ( / ) once to begin automatic tuning. When this unit is tuned into an FM station, the TUNED indicator lights up and the frequency of the station appears in the front panel display. • Press to tune into a higher frequency. • Press to tune into a lower frequency. TV/AV ENTRY YSP 2 ENTER Press FM to select FM as the input source. “FM” appears in the front panel display. FM Manual tuning y • You can also press INPUT on the front panel repeatedly to select FM as the input source. • If “XM” appears in the front panel display, press FM/XM again to display “FM” (U.S.A. and Canada models only). 3 Press SEARCH repeatedly until the AUTO indicator lights up in the front panel display. If the desired FM station signal is weak, tune into it manually. Note Manual tuning automatically switches the tuner to the monaural reception mode to increase the signal quality. 1 Set the operation mode selector to TV/AV. TV/AV YSP 2 Lights up Press FM to select FM as the input source. “FM” appears in the front panel display. BASIC OPERATION SEARCH FM A FM 88.9 MHz No colon (:) If a colon (:) appears in the front panel display, tuning is not available. Press PRESET/TUNE to turn the colon (:) off. y • You can also press INPUT on the front panel repeatedly to select FM as the input source. • If “XM” appears in the front panel display, press FM/XM again to display “FM” (U.S.A. and Canada models only). English 51 En Black process 45.0° 240.0 LPI 01EN_YSP-4000_UA.book Page 52 Wednesday, December 26, 2007 3:00 PM FM tuning 3 Press SEARCH repeatedly until the AUTO indicator disappears from the front panel display. 2 Press FM to select FM as the input source. “FM” appears in the front panel display. FM SEARCH y • You can also press INPUT on the front panel repeatedly to select FM as the input source. • If “XM” appears in the front panel display, press FM/XM again to display “FM” (U.S.A. and Canada models only). A FM 88.9 MHz 3 No colon (:) If a colon (:) appears in the front panel display, tuning is not available. Press PRESET/TUNE to turn the colon (:) off. 4 Press and hold MEMORY for more than three seconds. The preset station group and number, the MEMORY indicator, and the AUTO indicator flash. Automatic preset tuning starts from the current frequency and proceeds toward higher frequencies. Press ENTRY ( / ) to tune into the desired station manually. MEMORY ENTRY Flashes ENTER A1:FM 88.9 MHz y Hold down the button for quick search. Automatic preset tuning You can use the automatic preset tuning feature to store up to 40 FM stations with strong signals (A1 to E8: 5 preset station groups with 8 preset station numbers each). You can recall the preset stations easily by selecting the preset station groups and numbers. 1 Set the operation mode selector to TV/AV. TV/AV YSP 52 En Black process 45.0° 240.0 LPI Flashes When automatic preset tuning is completed, the front panel display shows the frequency of the last preset station. Notes • When you overwrite an existing preset station, the previously stored FM station is cleared. • If the number of automatically preset stations does not reach 40 (E8), this unit automatically stops searching. • Only FM stations with sufficient signal strength are preset automatically. If the desired station is weak in signal strength, tune into it manually and store it as described in “Manual preset tuning” on page 53. 01EN_YSP-4000_UA.book Page 53 Wednesday, December 26, 2007 3:00 PM FM tuning y Manual preset tuning • If the colon (:) does not appear, press PRESET/TUNE to display the colon. • U.S.A. and Canada models use CAT/A-E . • Even when the operation mode selector is set to YSP, you can select the desired preset group by pressing A-E (CAT for U.S.A. and Canada models). You can also store up to 40 stations (A1 to E8: 5 preset station groups with 8 preset station numbers each) manually. 1 Set the operation mode selector to TV/AV. 5 TV/AV YSP Press ENTRY ( / ) to select a preset station number (1 to 8) while the MEMORY indicator is flashing. ENTRY 2 3 Tune into the desired FM station. See page 51 for tuning instructions. ENTER Press MEMORY. The MEMORY indicator flashes in the front panel display for approximately 10 seconds. Flashes MEMORY A1:FM 88.9 MHz Preset station number y 4 Press A-E ( / ) repeatedly to select a preset station group (A to E) while the MEMORY indicator is flashing. The selected preset station group letter appears. Check that the colon (:) appears in the front panel display. 6 Press MEMORY while the MEMORY indicator is flashing. The preset station group and number appear in the front panel display together with the station band and frequency. The MEMORY indicator disappears from the front panel display. BASIC OPERATION • You can also use the numeric buttons to select the desired preset station number. • Even when the operation mode selector is set to YSP, you can select the desired preset number by pressing / . Flashes MEMORY A-E ENTER Flashes A1:FM 88.9 MHz The displayed station has been stored as A1. A :FM 88.9 MHz Notes • When you overwrite an existing preset station, the previously stored FM station is cleared. • The reception mode (stereo or monaural) is stored along with the station frequency. 53 En Black process 45.0° 240.0 LPI English Preset Colon (:) station group 01EN_YSP-4000_UA.book Page 54 Wednesday, December 26, 2007 3:00 PM FM tuning Selecting a preset station You can tune into the preset stations simply by selecting the preset station groups and numbers. 1 Set the operation mode selector to TV/AV. 4 Press ENTRY ( / ) to select the desired preset station number (1 to 8). The preset station group and number appear in the front panel display together with the station band and frequency. ENTRY TV/AV YSP 2 ENTER Press FM to select FM as the input source. “FM” appears in the front panel display. FM A1:FM 88.9 MHz y • You can also press INPUT on the front panel repeatedly to select FM as the input source. • If “XM” appears in the front panel display, press FM/XM again to display “FM” (U.S.A. and Canada models only). 3 Press A-E ( / ) to select the desired preset station group (A to E). The preset station group letter appears in the front panel display and changes each time you press the button. A-E ENTER y • You can also use the numeric buttons to select the desired preset station number. • Even when the operation mode selector is set to YSP, you can select the desired preset number by pressing / . Displaying the Radio Data System information (Europe model only) Radio Data System is a data transmission system used by FM stations. You can display the four types of the Radio Data System information: PS (program service), PTY (program type), RT (radio text), and CT (clock time). The corresponding indicators light up in the front panel display. Notes y • If the colon (:) does not appear, press PRESET/TUNE to display the colon. • U.S.A. and Canada models use CAT/A-E . • Even when the operation mode selector is set to YSP, you can select the desired preset group by pressing A-E (CAT for U.S.A. and Canada models). 54 En Black process 45.0° 240.0 LPI • You can select the Radio Data System display modes only when the corresponding Radio Data System indicators are lit in the front panel display. It may take a while for this unit to receive all of the Radio Data System data from the station. • If the signals being received are not strong enough, this unit may not be able to utilize the Radio Data System data. In particular, the “RT” mode requires a large amount of data and may not be available even when the other Radio Data System display modes are available. • In case of poor reception conditions, tune into the desired station manually (see page 51). • In case the signal strength is weakened by external interference while this unit is receiving the Radio Data System data, the reception may be cut off unexpectedly and “...WAIT” appears in the front panel display. • If the reception is cut off when the “CT” mode is selected, “CT WAIT” appears in the front panel display. 01EN_YSP-4000_UA.book Page 55 Wednesday, December 26, 2007 3:00 PM FM tuning 1 Tune into the desired Radio Data System broadcasting station. We recommend automatic preset tuning to tune into the Radio Data System broadcasting stations (see page 52). Program type Descriptions NEWS News AFFAIRS Current affairs INFO General information SPORT Sport EDUCATE Education DRAMA Drama CULTURE Culture SCIENCE Science VARIED Light entertainment POP M Pop music ROCK M Rock music M.O.R.M Middle-of-the-road music LIGHT M Light classical CLASSICS Serious classical OTHER M Other music Note The AUTO PS feature of this unit changes the frequency display to the “PS” mode if the Radio Data System station broadcasts the PS data. 2 Press DISPLAY repeatedly to select the desired Radio Data System display mode. DISPLAY PS PTY RT CT Frequency display BASIC OPERATION • Select “PS” to display the name of the Radio Data System program. • Select “PTY” to display the type of Radio Data System program. • Select “RT” to display the information on the Radio Data System program. • Select “CT” to display the current time. Note In the “RT” mode, this unit can scroll the display with a maximum of 64 alphanumeric characters, including the umlaut symbol. Unavailable characters are displayed with the “_” (underscore). English 55 En Black process 45.0° 240.0 LPI 01EN_YSP-4000_UA.book Page 56 Wednesday, December 26, 2007 3:00 PM ENJOYING SURROUND SOUND Enjoying surround sound You can enjoy multi-channel surround sound by changing the beam mode using the beam mode buttons on the remote control. Select 5 Beam, Stereo plus 3 Beam, 3 Beam, or My Surround for multi-channel playback. Notes • When ANGLE TO WALL OR CORNER is set in MANUAL SETUP (see page 78), 5 Beam and 3 Beam cannot be selected. • To enjoy 5 Beam, Stereo plus 3 Beam, or 3 Beam as the beam mode, you must perform AUTO SETUP or MANUAL SETUP so that the parameters best match your listening environment. AUTO VOL MODE SETUP INPUTMODE SLEEP 5BEAM ST+3BEAM 1 2 3 STEREO MY BEAM MY SUR. 4 5 6 MUSIC MOVIE SPORTS 7 8 OFF 0 9 SUR. DECODE +10 ENHANCER ENTRY CAT/ A-E ENTER 5 Beam 3BEAM Outputs sound beams from the front left, front right, center, surround left, and surround right channels. This mode is ideal for enjoying surround sound effects to the fullest when you watch DVDs recorded in a multi-channel format or play back 2-channel sources in a multi-channel format. MENU Press 5BEAM to select 5 Beam. TV/AV YSP DISPLAY RETURN 5BEAM (U.S.A. and Canada models) 1 1 Set the operation mode selector to YSP. Notes TV/AV YSP 2 Press one of the beam mode buttons (5BEAM, ST+3BEAM, 3BEAM, or MY SUR.) to select the desired beam mode for 5.1channel play back. 5BEAM ST+3BEAM 3BEAM 1 2 3 MY SUR. 6 56 En Black process 45.0° 240.0 LPI • To achieve the best surround sound effect, make sure that there are no obstacles placed in the path of sound beams in that the objects may prevent the sound beams from rebounding directly off the walls in your listening room. • The front left and right sound beams are output toward the walls in your listening room. • “SP Pos. Corner!” appears in the front panel display if INSTALLED POSITION is set to ANGLE TO WALL OR CORNER (see page 78). 01EN_YSP-4000_UA.book Page 57 Wednesday, December 26, 2007 3:00 PM Enjoying surround sound Stereo plus 3 Beam Outputs normal sound from the front left and right channels and sound beams from the center and surround left and right channels. This mode is ideal for watching live recordings on a DVD. Vocals and instrumental sounds can be heard close to the center of the listening position while sound reflections from the venue itself can be heard on your right and left, giving you the feeling that you are sitting right in front of the stage. Press ST+3BEAM to select Stereo plus 3 Beam. Notes • When you play back multi-channel sources, surround left and right signals are mixed down and output from the front left and right channels. • The front left and right sound beams are output toward the walls in your listening room. • “SP Pos. Corner!” appears in the front panel display if INSTALLED POSITION is set to ANGLE TO WALL OR CORNER (see page 78). My Surround ST+3BEAM 2 This mode enables surround system in a small listening area which may not fulfill the listening room conditions for other beam modes (see “Before installing this unit” on page 17). Use this beam mode when you want to enjoy surround sound near this unit, or when the other beam modes are unavailable. Press MY SUR. to select My Surround. MY SUR. 6 Note The front left and right sound beams are output directly toward the listening position. BASIC OPERATION 3 Beam Outputs sound beams from the front left and right and center channels. This mode is ideal for enjoying movies with the whole family. Because the listening position area is widened, you can enjoy excellent quality surround sound over a wider area. In addition, you can use this mode when the listening position is close to the backside of the wall, and the surround left and right sound beams cannot be reflected off the wall. Notes • Beam mode settings such as beam angles and distances are ineffective in this mode. • For the full effect of My Surround, your listening position must face toward the front of this unit. Press 3BEAM to select 3 Beam. 3BEAM 3 English y You can achieve a more realistic surround effect if you adjust settings for IMAGE LOCATION in BEAM MENU (see page 82). 57 En Black process 45.0° 240.0 LPI 01EN_YSP-4000_UA.book Page 58 Wednesday, December 26, 2007 3:00 PM Enjoying surround sound ■ Decoder indicators Depending on the input source and the selected surround mode, the indicators in the front panel display light up as follows: Status When PCM signals are being input Indicator PCM When DTS digital signals are being input When DTS Neo:6 is selected as the surround mode When Dolby Digital signals are being input When Dolby Pro Logic is selected as the surround mode When Dolby Pro Logic II is selected as the surround mode + DIGITAL PL PL • You can select an input mode (AUTO, DTS, or ANALOG) by pressing INPUTMODE repeatedly (see page 93). • Discs encoded in DTS-ES, Dolby Digital 5.1 EX, Dolby Digital EX, or Dolby Digital Surround EX will be played back in DTS or Dolby Digital. ■ Input channel indicators Depending on the channel component of the current digital input signal, the input channel indicators in the front panel display light up as follows: When 2-channel stereo signals are being input When 5.1-channel signals are being input 58 En Black process 45.0° 240.0 LPI Indicator Recommended source Surround mode Dolby Pro Logic – All sources Dolby Pro Logic II Movie Music Game Movies Music Games DTS Neo:6 Cinema Music Movies Music – XM Satellite Radio (U.S.A. and Canada models only) Neural Surround (U.S.A. and Canada models only) y Status ■ Surround modes and recommended sources Notes • When you select an input source (see page 47), the surround mode used for the previously selected input source is automatically selected. • If the power of this unit is turned off and on again, the surround mode used for the previously selected input source before the power was turned off is automatically selected. • If the surround modes are not available, “Prohibit” appears in the front panel display when you press SUR. DECODE. • The surround modes are available: – when the beam mode is set to a setting other than the 2channel or 5-channel stereo playback (see page 62) and My Surround (see page 57). – when the CINEMA DSP programs are turned off (see page 69). – when the movie program is selected as the CINEMA DSP program (see page 68). In this case, only Dolby Pro Logic, Dolby Pro Logic II Movie, and DTS Neo:6 Cinema are available. – when 2-channel signals are being input. – when the Music Enhancer is turned off (see page 70). 01EN_YSP-4000_UA.book Page 59 Wednesday, December 26, 2007 3:00 PM Enjoying surround sound Enjoying 2-channel sources in surround sound This unit can decode 2-channel sources for 5.1-channel playback so that you can enjoy a variety of surround sound effects by switching the surround mode. 2 Press SUR. DECODE repeatedly (or press SUR. DECODE and then press / ) to switch between surround modes. Choices: Neo:6 Cinema, Neo:6 Music, PRO LOGIC, PLII Movie, PLII Music, PLII Game, neural surround Default setting: Neo:6 Cinema y The surround modes are available only when the CINEMA DSP programs are turned off (see page 69) or when the movie program is selected as the CINEMA DSP program (see page 68). In addition, the beam mode must be set to 5 Beam, Stereo plus 3 Beam, or 3 Beam (see page 56), while the Music Enhancer must be also turned off (see page 70). 5BEAM ST+3BEAM 3BEAM 1 2 3 STEREO MY BEAM MY SUR. or SUR. DECODE ENTER 4 5 6 MUSIC MOVIE SPORTS 7 8 OFF SUR. DECODE 9 SUR. DECODE +10 0 ENHANCER ENTRY CAT/ A-E ENTER Neo:6 Cinema MENU TV/AV Neo:6 Music YSP DISPLAY RETURN (U.S.A. and Canada models) neural surround (U.S.A. and Canada models only) 1 Set the operation mode selector to YSP. BASIC OPERATION PRO LOGIC PLII Movie TV/AV YSP PLII Music PLII Game Example of the surround mode display in the front panel display when the CINEMA DSP program and the Music Enhancer are turned off English 59 En Black process 45.0° 240.0 LPI 01EN_YSP-4000_UA.book Page 60 Wednesday, December 26, 2007 3:00 PM Enjoying surround sound Enjoying TV in surround sound 4 If you hear sound from your TV speakers, reduce the volume level of your TV until you can no longer hear any audio being output. To reduce the TV volume level, use the remote control supplied with your TV. 5 Press VOLUME +/– to adjust the volume level. You can enjoy analog audio signals output from your TV in real surround sound. y Before performing the steps below, set the volume of this unit to 30. If necessary, adjust the volume level in step 4 below. TV INPUT1 MACRO TV STB FM/XM PRESET/TUNE SEARCH CAT MEMORY VOLUME AUTO VOL MODE SETUP INPUTMODE SLEEP 5BEAM ST+3BEAM 1 2 3BEAM 3 STEREO MY BEAM MY SUR. 4 5 6 MUSIC MOVIE SPORTS 7 8 OFF 9 SUR. DECODE +10 0 ENHANCER ENTRY CAT/ A-E ENTER MENU TV/AV YSP DISPLAY RETURN VOLUME CH TV VOL 6 Press SUR. DECODE repeatedly (or press SUR. DECODE and then press / ) to switch between surround modes. Signals input from 2-channel sources are played back in multi-channels. For more information on surround modes, see page 58. SUR. DECODE (U.S.A. and Canada models) 1 Select the TV channel you want to watch. To select a TV channel, use the remote control supplied with your TV. or SUR. DECODE ENTER 2 Set the operation mode selector to YSP. TV/AV YSP 3 Press TV. This unit outputs audio signals from your TV. TV 60 En Black process 45.0° 240.0 LPI 01EN_YSP-4000_UA.book Page 61 Wednesday, December 26, 2007 3:00 PM Enjoying surround sound Adjusting surround mode parameters You can configure the parameters for Dolby Pro Logic II Music and DTS Neo:6 Music to fine-tune the surround sound effect. MUSIC MOVIE 7 8 OFF 0 SPORTS +10 ENTRY CAT/ A-E ENTER MENU TV/AV YSP DISPLAY RETURN (U.S.A. and Canada models) 1 PANORAMA Gives the front left and right channel sound a wraparound effect, distributed throughout the entire surround sound field to give you an expansive feeling. Choices: ON/OFF Default setting: OFF 9 SUR. DECODE ENHANCER ■ When Dolby Pro Logic II Music is selected Repeat steps 1 and 2 in “Enjoying 2-channel sources in surround sound” on page 59 and select PL II Music or Neo:6 Music. DIMENSION Adjusts the difference in volume between the front and surround channels to the desired volume balance. Control range: –3 (toward the surround direction) to +3 (toward the front direction) Default setting: STD (standard) C. WIDTH Distributes the center channel sound to the left and right. If 0 is selected, the center channel sound is output only from the center channel. Control range: 0 to 7 Default setting: 3 ■ When DTS Neo:6 Music is selected 2 Press / to select the parameter. 3 BASIC OPERATION ENTER C. IMAGE Adjusts the center image from three channels (front left and right and center) to varying degrees. Control range: 0.0 (wider) to 1.0 (toward the center) Default setting: 0.3 Press / to configure the selected parameter. ENTER English 61 En Black process 45.0° 240.0 LPI 01EN_YSP-4000_UA.book Page 62 Wednesday, December 26, 2007 3:00 PM ENJOYING STEREO SOUND Enjoying stereo sound You can enjoy 2-channel and 5-channel stereo playback as the beam modes by pressing STEREO on the remote control. Notes • When you play back Dolby Digital audio signals in the 2-channel or 5-channel stereo playback, the dynamic range becomes compressed. If the volume level decreases to the extreme, use other beam modes except My Beam. • When the 2-channel or 5-channel stereo playback is selected as the beam mode, the surround modes (see page 58) and the CINEMA DSP programs (see page 65) become ineffective. Note 1 2 3 STEREO MY BEAM MY SUR. 4 5 6 MUSIC MOVIE SPORTS 7 8 OFF 0 9 SUR. DECODE +10 ENHANCER ENTRY CAT/ A-E ENTER When you play back multi-channel sources, all signals except those from the front left and right channels are mixed down and output from the front left and right channels. No audio is output from the center and surround channels. MENU TV/AV 5-channel stereo playback YSP DISPLAY RETURN (U.S.A. and Canada models) Sounds are output from front left and right, center, and surround left and right. This is ideal for playback in a large listening area or at a party. 2-channel stereo playback Sounds are output from the front right and left channels. This is ideal for playing back hi-fi sources, such as CDs, and can be used to replace your TV speakers. 1 Set the operation mode selector to YSP. TV/AV YSP 1 Set the operation mode selector to YSP. TV/AV 2 Press STEREO twice to select the 5-channel stereo playback as the beam mode. “5CH STEREO” appears in the front panel display. YSP STEREO 4 2 Press STEREO to select the 2-channel stereo playback as the beam mode. “STEREO” appears in the front panel display. STEREO 4 STEREO 62 En Black process 45.0° 240.0 LPI 5CH STEREO 01EN_YSP-4000_UA.book Page 63 Wednesday, December 26, 2007 3:00 PM PLAYING BACK SOUND CLEARLY (MY BEAM) Playing back sound clearly (My Beam) You can improve listenability in a noisy environment by changing the beam mode to My Beam, which outputs sound beams directly toward the listening position in a single channel. In addition, My Beam is also ideal when you do not want the sound beams to be reflected on the walls in your listening room or when you do not want to disturb other people while enjoying music or movies at night. My Beam microphone STANDBY/ON POWER POWER AV VOL MODE TV INPUTMODE SLEEP 5BEAM ST+3BEAM 1 2 3BEAM 3 STEREO MY BEAM MY SUR. 4 5 6 MUSIC MOVIE SPORTS 7 8 OFF 9 SUR. DECODE +10 0 ENHANCER ENTRY CAT/ A-E ENTER MENU TV/AV YSP DISPLAY RETURN (U.S.A. and Canada models) Note Using auto-adjust function The My Beam microphone on the remote control collects the test tones from this unit so that the beam angle can be automatically adjusted. 1 Set the operation mode selector to YSP. TV/AV YSP 2 Press and hold MY BEAM for more than two seconds. A test tone is output twice from this unit. Keep pointing the remote control toward this unit while the test tones are being output so that the My Beam microphone can collect the test tones. Control range: L60° to R60° Operation guarantee range: 6 m (20 ft), L45° to R45° Notes • If an error occurs, an error buzzer is played and “MY BEAM ERROR” is displayed in the front panel display. • An error may occur if the listening room is noisy. Make sure that the listening room is as quiet as possible while the test tones are being output. • Do not shake or move the remote control while the test tones are being output. • Do not cover the My Beam microphone on the remote control while the test tones are being output. • The batteries in the remote control may be weak if the remote control does not function properly. In this case, replace all the batteries and then try the procedure again. • When the input signal with 64 kHz or 96 kHz of sampling frequency is being played back, the beam angle cannot be automatically adjusted. English MY BEAM 5 63 En Black process 45.0° 240.0 LPI BASIC OPERATION If My Beam is selected as the beam mode, the surround modes (see page 58), the CINEMA DSP programs (see page 65), and TruBass (see page 84) become ineffective. In addition, no audio is output from the subwoofer connected to this unit. 01EN_YSP-4000_UA.book Page 64 Wednesday, December 26, 2007 3:00 PM Playing back sound clearly (My Beam) Using manual-adjust function You can adjust the beam angle manually while playing back an input source. This function is also ideal if the listening position is out of the operation guarantee range of the auto-adjust function. 1 Set the operation mode selector to YSP. TV/AV YSP 2 Press MY BEAM. “MY BEAM” is displayed in the front panel display. MY BEAM 5 3 Press / while “MY BEAM” is displayed to adjust the beam angle. Control range: L90° to R90° • Press repeatedly to increase the horizontal angle on the left side. • Press repeatedly to increase the horizontal angle on the right side. ENTER ANGLE 64 En Black process 45.0° 240.0 LPI 0 01EN_YSP-4000_UA.book Page 65 Wednesday, December 26, 2007 3:00 PM USING SOUND FIELD PROGRAMS Using sound field programs This unit is equipped with a variety of precise digital decoders that allow you to enjoy multi-channel playback from stereo or multi-channel sources. This unit is also equipped with a Yamaha CINEMA DSP (digital sound field processing) chip containing several sound field programs used to enhance your playback experience. Most of the CINEMA DSP programs are precise digital recreations of actual acoustic environments found in famous concert halls, music venues, and movie theaters. y The Yamaha CINEMA DSP programs are compatible with all Dolby Digital, DTS, and Dolby Surround sources. Note Choose a CINEMA DSP program based on your listening preference and do not purely rely on the name of the CINEMA DSP program itself. ■ What is a sound field? A significant factor that creates the rich, full tones of a live instrument is the multiple reflections from the walls of the room. In addition to making the sound live, these reflections enable the listener to tell where the player is situated as well as the size and shape of the room in which the listener is sitting. ■ Elements of a sound field In any environment, there are two distinct types of sound reflections combined with the direct sound coming straight to our ears from the player’s instrument to make up the sound field. Early reflections Reflected sounds reach our ears extremely rapidly (50 ms to 80 ms after the direct sound) after reflecting from one surface only (from the ceiling or the wall, for example). Early reflections help add clarity to the direct sound. Direct sound, early reflections, and subsequent reverberations all together help us determine the subjective size and shape of the room, and it is this information that the digital sound field processor reproduces in order to create the sound fields. BASIC OPERATION Reverberations These are caused by reflections from more than one surface (i.e., wall, ceiling, the back of the room, etc.) so numerous that they merge together to form a continuous sonic afterglow. They are non-directional and lessen the clarity of the direct sound. With the appropriate early reflections and subsequent reverberations in your listening room, you can create your own listening environment. The acoustics in your room could be changed to those of a concert hall, a dance floor, or a listening room of virtually any size at all. This ability to create sound fields at will is exactly what Yamaha has done with the CINEMA DSP technology. English 65 En Black process 45.0° 240.0 LPI 01EN_YSP-4000_UA.book Page 66 Wednesday, December 26, 2007 3:00 PM Using sound field programs ■ Sound field program descriptions You can select from the following sound field programs based on your listening preference when you play music, movie or sports sources. For details on how to switch between the available sound field programs, see page 67. Note There is only one sports sound field program available. Sound field program Source Feature Music Video This program produces a vibrant environment and lets you feel as if you are at an actual jazz or rock concert. Concert Hall This program creates a rich surround effect of a large round concert hall with a great deal of presence, emphasizing the extension of sounds, and lets you feel as if you are seated close to the center of the stage. Music Jazz Club This program recreates the acoustic environment of “The Bottom Line”, a famous jazz club in New York and lets you feel as if you are seated right in front of the stage. Sci-Fi This program clearly reproduces dialogs and special sound effects of the latest science fiction films and lets you feel a broad and expansive cinematic space amid silence. Spectacle Movie This program reproduces the wide and grand environment and lets you have added impressions on spectacular scenes with strong visual impacts. Adventure This program reproduces the thrilling environment of the latest action films and lets you feel the dynamic and excitement of fast-moving scenes. SPORTS This program reproduces the energetic environment of live sports broadcasting, converging a commentator’s voice on the center and broadening the overall atmosphere of the stadium, and lets you feel as if you are seated at an actual stadium or a ball park. 66 En Black process 45.0° 240.0 LPI Sports 01EN_YSP-4000_UA.book Page 67 Wednesday, December 26, 2007 3:00 PM Using sound field programs CINEMA DSP programs You can select from three different CINEMA DSP programs (MUSIC, MOVIE, and SPORTS) depending on the type of source you want to enjoy. The CINEMA DSP indicator lights up in the front panel display when one of the CINEMA DSP programs is selected. ■ Music programs Select this CINEMA DSP program when you play back music sources. This program produces a vibrant atmosphere and lets you feel as if you are seated in an actual rock or jazz concert hall. 1 Set the operation mode selector to YSP. Notes TV/AV • The CINEMA DSP programs are ineffective when My Surround (see page 57) is selected as the beam mode. • If the CINEMA DSP programs are not available, “Prohibit” appears in the front panel display when you press one of the CINEMA DSP program buttons on the remote control. YSP 2 Press MUSIC to select the music CINEMA DSP program. MUSIC 5BEAM ST+3BEAM 3BEAM 1 2 3 STEREO MY BEAM MY SUR. 4 5 6 MUSIC MOVIE SPORTS 7 8 OFF 0 3 +10 ENHANCER ENTRY CAT/ A-E ENTER DISPLAY 9 SUR. DECODE 7 MENU TV/AV Check that MUSIC is displayed in the front panel display and then press MUSIC on the remote control repeatedly (or press / on the remote control) to switch between the music sound field programs. YSP RETURN MUSIC (U.S.A. and Canada models) 7 BASIC OPERATION MUSIC ENTER or Music Video Concert Hall Jazz Club y For detailed descriptions of each sound field program, see “Sound field program descriptions” on page 66. English 67 En Black process 45.0° 240.0 LPI 01EN_YSP-4000_UA.book Page 68 Wednesday, December 26, 2007 3:00 PM Using sound field programs ■ Movie programs ■ Sports program Select this CINEMA DSP program when you play back movie sources, especially the ones encoded in Dolby Digital, DTS, or Dolby Surround. This program clearly reproduces dialog and sound effects, thus creating a broad and expansive cinematic space amid silence. Select this CINEMA DSP program when you play back sports sources. This program densely concentrates the vocal sound of the commentator in the center while broadening the sound from the audience or the environment all around your listening room. 1 1 Set the operation mode selector to YSP. TV/AV TV/AV YSP YSP 2 3 2 Press MOVIE to select the movie CINEMA DSP program. SPORTS 8 9 MOVIE MOVIE ENTER or Sci-Fi Spectacle Adventure y For detailed descriptions of each sound field program, see “Sound field program descriptions” on page 66. 68 En Black process 45.0° 240.0 LPI Press SPORTS to select the sports CINEMA DSP program. MOVIE Check that MOVIE is displayed in the front panel display and then press MOVIE on the remote control repeatedly (or press / on the remote control) to switch between the music sound field programs. 8 Set the operation mode selector to YSP. SPORTS y • There is only one sports sound field program available. • For detailed descriptions of each sound field program, see “Sound field program descriptions” on page 66. 01EN_YSP-4000_UA.book Page 69 Wednesday, December 26, 2007 3:00 PM Using sound field programs ■ Turning off CINEMA DSP programs Turn off the CINEMA DSP programs if you want to enjoy the original sound without the CINEMA DSP program effect. 2 Press MUSIC, MOVIE, or SPORTS to select the desired CINEMA DSP program. MUSIC 1 Set the operation mode selector to YSP. TV/AV YSP 2 7 3 MOVIE or 8 SPORTS or 9 Press / . “DSP LEVEL” is displayed in the front panel display. ENTRY Press OFF to turn off the CINEMA DSP programs. “CINEMA DSP OFF” is displayed in the front panel display and the CINEMA DSP indicator disappears. ENTER OFF 0 DSP LEVEL 0dB CINEMA DSP OFF 4 Press / to adjust the effect level of the selected CINEMA DSP program. You can enjoy good quality sound with the factory preset parameters. However, you can also adjust the effect level of the CINEMA DSP programs relative to the level of the direct sound so that each CINEMA DSP program can reflect your listening environment and your preference even more accurately. 1 Set the operation mode selector to YSP. BASIC OPERATION ■ Adjusting CINEMA DSP effect levels ENTER Control range: –6 dB to +3 dB • A larger value increases the effect level. • A smaller value decreases the effect level. TV/AV YSP English 69 En Black process 45.0° 240.0 LPI 01EN_YSP-4000_UA.book Page 70 Wednesday, December 26, 2007 3:00 PM USING THE MUSIC ENHANCER Using the music enhancer You can use the Music Enhancer of this unit to improve the sound nearest to the original depth and width of compression artifacts such as the MP3 format. MUSIC MOVIE 7 8 OFF SPORTS 9 SUR. DECODE +10 0 ENHANCER ENTRY 3 Press ENHANCER repeatedly to switch between the Music Enhancer levels (OFF, MIN, and MAX). MENU ENHANCER TV/AV CAT/ A-E ENTER YSP DISPLAY RETURN VOLUME CH TV VOL ENHANCER:HIGH (U.S.A. and Canada models) ENHANCER:LOW 1 Set the operation mode selector to YSP. TV/AV YSP 2 ENHANCER OFF The ENHANCER indicator lights up when “ENHANCER:HIGH” or “ENHANCER:LOW” is selected. Press ENHANCER to select the Music Enhancer. The currently selected mode appears in the front panel display. Lights up ENHANCER Notes • The Music Enhancer is not compatible with the CINEMA DSP programs. If a CINEMA DSP program is selected while the Music Enhancer is on, the Music Enhancer is turned off automatically. In this case, the Music Enhancer remains off even after the CINEMA DSP program is canceled. Likewise, if the Music Enhancer is turned on while a CINEMA DSP program is selected, the CINEMA DSP program is canceled automatically. In this case, the CINEMA DSP program remains off even after the Music Enhancer is turned off. • The Music Enhancer is available only when a setting other than My Surround (see page 57) is selected as the beam mode. 70 En Black process 45.0° 240.0 LPI 01EN_YSP-4000_UA.book Page 71 Wednesday, December 26, 2007 3:00 PM USING THE VOLUME MODE (NIGHT LISTENING ENHANCER/TV VOLUME EQUAL MODE) Using the volume mode (Night listening enhancer/TV volume equal mode) The night listening enhancers are designed to improve listenability at lower volumes or at night. In addition, you can limit the volume level of the TV so that it will not vary suddenly to a great extent whenever the contents being broadcast change (i.e. due to commercials, etc.). The EQUAL indicator lights up in the front panel display when “TV EQUAL VOLUME” is selected. AUTO VOL MODE SETUP INPUTMODE SLEEP 5BEAM ST+3BEAM 1 2 3BEAM 3 STEREO MY BEAM MY SUR. 4 5 6 MUSIC MOVIE SPORTS 7 8 OFF 0 9 Lights up SUR. DECODE +10 ENHANCER ENTRY CAT/ A-E ENTER • Select NIGHT:CINEMA when watching films to reduce the dynamic range of film soundtracks and to make dialog easier to hear at lower volumes. • Select NIGHT:MUSIC when listening to music sources to preserve ease-of-listening for all sounds. • Select TV EQUAL VOLUME when watching TV programs. • Select OFF to turn off the volume mode. MENU TV/AV YSP DISPLAY RETURN (U.S.A. and Canada models) 1 Set the operation mode selector to YSP. TV/AV YSP Press / to adjust the effect level of compression while NIGHT:CINEMA, NIGHT:MUSIC, or TV EQUAL VOLUME is displayed. Press VOL MODE repeatedly to select NIGHT:CINEMA, NIGHT:MUSIC, TV EQUAL VOLUME, or OFF. ENTER BASIC OPERATION 2 3 VOL MODE Effect.Lvl:MIN NIGHT:CINEMA Effect.Lvl:MID NIGHT:MUSIC Effect.Lvl:MAX TV EQUAL VOLUME OFF The NIGHT indicator lights up in the front panel display when “NIGHT:CINEMA” or “NIGHT:MUSIC” is selected. • Select Effect.Lvl:MIN for minimum compression. • Select Effect.Lvl:MID for standard compression. • Select Effect.Lvl:MAX for maximum compression. Notes Lights up 71 En Black process 45.0° 240.0 LPI English • The volume mode settings are canceled if you press STANDBY/ON or disconnect the AC power supply cable from the AC wall outlet. • The volume mode settings become ineffective when My Surround is selected as the beam mode (see page 57). 01EN_YSP-4000_UA.book Page 72 Wednesday, December 26, 2007 3:00 PM USING THE SLEEP TIMER Using the sleep timer Use this feature to automatically set this unit to the standby mode after a specified period of time. The sleep timer is useful if you are going to sleep after a certain amount of time while this unit is still playing back a source. FM/XM PRESET/TUNE SEARCH CAT Each time you press SLEEP, the front panel display changes as shown below. MEMORY AUTO VOL MODE SETUP INPUTMODE SLEEP 5BEAM ST+3BEAM 1 2 3 STEREO MY BEAM MY SUR. 4 5 6 MUSIC MOVIE SPORTS 7 8 OFF 0 ENHANCER CAT/ A-E SLEEP 3BEAM 9 SUR. DECODE +10 ENTRY SLEEP 90min SLEEP 60min SLEEP 30min SLEEP OFF MENU ENTER YSP RETURN (U.S.A. and Canada models) Set the operation mode selector to YSP. 3 TV/AV YSP 2 120min TV/AV DISPLAY 1 SLEEP Press SLEEP repeatedly to set the interval for the sleep timer. Choices: 120min, 90min, 60min, 30min, OFF The SLEEP indicator flashes in the front panel display while switching the interval for the sleep timer. SLEEP Flashes 72 En Black process 45.0° 240.0 LPI Wait for a few seconds without operating this unit to confirm the setting for the sleep timer. The SLEEP indicator lights up in the front panel display, indicating that the sleep timer is activated. Lights up 01EN_YSP-4000_UA.book Page 73 Wednesday, December 26, 2007 3:00 PM Using the sleep timer ■ Canceling the sleep timer 1 Set the operation mode selector to YSP. TV/AV YSP 2 Press SLEEP repeatedly until “SLEEP OFF” appears in the front panel display. SLEEP SLEEP 3 OFF Wait for a few seconds without operating this unit to confirm the setting for the sleep timer. The SLEEP indicator disappears from the front panel display, indicating that the sleep timer is deactivated. Disappears BASIC OPERATION Note The previous setting for the sleep timer before you deactivate it is stored in the system memory. y The sleep timer setting can also be deactivated if you press STANDBY/ON to set this unit to the standby mode or unplug the AC power supply cable from the AC outlet. English 73 En Black process 45.0° 240.0 LPI 01EN_YSP-4000_UA.book Page 74 Wednesday, December 26, 2007 3:00 PM DISPLAYING THE INPUT SOURCE INFORMATION Displaying the input source information You can display the format and sampling frequency of the current input signal in the front panel display. 7 8 OFF 2 9 SUR. DECODE +10 0 ENHANCER ENTRY CAT/ A-E ENTER MENU Press DISPLAY. The information on the current input signal is displayed as follows: DISPLAY TV/AV YSP DISPLAY RETURN VOLUME CH TV VOL MUTE TV INPUT TV MUTE D.DGTL:48kHz or (U.S.A. and Canada models) 1 Set the operation mode selector to YSP. TV/AV YSP INPUT SIGNAL DOLBY DGTL:48kHz Input signal Indicator Dolby digital DOLBY DGTL DTS DTS PCM PCM Analog ANALOG Sampling frequency 32/44.1/48/64/ 88.2/96 kHz – y When the input signal is unclear, “___” is displayed for the sampling frequency. 74 En Black process 45.0° 240.0 LPI 01EN_YSP-4000_UA.book Page 75 Wednesday, December 26, 2007 3:00 PM USING THE HDMI CONTROL FEATURE Using the HDMI control feature You can operate the following functions using the remote control supplied with your TV if this unit and an HDMI control-compatible TV (except some models) are connected via HDMI. • Turning on or off the power (synchronized operation with the TV) • Selecting the audio output component (TV or this unit) • Adjusting the volume level (up/down and mute) An example of the HDMI control-compatible component is a Panasonic EZ Sync (for U.S.A. and Canada) or Viera Link (for other countries)-compatible component (TV, DVD recorder, Blu-ray recorder, etc.). y If you connect this unit to an HDMI control-compatible DVD player or Blu-ray Disc player via HDMI, you can also control the connected component in synchronization with this unit (except some models). Connect this unit to your HDMI control-compatible TV via HDMI. For details about HDMI and HDMI components, see “Information on HDMI™” on page 21 and “Connections using HDMI cables” on page 22. Also in the owner’s manual supplied with your TV, refer to the information on connecting an AV amplifier. 2 Turn on the power of all components connected via HDMI. For details about controlling external components, see the owner’s manuals supplied with your components. 3 Check the system settings for all components connected via HDMI and activate the HDMI control feature. For details about setting external components, see the owner’s manuals supplied with your components. Once you have followed steps 1 to 3, you do not need to carry out the same procedure again next time. 4 Turn off the power of your TV and then turn on the power again. 5 Set the input source selector of your TV to this unit (HDMI, etc.). 6 Select the connected component as the input source by pressing INPUT on the front panel of this unit (or press one of the input selector buttons on the remote control). Confirm that the video image played back on the DVD recorder (etc.) appears in your TV correctly. 7 Use the remote control supplied with your TV to turn on or off the power, select the audio output component, and adjust the volume level of this unit. BASIC OPERATION 1 Notes • Check the following if you cannot operate this unit in synchronization with your TV. – Whether HDMI CONTROL is set to ON (see page 87). – Whether the HDMI control feature is activated for your TV (see the owner’s manual supplied with your TV). • While you are playing back audio from a non-HDMI component, turning off the power of your TV with the remote control supplied with your TV does not turn off the power of this unit. Playback continues without being affected. English 75 En Black process 45.0° 240.0 LPI 01EN_YSP-4000_UA.book Page 76 Wednesday, December 26, 2007 3:00 PM MANUAL SETUP MANUAL SETUP To achieve the best quality surround sound, you can use MANUAL SETUP to fine-tune the listening environment parameters, as well as to make advanced settings for sound signals, sound beams, digital input, and the OSD. Change the initial settings (indicated in bold under each parameter) to reflect the needs of your own listening environment. y • You can save the settings optimized by the AUTO SETUP procedure (see page 44). A set of settings optimized according to the specific conditions of your listening environment can be recalled later depending on the varying conditions of your listening environment (see page 45). • Most of the parameters in SOUND MENU and BEAM MENU are automatically set when you run AUTO SETUP (see page 37). Use SOUND MENU and BEAM MENU to make additional adjustments. • BEAM MENU allows you to make settings for the surround sound effects normally available in the speaker settings menu. • Make settings for the parameters in BEAM MENU first before making settings for the parameters in SOUND MENU, INPUT MENU, and DISPLAY MENU. SOUND MENU Use to manually adjust the various parameters related to the sound output. Item Features Page TONE CONTROL Adjusts the output level of high-frequency or low-frequency sound. 82 SUBWOOFER SET Adjusts the various subwoofer settings. 82 MUTE LEVEL Adjusts the muting level. 83 AUDIO DELAY Adjusts the audio delay. 83 ROOM EQ Adjusts the tonal quality of the listening room. 83 DD/DTS Dynamic Range Adjusts the dynamic range of Dolby Digital or DTS signals. 84 TruBass Selects the bass sound enhancer. 84 BEAM MENU Use to manually adjust the various parameters related to the sound beam output. Item Features Page SETTING PARAMETERS Adjusts the listening room and listening position settings. 78 BEAM ADJUSTMENT Adjusts the various sound beam settings. 79 IMAGE LOCATION Adjusts the sound position of the front left and right channels. 82 INPUT MENU Use to manually adjust the various parameters related to the audio and video input. Item Features Page INPUT ASSIGNMENT Assigns jacks according to the component to be used. 84 INPUT MODE Selects the initial input of the source. 85 INPUT TRIM Adjusts the input level of the source. 85 INPUT RENAME Renames the displayed input source. 86 HDMI SET Adjusts the various HDMI settings. 86 XM ANTENNA LEVEL (U.S.A. and Canada models only) Displays the current reception level of the XM Satellite Radio signal. 88 DISPLAY MENU Use to manually adjust the various parameters related to the display. Item Features Page F.DISPLAY SET Adjusts the front panel display settings. 88 OSD SET Adjusts the OSD settings. 89 UNIT SET Changes the display unit of measurement. 89 76 En Black process 45.0° 240.0 LPI 01EN_YSP-4000_UA.book Page 77 Wednesday, December 26, 2007 3:00 PM MANUAL SETUP Using MANUAL SETUP 3 Use the remote control to access and adjust each parameter. MUSIC MOVIE 7 8 SPORTS 9 OFF 0 SUR. DECODE ENTER +10 ENHANCER ENTRY CAT/ A-E ENTER ENTER MENU TV/AV YSP DISPLAY VOLUME Press / to select MANUAL SETUP and press ENTER. The following screen appears on your TV. RETURN CH ;MANUAL SETUP TV VOL . 1)SOUND MENU 2)BEAM MENU 3)INPUT MENU 4)DISPLAY MENU (U.S.A. and Canada models) p p [ ]/[ ]:Up/Down [ENTER]:Enter y You can adjust the SET MENU parameters while the unit is reproducing sound. 1 Set the operation mode selector to YSP. 4 Press / ENTER. to select a sub menu and press TV/AV YSP ENTER ENTER 2 Press MENU. The SET MENU screen appears on your TV. SET MENU MENU 5 . ;MEMORY ;AUTO SETUP ;MANUAL SETUP ;LANGUAGE SETUP Press / / / each parameter. and ENTER to configure ADVANCED OPERATION p p [ ]/[ ]:Up/Down [ENTER]:Enter ENTER y • The control buttons used for SET MENU are displayed at the bottom of the screen. • To return to the previous screen while using SET MENU, press RETURN. • To exit from the SET MENU screen, press MENU once more. • You can also perform the following operations in the front panel display. 6 Press MENU to exit. The OSD disappears from your TV screen. MENU English 77 En Black process 45.0° 240.0 LPI 01EN_YSP-4000_UA.book Page 78 Wednesday, December 26, 2007 3:00 PM MANUAL SETUP BEAM MENU ANGLE TO WALL OR CORNER FLAT TO WALL Use to manually adjust the various parameters related to the sound beam output. SET MENU → MANUAL SETUP → BEAM MENU 2)BEAM MENU . A)SETTING PARAMETERS B)BEAM ADJUSTMENT C)IMAGE LOCATION p p [ ]/[ ]:Up/Down [ENTER]:Enter y You can adjust the sound beam output level of each channel in “Adjusting the audio balance” (see page 90). • Select FLAT TO WALL if this unit is installed in parallel with the wall in your listening room. Adjust the width and length of your listening room as well as the distance of the listening position from this unit and the distance of the center of this unit from the left wall. Listening position from the left wall ■ SETTING PARAMETERS (Setting parameters) Use to set the position of this unit in your listening room and the distance of this unit from the listening position. When you make settings for each parameter, other related parameters are automatically adjusted to best match your listening environment. Listening position from the unit Room length Room width Note Choices for the room width and length: 2.0 m to 12.0 m (6.5 ft to 40.0 ft) Choices for the listening position from this unit: 1.8 m to 9.0 m (6.0 ft to 30.0 ft) Choices for the listening position from the left wall: 0.6 m to 11.4 m (2.0 ft to 38.0 ft) A)SETTING PARAMETERS 1/3 p p p . INSTALLED POSITION ;;;;;;;FLAT TO WALL INSTALLED HEIGHT ;;;;;;;1.0m p [ ]/[ ]:Up/Down [ ]/[ ]:Sel [ENTER]:Return A)SETTING PARAMETERS 2/3 | -------[ 5.4m ]| 4.9m | Room width and length p p If you make adjustments in SETTING PARAMETERS, the beam optimization settings made in the AUTO SETUP procedure will be lost. If you want to keep the beam optimization settings made in the AUTO SETUP and make further adjustments, adjust settings in BEAM ADJUSTMENT first (see page 79). A)SETTING PARAMETERS 3/3 Listening position from the unit and the left wall --------| 2.7m [ 2.5m ] | p p INSTALLED POSITION (Installed position of this unit) Use to adjust the installed position of this unit. Choices: FLAT TO WALL (Parallel to wall installation), ANGLE TO WALL OR CORNER (Corner installation) p p [ ]/[ ]:Up/Down [ ]/[ ]:Sel [ENTER]:Return 78 En Black process 45.0° 240.0 LPI p p [ ]/[ ]:Up/Down [ ]/[ ]:Sel [ENTER]:Return 01EN_YSP-4000_UA.book Page 79 Wednesday, December 26, 2007 3:00 PM MANUAL SETUP • Select ANGLE TO WALL OR CORNER if this unit is installed in the corner of your listening room. Adjust the width and length of your listening room as well as the distance of the listening position from this unit. Listening position from the unit INSTALLED HEIGHT (Installed height of this unit) Use to adjust the installed height of this unit. Choices: 0.0 m to 3.0 m Initial setting: 1.0 m Room width Room length Choices for the room width and length: 2.0 m to 12.0 m (6.5 ft to 40.0 ft) Choices for the listening position from this unit: 1.8 m to 9.0 m (6.0 ft to 30.0 ft) Floor 0.0 m to 3.0 m ■ BEAM ADJUSTMENT (Beam adjustment) A)SETTING PARAMETERS 2/3 ----- 5.4m --- p Notes p | [ 5.4m ] | | Room width and length Use to manually adjust the various sound beam settings. We recommend that you select 5 Beam as the beam mode before adjusting these parameters (see page 56). p p [ ]/[ ]:Up/Down [ ]/[ ]:Sel [ENTER]:Return A)SETTING PARAMETERS 3/3 • When INSTALLED POSITION is adjusted in MANUAL SETUP (see page 78), the factory default value is automatically set for this parameter except Center in FOCAL LENGTH (see page 81). • Depending on the beam mode settings (see pages 56 and 62), some channel positions may not be available for selection. In this case, “– –” is displayed. When using Stereo plus 3 Beam as the beam mode, set the surround left and right signals to be output from the front left and right channels. B)BEAM ADJUSTMENT p p p [ ]/[ ]:Up/Down [ ]/[ ]:Sel [ENTER]:Return p ADVANCED OPERATION \ [ 2.5m ] \ Listening position from the unit p p . a)HORIZONTAL ANGLE b)VERTICAL ANGLE c)BEAM TRAVEL LENGTH d)FOCAL LENGTH e)TREBLE GAIN [ ]/[ ]:Up/Down [ENTER]:Enter Note When you set the INSTALLED POSITION parameter in MANUAL SETUP (see page 78), the parameters newly set for the width and length of your listening room are automatically set as the factory default value. English 79 En Black process 45.0° 240.0 LPI 01EN_YSP-4000_UA.book Page 80 Wednesday, December 26, 2007 3:00 PM MANUAL SETUP HORIZONTAL ANGLE (Horizontal angle) Use to adjust the horizontal angle of sound beams for each channel. By adjusting the horizontal angle of the sound beams, you can optimize the sound beam paths. A test tone is automatically output. ( ) (+) (+) ( ) BEAM TRAVEL LENGTH (Beam travel length) A certain amount of delay must be applied to the sound from each channel so that all sounds can arrive at the listening position at the same time. This menu sets the distance that sound beams travel after being output and reflected off the wall until they arrive at the listening position and adjusts the delay applied to the respective channel. The lines in the illustration below indicate the distance. Choices: L90° to R90° Adjust toward L (left) to move the direction of the output to the left and adjust toward R (right) to move it to the right. Front L L65deg L90 R90 * 0(deg) p p p p [ ]/[ ]:Up/Down [ ]/[ ]:Sel [ENTER]:Return VERTICAL ANGLE (Vertical angle) Use to adjust the vertical angle of sound beams for each speaker. By altering the beam path, you can optimize sound beam angles. c)BEAM TRAVEL LENGTH 5 beam . Front L;;;;;;;6.0m Front R;;;;;;;6.0m Center;;;;;;;;2.5m Surround L;;;;9.1m Surround R;;;;9.1m p p a)HORIZONTAL ANGLE5 beam 1/5 Choices: 0.3 m to 24.0 m (1.0 ft to 80.0 ft) • Front L adjusts the distance the front left channel sound beams travel. • Front R adjusts the distance the front right channel sound beams travel. • Center adjusts the distance the center channel sound beams travel. • Surround L adjusts the distance the surround left channel sound beams travel. • Surround R adjusts the distance the surround right channel sound beams travel. p p [ ]/[ ]:Up/Down [ ]/[ ]:Sel [ENTER]:Return y Choices: –45° to +45° Initial setting: 0° • Adjust toward – (minus) to move the angle downward. • Adjust toward + (plus) to move the angle upward. b)VERTICAL ANGLE 1/5 5 beam (+) ------0deg. (-) p p Front L 0deg. 80 En Black process 45.0° 240.0 LPI p p [ ]/[ ]:Up/Down [ ]/[ ]:Sel [ENTER]:Return We recommend that you use the setting optimized by AUTO SETUP (see page 37). Adjust this parameter only when you changed HORIZONTAL ANGLE (see page 80). 01EN_YSP-4000_UA.book Page 81 Wednesday, December 26, 2007 3:00 PM MANUAL SETUP FOCAL LENGTH (Focal length) Use to set the distance from the front of this unit to the focal point of output for each channel to achieve an expansive feeling for each channel. The focal points except for the center channel should be set near the reflection points on the walls. The shorter the distance, the larger the expansion. TREBLE GAIN (Treble gain) Use to adjust the high-frequency output level of each channel. y If the reflection points of the front left and right or surround left and right sound beams are on curtain or other acoustically absorbent surfaces, you can achieve more effective surround sound by increasing the treble level for those sound beams. focal length focal point sweet spot Center channel ( ) (+) e)TREBLE GAIN + . Front L;;;;;;;;0dB -----Front R;;;;;;;;0dB -----Center;;;;;;;;;0dB -----Surround L;;;;;0dB -----Surround R;;;;;0dB ------ p p [ ]/[ ]:Up/Down [ ]/[ ]:Sel [ENTER]:Return p ADVANCED OPERATION Choices: –1.0 m to +13.0 m (–3.5 ft to +43.5 ft) Adjust toward – (minus) to move the focus outward and adjust toward + (plus) to move the focus toward the normal position. • Front L adjusts the focal length for the front left sound beams. • Front R adjusts the focal length for the front right sound beams. • Center adjusts the focal length for the center sound beams. Initial setting: –0.5 m (–1.5 ft) • Surround L adjusts the focal length for the surround left sound beams. • Surround R adjusts the focal length for the surround right sound beams. p Front left channel Choices: –12.0 dB to +12.0 dB Initial setting: 0 dB • Front L adjusts the high-frequency output level of the front left channel. • Front R adjusts the high-frequency output level of the front right channel. • Center adjusts the high-frequency output level of the center channel. • Surround L adjusts the high-frequency output level of the surround left channel. • Surround R adjusts the high-frequency output level of the surround right channel. y We recommend that you use the initial setting (–0.5 m (or 1.5 ft)) for the center channel. d)FOCAL LENGTH 5 beam . Front L;;;;;;+1.5m Front R;;;;;;+1.5m Center;;;;;;;-0.5m Surround L;;;+2.3m Surround R;;;+2.3m p p p p [ ]/[ ]:Up/Down [ ]/[ ]:Sel [ENTER]:Return English 81 En Black process 45.0° 240.0 LPI 01EN_YSP-4000_UA.book Page 82 Wednesday, December 26, 2007 3:00 PM MANUAL SETUP ■ IMAGE LOCATION (Image location) OFF L C )ON R Use to manually adjust the various parameters related to the sound output. SET MENU → MANUAL SETUP → SOUND MENU 1)SOUND MENU . A)TONE CONTROL B)SUBWOOFER SET C)MUTE LEVEL D)AUDIO DELAY E)ROOM EQ F)DD/DTS Dynamic Range G)TruBass [ ]/[ ]:Up/Down [ENTER]:Enter p C)IMAGE LOCATION . SOUND MENU p Use to adjust the direction from which the front left and right channel sound is heard so that each sound can be heard closer to the center channel. Use this feature to redirect audio signals if the sound coming from the front left and right channels seems unnatural, such as when your listening position is not the center of your listening room. You can only adjust this parameter when 3 Beam or 5 Beam is selected as the beam mode (see page 56). Choices: ON, OFF Setting range: 0% to 95% Initial setting: 0% ■ TONE CONTROL (Tone control) p You can adjust the tonal quality of sound beams. LEFT;;;;;;;;;;;0% RIGHT;;;;;;;;;;0% p p p p [ ]/[ ]:Up/Down [ ]/[ ]:Sel [ENTER]:Return . A)TONE CONTROLTREBLE;;;;;0dB BASS;;;;;;;0dB p With the front left channel adjusted p Without adjustment p [ ]/[ ]:Up/Down [ ]/[ ]:Sel [ENTER]:Return p LEFT (Left) Adjusts audio signals toward the left. The higher the percentage, the louder the output from the center. + -----+ ------ TREBLE (Treble) Use to adjust the high-frequency response. Choices: –12 dB to +12 dB Initial setting: 0 dB BASS (Bass) Use to adjust the low-frequency response. Choices: –12 dB to +12 dB Initial setting: 0 dB Without adjustment With the front right channel adjusted ■ SUBWOOFER SET (Subwoofer settings) Use to manually adjust the various subwoofer settings. B)SUBWOOFER SET . BASS OUT;;;;;FRONT CROSS OVER;;;100Hz LFE LEVEL;;;;;;0dB DISTANCE;;;;;;3.0m p p RIGHT (Right) Adjusts audio signals toward the right. The higher the percentage, the louder the output from the center. 82 En Black process 45.0° 240.0 LPI p p [ ]/[ ]:Up/Down [ ]/[ ]:Sel [ENTER]:Return 01EN_YSP-4000_UA.book Page 83 Friday, March 7, 2008 10:03 AM MANUAL SETUP ■ MUTE LEVEL (Muting level) C)MUTE LEVEL pMUTE ■ ROOM EQ (Room equalizer) Use to change the tonal qualities of your listening room when the unit is mounted on the wall. Choices: MOUNTING (Mount type), REFLECTING (Reflectivity type) E)ROOM EQ . MOUNTING;;;;;SHELF REFLECTING;;;NORMAL p [ ]/[ ]:Up/Down [ ]/[ ]:Sel [ENTER]:Return MOUNTING (Mounting type) Use to enhance medium to low range sounds. Choices: WALL (Wall mount), SHELF (Shelf mount) • Select WALL if this unit is mounted on the wall in your listening room. • Select SHELF if this unit is mounted on the shelf in your listening room. REFLECTING (Reflectivity type) Use to select the reflectivity of your listening room. Choices: NORMAL (Normal), HI ECHO (High echo) • Select NORMAL if your listening room has a normal reflectivity. • Select HI ECHO if your listening room has highly reflective surfaces such as concrete walls. p p -20dB p [ ]/[ ]:Select [ENTER]:Return ADVANCED OPERATION Use to adjust how much the mute function reduces the volume level. Choices: MUTE, –20 dB • Select MUTE to completely halt all sound output. • Select –20 dB to reduce the current volume level by 20 dB. AUDIO DELAY;;;;;0msec p DISTANCE (Distance) Select to adjust the distance of the subwoofer from the listening position. Choices: 0.3 to 15.0 m (1.0 ft to 50.0 ft) Initial setting: 3.0 m (10.0 ft) D)AUDIO DELAY p LFE LEVEL (Low-frequency effect level) Select to adjust the output level of the LFE (low-frequency effect) channel according to the capacity of your subwoofer. The LFE channel carries low-frequency special effects which are only added to certain scenes. This setting is effective only when this unit decodes Dolby Digital or DTS signals. Choices: –20 to 0 dB Use to delay the sound output and synchronize it with the video image. This may be necessary when using certain LCD monitors or projectors. Choices: 0 to 160 msec p CROSS OVER (Crossover) When BASS OUT is set to SWFR, you can use this feature to select a crossover (cutoff) frequency for all lowfrequency signals. All frequencies below the selected frequency will be sent to the subwoofer position. Choices: 80Hz, 100Hz, 120Hz ■ AUDIO DELAY (Audio delay) p BASS OUT (Bass out) Low-frequency (bass) signals can be directed to the subwoofer or the front left and right channels. This setting also determines the routing of LFE (low-frequency effect) signals found in Dolby Digital or DTS sources. Choices: SWFR (Subwoofer), FRONT • Select SWFR if you connect a subwoofer. LFE and low-frequency signals from other channels are directed to the subwoofer. • Select FRONT if you do not use a subwoofer. LFE and low-frequency signals from other channels are directed to the front left and right channels. [ ]/[ ]:Select [ENTER]:Return English 83 En Black process 45.0° 240.0 LPI 01EN_YSP-4000_UA.book Page 84 Wednesday, December 26, 2007 3:00 PM MANUAL SETUP ■ DD/DTS Dynamic Range (Dynamic range of Dolby Digital and DTS signals) Use to select the amount of dynamic range compression. This setting is effective only when the unit is decoding Dolby Digital and DTS signals. Dynamic range is the difference between the smallest sound that can be heard above the noise of the equipment and the biggest sound that can be heard without distortion. Choices: MIN (minimum), STD (standard), MAX (maximum) INPUT MENU Use to manually adjust the various parameters related to the audio and video input. SET MENU → MANUAL SETUP → INPUT MENU 3)INPUT MENU . A)INPUT ASSIGNMENT B)INPUT MODE C)INPUT TRIM D)INPUT RENAME E)HDMI SET F)XM ANTENNA LEVEL p MIN STD pMAX p p p [ ]/[ ]:Up/Down [ENTER]:Enter F)DD/DTS Dynamic Range [ ]/[ ]:Select [ENTER]:Return Note “F) XM ANTENNA LEVEL” is for U.S.A. and Canada models only. Select to adjust the dynamic range compression. • Select MIN for listening to sources at low volume levels. • Select STD for general use. • Select MAX for feature films. ■ TruBass Use to turn on or off the bass sound enhancer. The SRS TruBass technology improves bass even without a subwoofer and provides deeper, richer bass in the presence of a subwoofer. Choices: OFF, MID, DEEP G)TruBass p pMID DEEP p OFF [ ]/[ ]:Select [ENTER]:Return Note TruBass is not available when My Beam (see page 63) or My Surround (see page 57) is selected as the beam mode. 84 En Black process 45.0° 240.0 LPI ■ INPUT ASSIGNMENT (Input assignment) Use to assign the HDMI IN jacks of this unit to other components if the initial settings of this unit do not correspond to your needs. By assigning other components to the HDMI IN jacks of this unit, you can display the names of the connected components in the front panel display and OSD and operate the components with the input selector buttons of the same name. If you connect a component to one of the HDMI IN jacks of this unit and do not assign a name to it, the default component name for HDMI IN jack is displayed in the front panel and OSD when selected. • Select HDMI1 to assign a component to the HDMI AUX 1 IN jack of this unit. Choices: TV/STB, AUX1 • Select HDMI2 to assign a component to the HDMI DVD IN jack of this unit. Choices: DVD, AUX2 • Select Line1 to assign a component to the STB COMPONENT VIDEO IN jacks of this unit. Choices: TV/STB, AUX1 • Select Line2 to assign a component to the DVD/AUX 2 COMPONENT VIDEO IN jacks of this unit. Choices: DVD, AUX2 • Select Line3 to assign a component to the AUX 1 VIDEO IN jack of this unit. Choices: DVD, AUX2 01EN_YSP-4000_UA.book Page 85 Wednesday, December 26, 2007 3:00 PM MANUAL SETUP ■ INPUT TRIM (Input trim) AUX1 AUX1 DVD DVD p ) C)INPUT TRIM 1/2 ) p . HDMI1;;;; ( HDMI2;;;; ( Use to adjust the input level of the input source. p p [ ]/[ ]:Up/Down [ ]/[ ]:Sel [ENTER]:Return . TV/STB DVD ANALOG;;;-3.0dB DIGITAL;;-3.0dB DIGITAL;;-3.0dB p p A)INPUTHDMI ASSIGNMENT 1/3 A)INPUTCOMPONENT ASSIGNMENT 2/3 . Line1;;;;TV/STB ( TV/STB Line2;;;; DVD ( DVD ) p p ) p p [ ]/[ ]:Up/Down [ ]/[ ]:Sel [ENTER]:Return A)INPUT ASSIGNMENT 3/3 COMPOSITE . Line3;;;; AUX2 ( AUX2 p p ) p p [ ]/[ ]:Up/Down [ ]/[ ]:Sel [ENTER]:Return ■ INPUT MODE (Input mode) B)INPUT MODE pAUTO p p LAST [ ]/[ ]:Select [ENTER]:Return English • Select AUTO to set this unit to automatically detect the type of input signals and select the appropriate input mode. • Select LAST to set this unit to automatically select the last input mode used for that input source. If the type of input signals is different from the setting, no sounds will be produced. • Select TV/STB ANALOG to adjust the level of audio and video signals input at the TV/STB AUDIO IN jacks of this unit. Control range: –6.0 dB to 0.0 dB Initial setting: –3.0 dB • Select TV/STB DIGITAL to adjust the level of audio and video signals input at the TV/STB OPTICAL DIGITAL IN jack of this unit. Control range: –6.0 dB to 0.0 dB Initial setting: –3.0 dB • Select DVD DIGITAL to adjust the level of audio and video signals input at the DVD COAXIAL DIGITAL IN jack of this unit. Control range: –6.0 dB to 0.0 dB Initial setting: –3.0 dB • Select AUX1 ANALOG to adjust the level of audio and video signals input at the AUX 1 AUDIO IN jacks of this unit. Control range: –6.0 dB to 0.0 dB Initial setting: –3.0 dB • Select AUX1 DIGITAL to adjust the level of audio and video signals input at the AUX 1 OPTICAL DIGITAL IN jack of this unit. Control range: –6.0 dB to 0.0 dB Initial setting: –3.0 dB • Select AUX2 DIGITAL to adjust the level of audio and video signals input at the AUX 2 COAXIAL DIGITAL IN jack of this unit. Control range: –6.0 dB to 0.0 dB Initial setting: –3.0 dB • Select AUX3 ANALOG to adjust the level of audio signals input at the AUX 3 input jack on the front panel. Control range: –6.0 dB to 0.0 dB Initial setting: –3.0 dB • Select DOCK ANALOG to adjust the level of audio signals input at the DOCK terminal of this unit (U.S.A., Canada, and Australia models only). Control range: –6.0 dB to 0.0 dB Initial setting: –3.0 dB 85 En Black process 45.0° 240.0 LPI ADVANCED OPERATION Use to designate the input mode for the input sources connected to the DIGITAL IN jacks when you turn on the power of this unit. For information on the types of audio signals that can be output by this unit, see “Selecting the input mode” on page 93. Choices: AUTO, LAST p p [ ]/[ ]:Up/Down [ ]/[ ]:Sel [ENTER]:Return 01EN_YSP-4000_UA.book Page 86 Wednesday, December 26, 2007 3:00 PM MANUAL SETUP ■ INPUT RENAME (Input rename) ■ HDMI SET (HDMI settings) Use to change the name of the input source in the OSD and the front panel display. Press an input selector button (e.g., DVD) to select the component you want to change the name for and perform the following procedure. Use to change the HDMI audio/video output/input to match the connected component. Choices: SUPPORT AUDIO (Support audio), VIDEO INFO (Video information), UP-SCALING (HDMI up-scaling), ASPECT RATIO (HDMI aspect ratio), HDMI CONTROL (HDMI control) D)INPUT RENAME DVD -> E)HDMI SET p p DVD p p [ ]/[ ]:Position [ ]/[ ]:Character [ENTER]:Return Press / to place the _ (underscore) under the space or the character you want to edit. The _ (underscore) flashes. ENTER 2 SUPPORT AUDIO (Support audio) Use to select whether to play back HDMI audio signals on this unit or on another HDMI component connected to the HDMI OUT jack of this unit. Choices: YSP-4000, OTHER a)SUPPORT AUDIO Press / to select the desired character. • You can use up to 8 characters for each input. • Press to change the character in the following order or press to go in the reverse order: A to Z, a space, 0 to 9, a space, a to z, a space, #, *, +, etc. pYSP-4000 p OTHER p 1 p p . a)SUPPORT AUDIO b)VIDEO INFO c)UP-SCALING d)ASPECT RATIO e)HDMI CONTROL [ ]/[ ]:Up/Down [ENTER]:Enter [ ]/[ ]:Select [ENTER]:Return Notes ENTER 3 Repeat steps 1 to 2 to rename each input. 4 Press ENTER to exit. The new names are registered, and the display returns to the previous screen. ENTER 86 En Black process 45.0° 240.0 LPI • This setting is effective when HDMI CONTROL is set to OFF (see page 87). • The HDMI video signals input at one of the HDMI IN jacks of this unit are always output at the HDMI OUT jack of this unit. • When HDMI CONTROL is set to ON, this setting is ineffective. This unit follows the setting of the HDMI control-compatible TV. 01EN_YSP-4000_UA.book Page 87 Wednesday, December 26, 2007 3:00 PM MANUAL SETUP VIDEO INFO (Video information) Use to display the video information of the current input signal. Choices: HDMI SIGNAL, HDMI RES., HDMI ERROR b)VIDEO INFO . HDMI SIGNAL;;;HDMI -> HDMI HDMI RES.;;;;1080P -> 1080P HDMI ERROR;;;---- p p [ ]/[ ]:Up/Down [ENTER]:Return Notes • When “MONITOR CHECK” is set to “YES”, this unit receives the information of the available video signal resolutions from the video monitor connected via HDMI and you can only select the resolutions supported by the video monitor in “UPSCALING” (see page 97). • When “MONITOR CHECK” is set to “SKIP”, an asterisk (*) appears on the left of the unavailable video signal resolution(s) (see page 97). ASPECT RATIO (HDMI aspect ratio) Use this feature to select the adjustment of aspect ratio for analog video signals output at the HDMI OUT jack. Choices: THROUGH, 16:9 Normal, Smart Zoom • Select HDMI SIGNAL to display the type of the HDMI input/output signals. • Select HDMI RES. to display the resolution of the HDMI input/output signals. • Select HDMI ERROR to display the error message for HDMI sources or devices connected (see page 111 for details). c)UP-SCALING p • Select OFF to deactivate the HDMI up-conversion feature • Select THROUGH not to up-scale any analog video signals. • Select 480p (or 576p), 1080i, or 720p to up-scale analog video signals to 480p (or 576p), 1080i, or 720p of resolution. • Select THROUGH if you do not make any adjustments to the aspect ratio for HDMI video signal sources. • Select 16:9 Normal to display video images with 4:3 of aspect ratio on your video monitor with 16:9 of aspect ratio. Black stripes appear on the right and left sides as a result. • Select Smart Zoom to fit video images with 4:3 of aspect ratio to your video monitor with 16:9 of aspect ratio. Notes • When “UP-SCALING” is set to “THROUGH”, you cannot make any adjustments to “ASPECT RATIO”. • When “ASPECT RATIO” is set to “Smart Zoom”, the video images of the edge of the video monitor are rather stretched. • When the video signals are input at the HDMI IN jacks or the signals are input with 720p or 1080i of resolution, the “ASPECT RATIO” setting does not affect the video signals output at the HDMI OUT jack. ADVANCED OPERATION HDMI UP-SCALING;;;*720p XXX(480pXX1080iXXX*720p)XX XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX p [ ]/[ ]:Select [ENTER]:Return HDMI ASPECT RATIO;;;THROUGH XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX p [ ]/[ ]:Select [ENTER]:Return p UP-SCALING (HDMI up-scaling) Use this feature to activate or deactivate the HDMI upconversion of the analog video signals input at the composite video and component video jacks so that the up-scaled analog video signals are output at the HDMI OUT jack. This unit up-scales the analog video signals as follows: • 480i (NTSC)/576i (PAL) → 480p (NTSC)/576p (PAL), 1080i or 720p • 480p (NTSC)/576p (PAL) → 1080i or 720p Choices: OFF, THROUGH, 480p (or 576p), 1080i, 720p d)ASPECT RATIO HDMI CONTROL (HDMI control) Use this function to link this unit and an HDMI controlcompatible TV via HDMI. You can turn on or off the power, select the input mode, and adjust the volume level of this unit using the remote control supplied with your HDMI control-compatible TV. For details, see “Using the HDMI control feature” on page 75. Choices: OFF, ON English 87 En Black process 45.0° 240.0 LPI 01EN_YSP-4000_UA.book Page 88 Wednesday, December 26, 2007 3:00 PM MANUAL SETUP e)HDMI CONTROL OFF p ON XXXXXXX XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX p [ ]/[ ]:Select [ENTER]:Return DISPLAY MENU Use to manually adjust the various parameters related to the display. SET MENU → MANUAL SETUP → DISPLAY MENU p 4)DISPLAY MENU . A)F.DISPLAY SET B)OSD SET C)UNIT SET • Select ON to enable the HDMI control. The signals input at the HDMI IN jacks are output at the HDMI OUT jack when this unit is in the standby mode. • Select OFF to disable the HDMI control. The signals input at the HDMI IN jacks are not output at the HDMI ■ F.DISPLAY SET (Front panel display settings) Use to adjust the brightness and display settings of the front panel display. A)F.DISPLAY SET . STANDARD DIMMER;;;;;OFF AUTO DIMMER ;;;;;;;;;;;;;OFF SCROLL;;;;;;;;;;;;CONT. F)XM ANTENNA LEVEL p p Use to display the current reception level of the XM Satellite Radio signals. For the best reception, orient the connected XM Mini-Tuner Dock to obtain a value of 60% or more. Display status: NONE, 0 to 100% p ■ XM ANTENNA LEVEL (XM antenna level) (U.S.A. and Canada models only) p OUT jack when this unit is in the standby mode. [ ]/[ ]:Up/Down [ENTER]:Enter p p [ ]/[ ]:Up/Down [ ]/[ ]:Sel [ENTER]:Return XM ANTENNA LEVEL;;;;97% [ENTER]:Return Note “NONE” is displayed if the XM Mini-Tuner Dock is not connected to this unit. In this case, check the antenna connections (see page 5 in the Reference Guide). STANDARD DIMMER (Standard dimmer) Use to adjust the brightness of the front panel display when you operate this unit by using the control buttons on the front panel or on the remote control. Choices: –2, –1, OFF AUTO DIMMER (Auto dimmer) If no operation is performed for a specified period of time, the front panel display dims. Use to adjust the brightness of the front panel display in this case. Choices: OFF (the same brightness as the STANDARD DIMMER setting), –1 to –3 (based on the STANDARD DIMMER setting), DISPLAY OFF SCROLL (Front panel display scroll) (U.S.A., Canada, and Australia models only) Use to select the mode to display information in the front panel display when operating your iPod or XM Satellite Radio. Choices: CONT., ONCE • Select CONT. to continue to scroll the display. • Select ONCE to scroll the display to the end once, after which the first 15 characters appear and stay. 88 En Black process 45.0° 240.0 LPI 01EN_YSP-4000_UA.book Page 89 Wednesday, December 26, 2007 3:00 PM MANUAL SETUP ■ OSD SET (OSD settings) Use to adjust the display position and to set the display time of the OSD. B)OSD SET . OSD SHIFT;;;;;;;;;;0 OSD DISPLAY TIME;;;ON p p p p [ ]/[ ]:Up/Down [ ]/[ ]:Sel [ENTER]:Return OSD SHIFT (OSD shift) Use to adjust the vertical position of the OSD. Adjust toward the – (minus) direction to raise the position of the OSD, and adjust toward the + (plus) direction to lower it. Choices: –5 to +5 Initial setting: 0 OSD DISPLAY TIME (OSD display time) (U.S.A., Canada, and Australia models only) Use to set the interval for which the OSD screen is displayed after an operation. Choices: ON, 10s, 30s • Select ON to show the OSD screen constantly. • Select 10s to turn off the OSD screen 10 seconds after an operation. • Select 30s to turn off the OSD screen 30 seconds after an operation. y The OSD display time setting is available for your iPod and XM Satellite Radio (U.S.A. and Canada models only). For details, see pages 4 and 10 in the Reference Guide. ■ UNIT SET (Unit settings) ADVANCED OPERATION Use this to change the display unit of measurement. Choices: METERS (Australia, Europe, Asia, and Korea models), FEET (U.S.A. and Canada models) C)UNIT SET p METERS p p FEET [ ]/[ ]:Select [ENTER]:Return • Select METERS to enter distances in meters. • Select FEET to enter distances in feet. Note English If you change this setting, the adjusted sound beam settings may change. 89 En Black process 45.0° 240.0 LPI 01EN_YSP-4000_UA.book Page 90 Wednesday, December 26, 2007 3:00 PM Adjusting the audio balance Adjusting the audio balance You can adjust the sound beam output level of each channel by using the test tone or the audio output being played back in each beam mode to achieve a more true-to-life surround sound experience. Using the test tone 3 You can use the test tone feature to output a test tone from each channel to manually balance the channel levels. Use this to set the channel levels so that the volume level of each channel is identical when heard from your listening position. Press / to select the channel you want to adjust. The front panel display changes as follows: TEST FRONT L ENTER ENHANCER ENTRY CAT/ A-E ENTER TEST CENTER MENU TEST FRONT R TV/AV YSP DISPLAY RETURN TEST SUR.R VOLUME CH TV VOL TEST SUR.L MUTE TV INPUT CH LEVEL TEST TEST SUBWOOFER TV MUTE CODE SET Note (U.S.A. and Canada models) 1 “TEST SUBWOOFER” is only available when a subwoofer is connected to this unit and SWFR is selected for BASS OUT in SOUND MENU (see page 83). Set the operation mode selector to YSP. TV/AV 4 Press / to adjust the channel volume. YSP 2 Press TEST. “TEST FRONT L” appears in the front panel display and a test tone is output from the front left channel. ENTER Control range: –10.0 dB to +10.0 dB TEST TEST FRONT L 90 En Black process 45.0° 240.0 LPI 01EN_YSP-4000_UA.book Page 91 Wednesday, December 26, 2007 3:00 PM Adjusting the audio balance 5 Press TEST when you have completed all your adjustments. 1 Set the operation mode selector to YSP. TV/AV TEST YSP 2 Notes • All channel levels cannot be adjusted when the 2-channel or 5-channel stereo playback (see page 62), My Beam (see page 63), or My Surround (see page 57) is selected as the beam mode. • “FRONT L/R” cannot be adjusted when Stereo plus 3 Beam is selected as the beam mode (see page 57). • “FRONT L/R” are automatically adjusted depending on the settings of the other channels when Stereo plus 3 Beam or stereo playback is selected as the beam mode (see pages 57 and 62). Press CH LEVEL repeatedly (or press CH LEVEL and / ) to select the channel you want to adjust. The front panel display changes as follows. CH LEVEL or CH LEVEL ENTER y If the level of a particular channel cannot be adjusted, “– –dB” appears in the front panel display. Using the audio output being played back You can also manually adjust the channel levels while playing back an input source such as a DVD. ENHANCER ENTRY CAT/ A-E ENTER FRONT L +1.0dB CENTER -2.5dB FRONT R +1.0dB SUR.R +2.0dB SUR.L +2.0dB MENU TV/AV YSP DISPLAY CH TV VOL SWFR MUTE CH LEVEL TV INPUT TEST TV MUTE CODE SET (U.S.A. and Canada models) --dB Note ADVANCED OPERATION VOLUME RETURN “SWFR” is available only when a subwoofer is connected to this unit and SWFR is selected for BASS OUT in SOUND MENU (see page 82). English 91 En Black process 45.0° 240.0 LPI 01EN_YSP-4000_UA.book Page 92 Wednesday, December 26, 2007 3:00 PM Adjusting the audio balance 3 Press / to adjust the channel volume. ENTER Control range: –10.0 dB to +10.0 dB 4 Wait for a few seconds without operating this unit when you have completed your adjustment. Notes • All channel levels cannot be adjusted when the 2-channel or 5-channel stereo playback (see page 62), or My Surround (see page 57) is selected as the beam mode. • “FRONT L/R” cannot be adjusted when Stereo plus 3 Beam is selected as the beam mode (see page 57). • Only CENTER can be adjusted when My Beam is selected as the beam mode (see page 63). • “FRONT L/R” are automatically adjusted depending on the settings of the other channels when Stereo plus 3 Beam or stereo playback is selected as the beam mode (see pages 57 and 62). y If the level of a particular channel cannot be adjusted, “– –dB” appears in the front panel display. 92 En Black process 45.0° 240.0 LPI 01EN_YSP-4000_UA.book Page 93 Wednesday, December 26, 2007 3:00 PM Selecting the input mode Selecting the input mode You can select the type of audio input signals of the selected input source according to your preference or the conditions of the input source. This function is available for TV/STB, DVD, AUX1, and AUX2. y We recommend setting the input mode to AUTO in most cases. AV 3 TV DOCK DVD AUX1 STB TV AUX2 Press INPUTMODE repeatedly to toggle between input modes. AUX3 TV INPUT1 MACRO FM/XM PRESET/TUNE SEARCH CAT INPUTMODE MEMORY AUTO VOL MODE SETUP INPUTMODE SLEEP 5BEAM ST+3BEAM 1 2 3 STEREO MY BEAM MY SUR. 4 5 6 MUSIC MOVIE SPORTS 7 8 OFF 3BEAM 9 DVD AUTO TV/STB AUTO DVD DTS TV/STB DTS TV/STB ANALOG SUR. DECODE +10 0 ENHANCER ENTRY CAT/ A-E ENTER MENU When DVD is selected as the input source TV/AV AUX1 AUTO AUX1 DTS AUX1 ANALOG YSP DISPLAY RETURN (U.S.A. and Canada models) When AUX1 is selected as the input source 1 When TV or STB is selected as the input source AUX2 AUTO AUX2 DTS When AUX2 is selected as the input source Set the operation mode selector to YSP. Note TV/AV ANALOG is not available as the input mode of DVD and AUX2. YSP Press one of the input selector buttons to select the desired input source. DVD AUX1 STB TV AUX2 • AUTO Automatically selects audio input signals in the following priority order: 1) HDMI 2) Digital 3) Analog ADVANCED OPERATION 2 y Use this input mode in most cases. • DTS Selects only digital signals encoded in DTS. Compared to AUTO, this input mode provides greater stability while playing back CDs or LDs encoded in DTS. • ANALOG Selects only analog signals. Even when both digital and analog signals are input simultaneously, only analog signals are selected. You can adjust the default input mode to be selected when the power of this unit is turned on by adjusting INPUT MODE in INPUT MENU (see page 85). 93 En Black process 45.0° 240.0 LPI English y 01EN_YSP-4000_UA.book Page 94 Wednesday, December 26, 2007 3:00 PM Adjusting the system parameters Adjusting the system parameters This unit has additional menus that are displayed in the front panel display. These menus offer additional operations to adjust and customize the way this unit operates. Note When “F.PANEL KEY” is set to “F.PANEL: OFF” (see page 100), STANDBY/ON on the front panel is ineffective. Use STANDBY/ON on the remote control instead to adjust the system parameters. Using the system parameters 2 Follow the procedure below to enter the system parameters. Press and hold INPUT on the front panel and press STANDBY/ON on the remote control to turn on the power of this unit. “MEMORY PROTECT” is displayed in the front panel display. STANDBY/ON INPUT MEMORY PROTECT INPUT VOLUME + STANDBY/ON 3 STANDBY/ON POWER POWER AV ENHANCER ENTRY AUX1 AUX2 CAT/ A-E ENTER AUX3 TV/AV TV INPUT1 MACRO STB FM/XM DISPLAY TV PRESET/TUNE SEARCH CAT MENU TV DOCK DVD YSP RETURN MEMORY (U.S.A. and Canada models) 1 Press STANDBY/ON on the remote control to turn off the power of this unit. STANDBY/ON 94 En Black process 45.0° 240.0 LPI Release INPUT on the front panel. INPUT 01EN_YSP-4000_UA.book Page 95 Wednesday, December 26, 2007 3:00 PM Adjusting the system parameters Setting the MEMORY PROTECT 4 You can protect the settings you saved in the system memory of this unit from being accidentally erased or unwantedly changed. Press / to switch between “PROTECT: ON” and “PROTECT: OFF”. ENTER 1 Repeat steps 1 to 3 in “Using the system parameters” on page 94. 2 Set the operation mode selector to YSP. TV/AV PROTECT: ON YSP 3 Confirm that “MEMORY PROTECT” is displayed in the front panel display and press ENTER. PROTECT: OFF • Select PROTECT: ON to activate the protection feature. • Select PROTECT: OFF to deactivate the protection feature. MEMORY PROTECT 5 ENTER Press STANDBY/ON on the remote control to set this unit to the standby mode. STANDBY/ON The new setting will be activated when you turn on the power of this unit next time. ADVANCED OPERATION English 95 En Black process 45.0° 240.0 LPI 01EN_YSP-4000_UA.book Page 96 Wednesday, December 26, 2007 3:00 PM Adjusting the system parameters Setting the MAX VOLUME 5 You can set the maximum volume level so that this unit will not output sound beyond the limited volume level. 1 Repeat steps 1 to 3 in “Using the system parameters” on page 94. 2 Set the operation mode selector to YSP. Press level. / to adjust the maximum volume ENTER Control range: MAX, 99 to 01, MIN Control step: 1 “ TV/AV YSP 3 6 Press / so that “MAX VOLUME SET” is displayed in the front panel display. Press STANDBY/ON on the remote control to set this unit to the standby mode. STANDBY/ON The new setting for the maximum volume level will be activated when you turn on the power of this unit next time. ENTER Setting the TURN ON VOLUME You can set the initial volume level when the power of this unit is turned on. MAX VOLUME SET 4 Press ENTER. 1 Repeat steps 1 to 3 in “Using the system parameters” on page 94. 2 Set the operation mode selector to YSP. TV/AV ENTER 96 En Black process 45.0° 240.0 LPI YSP 01EN_YSP-4000_UA.book Page 97 Wednesday, December 26, 2007 3:00 PM Adjusting the system parameters 3 Press / so that “TURN ON VOLUME” is displayed in the front panel display. ENTER Setting the MONITOR CHECK Use this feature to activate or deactivate the monitor check function of this unit. When this parameter is set to “YES”, this unit receives the information on the available video signal resolutions from the video monitor connected via HDMI (see page 22). If your TV monitor is not compatible with 1080i and/or 720p of resolutions, you cannot select “1080i” and/or “720p” in “UP-SCALING” (see page 87). 1 Repeat steps 1 to 3 in “Using the system parameters” on page 94. 2 Set the operation mode selector to YSP. TURN ON VOLUME 4 Press ENTER. TV/AV YSP ENTER 5 Press / 3 Press / so that “MONITOR CHECK” is displayed in the front panel display. to adjust the initial volume level. ENTER ENTER Control range: MAX, 99 to 01, OFF Control step: 1 MONITOR CHECK Press STANDBY/ON on the remote control to set this unit to the standby mode. ADVANCED OPERATION 6 STANDBY/ON The new setting for the maximum volume level will be activated when you turn on the power of this unit next time. English 97 En Black process 45.0° 240.0 LPI 01EN_YSP-4000_UA.book Page 98 Wednesday, December 26, 2007 3:00 PM Adjusting the system parameters 4 Press / to switch between “MON CHK: YES” and “MON CHK: SKIP”. ENTER Setting the DEMO MODE You can test the sound beam output from this unit to experience the sound beam. 1 Repeat steps 1 to 3 in “Using the system parameters” on page 94. 2 Set the operation mode selector to YSP. TV/AV MON CHK: YSP YES 3 MON CHK: Press / so that “DEMO MODE” is displayed in the front panel display. SKIP ENTER • Select MON CHK: YES to activate the monitor check function. • Select MON CHK: SKIP to deactivate the monitor check function. 5 Press STANDBY/ON on the remote control to set this unit to the standby mode. DEMO MODE STANDBY/ON 4 Press ENTER. The new setting will be activated when you turn on the power of this unit next time. ENTER Note If you change the setting of “MONITOR CHECK”, “UPSCALING” is automatically set to “OFF” (see page 87). 98 En Black process 45.0° 240.0 LPI 01EN_YSP-4000_UA.book Page 99 Wednesday, December 26, 2007 3:00 PM Adjusting the system parameters 5 Press / to switch between “DEMO: ON” and “DEMO: OFF”. ENTER Setting the PANEL INPUT KEY You can disable the INPUT on the front panel when you adjust the system parameters. 1 Repeat steps 1 to 3 in “Using the system parameters” on page 94. 2 Set the operation mode selector to YSP. TV/AV DEMO: YSP ON 3 DEMO: Press / so that “PANEL INPUT KEY” is displayed in the front panel display. OFF ENTER • Select DEMO: ON to activate the demo mode. • Select DEMO: OFF to deactivate the demo mode. 6 Press STANDBY/ON on the remote control to set this unit to the standby mode. PANEL INPUT KEY STANDBY/ON 4 Press ENTER. ENTER ADVANCED OPERATION The new setting will be activated when you turn on the power of this unit next time. Press ENTER while playing back sources to test the sound beam. The sound beam being output shuttles between left and right. Press ENTER again to stop shuttling. English 99 En Black process 45.0° 240.0 LPI 01EN_YSP-4000_UA.book Page 100 Wednesday, December 26, 2007 3:00 PM Adjusting the system parameters 5 Press / to switch between “P.INPUT: ON” and “P.INPUT: OFF”. ENTER Disabling the front panel keys You can disable the front panel keys except when you adjust the system parameters. 1 Repeat steps 1 to 3 in “Using the system parameters” on page 94. 2 Set the operation mode selector to YSP. TV/AV P.INPUT: YSP ON 3 P.INPUT: Press / so that “F.PANEL KEY” is displayed in the front panel display. OFF ENTER • Select P.INPUT: ON to enable the INPUT key on the front panel. • Select P.INPUT: OFF to disable the INPUT key on the front panel. “F.PANEL KEY” is automatically set to “ON”. 6 F.PANEL KEY Press STANDBY/ON on the remote control to set this unit to the standby mode. STANDBY/ON The new setting will be activated when you turn on the power of this unit next time. 100 En Black process 45.0° 240.0 LPI 4 Press ENTER. ENTER 01EN_YSP-4000_UA.book Page 101 Wednesday, December 26, 2007 3:00 PM Adjusting the system parameters 5 Press / to switch between “F.PANEL: ON” and “F.PANEL: OFF”. ENTER Setting the FACTORY PRESET You can reset all of the parameters of this unit to the factory presets. This procedure completely resets ALL the parameters in SET MENU. Note After performing the following procedure you must run AUTO SETUP again to match your surround sound environment. F.PANEL: ON 1 Repeat steps 1 to 3 in “Using the system parameters” on page 94. 2 Set the operation mode selector to YSP. TV/AV YSP F.PANEL: OFF 3 Press / so that “FACTORY PRESET” is displayed in the front panel display. • Select F.PANEL: ON to enable the front panel keys. • Select F.PANEL: OFF to disable the front panel keys. “P.INPUT” is automatically set to “ON”. 6 ENTER Press STANDBY/ON on the remote control to set this unit to the standby mode. STANDBY/ON FACTORY PRESET 4 Press ENTER. ADVANCED OPERATION The new setting will be activated when you turn on the power of this unit next time. ENTER English 101 En Black process 45.0° 240.0 LPI 01EN_YSP-4000_UA.book Page 102 Wednesday, December 26, 2007 3:00 PM Adjusting the system parameters 5 Press / to switch between “PRESET: RESET” and “PRESET: CANCEL”. ENTER PRESET: RESET PRESET:CANCEL • Select PRESET: RESET to reset all of the current settings. • Select PRESET: CANCEL to cancel the resetting procedure. 6 Press STANDBY/ON on the remote control to set this unit to the standby mode. STANDBY/ON The new setting will be activated when you turn on the power of this unit next time. 102 En Black process 45.0° 240.0 LPI 01EN_YSP-4000_UA.book Page 103 Wednesday, December 26, 2007 3:00 PM Remote control features Remote control features In addition to controlling this unit, the remote control can also operate other AV components made by Yamaha and other manufacturers. To control other components, you must set up the remote control with the appropriate remote control codes and set the operation mode selector to TV/AV to change the control area. Note Depending on the external AV component you are using, you may not be able to operate the component with the remote control, even if a remote control code is set. In this case, operate the component using the supplied remote control. Setting remote control codes 2 You can control other components by setting the appropriate remote control codes. Codes can be set up for each input area (DVD, AUX1, AUX2, STB, and TV). For a complete list of available remote control codes, refer to “List of remote control codes” at the end of this manual. Press the numeric buttons to enter the remote control code while holding down CODE SET. Setting example: Yamaha DVD input area MY SUR. 6 TV MUTE Transmission indicator AV While holding down, press SPORTS 9 CODE SET TV SPORTS DOCK AUX1 DVD AUX2 9 AUX3 TV INPUT1 MACRO TV STB FM/XM PRESET/TUNE SEARCH CAT MEMORY AUTO VOL MODE SETUP INPUTMODE SLEEP 5BEAM ST+3BEAM 3BEAM 1 2 3 STEREO MY BEAM MY SUR. 4 5 6 MUSIC MOVIE SPORTS 7 8 OFF 0 3 9 SUR. DECODE +10 ENHANCER MUTE CH LEVEL TV INPUT TEST TV MUTE CODE SET Note 1 Press and hold CODE SET and press one of the input selector buttons to select the input source you want to set a remote control code for. The transmission indicator flashes twice and remains lit. Proceed to step 2 while holding down CODE SET. TV MUTE While holding down, press CODE SET DVD AUX1 STB TV AUX2 If the manufacturer of your component has more than one code, try each of them until you find the correct one. ADVANCED OPERATION (U.S.A. and Canada models) Refer to “Controlling other components” on page 104 to operate the external component using the remote control. If the external component functions correctly the remote control code setup is successful. If the external component does not function correctly, the remote control code may be incorrect. Confirm that the remote control code is correct. See “List of remote control codes” at the end of this manual and start over from step 1. If the remote control is without batteries for more than two minutes, or if exhausted batteries remain in the remote control, the contents of the memory may be cleared. When the memory is cleared, insert new batteries and reset the remote control codes. When changing the batteries, be careful not to press any of the buttons on the remote control. Doing so will clear the contents of the memory. English 103 En Black process 45.0° 240.0 LPI 01EN_YSP-4000_UA.book Page 104 Wednesday, December 26, 2007 3:00 PM Remote control features Controlling other components ■ Operating your TV Set the operation mode selector to TV/AV, and press TV to select TV as the input source. The control area of the remote control changes to the TV operation mode. TV/AV TV YSP STANDBY/ON 4 TV DOCK DVD AUX1 AUX2 AUX3 TV INPUT1 MACRO TV STB FM/XM PRESET/TUNE SEARCH CAT MEMORY 5 AUTO VOL MODE SETUP INPUTMODE SLEEP 5BEAM ST+3BEAM 1 2 3 STEREO MY BEAM MY SUR. 1 3BEAM 4 5 6 MUSIC MOVIE SPORTS 7 8 OFF 0 9 SUR. DECODE +10 ENHANCER ENTRY CAT/ A-E ENTER MENU TV/AV YSP DISPLAY VOLUME RETURN CH TV VOL 2 6 3 MUTE TV INPUT CH LEVEL TEST TV MUTE CODE SET (U.S.A. and Canada models) 104 En Black process 45.0° 240.0 LPI 2 CH +/– Switches between the available TV channels. 3 TV INPUT Switches the input source for your TV. 4 TV POWER Turns on or off the power of your TV. POWER POWER AV 1 Numeric buttons Selects a TV channel for playback. 7 5 TV INPUT1 Selects the input source of your TV. 6 TV VOL +/– Adjusts the audio output level of your TV. 7 TV MUTE Temporarily mutes audio output from your TV. 01EN_YSP-4000_UA.book Page 105 Wednesday, December 26, 2007 3:00 PM Remote control features ■ Operating your DVD player/recorder Set the operation mode selector to TV/AV and press DVD to select DVD as the input source. The control area of the remote control changes to the DVD operation mode. TV/AV ■ Operating your STB (CATV/Satellite tuner) Set the operation mode selector to TV/AV and press STB to select STB as the input source. The control area of the remote control changes to the STB operation mode. DVD YSP TV/AV STB YSP STANDBY/ON POWER POWER AV TV 4 DOCK AUX1 DVD AUX2 STANDBY/ON POWER POWER AUX3 AV TV INPUT1 MACRO FM/XM PRESET/TUNE SEARCH CAT DOCK MEMORY AUX1 DVD AUX2 TV STB FM/XM PRESET/TUNE SEARCH CAT MEMORY 5BEAM ST+3BEAM 3BEAM 1 2 3 STEREO MY BEAM MY SUR. 4 5 6 5BEAM ST+3BEAM MUSIC MOVIE SPORTS 1 2 3 7 8 9 STEREO MY BEAM MY SUR. 1 OFF 0 ENHANCER AUTO VOL MODE SETUP INPUTMODE SLEEP 1 SUR. DECODE +10 ENTRY MENU 5 4 5 6 MOVIE SPORTS 7 8 0 ENTER 3BEAM MUSIC OFF TV/AV CAT/ A-E 3 AUX3 TV INPUT1 MACRO AUTO VOL MODE SETUP INPUTMODE SLEEP 2 TV TV STB 9 SUR. DECODE +10 ENHANCER ENTRY CAT/ A-E ENTER MENU YSP DISPLAY VOLUME RETURN CH 6 TV VOL TV/AV YSP DISPLAY MUTE TV INPUT CH LEVEL TEST RETURN VOLUME CH MUTE TV INPUT TV VOL 2 TV MUTE CODE SET TV MUTE CODE SET (U.S.A. and Canada models) 3 1 Numeric buttons Enter numeric digits. 2 Cursor buttons / / Use to select DVD menu items. ADVANCED OPERATION (U.S.A. and Canada models) 1 Numeric buttons Enter numeric digits. 2 CH +/– Switches between the available STB channels. / , ENTER 3 AV POWER Turns on or off the power of your STB. 3 Operation buttons for DVD players Operate your DVD player/recorder, such as play and stop. 4 AV POWER Turns on or off the power of your DVD player/recorder. 5 MENU Displays the DVD menu. English 6 RETURN Use to return to the previous DVD menu screen or exit from the DVD menu. 105 En Black process 45.0° 240.0 LPI 01EN_YSP-4000_UA.book Page 106 Wednesday, December 26, 2007 3:00 PM Remote control features ■ Operating your VCR Set the operation mode selector to TV/AV and press AUX1 to select VCR as the input source. The control area of the remote control changes to the AUX1 operation mode. y This operation is available when your VCR is connected to the AUX 1 AUDIO IN jacks on this unit. TV/AV AUX1 YSP STANDBY/ON POWER POWER AV TV DOCK DVD AUX1 AUX2 4 AUX3 TV INPUT1 MACRO TV STB FM/XM PRESET/TUNE SEARCH CAT MEMORY AUTO VOL MODE SETUP INPUTMODE SLEEP 5BEAM ST+3BEAM 1 2 3 STEREO MY BEAM MY SUR. 1 3BEAM 4 5 6 MUSIC MOVIE SPORTS 7 8 OFF 0 9 SUR. DECODE +10 ENHANCER ENTRY CAT/ A-E ENTER MENU TV/AV YSP DISPLAY RETURN VOLUME CH MUTE TV INPUT TV VOL 2 CH LEVEL TEST TV MUTE CODE SET 3 (U.S.A. and Canada models) 1 Numeric buttons Enter numeric digits. 2 CH +/– Switches between the available VCR channels. 3 Operation buttons for VCR Operate your VCR, such as play and stop. 4 AV POWER Turns on or off the power of your VCR. 106 En Black process 45.0° 240.0 LPI 01EN_YSP-4000_UA.book Page 107 Wednesday, December 26, 2007 3:00 PM Remote control features ■ Setting macros for the TV with the tuning capability Using the TV macro The TV macro feature makes it possible to perform a series of operations with the press of a single button. For example, when you want to play a DVD, you would normally turn on the component, select DVD as the input source, and press the play button to start playback. The TV macro feature lets you perform all of these operations simply by pressing the DVD macro button. 1 Press and hold CODE SET and press one of the input selector buttons to select the input source you want to set macros for. Proceed to step 2 while holding down CODE SET. TV MUTE While holding down, press Notes • Be sure to set up a remote control code for your TV before setting macros. • The ways to set macros differ if your TV does not have the tuning capability. • If you press any control buttons on the remote control other than the ones used to set macros while setting macros, the setting procedure is automatically canceled. • If it takes more than 10 seconds in steps 2 and 3, the setting procedure is automatically canceled. In this case, repeat from step 1. CODE SET 2 DVD AUX1 AUX2 STB Press MACRO while holding down CODE SET. TV MUTE MACRO While holding down, press CODE SET STANDBY/ON POWER POWER AV TV DOCK AUX1 DVD AUX2 AUX3 3 TV INPUT1 MACRO TV STB FM/XM PRESET/TUNE SEARCH CAT MEMORY Press CH +/– or the numeric buttons to select the TV channel. Check that the TV screen changes to the tuner screen. AUTO VOL MODE SETUP INPUTMODE SLEEP 5BEAM ST+3BEAM 5BEAM ST+3BEAM 3BEAM 1 2 3 1 2 3 STEREO MY BEAM MY SUR. STEREO MY BEAM MY SUR. 4 5 6 CH MUSIC MOVIE 7 8 OFF 0 or SPORTS 9 ENTER 4 YSP VOLUME RETURN CH 7 8 9 +10 MENU TV/AV DISPLAY 6 SPORTS Press TV INPUT repeatedly until the screen changes to the display of the input source selected in step 1. TV VOL TV INPUT MUTE TV INPUT CH LEVEL TEST ADVANCED OPERATION CAT/ A-E 5 MOVIE 0 +10 ENTRY 4 MUSIC OFF SUR. DECODE ENHANCER 3BEAM TV MUTE CODE SET 5 Press ENTER to confirm the macro setting. (U.S.A. and Canada models) ENTER English 107 En Black process 45.0° 240.0 LPI 01EN_YSP-4000_UA.book Page 108 Wednesday, December 26, 2007 3:00 PM Remote control features ■ Setting macros for the TV without the tuning capability 1 Press and hold CODE SET and press one of the input selector buttons to select the input source you want to set macros for. Proceed to step 2 while holding down CODE SET. TV MUTE DVD Press and hold one of the input selector buttons for approximately two seconds to select the input source you want to operate macros for. The TV input changes at the same time the input mode changes. DVD AUX2 While holding down, press While holding down, press 1 MACRO CODE SET Press and hold CODE SET and press one of the input selector buttons to select the input source you want to cancel the macros for. Proceed to step 2 while holding down CODE SET. DVD TV MUTE Press INPUT1. Check that the TV screen changes to the input 1 screen. INPUT1 Press TV INPUT repeatedly until the screen changes to the display of the input source selected in step 1. TV INPUT Press MACRO while holding down CODE SET. While holding down, press Press ENTER to cancel the macros. ENTER 5 Press ENTER to confirm the setting. ENTER 108 En Black process 45.0° 240.0 LPI MACRO CODE SET 3 AUX2 STB CODE SET 2 AUX1 While holding down, press TV MUTE 4 AUX2 ■ Canceling the macros Press MACRO while holding down CODE SET. TV MUTE 3 AUX1 STB STB CODE SET 2 AUX1 ■ Operating macros 01EN_YSP-4000_UA.book Page 109 Wednesday, December 26, 2007 3:00 PM Troubleshooting Troubleshooting Refer to the chart below when this unit does not function properly. If the problem you are experiencing is not listed below or if the instruction below does not help, set this unit to the standby mode, disconnect the AC power supply cable, and contact the nearest authorized Yamaha dealer or service center. ■ General Problem This unit fails to turn on when STANDBY/ON is pressed, or enters the standby mode soon after the power has been turned on. Cause Remedy See page Connect the AC power supply cable firmly to the AC wall outlet. 31 This unit has been exposed to a strong external electric shock (such as lightning and strong static electricity). Set this unit to the standby mode, disconnect the AC power supply cable, plug it back in after 30 seconds, and use it normally. — The internal temperature becomes too high and the overheat protection circuitry has been activated. Wait for about one hour for this unit to cool down and turn it back on. — The sleep timer has turned the unit off. Turn on the power and play back the source again. — Incorrect input or output cable connections. Connect the cables properly. If the problem persists, the cables may be defective. 20 No appropriate input source has been selected. Select an appropriate input source with INPUT or the input selector buttons. 47 The volume is turned down. Turn up the volume. 49 The sound is muted. Press MUTE or VOLUME +/– to resume audio output and adjust the volume level. 49 The signals this unit cannot reproduce (such as PCM signals with more than 96 kHz of sampling frequency) are being received from the source component. Play a source whose signals can be reproduced by this unit. — Change the system settings of the source component. — The HDMI components connected to this unit do not support the HDCP copy protection standards. Connect the HDMI components that support the HDCP copy protection standards. 21 SUPPORT AUDIO is set to OTHER and HDMI audio signals are not being played back on this unit. Set SUPPORT AUDIO to YSP-4000 in MANUAL SETUP 86 The sleep timer has turned this unit off. Turn on the power and play back the source again. — The sound is muted. Press MUTE or VOLUME +/– to resume audio output and adjust the volume level. 49 No sound from the effect channels. You are playing back the source or program in the 2-channel stereo playback or My Beam mode. Press one of the beam mode buttons on the remote control to select a multi-channel playback mode and play back the source or program once more. 56 No sound from the center channel. The output level of the center channel is set to minimum. Raise the level of the center channel. 90 No sound from the surround channels. The output level of the surround channels is set to minimum. Raise the output level of the surround channels. 90 This unit suddenly enters the standby mode. No sound. The sound suddenly goes off. ADDITIONAL INFORMATION The AC power supply cable is not firmly connected to the AC wall outlet. English 109 En Black process 45.0° 240.0 LPI 01EN_YSP-4000_UA.book Page 110 Wednesday, December 26, 2007 3:00 PM Troubleshooting Problem No sound from the subwoofer. Cause BASS OUT in SUBWOOFER SET is set to FRONT. Remedy Select SWFR. See page 83 The source does not contain low bass signals. Distorted or too little bass sound. CROSS OVER in SUBWOOFER SET is set incorrectly. Set CROSS OVER correctly. One of the night listening enhancers is currently selected. Turn off the night listening enhancers. TruBass is currently turned on. Turn off TruBass. 84 The volume level of the subwoofer is too high. Turn down the volume level of the subwoofer. — The listening room is not a regular shape. Install this unit in a square or rectangular shaped room. — There is no wall in the path of the sound beam. Try placing a flat object, such as a board, in the path of the sound beam. — Dolby Digital or DTS sources cannot be played back. (Dolby Digital or DTS indicator does not light up in the front panel display.) The connected component is not set to output Dolby Digital or DTS digital signals. Make an appropriate setting following the operating instructions for your component. — The input mode is set to ANALOG. Set the input mode to AUTO. 93 There is noise interference when a subwoofer is not connected to this unit. The protection circuitry was in operation because a source with strong bass elements was played back. Turn down the volume level. 49 Select SWFR for BASS OUT. 83 Connect a subwoofer and adjust settings for SUBWOOFER SET. 82 Too much bass sound. Surround sound effects are insubstantial. 82 71 Low-frequency sounds are distorted. CROSS OVER in SUBWOOFER SET is set incorrectly. Set CROSS OVER correctly. 83 On-screen display does not appear. The OSD video pin cable is not connected properly. Connect the cable properly. 23 This unit does not operate properly. The internal microcomputer has been frozen by an external electric shock (such as lightning or excessive static electricity) or by a power supply with low voltage. Disconnect the AC power supply cable from the outlet and plug it in again after about 30 seconds. — No sound is heard from the TV connected via HDMI. The TV does not accept the multi-channel audio signals. Convert the multi-channel audio signals to the 2-channel audio signals at the source component such as a DVD player. — “SUPPORT AUDIO” is set to “YSP-4000”. Set “SUPPORT AUDIO” to “OTHER”. 86 There is noise interference from digital or highfrequency equipment. This unit is too close to the digital or highfrequency equipment. Move this unit farther away from such equipment. — This unit does not output effect sounds properly. The original source includes surround effects. Disable the surround effect settings of this unit. — My Beam auto-adjust function does not work. The listening room is too noisy. Keep the listening room as quiet as possible. — Try manual-adjust function. 64 The sound reflectivity of the listening room is too much. Set REFLECTING to HI ECHO. 83 The remote control may be operated outside of the remote control operation range. The remote control functions within a maximum range of 6 m (20 ft) and no more than 45 degrees off-axis from the front panel. 32 The function does not work properly because of the condition of the connected components. Select My Beam and then try again. 63 110 En Black process 45.0° 240.0 LPI 01EN_YSP-4000_UA.book Page 111 Wednesday, December 26, 2007 3:00 PM Troubleshooting ■ Remote control Problem The remote control does not work and/or function properly. Cause Remedy See page Wrong distance or angle. The remote control functions within a maximum range of 6 m (20 ft) and no more than 45 degrees off-axis from the front panel. 32 Direct sunlight or lighting (from an inverter type of fluorescent lamp, etc.) is striking the remote control sensor of this unit. Reposition this unit. — The batteries are weak. Replace all batteries. 32 The external component you want to operate is not selected as the input source. Press INPUT on the front panel or the input selector buttons on the remote control to select the external component you want to operate. 47 The remote control code was not correctly set. Set the remote control code correctly or try another code for the same manufacturer using the “List of remote control codes” at the end of this manual. 103 Even if the remote control code is correctly set, there are some models that do not respond to the remote control. Use the remote control supplied with the external component. — The cursor buttons do not work during SET MENU operation. The operation mode selector was unwantedly set to TV/AV. Set the operation mode selector to YSP. — Cannot use the My Beam auto-adjust function. Wrong distance or angle. The remote control functions within a maximum range of 6 m (20 ft) and no more than 45 degrees off-axis from the front panel. 32 Cannot operate external components with the remote control of this unit. ■ HDMI Error message Cause Remedy See page Device Error The number of the connected HDMI components exceeds the limit. Reduce the number of the connected HDMI components. — HDCP Error HDCP authentication failed. Check that the connected HDMI components support the HDCP copy protection standards. — Out of Resolution The resolution of the HDMI output signals exceeds the limit allowed by your TV. Adjust UP-SCALING. 87 ADDITIONAL INFORMATION English 111 En Black process 45.0° 240.0 LPI 01EN_YSP-4000_UA.book Page 112 Wednesday, December 26, 2007 3:00 PM Troubleshooting ■ FM tuner Problem Cause FM stereo reception is noisy. The characteristics of FM stereo broadcasts may cause this problem when the transmitter is too far away or the antenna input is poor. Remedy See page Check the antenna connections. 30 Try using a high-quality directional FM antenna. — Use the manual tuning method. 51 There is distortion, and clear reception cannot be obtained even with a good FM antenna. There is multi-path interference. Adjust the antenna position to eliminate multi-path interference. — The desired station cannot be tuned into with the automatic tuning method. The signal is too weak. Use a high-quality directional FM antenna. — Use the manual tuning method. 51 Previously preset stations can no longer be tuned into. This unit has been disconnected for a long period. Preset the stations again. 52 112 En Black process 45.0° 240.0 LPI 01EN_YSP-4000_UA.book Page 113 Wednesday, December 26, 2007 3:00 PM Glossary Glossary ■ Dolby Digital ■ DTS Digital Surround Dolby Digital is a digital surround sound system that gives you completely independent multi-channel audio. With 3 front channels (left, center, and right) and 2 surround stereo channels, Dolby Digital provides 5 full-range audio channels. With an additional channel especially for bass effects, called LFE (low-frequency effect), the system has a total of 5.1-channels (LFE is counted as 0.1-channel). By using 2-channel stereo for the surround channels, more accurate moving sound effects and surround sound environment are possible than with Dolby Surround. The wide dynamic range (from maximum to minimum volume) reproduced by the 5 full-range channels and the precise sound orientation generated using digital sound processing provide listeners with excitement and realism previously unheard of. With this unit, any sound environment from monaural up to a 5.1-channel configuration can be freely selected for your enjoyment. DTS digital surround was developed to replace the analog soundtracks of movies with a 6-channel digital sound track, and is now rapidly gaining popularity in movie theaters around the world. DTS, Inc. has developed a home theater system so that you can enjoy the depth of sound and natural spatial representation of DTS digital surround in your home. This system produces practically distortion-free 6-channel sound (technically, left, right, and center channels, 2 surround channels, plus an LFE 0.1-channel as a subwoofer, for a total of 5.1 channels). The unit incorporates a DTS-ES decoder that enables 6.1channel reproduction by adding the surround back channel to existing 5.1-channel format. ■ Dolby Pro Logic II Dolby Pro Logic II is an improved technique used to decode vast numbers of existing Dolby Surround software. This new technology enables a discrete 5-channel playback with 2 front left and right channels, 1 center channel, and 2 surround left and right channels (instead of only 1 surround channel for conventional Pro Logic technology). Music and Game modes are also available for 2-channel sources in addition to the Movie mode. ■ Dolby Surround Neo:6 decodes the conventional 2-channel sources for 6channel playback by the specific decoder. It enables playback with the full-range channels with higher separation just like digital discrete signal playback. Two modes are available: Music mode for playing music sources and Cinema mode for movies. ■ EUPHONY Euphony is a revolutionary sound field reproduction system implemented with state-of-the-art sound technologies developed under the basic concept of enjoying beautiful sound. It can reproduce surround sound optimized without depending on the number of input channels, the number of speakers (two or more speakers) or the speaker’s dimensions. In addition, it features steady center localization. It also can reproduce the surround sound for the headphones with natural sound and “out-ofhead” localization so that the listener feels an expanded sound and will not tire, even when listening to music or a movie for long time. ■ HDMI 113 En Black process 45.0° 240.0 LPI English HDMI (High-Definition Multimedia Interface) is the first industry-supported, uncompressed, all-digital audio/video interface. Providing an interface between any source (such as a set-top box or AV receiver) and an audio/video monitor (such as a digital television), HDMI supports standard, enhanced, or high-definition video as well as multi-channel digital audio using a single cable. HDMI transmits all ATSC HDTV standards and supports 8channel digital audio, with bandwidth to spare to accommodate future enhancements and requirements. When used in combination with HDCP (High-bandwidth Digital Content Protection), HDMI provides a secure audio/video interface that meets the security requirements of content providers and system operators. For further information on HDMI, visit the HDMI website at “http://www.hdmi.org/”. ADDITIONAL INFORMATION Dolby Surround uses a 4-channel analog recording system to reproduce realistic and dynamic sound effects: 2 front left and right channels (stereo), a center channel for dialog (monaural), and a surround channel for special sound effects (monaural). The surround channel reproduces sound within a narrow frequency range. Dolby Surround is widely used with nearly all video tapes and laser discs, and in many TV and cable broadcasts as well. The Dolby Pro Logic decoder built into this unit employs a digital signal processing system that automatically stabilizes the volume on each channel to enhance moving sound effects and directionality. ■ DTS Neo:6 01EN_YSP-4000_UA.book Page 114 Wednesday, December 26, 2007 3:00 PM Glossary ■ LFE 0.1-channel This channel is for the reproduction of low bass signals. The frequency range for this channel is 20 Hz to 120 Hz. This channel is counted as 0.1 because it only enforces a low-frequency range compared to the full-range reproduction by the other 5/6 channels in Dolby Digital or DTS 5.1/6.1-channel systems. ■ Neural Surround Neural Surround™ represents the latest advancement in surround technology and has been adopted by XM Satellite Radio for digital radio broadcast of surround recordings and live events in surround sound. Neural Surround™ employs psychoacoustic frequency domain processing which allows delivery of a more detailed sound stage with superior channel separation and localization of audio elements. ■ PCM (Linear PCM) Linear PCM is a signal format under which an analog audio signal is digitized, recorded, and transmitted without using any compression. This is used as a method of recording CDs and DVD audio. The PCM system uses a technique for sampling the size of the analog signal per very small unit of time. Standing for pulse code modulation, the analog signal is encoded as pulses and then modulated for recording. ■ SRS TruBass SRS TruBass is a psychoacoustic bass enhancement technology developed by SRS Labs, Inc. for speakers and headphone systems that delivers bass up to an octave below the physical capabilities of the speaker’s driver. SRS TruBass technology takes advantage of a spontaneous tendency of the human ears to infer lowrange audio data when presented with higher-frequency harmonic signals. As a result, our ears can hear the original low-range sound that the speaker system is incapable of producing. 114 En Black process 45.0° 240.0 LPI 01EN_YSP-4000_UA.book Page 115 Wednesday, December 26, 2007 3:00 PM Index Index ■ Numerics ■ M 3 Beam ............................................................................ 57 5 Beam ............................................................................ 56 MANUAL SETUP ..........................................................76 MEMORY .......................................................................44 Movie program................................................................68 Music program ................................................................67 My Beam.........................................................................63 ■ A AC power supply cable ................................................... 31 Audio pin cable............................................................... 21 AUTO SETUP (IntelliBeam).......................................... 37 ■ B Battery............................................................................. 32 BEAM MENU ................................................................ 78 Beam mode ......................................................... 56, 62, 63 ■ C ■ N Night listening enhancer .................................................71 ■ O On-screen display (OSD) ................................................34 Optical cable ...................................................................21 OSD video pin cable .......................................................21 Cable clamp .................................................................... 21 Cardboard microphone stand .......................................... 39 CINEMA DSP ................................................................ 67 ■ P ■ D ■ R DEMO MODE................................................................ 98 Demonstration DVD ......................................................... 6 Digital audio pin cable.................................................... 21 DISPLAY MENU ........................................................... 88 Dolby Digital .................................................................. 58 Dolby Pro Logic.............................................................. 58 Dolby Pro Logic II.......................................................... 58 DTS................................................................................. 58 DTS Neo: 6 ..................................................................... 58 Dynamic range................................................................ 84 Rear panel .........................................................................9 Remote control ................................................................11 Remote control code .....................................................103 Remote control sensor.....................................................32 ■ E EUPHONY ................................................................... 113 ■ F FACTORY PRESET ..................................................... 101 Fastener........................................................................... 19 Front panel ........................................................................ 7 Front panel display ........................................................... 8 ■ H HDMI.............................................................................. 21 HDMI cable .................................................................... 21 IntelliBeam ..................................................................... 37 IntelliBeam microphone ................................................. 38 ■ S SET MENU.....................................................................34 Sleep timer ......................................................................72 Sound field program........................................................65 Stereo plus 3 Beam .........................................................57 Surround mode ................................................................58 Surround sound ...............................................................56 SOUND MENU ..............................................................82 Sports program ................................................................68 Stereo sound ....................................................................62 System parameter ............................................................94 ■ T Test tone ..........................................................................90 TruBass............................................................................84 TV macro ......................................................................107 TV volume equal mode ...................................................71 ■ V Volume ............................................................................49 Volume mode ..................................................................71 ■ L LFE 0.1-channel ........................................................... 114 ADDITIONAL INFORMATION ■ I PCM ..............................................................................114 Power...............................................................................33 English 115 En Black process 45.0° 240.0 LPI 01EN_YSP-4000_UA.book Page 116 Wednesday, December 26, 2007 3:00 PM Specifications Specifications AMP SECTION FM SECTION • Maximum Output Power (JEITA) ................................................. 2 W (1 kHz, 10% THD, 4 Ω) × 40 20 W (100 Hz, 10% THD, 4 Ω) × 2 • Tuning Range [U.S.A., Canada, and Asia models] ................ 87.5 to 107.9 MHz [Other models] ............................................ 87.50 to 108.00 MHz SPEAKER SECTION GENERAL • Driver Small dia. speakers ...................... 4 cm (1-9/16 in) cone magnetic shielding type × 40 Woofers ...................... 11 cm (4-5/16 in) cone magnetic shielding type × 2 • Frequency response ..................................................55 Hz to 20 kHz (-10 dB, stereo mode) CONNECTIONS • Input Jacks TV/STB, AUX 1 AUDIO IN (1 V, 32 kΩ) ........... 2 pairs (Analog) TV/STB, AUX 1 OPTICAL DIGITAL IN ........ 2 (Optical digital) DVD, AUX 2 COAXIAL DIGITAL IN ............ 2 (Coaxial digital) STB, DVD/AUX 2, AUX 1 VIDEO IN .................. 3 (Composite) STB, DVD/AUX 2 COMPONENT VIDEO IN .....2 (Component) AUX 1, DVD HDMI IN ............................................................... 2 AUX 3 .......................................................................................... 1 • Output Jacks SUBWOOFER (1.5 V, less than 120 Hz) ................ 1 (Subwoofer) VIDEO OUT (1 Vp-p, 75 Ω) .................................. 1 (Composite) COMPONENT VIDEO OUT (Y: 1 Vp-p, 75 Ω PB/PR: 0.5 Vp-p, 75 Ω) ........... 1 (Component) HDMI OUT .................................................................................. 1 • System Connector Jack INTELLIBEAM MIC ..................................1 (Microphone input) RS-232C ........................................................... 1 (System control) SYSTEM CONNECTOR (U.S.A. and Canada models) ........................................................................ 1 (System control) IR IN ................................................................ 1 (System control) IR-OUT ............................................................ 1 (System control) HDMI interface of this unit is based on the following standard: • HDCP (High-bandwidth Digital Content Protection System) licensed by Digital Content Protection, LLC. 116 En Black process 45.0° 240.0 LPI • Power Supply [U.S.A. and Canada models] ............................. AC 120 V, 60 Hz [Australia model] .................................. AC 220–240 V, 50/60 Hz [U.K. and Europe models] .................... AC 220–240 V, 50/60 Hz [Korea model] ....................................... AC 220–240 V, 50/60 Hz [General model] .................................... AC 110–120 V, 50/60 Hz [Asia model] ..........................................AC 220–240 V, 50/60 Hz • Power Consumption .................................................................. 55 W • Standby Power Consumption ...................................... 0.5 W or less • Dimensions (W x H x D) ............................... 1030 x 198 x 144 mm (40-17/32 x 7-21/32 x 5-22/32 in) • Weight ............................................................ 15.5 kg (34 lbs 10 oz) * Specifications are subject to change without notice. 01EN_YSP-4000_UA.book Page i Wednesday, December 26, 2007 3:00 PM List of remote control codes TV ADMIRAL 292, 293, 216 AIWA 294, 276, 283, 284 AKAI 295, 296 ALBA 296 AOC 297 BELL & HOWELL 292 BESTAR 298 BLAUPUNKT 229, 222 BLUE SKY 298 BRANDT 223 BROC SONIC 297 BUSH 296 BYD:SIGN 201, 202 CLATRONIC 298 CRAIG 224 CROSLEX 225, 298 CURTIS MATHIS 297, 226 DAEWOO 297, 298, 224, 227, 228 DAYTRON 239 DUAL 298 DWIN 293, 281 EMERSON 297, 224, 239, 232 FURGUSON 223, 265, 266 FIRST LINE 298 FISHER 295, 233 FRABA 298 FUJITSU 289 FUNAI 277, 278 GE 293, 297, 234, 235, 236 GOODMANS 296, 298, 223 GRUNDIG 229, 238, 249 HITACHI 297, 239, 242, 243, 285, 206 ICE 296 IRRADIO 296 ITT/NOKIA 244, 245 JC PENNY 293, 297, 234, 237 JVC 296, 246, 247, 286 KENDO 298 KTV 297, 239 LG/GOLDSTAR 297, 298, 239, 237 LOEWE 298, 248, 207 LXI 293, 297, 225, 226, 233, 298 MAGNAVOX 297, 225, 239, 298 MARANTZ 298, 210 MATSUI 295 MEDION 203, 204, 298 MEMOREX 297, 216 MITSUBISHI 299, 297, 259, 287 NAD 226, 255 NEC 297, 252, 282 NOKIA 244, 245 NOKIA OCEANIC 245 NORDMENDE 265, 266 ONWA 296 PANASONIC 234, 235, 236, 253, 288, 211 PHILCO 297, 225, 239, 298 PHILIPS 298, 225, 205 PIONEER 226, 235, 254, 255, 268 PORTLAND 297, 256 PROSCAN 293, 221 PROSCAN 231, 241, 251 PROTON 297, 250, 260, 270 QUASAR 234, 235 RADIO SHACK299, 293, 297 RCA 293, 297, 234, 256, 257, 258, 221 RUNCO 220, 230, 271 SABA 223, 269, 265, 266 SAMPO 281, 297, 280 SAMSUNG 297, 239, 248, 262, 275 SANYO 295, 233, 279, 272, 273, 274, 212 SCHNEIDER 296 SCOTT 297 SHARP 292, 239, 232, 213, 208 SIEMENS 229 SIGNATURE 216 SIGNATURE 292 SONY 263, 214 SYLVANIA 297, 225, 298 SYNPHONIC 217, 218, 219 TELEFUNKUN 269, 264, 265, 266 THOMSON 223, 266 TOSHIBA 292, 226, 267, 215 VIDECH 297, 242 WARDS 297, 239, 232, 216 YAMAHA 299, 292, 242, 285, 287, 253, 206 YAMAJI 298 ZENITH 216, 261, 271 DVD PLAYER AIWA 648, 649 APEX DIGITAL 652, 653, 654 BYD:SIGN 678, 679 DAEWOO 655 DENON 623, 624, 682 FUNAI 625 HARMAN/KARDON 656, 657 HITACHI 626, 688, 689 JVC 627, 643, 692 KENWOOD 628 KLH 658 LG/GOLDSTAR 645, 663, 664 MARANTZ 699, 659 MITSUBISHI 629 ONKYO 632, 633, 634 PANASONIC 623, 635, 668, 672, 682, 683, 684 PHILIPS 699, 647, 659 PIONEER 636, 637, 638, 673, 674, 675, 685 686, 687 RCA 639 SAMSUNG 642 SHARP 643, 692 SONY 644, 676, 677 SYLVANIA 662 SYMPHONIC 662 THOMSON 646 TOSHIBA 634, 665, 666, 667 YAMAHA 699, 622, 623, 647, 682 ZERITH 663, 664 VCR ADMIRAL 395 AIWA 396, 397, 398, 329 AKAI 322, 323, 324 AUDIO DYNAMIC 392, 394 BELL & HOWELL 393 BLAUPUNKT 325, 326 BROC SONIC 327 BUSH 322 CANON 325, 328 CGM 396, 332 CITIZEN 396 CRAIG 396, 363 CURTHIS MATHIS 397, 328, 333 DAEWOO 328, 334, 335 DBX 392, 394 DIMENSIA 333 DYNATECH 397 EMERSON 327, 334, 396, 397 FISHER 393, 336 FUNAI 397 GE 328, 333, 387 GO VIDEO 321, 331, 341, 351, 363 GOODMANS 334, 337 GRUNDIG 332, 338 HITACHI 325, 333, 349, 342, 343 INSTANT REPLAY 325, 328 ITT/NOKIA 393 JC PENNY 392, 393, 394, 328, 333, 349, 396, 363 JVC 392, 394, 344, 345, 346, 347 KENDO 396 KENWOOD 392, 394, 396 LG/GOLDSTAR 396, 388 LOEWE 396, 337 LUXOR 395 LXI 393, 396, 397, 336, 349 MAGNAVOX 325, 326, 328 MARANTZ 392, 394 MARTA 396 MATSUI 396 MEMOREX 328, 336, 396, 397 MINOLTA 333, 349 MITSUBISHI 399, 344, 348, 359, 353, 352 MTC 363, 397 MULTITECH 397, 348, 354 NEC 392, 394, 344, 383 NOKIA 393, 395 NOKIA OCEANIC 395 OKANO 323 OLYMPIC 325, 328 ORION 327 PANASONIC 325, 328, 339, 355, 378, 384, 385, 386 PENTAX 333, 349 PHILCO 325, 328, 397 PHILLIPS 325, 326, 328, 337, 356, 357 PHONOLA 337 PILOT 396 PIONEER 325 QUASAR 325, 328 RCA/PROSCAN 325, 326, 328, 333, 335, 349, 358, 363, 397 REALISTIC 393, 397, 328, 336, 359, 362, 396, 363 SAMSUNG 354, 358, 363, 364, 365, 366 SANSUI 394 SANYO 393, 336, 367 SCHNEIDER 337 SCOTT 399, 335, 336, 348, 359, 354, 358, 352 SELECO 322 SHARP 395, 362, 382 SIEMENS 393 SIGNATURE 2000 395, 397 SONY 368, 379, 372, 373, 374, 375 SYLVANIA 397, 325, 326, 328 SYMPHONIC 397 TANDBERG 334 TANDY 397 TASHIRO 396 TATUNG 392, 394 TEAC 392, 394, 397 TECHNICS 325, 328 TEKNIKA 396 TELEFUNKUN 376, 377 THOMAS 397 THORN 393, 396 TOSHIBA 335, 389 TOTEVISION 363, 396 UNITECH 363 UNIVERSUM 396, 327, 376 VIDEOSONIC 363 W.WHOUSE 396 WARDS 395, 396, 336, 362, 397, 363 YAMAHA 399, 392, 393, 394 ZERITH 344, 361, 368, 371, 379, 396, 397 CABLE TV TUNER ABC 739, 752, 753, 755, 758, 759, 762 GENERAL INSTRUMENT 722, 786, 787, 788 HAMIN 723, 724, 725, 726, 727 HITACHI 722 JEROLD 722, 728, 729, 732, 733, 734, 735, 736, 737 MAGNAVOX 738 MOTOROLA 748, 728 OAK 739, 742, 743 PANASONIC 744, 745, 746, 747, 783, 784 PHILLIPS 763, 764, 765, 766, 767, 768 PIONEER 748, 785, 747 RADIO SHACK749 i Black process 45.0° 240.0 LPI 01EN_YSP-4000_UA.book Page ii Wednesday, December 26, 2007 3:00 PM RCA 744, 792, 793 SCIENTIFIC ATLANTA 752, 753, 754, 789 SONY 756, 757 TOCOM 755 UNIVERSAL 769, 772, 773, 774, 775 VIEWSTAR 764, 766, 776, 777, 778, 779, 782 SATELLITE TUNER ECHOSTAR 822 GE 837, 838, 839 GENERAL INSTRUMENT 823 HITACHI 824 HUGHES 843, 844, 845, 846 JVC 822 MAGNAVOX 825 PANASONIC 826, 829 PHILLIPS 825, 843, 844, 845, 846, 847, 848, 849 PRIMESTAR 827 PROSCAN 837, 838, 839, 842 RADIO SHACK 828 RCA 837, 838, 839, 842 SAMSUNG 852 SKY+ 853 SKY HD 853 SONY 832, 835 TOSHIBA 833, 836 UNIDEN 825 ZENITH 834 ii Black process 45.0° 240.0 LPI 00cv_YSP-4000_UA.fm Page 1 Friday, March 7, 2008 10:23 AM UA YSP-4000 YSP-4000 Digital Sound ProjectorTM © 2007 YAMAHA ELECTRONICS CORPORATION, USA 6660 ORANGETHORPE AVE., BUENA PARK, CALIF. 90620, U.S.A. YAMAHA CANADA MUSIC LTD. 135 MILNER AVE., SCARBOROUGH, ONTARIO M1S 3R1, CANADA YAMAHA ELECTRONIK EUROPA G.m.b.H. SIEMENSSTR. 22-34, 25462 RELLINGEN BEI HAMBURG, GERMANY YAMAHA ELECTRONIQUE FRANCE S.A. RUE AMBROISE CROIZAT BP70 CROISSY-BEAUBOURG 77312 MARNE-LA-VALLEE CEDEX02, FRANCE YAMAHA ELECTRONICS (UK) LTD. YAMAHA HOUSE, 200 RICKMANSWORTH ROAD WATFORD, HERTS WD18 7GQ, ENGLAND YAMAHA SCANDINAVIA A.B. J A WETTERGRENS GATA 1, BOX 30053, 400 43 VÄSTRA FRÖLUNDA, SWEDEN YAMAHA MUSIC AUSTRALIA PTY. LTD. LEVEL 1, 99 QUEENSBRIDGE STREET, SOUTHBANK, VIC 3006, AUSTRALIA Black process 45.0° 240.0 LPI All rights reserved. OWNER’S MANUAL Printed in Malaysia WK94290-2 UA YSP-4000 Digital Sound ProjectorTM Reference Guide for iPodTM/XMTM Radio Overview This is the Reference Guide for Yamaha YSP-4000 Digital Sound Projector. This guide explains the connections and operations of iPod and XM Satellite Radio (U.S.A. and Canada models only). Operations in this guide use keys on the supplied remote control unless otherwise specified. For general information including the controls and functions of this unit, refer to the owner’s manual. y The illustrations used in this Reference Guide are for U.S.A. and Canada models only. iPodTM “iPod” is a trademark of Apple Inc., registered in the U.S. and other countries. The XM name and related logos are registered trademarks of XM Satellite Radio Inc. Neural Surround™ name and related logos are trademarks owned by Neural Audio Corporation. Contents Using iPod™........................................................................................................................................ 2 Connection................................................................................................................................................. 2 Controlling iPod™ ....................................................................................................................................2 XM™ Satellite Radio tuning (U.S.A. and Canada models only).................................................... 5 Connecting XM™ Mini-Tuner Home Dock ............................................................................................. 5 Activating XM™ Satellite Radio .............................................................................................................. 6 Basic XM™ Satellite Radio operations .................................................................................................... 6 Presetting the XM™ Satellite Radio channels .......................................................................................... 9 Displaying the XM™ Satellite Radio information.................................................................................. 10 Troubleshooting ................................................................................................................................ 11 USING IPOD™ Using iPod™ This unit has the DOCK terminal on the rear panel that allows you to connect the Yamaha iPod universal dock (such as YDS-10, sold separately). Station your iPod in the Yamaha iPod universal dock, and use the supplied remote control to operate your iPod. Notes • Only iPod (Click and Wheel), iPod nano, and iPod mini are supported. • Some features may not be compatible depending on the model or the software version of your iPod. Connection Controlling iPod™ Connect the Yamaha iPod universal dock to the DOCK terminal of this unit using a dedicated cable. STANDBY/ON POWER POWER AV CAUTION TV DOCK DVD Do not connect this unit or other components to the main power until all connections between components are complete. AUX1 0 Rear panel of this unit SUBWOOFER DVD AUX 2 COAXIAL AUX2 AUX3 TV INPUT1 MACRO STB OFF 1 TV +10 ENHANCER ENTRY CAT/ A-E ENTER MENU TV/AV YSP OPTICAL AUX 1 TV/STB AUX 1 AUDIO IN DOCK TV/STB AUX 1 DIGITAL IN 2 DISPLAY RETURN VOLUME CH MUTE TV INPUT CH LEVEL 3 SUR. DECODE TEST 4 5 6 TV VOL TV MUTE CODE SET 7 8 9 0 A Yamaha iPod universal dock (such as YDS-10, sold separately) y When your iPod and external component using the AUX 3 input jack are connected to this unit at the same time, and when the DOCK indicator is lit in the front panel display, iPod output takes priority. (U.S.A. and Canada models) 1 Navigate through the iPod menu ( / / / ) and starts playback (ENTER). 2 Displays the OSD (on-screen menu) menu. 3 Selects AUX3/DOCK (U.S.A. and Canada models) or AUX3 (Australia model) as the input source. 4 Use to return to the previous iPod menu. 5 Sets the operation mode of this unit. 6 Use to return to the previous iPod menu. 7 Stops playback. 8 Pauses playback. 9 Searches forward/backward. 0 Starts playback. A Skips to the beginning of the current/previous/next track. y 8 and 9 toggle between play and pause operations in the Simple Remote mode. 2 En 01EN_YSP-4000_UA-RG.book Page 3 Friday, March 7, 2008 11:25 AM Using iPod™ y • For a complete list of status messages that appear in the front panel display and in the OSD, see the “iPod” section in “Troubleshooting” on page 11. • While your iPod is stationed in the Yamaha iPod universal dock connected to the DOCK terminal of this unit, your iPod battery is automatically charged as long as this unit is turned on. ■ Controlling iPod in the Simple Remote mode ■ Controlling iPod in the Menu Browse mode You can perform some basic operations such as play, pause, stop, backward/forward search, and track skip using the remote control without the aid of the OSD. Such basic operations can be performed also on your iPod. You can perform the advanced operations using the remote control with the aid of the OSD (see the owner’s manual for information on the OSD). In the OSD, you can browse the song list stored on your iPod. Further, you can change or adjust the settings on your iPod as desired. Such advanced operations cannot be performed on your iPod. 1 Set the operation mode selector to TV/AV. TV/AV 1 Set the operation mode selector to TV/AV. YSP TV/AV YSP 2 Press AUX3/DOCK (U.S.A. and Canada models) or AUX3 (Australia model), and set your iPod in the Yamaha iPod universal dock. In the front panel display, “iPod connected” appears and the DOCK indicator lights up. 2 Lights up Press AUX3/DOCK (U.S.A. and Canada models) or AUX3 (Australia model), and set your iPod in the Yamaha iPod universal dock. In the front panel display, “iPod connected” appears and the DOCK indicator lights up. Lights up iPod connected iPod connected y • You can view the photos or video clips stored on your iPod in the iPod screen (some models only). • Use # and * on the remote control interchangeably to toggle between play and pause operations. Note 3 Press DISPLAY, and display the menu browse mode. The OSD appears on your TV. Information on the current song appears only in the iPod screen but not in the front panel display of this unit. iPod DISPLAY Playlists Artists Albums Songs Genres Composers Settings Top > > > > > > > English 3 En Black process 45.0° 240.0 LPI 01EN_YSP-4000_UA-RG.book Page 4 Wednesday, December 26, 2007 10:39 AM Using iPod™ y 4 Press / and / to navigate through the iPod menu, and press ENTER to start playback of the selected song. ENTER and ENTER • Press RETURN or MENU to go back to the previous menu. • The information on the current song also appears in the front panel display. You can set the front panel display mode: CONT. or ONCE. For details, see “SCROLL” (Front panel display scroll) in “F.DISPLAY SET” (Front panel display settings) in the owner’s manual (see page 88). • You can set the interval for which the OSD screen is displayed after an operation. See “OSD DISPLAY TIME” (OSD display time) in “OSD SET” (OSD settings) in the owner’s manual (see page 89). • You can view the photos or video clips stored on your iPod in the OSD (some models only). Notes ENTER Choices: Playlists (playlists), Artists (artists), Albums (albums), Songs (songs), Genres (genres), Composers (composers), Settings (settings) • Playlists > Songs • Artists > Albums > Songs • Albums > Songs • Songs • Genres > Artists > Albums > Songs • Composers > Albums > Songs • Settings > Shuffle, Repeat • The YAMAHA logo appears in the iPod screen in this mode. • Undisplayable characters are shown as underscores “_” in the front panel display and OSD. • You can change or adjust the “Settings” parameters only in the OSD. ■ An example of the information display during playback 7 Settings parameters: Shuffle Shuffle Use this function for random playback of songs or albums. When “Songs” or “Albums” is chosen, “S” appears in the top right corner while the songs or albums are being shuffled. Press ENTER repeatedly to toggle between the choices. Choices: Off, Songs, Albums • Select “Off ” to deactivate this function. • Select “Songs” for random playback of songs. • Select “Albums” for random playback of albums. Repeat Repeat Use this function for repeated playback of a song or a sequence of songs. When “One” or “All” is chosen, “R” appears in the top right corner while a song or a sequence of songs are being repeated. Press ENTER repeatedly to toggle between the choices. Choices: Off, One, All • Select “Off ” to deactivate this function. • Select “One” for repeated playback of a song. • Select “All” for repeated playback of a sequence of songs. 4 En Black process 45.0° 240.0 LPI 1 iPod[Play] S R 1/9 2 3 4 FrankieZipper Made-to-order RoadtoIndia 5 6 ||||||||;;;;;;;;;;;; 0:51-7:44 8 9 1 Track number/total tracks 2 Name of the artist 3 Name of the album 4 Name of the song 5 Progress bar 6 Elapsed time 7 Shuffle and repeat icons 8 (playback), (pausing), and (search backward) 9 Remaining time (search forward), XM™ SATELLITE RADIO TUNING (U.S.A. AND CANADA MODELS ONLY) XM™ Satellite Radio tuning (U.S.A. and Canada models only) ■ About XM Satellite Radio XM Satellite Radio offers an extraordinary variety of commercial-free music, plus the best in sports, news, talk, and entertainment. XM is broadcast in superior digital audio from coast to coast. From rock to reggae, from classical to hip hop, XM has something for every music fan. XM’s dedication to playing the richest selection of music is matched by its passion for live sporting events, talk radio, up-to-the-minute news, stand-up comedy, children’s programming, and much more. XM READY Legal Disclaimer Hardware and required monthly subscription sold separately. Other fees and taxes, including a one-time activation fee may apply. Subscription fee is consumer only. All fees and programming subject to change. Channels with frequent explicit language are indicated with an XL. Channel blocking is available for XM radio receivers by calling 1-800-XMRADIO (US residents) and 1-877-GET-XMSR (Canadian residents). For a full listing of the XM commercial-free channels and advertising-supported channels, visit lineup.xmradio.com (US residents) or www.xmradio.ca (Canadian residents). Subscriptions subject to Customer Agreement available at xmradio.com (US residents) and xmradio.ca (Canadian residents). Service only available in the 48 contiguous United States and Canada. ©2007 XM Satellite Radio Inc. All rights reserved. All other trademarks are the property of their respective owners. y This unit is equipped with the Neural Surround decoder that plays back the XM HD surround sound content of the XM Satellite Radio broadcasts in multi-channels, resulting in a full surround sound experience. See “Surround modes and recommended sources” in the owner’s manual (see page 58). Note The XM Satellite Radio service is unavailable in Alaska and Hawaii. Connecting XM™ Mini-Tuner Home Dock Connect XM Mini-Tuner and Home Dock (each sold separately by XM Satellite Radio) to the XM jack on the rear panel of this unit. For information on your XM MiniTuner and Home Dock, see the operating instructions provided with XM Mini-Tuner Home Dock. XM Mini-Tuner and Home Dock (each sold separately) y • To ensure optimal reception of the XM Satellite Radio signals, the antenna of Home Dock must be placed at or near a southfacing window with no obstacles in the path to the sky. You can mount it indoors or outdoors. • Use the “XM ANTENNA LEVEL” parameter in “MANUAL SETUP” (see page 88 in the owner’s manual) to display the XM Satellite Radio reception level (%) in the OSD. For the best reception, adjust the orientation of the connected indoor antenna of the Home Dock to obtain a value of 60% or more. Note If “CHECK ANTENNA” appears in the front panel display, Home Dock may not be connected properly to the XM jack on the rear panel of this unit. DVD AUX 2 COAXIAL OPTICAL TV/STB AUX 1 DIGITAL IN XM IR IN RS-232C Rear panel of this unit English 5 En XM™ Satellite Radio tuning (U.S.A. and Canada models only) Activating XM™ Satellite Radio Once you have installed XM Mini-Tuner Home Dock, inserted XM Mini-Tuner, connected Home Dock to your XM READY home audio system, and installed the antenna, you are ready to subscribe and begin receiving XM programming. There are three places to find your eight-character XM Radio ID: on XM Mini-Tuner, on XM Mini-Tuner package, and on XM Channel 0 (see “All Channel Search mode” on page 7). Record the XM Radio ID in the following eight squares for reference. Basic XM™ Satellite Radio operations STANDBY/ON POWER POWER AV TV DOCK DVD AUX1 STB TV AUX2 AUX3 TV INPUT1 MACRO FM/XM PRESET/TUNE SEARCH CAT MEMORY AUTO VOL MODE SETUP INPUTMODE SLEEP Note The XM Radio ID does not use the letters “I”, “O”, “S”, or “F”. Activate your XM Satellite Radio service in the U.S. online at http://www.xmradio.com/ or call 1-800-XM-RADIO (1-800-9672346). You will need a major credit card. XM will send a signal from the satellites to activate the full channel lineup. Activation normally takes 10 to 15 minutes, but during peak busy periods you may need to keep your XM READY home audio system on for up to an hour. When you can access the full channel lineup on your XM READY home audio system, you are done. For more information or to subscribe in Canada, visit XM on the Web at http://www.xmradio.ca/ or call XM’s Listener Care at 1-877GET-XMSR (1-877-438-9677). 5BEAM ST+3BEAM 1 2 3 STEREO MY BEAM MY SUR. 4 5 6 MUSIC MOVIE SPORTS 7 8 OFF 9 SUR. DECODE +10 0 ENHANCER ENTRY CAT/ A-E ENTER MENU TV/AV YSP DISPLAY RETURN VOLUME 1 3BEAM CH TV VOL Set the operation mode selector to TV/AV. TV/AV YSP 2 Press FM/XM repeatedly to select XM as the input source. In the front panel display, the XM indicator lights up and the XM Satellite Radio information (channel number/channel name, channel category, and artist name/song or program title) for the currently selected channel appears. FM/XM Lights up [001] Preview y • You can also press INPUT on the front panel repeatedly to select XM as the input source. • When XM is selected as the input source, this unit automatically recalls the previously chosen channel. 6 En XM™ Satellite Radio tuning (U.S.A. and Canada models only) ■ Category Search mode 3 Search for a desired channel by using one of the four XM Satellite Radio search modes: • To select a channel from all channels, see “All Channel Search mode” on this page. • To select a channel by channel category, see “Category Search mode” on this page. • To select a channel from the preset channels, see “Preset Search mode” on page 8. • To select a channel by directly entering the channel number, see “Direct Number Access mode” on page 8. 1 SEARCH y CAT SEARCH • You can preset the XM Satellite Radio channels (see page 9). • You can display the XM Satellite Radio information in the front panel display and/or in the OSD (see page 10). ■ All Channel Search mode 1 Press SEARCH repeatedly to select “CAT SEARCH”. 2 Press CAT/A-E ( / ) repeatedly to change the XM channel category. Press SEARCH repeatedly to select “ALL CH SEARCH”. CAT/ A-E ENTER SEARCH 3 Press ENTRY ( / ) repeatedly to search for an XM channel within the selected channel category. ALL CH SEARCH ENTRY ENTER 2 Press ENTRY ( / ) repeatedly to search for an XM channel within all channels. ENTRY y ENTER Hold down ENTRY ( / ) for quick search. y • Hold down ENTRY ( / ) for quick search. • To change the channel category, press CAT/A-E ( / ). • Select channel “0” to display your XM Radio ID number. English 7 En XM™ Satellite Radio tuning (U.S.A. and Canada models only) ■ Preset Search mode Prior to selecting a preset channel in the Preset Search mode, you must preset the XM channels. For details, see “Presetting the XM™ Satellite Radio channels” on page 9. 1 ■ Direct Number Access mode 1 Press SEARCH repeatedly to select either “ALL CH SEARCH” or “CAT SEARCH”. Press SEARCH repeatedly to select “PRESET SEARCH”. SEARCH SEARCH ALL CH SEARCH or PRESET SEARCH CAT SEARCH 2 Press CAT/A-E ( / ) repeatedly to change the preset channel group (A to E). CAT/ A-E 3 ENTER Press ENTRY ( / ) repeatedly to change the preset channel number (1 to 8). 2 Press the numeric buttons (0 to 9) to enter the desired three-digit XM channel number. For example, to enter the number 123, press the numeric buttons 1, 2, and 3. 5BEAM ST+3BEAM 3BEAM 1 2 3 The front panel display changes as follows: ENTRY <XM> --1 ENTER <XM> -12 y You can also use the numeric buttons to directly input the preset channel number. <XM> 123 Notes • To enter a one- or two-digit number, press the corresponding number button(s), and press ENTER to confirm the number. If you do not press ENTER, this unit automatically confirms the entered number after a few seconds. • If you press a button other than the numeric buttons and ENTER during this operation, the Direct Number Access mode is canceled. 8 En XM™ Satellite Radio tuning (U.S.A. and Canada models only) Presetting the XM™ Satellite Radio channels 4 You can use this feature to store up to 40 XM Satellite Radio channels (A1 to E8: 5 preset channel groups with 8 preset channel numbers each). You can then recall the preset channels easily by selecting the preset group and number as described in “Preset Search mode” on page 8. Press ENTRY ( / ) repeatedly to select a preset number while the MEMORY indicator is flashing. The selected preset number appears in the front panel display. ENTRY ENTER 1 Search for an XM channel that you want to preset. See “Basic XM™ Satellite Radio operations” on page 6 for details. Flashing [043] XMU Currently selected channel number C8 [043] XMU y The initial factory setting for all preset channels is “[001] Preview”. 2 Press MEMORY. The MEMORY indicator flashes in the front panel display for about 10 seconds. MEMORY Currently selected preset number 5 Press MEMORY or ENTER to assign the preset group and number to the selected XM channel while the MEMORY indicator is flashing. A colon (:) appears, and the MEMORY indicator turns off in the front panel display. Flashes MEMORY or Note ENTER Operate steps 3 to 5 while the MEMORY indicator is flashing. 3 Press CAT/A-E ( / ) repeatedly to select a preset group while the MEMORY indicator is flashing. The selected preset group appears in the front panel display. 8 : (:)[ 0 4 3 ] X M U C Colon Colon (:) CAT/ A-E ENTER Note When you overwrite an existing preset channel, the previously stored XM channel information is cleared and updated. Flashing English C [043] XMU Currently selected preset group 9 En XM™ Satellite Radio tuning (U.S.A. and Canada models only) Displaying the XM™ Satellite Radio information You can display the XM Satellite Radio information (channel number/channel name, channel category, and artist name/song or program title) for the currently selected channel in the front panel display or in the OSD. Note If a status or error message appears in the front panel display or in the OSD, see the “XM Satellite Radio (U.S.A. and Canada models only)” in “Troubleshooting” on page 11. y • You can set the front panel display mode: CONT. or ONCE. When ONCE is selected, the front panel display scrolls characters to the end once, after which the first 15 characters appear and stay. See “SCROLL” (Front panel display scroll) in “F.DISPLAY SET” (Front panel display settings) in the owner’s manual (page 88). • Undisplayable characters are displayed as spaces. ■ Displaying the XM channel information in the OSD Press DISPLAY. The following screen is displayed in the OSD. ■ Displaying the XM channel information in the front panel display DISPLAY Press DISPLAY repeatedly to toggle between the following information displays. DISPLAY XM INFORMATION ALL CH SEARCH XM :043 CHAN :XMU CAT :Rock NAME :Coldplay TITLE:Speed of sound .(Coldplay/Spe) [ ]/[ ]:CHANNEL [ ]/[ ]:CATEGORY Channel number / Channel name Channel category y Artist name / Song or program title When the channel number / channel name is displayed: [043] XMU When the channel category is displayed: <CAT>ROCK When the artist name / song title is displayed: Coldplay / Spee 10 En • To turn off the OSD, press DISPLAY again. • You can set the interval for which the OSD screen is displayed after an operation. See “OSD DISPLAY TIME” (OSD display time) in “OSD SET” (OSD settings) in the owner’s manual (page 89). • To hold the XM Satellite Radio OSD information, press ENTER. To unhold, press ENTER again. • This unit can save up to two XM Satellite Radio OSD information screens for future reference. To view the previous OSD screens, press RETURN repeatedly while the current XM Satellite Radio OSD information screen is on hold. TROUBLESHOOTING Troubleshooting Refer to the following charts when the status messages appear during your iPod or XM Satellite Radio operations on this unit. If you experience a problem that is not listed below, or if the instruction below does not help, set this unit to the standby mode, disconnect the power supply cable, and contact the nearest authorized Yamaha dealer or service center. ■ iPod Note In case of a transmission error with no status message appearing in the front panel display and in the OSD, check the connection between your iPod and this unit. Status message Loading... Cause Remedy See page This unit is in the middle of recognizing the connection with your iPod. This unit is in the middle of acquiring the song lists from your iPod. Connect error There is a problem with the signal path from your iPod to this unit. Turn off this unit and reconnect the Yamaha iPod universal dock to the DOCK terminal of this unit. 2 Try resetting your iPod. — Only iPod (Click and Wheel), iPod nano, and iPod mini are supported. — Unknown iPod Your iPod is not supported by this unit. iPod connected The connection between your iPod and this unit is completed. Disconnected Your iPod is removed from the Yamaha iPod universal dock. Set your iPod back in the Yamaha iPod universal dock. 2 Unable to play This unit cannot play back the files stored on your iPod. Check the playability of the files stored on your iPod. — Store other playable music files on your iPod. — ■ XM Satellite Radio (U.S.A. and Canada models only) Status message Cause Remedy See page XM Mini-Tuner and Home Dock are not connected to the XM jack of this unit or not working properly. Check XM Mini-Tuner and Home Dock connections and adjust the orientation for the best reception level. 5 UPDATING The XM user encryption code is being updated. Wait until the encryption code is updated. — NO SIGNAL The signal is too weak. Adjust the orientation of the indoor antenna of Home Dock for the best reception level. 5 LOADING It takes longer than four seconds to decode audio or text data. Wait until the decoding process is finished. — OFF AIR The currently selected XM channel is not broadcasting signals. Check the channel number again or select another XM channel. — <XM> - - - The Channel Station ID (SID) is no longer available. - - - No artist name or song title is available. Select another channel category by pressing CAT/A-E repeatedly. 7 / - - - <CAT> - - - No channel is available for the selected category. 11 En English CHECK ANTENNA 01EN_YSP-4000_UA-RG.book Page 12 Friday, March 7, 2008 11:25 AM © 2007 YAMAHA ELECTRONICS CORPORATION, USA 6660 ORANGETHORPE AVE., BUENA PARK, CALIF. 90620, U.S.A. YAMAHA CANADA MUSIC LTD. 135 MILNER AVE., SCARBOROUGH, ONTARIO M1S 3R1, CANADA YAMAHA ELECTRONIK EUROPA G.m.b.H. SIEMENSSTR. 22-34, 25462 RELLINGEN BEI HAMBURG, GERMANY YAMAHA ELECTRONIQUE FRANCE S.A. RUE AMBROISE CROIZAT BP70 CROISSY-BEAUBOURG 77312 MARNE-LA-VALLEE CEDEX02, FRANCE YAMAHA ELECTRONICS (UK) LTD. YAMAHA HOUSE, 200 RICKMANSWORTH ROAD WATFORD, HERTS WD18 7GQ, ENGLAND YAMAHA SCANDINAVIA A.B. J A WETTERGRENS GATA 1, BOX 30053, 400 43 VÄSTRA FRÖLUNDA, SWEDEN YAMAHA MUSIC AUSTRALIA PTY. LTD. LEVEL 1, 99 QUEENSBRIDGE STREET, SOUTHBANK, VIC 3006, AUSTRALIA Black process 45.0° 240.0 LPI All rights reserved. Printed in Malaysia WK94360-2 Items used for connections and operations in this guide s Audio pin cable (x1) s OSD* video pin cable (x1) s Optical cable (x1) s Coaxial cable (x1) s AC power supply cable (x1) s IntelliBeam microphone (x1) s Cardboard microphone stand (x1) s Demonstration DVD (x1) *OSD: On-Screen Display YSP-4000 QUICK REFERENCE GUIDE This quick reference guide explains steps to connect a TV and a DVD player to this unit and achieve the surround sound effects in a quick, easy manner. For detailed operation, refer to the Owner’s Manual. 1 2 Connecting external components to this unit Connecting external components such as a TV or DVD player to this unit. Connect your TV or DVD player to this unit using appropriate cables as shown below. After all connections are complete, plug the power supply cable into the AC wall outlet. For further information on connecting other components, see pages 20 to 31 in the Owner’s Manual. Connection example 2 Connection example 1 This connection example shows a way to connect external components such as a TV or DVD player to this unit by using the supplied cable. You can enjoy the multi-channel audio from the DVD player and the analog/digital audio from the TV. Use the video pin cable supplied with your DVD player to make a video connection between your DVD player and this unit. Installing this unit TV Decide where to install this unit. Optical digital output Install this unit where there are no objects such as furniture obstructing the path of sound beams. Otherwise, the desired surround sound effects may not be achieved. You may install this unit in parallel with the wall or in the corner. TV Analog audio output R L Video input Coaxial digital output 2 Digital satellite tuner/Cable TV tuner/ Digital airwave tuner DVD player DVD player 1. Pull out the cap Install this unit in the exact center of the wall when it is measured from the left and right corners. This connection example shows a way to make the most of the capability of this unit. You can enjoy DVD audio and video with higher quality via the HDMI cable. In case your TV does not have a built-in digital satellite tuner, cable TV tuner, or digital airwave tuner, connect a digital satellite tuner, cable TV tuner, or digital airwave tuner via the HDMI cable. For details, see “Connections using HDMI cables” on page 22 in the Owner’s Manual. Video output 2. Check the direction 1 Install this unit in the corner at a 40˚ to 50˚ angle from the adjacent walls. Pull out the cap before connecting the optical cable, and then check the direction to insert the cable. HDMI INPUT HDMI connection HDMI OUTPUT AUX1 Video connection 1 Subwoofer (Sold separately) 2 (Sold separately) This connection is not necessary if your TV has a built-in digital satellite tuner, cable TV tuner, or digital airwave tuner. Use the optical cable supplied with this unit to make an audio connection between your TV and this unit. For details, see “Connection example 1”. DVD IN An object, such as furniture An object, such as furniture 2 1 3 4 OUT HDMI Front left channel 40˚ to 50˚ Center channel Front left channel Center channel Front right channel Front right channel Surround left channel Surround left channel Surround right channel Surround right channel * The rear panel illustration shows jacks and their names to FM75 UNBAL. COMPONENT COMPONENT ANTENNA COMPONENT SUBWOOFER DVD help you find them easily. They are not exactly the same as the ones on the actual rear VIDEO OUT STB DVD/AUX 2 VIDEO IN AUX 1 TV/STB AUX 1 AUDIO IN DOCK AUX 2 Audio connection * The rear panel illustration shows jacks and their names to COAXIAL help you find them easily. OPTICAL They are not exactly the same TV/STB AUX 1 DIGITAL IN as the ones on the actual rear panel of this unit. YSP-4000 panel of this unit. AL. ANTENNA COMPONENT Do not plug the power supply cable into an AC wall outlet until all connections are complete. SUBWOOFER To the AC wall outlet Install this unit using a rack, etc. YSP-4000 Depending on your installation environment, connections with external components (see “2 Connecting external components to this unit”) can be done before installing this unit. We recommend that you temporarily place and arrange all components in order to decide which procedure must come first. In case you install this unit on top of a rack, etc., use the supplied fasteners to prevent an accidental fall of this unit. For further information on installation, see page 17 in the Owner’s Manual. To the AC wall outlet Connect cables in the following order. The following is an example of installing this unit in a rack. To prevent this unit or the floor from being scratched, we recommend putting a piece of cloth on the floor in step 2. 1 Place this unit in front of 2 Place this unit upside 3 Install this unit in the the rack. down and connect this unit to your TV and DVD player. rack. DVD/AUX 2 VIDEO IN Do not plug the power supply cable into an AC wall outlet until all connections are complete. TV/STB AUX 1 AUDIO IN Subwoofer 3 Audio connection 5 Supplied 4 Installation is completed. AUX 1 Connect cables in the following order. 1 Audio pin cable (Outputs TV analog audio sounds from this unit) 4 Digital audio pin cable (Outputs DVD digital audio sounds from this unit) 2 OSD video pin cable (Displays the DVD analog video and the YSP-4000 menu screen on the TV) 5 AC power supply cable (Connects this unit to the AC wall outlet) Supplied 3 AC power supply cable (Connects this unit to the AC wall outlet) Sold separately 1 HDMI cable (Displays the DVD digital video and the YSP-4000 menu screen on the TV) 2 HDMI cable (Inputs DVD digital audio/video signals to this unit) 3 Optical cable (Outputs TV digital audio sounds from this unit) y Hint y Hint y Hint • To enjoy better surround effects, place this unit on the upper shelf to keep it away from the floor. • You can also use the optional metal wall bracket (sold separately) to mount this unit on the wall. For details, refer to the instructions supplied with the metal wall bracket. Note Check whether the digital audio output of your TV and DVD player is turned on. If you have connected external components, follow the steps on the backside to start the Continued on the back AUTO SETUP procedure. Be careful not to leave scratches on this unit or the rack. Printed in Malaysia 0810_YSP-4000_En_guide.p65 Note If you have connected external components, follow the steps on the backside to start the Continued on the back AUTO SETUP procedure. Check whether the digital audio output of your TV and DVD player is turned on. C2007 WK94420 [En] 1 If you connect this unit to an HDMI control-compatible TV (except some models) via HDMI, you can use the remote control supplied with your TV to turn on or off the power, select the audio output component, and adjust the volume level of this unit. 8/10/07, 10:52 PM All rights reserved. Continued from the front 3 Carry out the AUTO SETUP (IntelliBeam) Carry out the AUTO SETUP to adjust the settings that best match your listening environment 6 Set the operation mode selector to YSP. This unit switches to the YSP operation mode. ENHANCER The IntelliBeam technology allows you to achieve sound adjustments that best match your listening environment. It is normal for loud test tones to be output during the AUTO SETUP procedure. Make sure that there are no children around in the listening room while the AUTO SETUP procedure is in progress. A-E 1 Connect the supplied IntelliBeam microphone to the INTELLIBEAM MIC jack on the front panel. DISPLAY ENTRY ENTER The following screen appears on the TV. Leave the room within 10 seconds before the AUTO SETUP procedure starts. MENU 2 3 4 YSP ENHANCER ENTRY MENU AUTO SETUP START RETURN Will begin in 10sec YSP DISPLAY 7 Press and hold AUTO SETUP for more than 2 seconds. Please leave the room TV/AV ENTER A-E **-------[RETURN]:Cancel RETURN The setup screen automatically changes during the AUTO SETUP procedure. When the AUTO SETUP procedure is completed, the following screen appears on the TV. The menu screen appears on the TV. If the menu screen does not appear, check the OSD video pin cable (see the connection example on the front page). INTELLIBEAM MIC 4 Enjoying surround sound Enjoy TV or DVD digital audio in surround sound. For instructions on how to operate or set your TV or DVD player, refer to the owner’s manual supplied with each component. Enjoying DVDs in surround sound Enjoying TV in surround sound TV/AV You may want to use the supplied cardboard microphone stand for the AUTO SETUP. Assemble the stand and place the IntelliBeam microphone on top of it as shown below. 1 10 Press ENTER to start the AUTO SETUP procedure, and then leave the room within 10 seconds. 1 Select the DVD video input on your TV. 1 Select the TV channel using the remote control supplied with your TV. 2 Set the operation mode selector to YSP. 2 Set the operation mode selector to YSP. SHOW RESULT This unit switches to the YSP operation mode. This unit switches to the YSP operation mode. MEASUREMENT COMPLETE IntelliBeam microphone (supplied) PRESET/TUNE SEARCH A-E MEMORY FM Cardboard microphone stand (supplied) VOL MODE AUTO SETUP INPUTMODE SLEEP 5BEAM ST+3BEAM 3BEAM 1 2 3 BEAM MODE :5 BEAM SUBWOOFER :NOT APPLICABLE AUTO SETUP PREPARATION & CHECK Please connect the MIC. Please place the MIC at least 1.8m/6ft away from the YSP unit. The MIC should be set at ear level when seated. Measurement takes about 3min. After [ENTER] is pressed, please leave the room. [ENTER]:Start [RETURN]:Cancel [ENTER]:Save set-up [RETURN]:Do not save set-up A-E IntelliBeam microphone Center height of this unit Place the IntelliBeam microphone on the extended center line of this unit and 1.8 m (6.0 ft) or more away from it. Also, make sure place the IntelliBeam microphone within 1 m (3.3 ft) upper or lower from the center height of this unit. Upper bound position of the microphone Within 1 m (3.3 ft) Cardboard microphone stand More than 1.8 m (6.0 ft) Within 1 m (3.3 ft) Listening position Lower bound position of the microphone Center line Cardboard microphone stand 8 Check the following points. About the IntelliBeam microphone • Is the microphone placed on an imaginary center line drawn from this unit? • Is the microphone placed within 1 m (3.3 ft) upper or lower from the center height of this unit? • Is the microphone placed more than 1.8 m (6.0 ft) from the front of this unit? About the room environment • Is your listening room kept as quiet as possible? 9 Prepare to leave the room. Subwoofer VOLUME STANDBY/ON DVD AUX1 POWER POWER TV AV AUX2 INPUT1 AUX3 TV MIN MAX CROSSOVER/ HIGH CUT MIN • The result may differ depending on the environment. • If any error occurs, the corresponding error message appears on the screen. In this case, see “Error messages for AUTO SETUP” on page 43 in the Owner’s Manual and then follow the instructions. To start the AUTO SETUP procedure once again, press RETURN. If the OSD video pin cable is connected to the video input 1 on the TV as shown in the connection example, switch the video input to “1”. 2 This unit switches to the DVD playback mode. DVD AUX1 AUX2 INPUT1 RETURN 3 Press TV on the remote control of this unit. This unit switches to the TV playback mode. AUX3 TV DVD AUX1 AUX2 MACRO INPUT1 TV PRESET/TUNE SEARCH MEMORY STB AUX3 TV 2) Play back the supplied demonstration DVD on the DVD player. 11 Press ENTER. MACRO TV PRESET/TUNE SEARCH A-E ENHANCER ENTRY MENU AUTO SETUP COMPLETE TV/AV ENTER A-E YSP Please remove the MIC from the YSP and the listening position. RETURN 12 Disconnect the IntelliBeam microphone. MEMORY FM VOL MODE AUTO SETUP INPUTMODE SLEEP 4 Check the digital signal being output at this unit. Input channel indicators The input channel indicators (see page 8 in the Owner’s Manual) are lit in the front panel display, and they switch according to the channel composition of the corresponding input source. If the sound is output from your TV speakers, mute the volume on your TV. For details about digital audio input signals, see page 58 in the Owner’s Manual. VOLUME CH TV VOL MUTE TV INPUT TV MUTE 5BEAM ST+3BEAM 1 2 3 STEREO MY BEAM MY SUR. 4 5 6 5 Press VOLUME +/- on the remote control to adjust the volume level of this unit. The AUTO SETUP has completed. Keep the IntelliBeam microphone in a safe place. The settings are automatically saved in the system memory. 6 Press one of the beam mode buttons on the remote control to select the desired beam mode. Select one of the six beam modes that best matches the current input source of this unit. For further information on the beam modes, see page 56 in the Owner’s Manual. MAX 3BEAM MACRO INTELLIBEAM MIC 0810_YSP-4000_En_guide.p65 1) Press DVD on the remote control of this unit. STB y Hint • When leaving the room, bring this guide with you. • Wait outside the room during the AUTO SETUP procedure. • The AUTO SETUP procedure takes about 3 minutes. • To cancel the AUTO SETUP procedure after it is started, press RETURN. 5 Select the appropriate video input on your TV. 3 y Hint DISPLAY The power of this unit turns on. Before operations, insert batteries into the remote control (see page 32 in the Owner’s Manual). If necessary, adjust the volume level of this unit. If you have connected the subwoofer, set the volume and crossover/high cut frequency. Refer to the note on page 38 in the Owner’s Manual. YSP DISPLAY If “ENVIRONMENT CHECK (FAILED) is displayed, see page 42 in the Owner’s Manual and then run the procedure again. IntelliBeam microphone 4 Turn on the power of your TV. RETURN TV/AV ENTER The following screen appears on the TV for 2 seconds and then the menu screen disappears from the TV. The best setting may not be done if you are in the room. Prepare to leave the room in 10 seconds after pressing ENTER in step 10. 3 Press STANDBY/ON on the remote control. A-E YSP DISPLAY 2 Set the IntelliBeam microphone at your normal listening position. Use the supplied cardboard microphone stand or a tripod to place the IntelliBeam microphone at the same height as your ears would be when you are seated. TV/AV ENTER 8/10/07, 10:52 PM To fine-tune the listening environment parameters manually or make advanced settings for speaker positions, sound beams, etc., see “MANUAL SETUP” on page 76 in the Owner’s Manual.